celicarepairmanual_1
TRANSCRIPT
TOYOTA
REPAIRMANUAL• MAINTENANCE• PREPARATION• SPECIFICATIONS•DIAGNOSTICS
Pub. No. RM744U1 VOLUME 1
FOREWORD
This manual (Volume 1) contains maintenance, preparation, specifications and diagnostics procedures forthe 2000 CELICA.
Applicable models: ZZT230, 231 seriesi
Fc* repair procedures for the engine, chassis and body, and electrical service procedures, refer to VOLUME2 (Pub. No. RM744U2).
The manual is divided into 6 sections with a thumb index for each section at the edge of the pages.
Please note that the publications below have also been prepared as relevant service manuals for the compo-nents and systems in this vehicles.
r Manual Name
• U240E Automatic Transaxte Repair Manual (Aug., 1999)
•; U340E, U341 E Automatic Transaxle Repair Manual (Aug., 1 999)
• 2000 CELICA Electrical Wiring Diagram
•,2000 CELICA New Car Features
Pub. No.
RM740U
RM735U
EWD399U
NCF169U
All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. However,specifications and procedures are subject to change without notice.
TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION
©1999 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATIONAll rights reserved. This book may not be repro-duced or copied, in whole or in part, without thewritten permission of Toyota Motor Corporation.First Printing: Jul. 14,1999 01-990714-00
CAUTION
This manual does not include all the necessary items about repair and service. This manual is madefor the purpose of the use for the persons who have special techniques and certifications. In thecases that non-specialized or uncertified technicians perform repair or service only using this manu-al or without proper equipment or tool, that may cause severe injury to you or other people aroundand also cause damage to your customer's vehicle.
In order to prevent dangerous operation and damages to your customer's vehicle, be sure to followthe instruction shown below.
Must read this manual thoroughly. It is especially important to have good understanding all thecontents written in the PRECAUTION of "IN" section.
The service method written in this manual is very effective to perform repair and service. Whenperforming the operations following the procedures using this manual, be sure to use tools spe-cified and recommended. If using non-specified or recommended tools and service method,be sure to confirm safety of the technicians and any possibility of causing personal injury ordamage to the customer's vehicle before starting the operation.
If part replacement is necessary, must replace the part with the same part number or equivalentpart. Do not replace it with inferior quality.
It is important to note that this manual contains various "Cautions" and "Notices" that must becarefully observed in order to reduce the risk of personal injury during service or repair, or thepossibility that improper service or repair may damage the vehicle or render it unsafe. It is alsoimportant to understand that these "Cautions" and "Notices" are not exhaustive, because it isimportant to warn of all the possible hazardous consequences that might result from failure tofollow these instructions.
NOTE: The screen toned sections below are in VOLUME 2(Pub. No. RM744U2).
INTRODUCTIONMAINTENANCEPREPARATION
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONSDIAGNOSTICS
erjyrs
f.uife*»;K'-sJv SSKJ i l Td A M<2! ?! V1 Bi,, I lll*ii^lis3'#iAi™L
ili®s»*^jtta^ri3<-MS^
AIRALPHABETICAL INDEX If
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL IN-1
GENERAL INFORMATION IN-1
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION IN-3
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION AND
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER IN-3
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS INM
GENERAL INFORMATION IN-4
VEHICLE LIFT AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS .. IN-8
FOR ALL OF VEHICLES IN-10
PRECAUTION IN-10
HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU
CONTROLLED SYSTEMS IN-19
GENERAL INFORMATION IN-19
HOW TO PROCEED WITH
TROUBLESHOOTING IN-20
HOW TO USE THE DIAGNOSTIC CHART
AND INSPECTION PROCEDURE IN-30
TERMS IN-35
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL .... IN-35
GLOSSARY OF SAE AND TOYOTA TERMS ... INMO
i
JN-1INTRODUCTION - HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUALINOOU-3S
GENERAL INFORMATION1. INDEXAn INDEX is provided on the first page of each section to guide you to the item to be repaired. To assist youin finding your way through the manual, the section title and major heading are given at the top of every page.2. PRECAUTIONAt the beginning of each section, a PRECAUTION is given that pertains to all repair operations containedin that section.Read these precautions before starting any repair task.3. TROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTING tables are included for each system to help you diagnose the problem and find thecause. The fundamentals of how to proceed with troubleshooting are described on page IN-20.Be sure to read this before performing troubleshooting.4. PREPARATIONPreparation lists the SST (Special Service Tools), recommended tools, equipment, lubricant and SSM (Spe-cial Service Materials) which should be prepared before beginning the operation and explains the purposeof each one.5. REPAIR PROCEDURESMost repair operations begin with an overview illustration. It identifies the components and shows how theparts fit together.Example:
Clevis Pin
Slotted Spring Pin
Clevis
Snap RingWasher Lock Nut
Push RodPiston
Cylinder
N-m (kgf-cm, ft-lbf) |: Specified torque
* Non-reusable part
IN-2INTRODUCTION - HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The procedures are presented in a step-by-step format:• The illustration shows what to do and where to do it.• The task heading tells what to do.• The detailed text tells how to perform the task and gives other information such as specifications
and warnings.Example:
This format provides the experienced technician with a FAST TRACK to the information needed. The uppercase task heading can be read at a glance when necessary, and the text below it provides detailed informa-tion. Important specifications and warnings always stand out in bold type.6. REFERENCESReferences have been kept to a minimum. However, when they are required you are given the page to referto.7. SPECIFICATIONSSpecifications are presented in bold type throughout the text where needed. You never have to leave theprocedure to look up your specifications. They are also found in Service Specifications section for quick ref-erence.8. CAUTIONS, NOTICES, HINTS:
CAUTIONS are presented in bold type, and indicate there is a possibility of injury to you or otherpeople.
• NOTICES are also presented in bold type, and indicate the possibility of damage to the componentsbeing repaired.HINTS are separated from the text but do not appear in bold. They provide additional information tohelp you perform the repair efficiently.
9. SI UNITThe UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed according to the SI UNIT (International System ofUnit), and alternately expressed in the metric system and in the English System.Example:
Torque: 30 N-m (310 kgf-cm, 22 ftlbf)
IN-3INTRODUCTION - IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATIONVEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ANDENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
B
B02923
1ZZ-FE engine:
2ZZ-GE engine
B02924
1. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERThe vehicle identification number is stamped on the vehicleidentification number plate and the certification label, as shownin the illustration.
A: Vehicle Identification Number PlateB: Certification Label
2. ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe engine serial number is stamped on the engine block, asshown in the illustration.
IN-4INTRODUCTION - REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONSWOCO-OB
GENERAL INFORMATIONBASIC REPAIR HINT(a) Use fender, seat and floor covers to keep the vehicle
clean and prevent damage.(b) During disassembly, keep parts in the appropriate order
to facilitate reassembly.(c) Installation and removal of battery terminal:
(1) Before performing electrical work, disconnect thenegative (-) terminal cable from the battery.
(2) If it is necessary to disconnect the battery for in-spection or repair, first disconnect the negative (—)terminal cable.
(3) When disconnecting the terminal cable, to preventdamage to battery terminal, loosen the cable nutand raise the cable straight up without twisting orprying it.
(4) Clean the battery terminals and cable ends with aclean shop rag. Do not scrape them with a file or oth-er abrasive objects.
(5) Install the cable ends to the battery terminals afterloosening the nut, and tighten the nut after installa-tion. Do not use a hammer to tap the cable endsonto the terminals.
(6) Be sure the cover for the positive (+) terminal isproperly in place.
(d) Check hose and wiring connectors to make sure that theyare connected securely and correctly.
(e) Non-reusable parts(1) Always replace cotter pins, gaskets, O-rings, oil
seals, etc. with new ones.(2) Non-reusable parts are indicated in the component
illustrations by the "•*" symbol.
Seal Lock Adhesive
(f) Precoated partsPrecoated parts are bolts, nuts, etc. that are coated witha seal lock adhesive at the factory.(1) If a precoated part is retightened, loosened or
caused to move in any way, it must be recoated withthe specified adhesive.
(2) When reusing precoated parts, clean off the oldadhesive and dry with compressed air. Then applythe specified seal lock adhesive to the bolt, nut orthreads.
IN-5INTRODUCTION - REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
(3) Precoated parts are indicated in the component il-lustrations by the "A" symbol.
(g) When necessary, use a sealer on gaskets to preventleaks.
(h) Carefully observe all specifications for bolt tighteningtorques. Always use a torque wrench.
(i) Use of special service tools (SST) and special service ma-terials (SSM) may be required, depending on the natureof the repair. Be sure to use SST and SSM where speci-fied and follow the proper work procedure. A list of SSTand SSM can be found in Preparation section in thismanual.
Medium Current Fuse and High Current FuseEqual Amperage Rating
BE1367
(j) When replacing fuses, be sure the new fuse has the cor-rect amperage rating. DO NOT exceed the rating or useone with a lower rating.
Illustration Symbol Part Name Abbreviation
FUSE FUSEBE5594 IN0365
MEDIUM CURRENT FUSE M-FUSE
BE5595 1N0366
HIGH CURRENT FUSE H-FUSE
IN0367
FUSIBLE LINK FL
BES597
CIRCUIT BREAKER CB
INO368
IN-6INTRODUCTION - REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
(k) Care must be taken when jacking up and supporting thevehicle. Be sure to lift and support the vehicle at the prop-er locations (See page IN-8).• Cancel the parking brake on the level place and
shift the transmission in Neutral (or N position).• When jacking up the front wheels of the vehicle at
first place stoppers behind the rear wheels.• When jacking up the rear wheels of the vehicle at
first place stoppers before the front wheels.• When either the front or rear wheels only should be
jacked up, set rigid racks and place stoppers in frontand behind the other wheels on the ground.After the vehicle is jacked up, be sure to support iton rigid racks . It is extremely dangerous to do anywork on a vehicle raised on a jack alone, even fora small job that can be finished quickly.
(I) Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to thefollowing parts:(1) Do not open the cover or case of the ECU unless
absolutely necessary. (If the 1C terminals aretouched, the 1C may be destroyed by static electric-ity.)
WRONG CORRECT
IN02S3
WRONG CORRECT
IN0252
(2) To disconnect vacuum hoses, pull off the end, notthe middle of the hose.
(3) To pull apart electrical connectors, pull on the con-nector itself, not the wires.
(4) Be careful not to drop electrical components, suchas sensors or relays. If they are dropped on a hardfloor, they should be replaced and not reused.
(5) When steam cleaning an engine, protect the elec-tronic components, air filter and emission-relatedcomponents from water.
(6) Never use an impact wrench to remove or installtemperature switches or temperature sensors.
(7) When checking continuity at the wire connector, in-sert the tester probe carefully to prevent terminalsfrom bending.
(8) When using a vacuum gauge, never force the hoseonto a connector that is too large. Use a step-downadapter for adjustment. Once the hose has beenstretched, it may leak air.
IN-7INTRODUCTION - REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
Example
IN0002
(m) Installation and removal of vacuum hose:(1) When disconnecting vacuum hoses, use tags to
identify how they should be reconnected to.(2) After completing a job, double check that the vacu-
um hoses are properly connected. A label under thehood shows the proper layout.
(n) Unless otherwise stated, all resistance is measured at anambient temperature of 20°C (68°F). Because the resis-tance may be outside specifications if measured at hightemperatures immediately after the vehicle has been run-ning, measurement should be made when the engine hascooled down.
IN-8irfTRODUCTION - REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
VEHICLE LIFT AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS
Front
JACK POSITIONFront Front crossmemberRear Rear axle beamCAUTION : When jacking-up the rear and front, make
sure the car is not carrying any extra weight.
PANTOGRAPH JACK POSITION oSUPPORT POSITION
Safety stand and swing arm type lift
IN-9INTRODUCTION - REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
PLATE TYPE LIFT
HINT:
Left and right set position
Front and rear set position
Place the vehicle over the center of the lift.
• Align the cushion gum ends of the platewith the attachment lower ends (A, C).
• Align the attachment upper end (B) with thefront jack supporting point (L).
Attachment dimensions
100 mm (3.94 in.)
200 mm (7.87 in.)
70 mm (2.76 in.)
B02326
IN-10INTRODUCTION - FOR ALL OF VEHICLES
Negative Cable
BO4111
FOR ALL OF VEHICLESNOFA-01
PRECAUTION1. FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH SRS AIRBAG AND
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER
(a) The CELICA is equipped with an SRS (Supplemental Re-straint System), such as the driver airbag, front passen-ger airbag assembly, side airbag assembly and seat beltpretensioner.Failure to carry out service operations in the correct se-quence could cause the supplemental restraint system tounexpectedly deploy during servicing, possibly leading toa serious accident.Further, if a mistake is made in servicing the supplementalrestraint system, it is possible the SRS may fail to operatewhen required. Before servicing (including removal orinstallation of parts, inspection or replacement), be sureto read the following items carefully, then follow the cor-rect procedure described in this manual.
(b) GENERAL NOTICE(1) Malfunction symptoms of the supplemental re-
straint system are difficult to confirm, so the diag-nostic trouble codes become the most importantsource of information when troubleshooting. Whentroubleshooting the supplemental restraint system,always inspect the diagnostic trouble codes beforedisconnecting the battery (See page DM326).
(2) Work must be started after 90 seconds from thetime the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK" posi-tion and the negative (-) terminal cable is discon-nected from the battery.(The supplemental restraint system is equippedwith a back-up power source so that if work isstarted within 90 seconds of disconnecting the neg-ative (-) terminal cable from the battery, the SRSmay deploy.)When the negative (-) terminal cable is discon-nected from the battery, memory of the clock andaudio systems will be cancelled. So before startingwork, make a record of the contents memorized bythe each memory system. Then when work is fin-ished, reset the clock and audio systems as before.To avoid erasing the memory of each memory sys-tem, never use a back-up power supply from anoth-er battery.
IN-11INTRODUCTION - FOR ALL OF VEHICLES _^_^_
(3) Even in cases of a minor collision where the SRSdoes not deploy, the steering wheel pad, front pas-senger airbag assembly, side airbag assembly andseat belt pretensioner should be inspected {Seepage RS-14, RS-28, and BO-111).
(4) Never use SRS parts from another vehicle. Whenreplacing parts, replace them with new parts.
(5) Before repairs, remove the airbag sensor if shocksare likely to be applied to the sensor during repairs.
(6) Never disassemble and repair the airbag sensor as-sembly, steering wheel pad, front passenger airbagassembly, side airbag assembly or seat belt preten-sioner.
(7) If the airbag sensor assembly, steering wheel pad,front passenger airbag assembly, side airbag as-sembly or seat belt pretensioner has been dropped,or if there are cracks, dents or other defects in thecase, bracket or connector, replace them with newones.
(8) Do not directly expose the airbag sensor assembly,steering wheel pad, front passenger airbag assem-bly, side airbag assembly or seat belt pretensionerto hot air or flames.
(9) Use a volt/ohmmeter with high impedance (10 kQ/Vminimum) for troubleshooting of the electrical cir-cuit.
(10) Information labels are attached to the periphery ofthe SRS components. Follow the instructions on thenotices.
(11) After work on the supplemental restraint system iscompleted, check the SRS warning light (See pageDI-326).
W02655
(c) SPIRAL CABLE (in Combination Switch)The steering wheel must be fitted correctly to the steeringcolumn with the spiral cable at the neutral position, other-wise cable disconnection and other troubles may result.Refer to SR-19 of this manual concerning correct steer-ing wheel installation.
IN-12INTRODUCTION - FOR ALL OF VEHICLES
(d) STEERING WHEEL PAD (with Airbag)(1) When removing the steering wheel pad or handling
a new steering wheel pad, it should be placed withthe pad top surface facing up.Storing the pad with its metallic surface facing up-ward may lead to a serious accident if the airbag de-ploys for some reason. In addition do not store asteering wheel pad on top of another one.
(2) Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib.(This may cause the airbag to deploy, which is verydangerous.)
(3) Grease should not be applied to the steering wheelpad and the pad should not be cleaned with deter-gents of any kind.
(4) Store the steering wheel pad where the ambienttemperature remains below 93°C (200°F), withouthigh humidity and away from electrical noise.
(5) When using electric welding, first disconnect the air-bag connector (yellow color and 2 pins) under thesteering column near the combination switch con-nector before starting work.
(6) When disposing of a vehicle or the steering wheelpad alone, the airbag should be deployed using anSST before disposal (See page RS-16).Carry out the operation in a safe place away fromelectrical noise.
Example:
Correct
O
B02920
Example
R05643Z13950
IN-13INTRODUCTION - FOR ALL OF VEHICLES
(e) FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY(1) Always store a removed or new front passenger air-
bag assembly with the airbag deployment directionfacing up.Storing the airbag assembly with the airbag deploy-ment direction facing down could cause a seriousaccident if the airbag inflates.
(2) Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib.(This may cause the airbag to deploy, which is verydangerous.)
(3) Grease should not be applied to the front passen-ger airbag assembly and the airbag door should notbe cleaned with detergents of any kind.
(4) Store the airbag assembly where the ambient tem-perature remains below 93°C (200°F), without highhumidity and away from electrical noise.
(5) When using electric welding, first disconnect the air-bag connector (yellow color and 2 pins) installed onthe assembly before starting work.
(6) When disposing of a vehicle or the airbag assemblyalone, the airbag should be deployed using an SSTbefore disposal (See page RS-30).Perform the operation in a safe place away fromelectrical noise.
Example:
Correct
O
B02927
Example:
ROS648 R05649 H06952 Z13951
IN-14INTRODUCTION - FOR ALL OF VEHICLES
(f) SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY(1) Always store a removed or new side airbag assem-
bly with the airbag deployment direction facing up.Storing the airbag assembly with the airbag deploy-ment direction facing down could cause a seriousaccident if the airbag deploys.
(2) Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib.(This may cause the airbag to deploy, which is verydangerous.)
(3) Grease should not be applied to the side airbag as-sembly and the surface should not be cleaned withdetergents of any kind.
(4) Store the airbag assembly where the ambient tem-perature remains below 93°C (200°F), without highhumidity and away from electrical noise.
(5) When using electric welding, first disconnect the air-bag connector (yellow color and 2 pins) under theseat before starting work.
(6) When disposing of a vehicle or the side airbag as-sembly alone, the airbag should be deployed usingan SST before disposal (See page RS-43).Perform the operation in a safe place away fromelectrical noise.
Example:
Example:
N21642
IN-15INTRODUCTION - FOR ALL OF VEHICLES
(g) SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER(1) Never measure the resistance of the seat belt pre-
tensioner. (This may cause the seat belt pretension-er to activate, which is very dangerous.)
(2) Never disassemble the seat belt pretensioner.(3) Never install the seat belt pretensioner in another
vehicle.(4) Store the seat belt pretensioner where the ambient
temperature remains below 80°C (176°F) andaway from electrical noise without high humidity.
(5) When using electric welding, first disconnect theconnector (yellow color and 2 pins) before startingwork.
(6) When disposing of a vehicle or the seat belt preten-sioner alone, the seat belt pretensioner should beactivated before disposal (See page BO-112). Per-form the operation in a safe place away from electri-cal noise.
(7) The seat belt pretensioner is hot after activation, solet it cool down sufficiently before the disposal.However never apply water to the seat belt preten-sioner.
Example:
IN-16INTRODUCTION - FOR ALL OF VEHICLES
(h) AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY(1) Never reuse the airbag sensor assembly involved
in a collision when the SRS has deployed.(2) The connectors to the airbag sensor assembly
should be connected or disconnected with the sen-sor mounted on the floor. If the connectors are con-nected or disconnected while the airbag sensor as-sembly is not mounted to the floor, it could causeundesired ignition of the supplemental restraint sys-tem.
(3) Work must be started after 90 seconds from thetime the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK" posi-tion and the negative (-) terminal cable is discon-nected from the battery, even if only loosing the setbolts of the airbag sensor assembly.
(i) WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTORThe SRS wire harness is integrated with the instrumentpanel wire harness assembly. All the connectors in thesystem are a standard yellow color. If the SRS wire har-ness becomes disconnected or the connector becomesbroken due to an accident, etc., repair or replace it asshown on page RS-72.
IN-17INTRODUCTION - FOR ALL OF VEHICLES
2. FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH A CATALYTIC CONVERTERCAUTION:If large amount of unburned gasoline flows into the converter, it may overheat and create a fire haz-ard. To prevent this, observe the following precautions and explain them to your customer.(a) Use only unleaded gasoline.(b) Avoid prolonged idling.
Avoid running the engine at idle speed for more than 20 minutes.(c) Avoid spark jump test.
(1) Perform spark jump test only when absolutely necessary. Perform this test as rapidly as possible.(2) While testing, never race the engine.
(d) Avoid prolonged engine compression measurement.Engine compression tests must be done as rapidly as possible.
(e) Do not run engine when fuel tank is nearly empty.This may cause the engine to misfire and create an extra load on the converter.
(f) Avoid coasting with ignition turned off.(g) Do not dispose of used catalyst along with parts contaminated with gasoline or oil.
3. IF VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMFor vehicles with mobile communication systems such as two-way radios and cellular telephones, observethe following precautions.
(1) Install the antenna as far as possible away from the ECU and sensors of the vehicle's electronicsystem.
(2) Install the antenna feeder at least 20 cm (7.87 in.) away from the ECU and sensors of the ve-hicle's electronic systems. For details about ECU and sensors locations, refer to the section onthe applicable component.
(3) Avoid winding the antenna feeder together with other wiring as much as possible, and also avoidrunning the antenna feeder parallel with other wire harnesses.
(4) Check that the antenna and feeder are correctly adjusted.(5) Do not install powerful mobile communications system.
IN-18INTRODUCTION - FOR ALL OF VEHICLES
4. FOR USING OBD II SCAN TOOL OR TOYOTA HAND-HELD TESTERCAUTION:Observe the following items for safety reasons:
Before using the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester, the OBD II scan tool's instruc-tion book or TOYOTA hand-held tester's operator manual should be read thoroughly.
• Be sure to route all cables securely when driving with the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester connected to the vehicle, (i.e. Keep cables away from feet, pedals, steering wheeland shift lever.)
• Two persons are required when test driving with the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-heldtester, one person to drive the vehicle and the other person to operate the OBD II scan tool orTOYOTA hand-held tester.
INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED IN-19SYSTEMS
HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMSGENERAL INFORMATIONA large number of ECU controlled systems are used in the CELICA. In general, the ECU controlled systemis considered to be a very intricate system requiring a high level of technical knowledge and expert skill totroubleshoot. However, the fact is that if you proceed to inspect the circuits one by one, troubleshooting ofthese systems is not complex. If you have adequate understanding of the system and a basic knowledgeof electricity, accurate diagnosis and necessary repair can be performed to locate and fix the problem. Thismanual is designed through emphasis of the above standpoint to help service technicians perform accurateand effective troubleshooting, and is compiled for the following major ECU controlled systems:The troubleshooting procedure and how to make use of it are described on the following pages.
System
1. Engine
2. U240E Automatic Transaxle
3. U341E Automatic Transaxle
4. Anti-Lock Brake System with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
5. Supplemental Restraint System
6. Cruise Control System
7. Body Control system
Page
DM
DM55
Dt-218
DI-274
DI-324
DM83
DI-535
FOR USING OBDII SCAN TOOL OR TOYOTA HAND-HELD TESTERBefore using the scan tool or tester, the scan tool's instruction book or tester's operator manual shouldbe read thoroughly.If the scan tool or tester cannot communicate with ECU controlled systems when you have connectedthe cable of the scan tool or tester to DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and operated the scan tool,there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side.(1) If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle, inspect the diagnosis
data link line (Bus®line) or ECU power circuit of the vehicle.(2) If communication is still not possible when the tool is connected to another vehicle, the problem
is probably in the tool itself, so perform the Self Test procedures outline in the Tester Operator'sManual.
IN-20 INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTINGCarry out troubleshooting in accordance with the procedure on the following page. Here, only the basic pro-cedure is shown. Details are provided in Diagnostics section, showing the most effective methods for eachcircuit. Confirm the troubleshooting procedures first for the relevant circuit before beginning troubleshootingof that circuit.
(Vehicle Brought to Workshop)
Customer ProblemAnalysis
1Ask the customer about the conditions and theenvironment when the problem occurred.
/Symptom Confirmationand Diagnostic TroubleCode Check
Symptom Simulation
2,3
\7Diagnostic TroubleCode Chart /
Confirm the symptoms and the problem conditions,and check the diagnostic trouble codes.(When the problem symptoms do not appearduring confirmation, use the symptom simulationmethod described later on.)
Problem SymptomsTable,
Circuit Inspection or PartsInspection /
7 I Repair /
8 / Confirmation Test
4,5,6Check the results obtained in Step 2, then confirmthe inspection procedure for the system or the partwhich should be checked using the diagnostictrouble code chart or the problem symptoms table.
Check and repair the affected system or part inaccordance with the instructions in Step 6.
8After completing repairs, confirm that the problemhas been eliminated.(If the problem is not reproduced, perform theconfirmation test under the same conditions andin the same environment as when it occurred forthe first time.)
INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
IN-21
1. CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSISIn troubleshooting, the problem symptoms must be confirmed accurately and all preconceptions must becleared away in order to give an accurate judgment. To ascertain just what the problem symptoms are, it isextremely important to ask the customer about the problem and the conditions at the time it occurred.Important Point in the Problem Analysis:The following 5 items are important points in the problem analysis. Past problems which are thought to beunrelated and the repair history, etc. may also help in some cases, so as much information as possible shouldbe gathered and its relationship with the problem symptoms should be correctly ascertained for referencein troubleshooting. A customer problem analysis table is provided in Diagnostics section for each systemfor your use.
Important Points in the Customer Problem Analysis •
• What Vehicle model, system name• When Date, time, occurrence frequency• Where Road conditions• Under what conditions? -• How did it happen?
Running conditions, driving conditions, weather conditions.Problem symptoms
(Sample) Engine control system check sheet.
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet '"s
Na
Customer's Name
Driver's Name
Data VehicleBrought in
License No.
em S
ympt
oms
aI
* !•
D Engine doesnot Start
D Difficult toStart
D Poor Idling
DPoorDrive ability
D Engine Stall
.mothers
pector'sme
Model and ModelYear
Frame No.
Engine Model
Odometer Reading kmmiles
D Engine does not crank D No initial combustion D No complete combustion
D Engine cranks slowlyD Other
D Incorrect first idle D Idling rpm is abnormal DHigh( rpm) DLow( rpm)D Rough idling D Other
D Hesitation D Back fireO Knocking D Other
D Soon after starting O After a<D After accelerator pedal releasedD Shifting from N to D Q Other
O Muffler explosion (after-fire) O Surging
scelerator pedal depressedO During A/C operation
— i
1N-22 INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
2. SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION AND DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHECKThe diagnostic system in the CELICA fulfills various functions. The first function is the Diagnostic TroubleCode Check in which a malfunction in the signal circuits to the ECU is stored in code in the ECU memoryat the time of occurrence, to be output by the technician during troubleshooting. Another function is the InputSignal Check which checks if the signals from various switches are sent to the ECU correctly.By using these check functions, the problem areas can be narrowed down quickly and troubleshooting canbe performed effectively. Diagnostic functions are incorporated in the following systems in the CELICA.
System
Engine
Automatic Transaxle (U240E)
Automatic Transaxle (U341 E)
AntH-Ock Brake System with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Supplemental Restraint System
Cruise Control System
Body Control System
Diagnostic Trouble
Code Check
O (with Check
Mode)O (with Check
Mode)
O (with Check
Mode)
OOOO
Input Signal Check
(Sensor Check)
O
0
O
O
Diagnostic Test
Mode (Active Test)
O
O
In diagnostic trouble code check, it is very important to determine whether the problem indicated by the diag-nostic trouble code is still occurring or occurred in the past but returned to normal at present. In addition,it must be checked in the problem symptom check whether the malfunction indicated by the diagnostictrouble code is directly related to the problem symptom or not. For this reason, the diagnostic trouble codesshould be checked before and after the symptom confirmation to determine the current conditions, as shownin the table below. If this is not done, it may, depending on the case, result in unnecessary troubleshootingfor normally operating systems, thus making it more difficult to locate the problem, or in repairs not pertinentto the problem. Therefore, always follow the procedure in correct order and perform the diagnostic troublecode check.
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHECK PROCEDURE
Diagnostic TroubleCode Check (Make anote of and then clear)Diagnostic TroubleCode Display
cC
t=:Normal Code Display— .
1— ,
t=C
Confirmationof Symptoms
Problem symptomsexist
>
No problemsymptoms exist
Problem symptomsexist
No problemsymptoms exist
Diagnostic TroubleCode Check
Same diagnostictrouble code isdisplayed
Normal code isdisplayed
Normal code isdisplayed
Normal code isdisplayed
Problem Condition
Problem is still occurring in the diagnosticcircuit
The problem is still occurring in a placeother than in the diagnostic circuit(The diagnostic trouble code displayedfirst is either for a past problem or it is asecondary problem)
The problem occurred in the diagnosticcircuit in the past
The problem is still occurring in a placeother than in the diagnostic circuit
The problem occurred in a place otherthan in the diagnostic circuit in the past
INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
IN-23
Taking into account the points on the previous page, a flow chart showing how to proceed with troubleshoot-ing using the diagnostic trouble code check is shown below. This flow chart shows how to utilize the diagnos-tic trouble code check effectively, then by carefully checking the results, indicates how to proceed either todiagnostic trouble code troubleshooting or to troubleshooting of problem symptoms table.
Diagnostic trouble code check
Making a note of and clearing of the diagnostic trouble codes displayed
Symptom confirmation
Problem symptoms!"] No Problem symptomsexist J L, exist
Simulation test using the symptomsimulation methods
\7Diagnostic trouble code check
> Diagnostic trouble code displayed> Problem symptoms exist
> Normal code displayed' Problem symptoms exist
• Normal code displayed• No problem symptoms exist
Troubleshooting of problem indicatedby diagnostic trouble code
Troubleshooting of eachproblem symptom
System Normal
If a diagnostic trouble code wasdisplayed in the initial diagnostictrouble code check, it indicatesthat the trouble may have occurredin a wire harness or connector inthat circuit in the past. Therefore,check the wire harness and con-nectors (See page IN-30).
IN-26 INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
4. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHARTThe inspection procedure is shown in the table below. This table permits efficient and accurate troubleshoot-ing using the diagnostic trouble codes displayed in the diagnostic trouble code check. Proceed with trouble-shooting in accordance with the inspection procedure given in the diagnostic chart corresponding to thediagnostic trouble codes displayed. The engine diagnostic trouble code chart is shown below as an example.
• DTC No.Indicates the diagnostic trouble code.
• Page or InstructionsIndicates the page where the inspection procedurefor each circuit is to be found, or gives instructionsfor checking and repairs.
• Trouble AreaIndicates the suspect area of theproblem.
Detection ItemIndicates the system of the problem or
/ 7DTC CHART (SAE Controlled) / /
HINT: / /Parar leters listed in the chart may not be exactly the same as your reading due to the type of instrument or otherfactors. / /
If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check mode, check the circuit for that code listed in the tablebelow. For details of each code, turn lo the page referred to under the "See page" for the respective "DTC No."in the DTC chart. / /
DTQ No.(Selpage)
P0100(DI-24)
P0101(DI-28)
P0110(DI-29)
P0115(DI-33)
P0116(DI-37)
Detection Item /
r
Mass Air Row Circuit Malfunction
Mass Air Flow CircuitRange/ Performance Problem
Intake Air Temp. CircuitMalfunction
Engine Coolant Temp.Circuit Malfunction
Engine Coolant Temp.Circuit Range/ Performance Problem
Trouble Area /
• Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit• Mass air flow meter• ECM
• Mass air flow meter
• Open or short in intake air temp, sensorcircuit
• Intake air temp, sensor• ECM
• Open or short in engine coolant temp, sensor circuit• Engine coolant temp, sensor• ECM
• Engine coolant temp, sensor• Cooling system
MIL*
oo
o
0
o
Memory
O
o
0
oo
INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
IN-27
5. PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLEThe suspected circuits or parts for each problem symptom are shown in the table below. Use this table totroubleshoot the problem when a "Normal" code is displayed in the diagnostic trouble code check but theproblem is still occurring. Numbers in the table indicate the inspection order in which the circuits or partsshould be checked.HINT:When the problem is not detected by the diagnostic system even though the problem symptom is present,it is considered that the problem is occurring outside the detection range of the diagnostic system, or thatthe problem is occurring in a system other than the diagnostic system.
• PageIndicates the page where the flow chart for each circuitis located.
> Circuit Inspection, Inspection OrderIndicates the circuit which needs to be checked for each problemsymptom. Check in the order indicated by the numbers.
• Problem Symptom\
« Circuit or Part Name /Indicates the circuit or part which needs to be checked. /
\ \
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE\ \ »
Symptom
Engine does not crank (Does not start)
No initial combustion (Does not start)
No complete combustion (Does not start)
Engine cranks normally (Difficult to start)
Cold engine (Difficult to start)
Hot engine
— I-u«-sQeed_(Poor idling)
>ig)
^^J
/
7Suspect Area
v\ . Starter and starter relay
1 . ECM power source circuit
2. Fuel pump control circuit3. Engine control module (ECM)
1 . Fuel pump control circuit
1 . Starter signal circuit2. Fuel pump control circuit3. Compression
1 . Starter signal circuit2. Fuel pump control circuit
1 . Starter signal circuit2. Fuel pump control circuit
1 . A/C signal circuit (Compressor circuit)2. ECM power source circuit ^, — ' —
1 . A/C signal circuit2. Fuel pump control circuit
1 . Compression
r_-^
rSeepage
ST-2ST-17
DM47
DM51IN-29
DM51
DM44
DM51EM-3
DM44
DM 51
DM44
DM51
____&c=sa — . — Ll
IN-28 INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
6. CIRCUIT INSPECTIONHow to read and use each page is shown below.
1 Diagnostic Trouble Code No. and Detection Item
DTC
> Circuit DescriptionThe major role and operation, etc. of the circuitand its component parts are explained.
P0325 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunctionircujt M<
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION /Knock sensor is fitted to the cylinder block to detect engine knocking. This sensor contains a piezoelectric element which
generates a voltage when it becomes deformed, which occurs when the cylinder block vibrates due to knocking. If engine
knocking occurs, ignition timing is retarded to suppress ft
DTC No-
P0325
DTC Detecting Condition
No knock sensor 1 signal to ECM with
1,200rpmormore.
le speed,• Open or short in
• Knock si
• ECM
knd S< sensort circuit
;ensor 1 (loos eness)
If the ECM detects the above diagnosis conditions, it operates the ft
value is set to the maximum value.
function in which tl le corrective retard angle
• Indicates the diagnostic trouble code, diagnostictrouble code set parameter and suspect area ofthe problem.
WIRING DIAGRAM
ECM
Knock Sensor 1
f
GR
• Wiring DiagramThis shows a wiring diagram of the circuit.Use this diagram together with ELECTRICALWIRING DIAGRAM to thoroughly understand thecircuit.Wire colors are indicated by an alphabetical code.B = Black, L = Blue, R = Red, BR = Brown,LG = Light Green, V = Violet, G = Green,O = Orange, W = White, GR = Gray, P = Pink,Y = Yellow, SB = Sky BlueThe first letter indicates the basic wire color andthe second letter indicates the color of the stripe.
V08423
INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
IN-29
• Indicates the position of the ignition switch during the check.LOCK ON
Ignition Switch LOCK (OFF) (#\ Ignition Switch ON
START ACC
Ignition Switch START (/) Ignition Switch ACC
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
• Inspection ProcedureUse the inspection procedure to determine ifthe circuit is normal or abnormal, and, if it isabnormal, use it to determine whether theproblem is located in the sensors, actuators,wire harness or ECU.
Check continuity between terminal KNK of ECM connector and body ground.
LOCK
KNK
PREPARATION:
(a) Remove the glove compartment (See page SF-68).(b) Disconnect the E6 connector of ECM.
CHECK:Measure resistance between terminal KNK of ECM connectorand body ground.
OK:Resistance: 1 Mil or higher
OK Go to step 3.
N<v
Check knock sensor (See page SF-61).
Indicates the place to check the voltage or resistance.' Indicates the connector position to checked, from the front or back side.
/n~ir\
Wire Harness
Check from the connector back side,(with harness)
Check from the connector front side, (without harness)In this case, care must be taken not to bend the terminals.
• Indicates the condition of the connector of ECU during the check.KNK KNK
E6 Connector
Connector being checked is connected.
E6 Connector
Connector being checked is disconnected.
V08425
IN-30 INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
FK>M6
FI0047
F10048
n-JO5*-n
HOW TO USE THE DIAGNOSTICCHART AND INSPECTIONPROCEDURE1. CONNECTOR CONNECTION AND TERMINAL IN-
SPECTIONFor troubleshooting, diagnostic trouble code charts orproblem symptom table are provided for each circuit withdetailed inspection procedures on the following pages.
• When all the component parts, wire harnesses and con-nectors of each circuit except the ECU are found to benormal in troubleshooting, then it is determined that theproblem is in the ECU. Accordingly, if diagnosis is per-formed without the problem symptoms occurring, refer toStep 8 to replace the ECU. So always confirm that theproblem symptoms are occurring, or proceed with inspec-tion while using the symptom simulation method.
• The instructions "Check wire harness and connector" and"Check and replace ECU" which appear in the inspectionprocedure, are common and applicable to all diagnostictrouble codes. Follow the procedure outlined belowwhenever these instructions appear.
OPEN CIRCUIT:This could be due to a disconnected wire harness, faulty con-tact in the connector, and a connector terminal pulled out, etc.HINT:• It is rarely the case that a wire is broken in the middle of
it. Most cases occur at the connector. In particular, care-fully check the connectors of sensors and actuators
• Faulty contact could be due to rusting of the connectorterminals, to foreign materials entering terminals or a de-formation of connector terminals. Simply disconnectingand reconnecting the connectors once changes thecondition of the connection and may result in a return tonormal operation. Therefore, in troubleshooting, if no ab-normality is found in the wire harness and connectorcheck, but the problem disappears after the check, thenthe cause is considered to be in the wire harness or con-nectors.
SHORT CIRCUIT:This could be due to a contact between wire harness and thebody ground or to a short circuit occurred inside the switch, etc.HINT:When there is a short circuit between the wire harness and bodyground, check thoroughly whether the wire harness is caughtin the body or is clamped properly.
INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
IN-31
Sensor Side ECU Side
IN0379
ECU Side
IN0378
IN0380
Pull Lightly
Looseness of Crimping
2. CONNECTOR HANDLINGWhen inserting tester probes into a connector, insert them fromthe rear of the connector. When necessary, use mini test leads.For water resistant connectors which cannot be accessed frombehind, take good care not to deform the connector terminals.
3. CONTINUITY CHECK (OPEN CIRCUIT CHECK)(a) Disconnect the connectors at both ECU and sensor
sides.(b) Measure the resistance between the applicable terminals
of the connectors.Resistance: 1 Q or less
HINT:Measure the resistance while lightly shaking the wire harnessvertically and horizontally.
4. RESISTANCE CHECK (SHORT CIRCUIT CHECK)(a) Disconnect the connectors on both ends.(b) Measure the resistance between the applicable terminals
of the connectors and body ground. Be sure to carry outthis check on the connectors on both ends.Resistance: 1 Ma or higher
HINT:Measure the resistance while lightly shaking the wire harnessvertically and horizontally.
5. VISUAL CHECK AND CONTACT PRESSURE CHECK(a) Disconnect the connectors at both ends.(b) Check for rust or foreign material, etc. in the terminals of
the connectors.(c) Check crimped portions for looseness or damage and
check that the terminals are secured in lock portion.HINT:The terminals should not come out when pulled lightly from theback.
IN-32 INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
(d) Prepare a test male terminal and insert it in the female ter-minal, then pull it out.
NOTICE:When testing a gold—plated female terminal, always use agold-plated male terminal.HINT:When the test terminal is pulled out more easily than others,there may be poor contact in that section.
Fig. 1
Sensor
BE4063
Fig. 2
ECU
Sensor
Fig. 3
Sensor
Z17004
6. CHECK OPEN CIRCUITFor the open circuit in the wire harness in Fig. 1, perform "(a)Continuity Check" or "(b) Voltage Check" to locate the section.
ECU
ECU
(a) Check the continuity.(1) Disconnect connectors "A" and "C" and measure
the resistance between them.In the case of Fig. 2,Between terminal 1 of connector "A" and terminal 1of connector "C" -> No continuity (open)Between terminal 2 of connector "A" and terminal 2of connector "C" -> ContinuityTherefore, it is found out that there is an open circuitbetween terminal 1 of connector "A" and terminal 1of connector "C".
(2) Disconnect connector "B" and measure the resis-tance between the connectors.In the case of Fig. 3,Between terminal 1 of connector "A" and terminal 1of connector "B1" -> ContinuityBetween terminal 1 of connector "B2" and terminal1 of connector "C" -> No continuity (open)Therefore, it is found out that there is an open circuitbetween terminal 1 of connector "B2" and terminal1 of connector "C".
INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
IN-33
Fig-4
Sensor
217007
(b) Check the voltage.In a circuit in which voltage is applied (to the ECU connec-tor terminal), an open circuit can be checked for by con-ducting a voltage check.
As shown in Fig. 4, with each connector still con-nected, measure the voltage between body groundand terminal 1 of connector "A" at the ECU 5V out-put terminal, terminal 1 of connector "B", and termi-nal 1 of connector "C", in that order.
If the results are:5V: Between Terminal 1 of connector "A" and Body Ground5V: Between Terminal 1 of connector "B" and Body Ground0V: Between Terminal 1 of connector "C" and Body GroundThen it is found out that there is an open circuit in the wire har-ness between terminal 1 of "B" and terminal 1 of "C".
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Z17008
7. CHECK SHORT CIRCUITIf the wire harness is ground shorted as in Fig. 5, locate the sec-tion by conducting a "continuity check with ground".
Check the continuity with ground.(1) Disconnect connectors "A" and "C" and measure
the resistance between terminal 1 and 2 of connec-tor "A" and body ground.In the case of Fig. 6Between terminal 1 of connector "A" and bodyground -> Continuity (short)Between terminal 2 of connector "A" and bodyground -> No continuityTherefore, it is found out that there is a short circuitbetween terminal 1 of connector "A" and terminal 1of connector "C".
IN-34 INTRODUCTION - HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLEDSYSTEMS
Fig. 7
BE4069 7808
(2) Disconnect connector "B" and measure the resis-tance between terminal 1 of connector "A" and bodyground, and terminal 1 of connector "B2" and bodyground.Between terminal 1 of connector "A" and bodyground —> No continuityBetween terminal 1 of connector "B2" and bodyground -» Continuity (short)Therefore, it is found out that there is a short circuitbetween terminal 1 of connector "B2" and terminal1 of connector "C".
8. CHECK AND REPLACE ECUFirst check the ECU ground circuit. If it is faulty, repair it. If it isnormal, the ECU could be faulty, so replace the ECU with a nor-mal functioning one and check that the symptoms appear.
IN0383
(1) Measure the resistance between the ECU groundterminal and the body ground.
Resistance: 1 Q or less
ECU Side
crap.!r:ijjji~HJ) { * ntn c'"T"j F_ii___i F i f"ffi^a^ElirssjJSF-- "8
\ GroundW/H Side
Ground
IN0384
(2) Disconnect the ECU connector, check the groundterminals on the ECU side and the wire harnessside for bend and check the contact pressure.
IN-35INTRODUCTION - TERMS
TERMSABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
ABS
AC
ACC
ACIS
ACSD
A.D.D.
A/F
AHC
ALR
ALT
AMP
ANT
APPROX.
A/T
ATF
AUTO
AUX
AVG
AVS
BA
BACS
BAT
BDC
B/L
B/S
BTDC
BVSV
Calif.
CB
CCo
CD
CF
CG
CH
COMB.
CPE
CPS
CPU
CRS
CTR
C/V
CV
Meaning
Anti-Lock Brake System
Alternating Current
Accessory
Acoustic Control Induction System
Automatic Cold Start Device
Automatic Disconnecting Differential
Air-Fuel Ratio
Active Height Control Suspension
Automatic Locking Retractor
Alternator
Amplifier
Antenna
Approximately
Automatic Transmission (Transaxle)
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Automatic
Auxiliary
Average
Adaptive Variable Suspension
Brake Assist
Boost Altitude Compensation System
Battery
Bottom Dead Center
Bi-Level
Bore-Stroke Ratio
Before Top Dead Center
Bimetallic Vacuum Switching Valve
California
Circuit Breaker
Catalytic Converter For Oxidation
Compact Disc
Cornering Force
Center Of Gravity
Channel
Combination
Coupe
Combustion Pressure Sensor
Central Processing Unit
Child Restraint System
Center
Check Valve
Control Valve
IN-36INTRODUCTION - TERMS
cwDC
DEF
DFL
DIFF.
DIFF. LOCK
D/INJ
DLI
DOHC
DP
DS
DSP
EBD
ECAM
ECD
ECDY
ECU
ED
EDU
EDIC
EFI
E/G
EGR-VM
ELR
ENG
ESA
ETCS
EVP
E-VRV
EXH
FE
FF
F/G
FIPG
FL
F/P
FPU
Fr
FR
F/W
FW/D
FWD
GAS
GND
HAG
H/B
Curb Weight
Direct Current
Defogger
Deflector
Differential
Differential Lock
Direct Injection
Distributorless Ignition
Double Over Head Cam
Dash Pot
Dead Soak
Digital Signal Processor
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
Engine Control And Measurement System
Electronic Controlled Diesel
Eddy Current Dynamometer
Electronic Control Unit
Electro- Deposited Coating
Electronic Driving Unit
Electric Diesel Injection Control
Electronic Fuel Injection
Engine
Egr-Vacuum Modulator
Emergency Locking Retractor
Engine
Electronic Spark Advance
Electronic Throttle Control System
Evaporator
Electric Vacuum Regulating Valve
Exhaust
Fuel Economy
Front-Engine Front-Wheel-Drive
Fuel Gage
Formed In Place Gasket
Fusible Link
Fuel Pump
Fuel Pressure Up
Front
Front-Engine Rear— Wheel-Drive
Flywheel
Flywheel Damper
Front-Wheel-Drive
Gasoline
Ground
High Altitude Compensator
Hatchback
IN-37INTRODUCTION - TERMS
H-FUSE
HI
HID
HSG
HT
HWS
IAC
1C
IDI
IPS
IG
IIA
IN
INT
I/P
IRS
J/B
J/C
KD
LAN
LB
LCD
LED
LH
LHD
L/H/W
LLC
LNG
LO
LPG
LSD
LSP & PV
LSPV
MAX.
MIC
MIL
WIN.
MP
MPX
M/T
MT
MTG
N
NA
No.
O/D
High Current Fuse
High
High Intensity Discharge (Head Lamp)
Housing
Hard Top
Heated Windshield System
Idle Air Control
Integrated circuit
Indirect Diesel Injection
Independent Front Suspension
Ignition
Integrated Ignition Assembly
Intake (Manifold, Valve)
Intermittent
Instrument Panel
Independent Rear Suspension
Junction Block
Junction Connector
Kick-Down
Local Area Network
Liftback
Liquid Crystal Display
Light Emitting Diode
Left-Hand
Left-Hand Drive
Length, Height, Width
Long-Life Coolant
Liquified Natural Gas
Low
Liquified Petroleum Gas
Limited Slip Differential
Load Sensing Proportioning And Bypass Valve
Load Sensing Proportioning Valve
Maximum
Microphone
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Minimum
Multipurpose
Multiplex Communication System
Manual Transmission
Mount
Mounting
Neutral
Natural Aspiration
Number
Overdrive
IN-38INTRODUCTION - TERMS
OEM
OHC
OHV
OPT
O/S
P&BV
PCS
PCV
PKB
PPS
PS
PTO
R & P
R/B
RBS
R/F
RFS
RRS
RH
RHD
RLY
ROM
Rr
RR
RWD
SON
SEN
SICS
SOC
SOHC
SPEC
SPI
SRS
SSM
SST
STD
STJ
SW
SYS
T/A
TACH
TBI
TC
TCCS
TCV
TDC
Original Equipment Manufacturing
Overhead Camshaft
Overhead Valve
Option
Oversize
Proportioning And Bypass Valve
Power Control System
Positive Crankcase Ventilation
Parking Brake
Progressive Power Steering
Power Steering
Power Take-Off
Rack And Pinion
Relay Block
Recirculating Ball Type Steering
Reinforcement
Rigid Front Suspension
Rigid Rear Suspension
Right-Hand
Right-Hand Drive
Relay
Read Only Memory
Rear
Rear-Engine Rear-Wheel Drive
Rear-Wheel Drive
Sedan
Sensor
Starting Injection Control System
State Of Charge
Single Overhead Camshaft
Specification
Single Point Injection
Supplemental Restraint System
Special Service Materials
Special Service Tools
Standard
Cold-Start Fuel Injection
Switch
System
Transaxle
Tachometer
Throttle Body Electronic Fuel Injection
Turbocharger
TOYOTA Computer-Controlled System
Timing Control Valve
Top Dead Center
IN-39INTRODUCTION - TERMS
TEMP.
TEMS
TIS
T/M
TMC
TMMK
TRAC
TURBO
U/D
U/S
VCV
VENT
VIN
VPS
VSC
VSV
VTV
w/
WGN
W/H
w/o
1st
2nd
2WD
4WD
Temperature
TOYOTA Electronic Modulated Suspension
Total Information System For Vehicle Development
Transmission
TOYOTA Motor Corporation
TOYOTA Motor Manufacturing Kentucky, Inc.
Traction Control System
Turbocharge
Underdrive
Undersize
Vacuum Control Valve
Ventilator
Vehicle Identification Number
Variable Power Steering
Vehicle Skid Control
Vacuum Switching Valve
Vacuum Transmitting Valve
With
Wagon
Wire Harness
Without
First
Second
Two Wheel Drive Vehicle (4x2)
Four Wheel Drive Vehicle (4x4)
IN-40INTRODUCTION - TERMS
GLOSSARY OF SAE AND TOYOTA TERMSThis glossary lists all SAE-J1930 terms and abbreviations used in this manual in compliance with SAE rec-ommendations, as well as their TOYOTA equivalents.
SAE
ABBREVIATIONS
A/C
ACL
AIR
AP
B+
BARO
CAC
GARB
CFI
CKP
CL
CMP
CPP
CTOX
CTP
DPI
Dl
DLC1
DLC2
DLC3
DTC
DTM
ECL
ECM
ECT
EEPROM
EFE
EGR
El
EM
EPROM
EVAP
FC
FEEPROM
FEPROM
FF
FP
GEN
GND
SAE TERMS
Air Conditioning
Air Cleaner
Secondary Air Injection
Accelerator Pedal
Battery Positive Voltage
Barometric Pressure
Charge Air Cooler
Carburetor
Continuous Fuel Injection
Crankshaft Position
Closed Loop
Camshaft Position
Clutch Pedal Position
Continuous Trap Oxidizer
Closed Throttle Position
Direct Fuel Injection (Diesel)
Distributor Ignition
Data Link Connector 1
Data Link Connector 2
Data Link Connector 3
Diagnostic Trouble Code
Diagnostic Test Mode
Engine Control Level
Engine Control Module
Engine Coolant Temperature
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
Early Fuel Evaporation
Exhaust Gas Retirculation
Electronic Ignition
Engine Modification
Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
Evaporative Emission
Fan Control
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable
Read Only Memory
Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
Flexible Fuel
Fuel Pump
Generator
Ground
TOYOTA TERMS
( )— ABBREVIATIONS
Air Conditioner
Air Cleaner, A/CL
Air Injection (Al)
-
+B, Battery Voltage
MAC
Intercooler
Carburetor
-
Crank Angle
Closed Loop
Cam Angle
-
-
LL ON, Idle ON
Direct Injection (Dl)
-
1 : Check Connector
2: Total Diagnosis Comunication Link (TDCL)
3: OBD II Diagnostic Connector
Diagnostic Code
-
-
Engine ECU (Electronic Control Unit)
Coolant Temperature, Water Temperature (THW)
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
(EEPROM),
Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM)
Cold Mixture Heater (CMH), Heat Control Valve (HCV)
Exhaust Gas Recirculatfon (EGR)
TOYOTA Distributorless Ignition (TDI)
Engine Modification (EM)
Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM)
Evaporative Emission Control (EVAP)
-
-
-
-
Fuel Pump
Alternator
Ground (GND)
INTRODUCTION - TERMSIN-41
HO2S
IAC
IAT
ICM
IFI
IFS
ISC
KS
MAP
MAP
MC
MDP
MFI
MIL
MST
MVZ
NVRAM
O2S
OBD
OC
OP
PAIR
PCM
PNP
PROM
PSP
PTOX
RAM
RM
ROM
RPM
SC
SCB
SFI
SPL
SRI
SRT
ST
TB
TBI
TC
TCC
Heated Oxygen Sensor
Idle Air Control
Intake Air Temperature
Ignition Control Module
Indirect Fuel Injection
Inertia Fuel-Shutoff
Idle Speed Control
Knock Sensor
Mass Air Flow
Manifold Absolute Pressure
Mixture Control
Manifold Differential Pressure
Multiport Fuel Injection
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Manifold Surface Temperature
Manifold Vacuum Zone
Non-Volatile Random Access Memory
Oxygen Sensor
On-Board Diagnostic
Oxidation Catalytic Converter
Open Loop
Pulsed Secondary Air Injection
Powertrain Control Module
Park/Neutral Position
Programmable Read Only Memory
Power Steering Pressure
Periodic Trap Oxidizer
Random Access Memory
Relay Module
Read Only Memory
Engine Speed
Supercharger
Supercharger Bypass
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection
Smoke Puff Limiter
Service Reminder Indicator
System Readiness Test
Scan Tool
Throttle Body
Throttle Body Fuel Injection
Turbocharger
Torque Converter Clutch
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Idle Speed Control (ISC)
Intake or Inlet Air Temperature
-
Indirect Injection (IDL)
-
-
Knock Sensor
Air Flow Meter
Manifold PressureIntake Vacuum
Electric Bleed Air Control Valve (EBCV)
Mixture Control Valve (MCV)Electric Air Control Valve (EACV)
-
Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI)
Check Engine Lamp
-
-
-
Oxygen Sensor, O2 Sensor (O2S)
On-Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
Oxidation Catalyst Convert (OC), CCo
Open Loop
Air Suction (AS)
-
-
-
-
Diesel Paniculate Filter (DPF)Diesel Particulate Trap (DPT)
Random Access Memory (RAM)
-
Read Only Memory (ROM)
Engine Speed
Supercharger
E-ABV
Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI), Sequential Injection
-
-
-
-
Throttle Body
Single Point Injection
Central Fuel Injection (Ci)
Turbocharger
Torque Converter
IN-42INTRODUCTION - TERMS
TCM
TP
TR
TW
TWO
TWC+OC
VAF
VR
VSS
WOT
WU-OC
WU-TWC
3GR
4GR
Transmission Control Module
Throttle Position
Transmission Range
Thermal Vacuum Valve
Three-Way Catalytic Converter
Three-Way + Oxidation Catalytic Converter
Volume Air Flow
Voltage Regulator
Vehicle Speed Sensor
Wide Open Throttle
Warm Up Oxidation Catalytic Converter
Warm Up Three-Way Catalytic Converter
Third Gear
Fourth Gear
Transmission ECU, ECT ECU
Throttle Position
-
Bimetallic Vacuum Switching Valve (BVSV)
Thermostatic Vacuum Switching Valve (TVSV)
Three-Way Catalytic (TWC)
Manifold Converter
CCflo
CCR + CCo
Air Flow Meter
Voltage Regulator
Vehicle Speed Sensor
Full Throttle
-
-
-
-
MAINTENANCE
OUTSIDE VEHICLE MA-1
INSIDE VEHICLE MA-2
UNDER HOOD MA-4 |
ENGINE MA-5
BRAKE MA-6
CHASSIS MA-7
MA-1MAINTENANCE - OUTSIDE VEHICLE
OUTSIDE VEHICLEUA001-09
GENERAL MAINTENANCEThese are maintenance and inspection items which are considered to be the owner's responsibility.They can be done by the owner or they can have them done at a service shop.These items include those which should be checked on a daily basis, those which, in most cases, do notrequire (special) tools and those which are considered to be reasonable for the owner to do.Items and procedures for general maintenance are as follows.1. GENERAL NOTES
Maintenance items may vary from country to country. Check the owner's manual supplement in whichthe maintenance schedule is shown.Every service item in the periodic maintenance schedule must be performed.Periodic maintenance service must be performed according to whichever interval in the periodic main-tenance schedule occurs first, the odometer reading (miles) or the time interval (months).
• Maintenance service after the last period should be performed at the same interval as before unlessotherwise noted.
• Failure to do even one item an cause the engine to run poorly and increase exhaust emissions.2. TIRES(a) Check the pressure with a gauge. If necessary, adjust.(b) Check for cuts, damage or excessive wear.3. WHEEL NUTSWhen checking the tires, check the nuts for looseness or for missing nuts. If necessary, tighten them.4. TIRE ROTATIONCheck the owner's manual supplement in which the maintenance schedule is shown.5. WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADESCheck for wear or cracks whenever they do not wipe clean. If necessary, replace.6. FLUID LEAKS(a) Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid.(b) If you smell gasoline fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected.7. DOORS AND ENGINE HOOD(a) Check that all doors and the tailgate operate smoothly, and that all latches lock securely.(b) Check that the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch
is released.
MA-2MAINTENANCE - INSIDE VEHICLE
INSIDE VEHICLEMAKU-16
GENERAL MAINTENANCEThese are maintenance and inspection items which are considered to be the owner's responsibility.They can be done by the owner or they can have them done at a service shop.These items include those which should be checked on a daily basis, those which, in most cases, do notrequire (special) tools and those which are considered to be reasonable for the owner to do.
| Items and procedures for general maintenance are as follows.. GENERAL NOTES
Maintenance items may vary from country to country. Check the owner's manual supplement in whichthe maintenance schedule is shown.Every service item in the periodic maintenance schedule must be performed.Periodic maintenance service must be performed according to whichever interval in the periodic main-tenance schedule occurs first, the odometer reading (miles) or the time interval (months).
• Maintenance service after the last period should be performed at the same interval as before unlessotherwise noted.Failure to do even one item an cause the engine to run poorly and increase exhaust emissions.
2. LIGHTS(a) Check that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all working.(b) Check the headlight aim.3. WARNING LIGHTS AND BUZZERSCheck that all warning lights and buzzers function properly.4. HORNCheck that it is working.5. WINDSHIELD GLASSCheck for scratches, pits or abrasions.6. WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
(a) Check operation of the wipers and washer.(b) Check that the wipers do not streak.7. WINDSHIELD DEFROSTERCheck that air comes out from the defroster outlet when operating the heater or air conditioner.8. REAR VIEW MIRRORCheck that it is mounted securely.9. SUN VISORSCheck that they move freely and are mounted securely.10. STEERING WHEELCheck that it has the specified freeplay. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering,excessive freeplay or strange noises.11. SEATS(a) Check that the seat adjusters operate smoothly.(b) Check that all latches lock securely in any position.(c) For fold-down seat backs, check that the latches lock securely.12. SEAT BELTS(a) Check that the seat belt system such as the buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and
smoothly.(b) Check that the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
MA-3MAINTENANCE - INSIDE VEHICLE
13. ACCELERATOR PEDALCheck the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching.14. CLUTCH PEDAL (See page CL-2)(a) Check the pedal for smooth operation.(b) Check that the pedal has the proper freeplay.15. BRAKE PEDAL (See page BR-6)(a) Check the pedal for smooth operation.(b) Check that the pedal has the proper reserve distance and freeplay.(c) Check the brake booster function.16. BRAKESAt a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied.17. PARKING BRAKE (See page BR-8)(a) Check that the lever has the proper travel.(b) On a safe incline, check that the vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied.18. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION "PARK" MECHANISM(a) Check the lock release button of the selector lever for proper and smooth operation.(b) On a safe incline, check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in "P" position and all
brakes released.
MA-4MAINTENANCE - UNDER HOOD
UNDER HOODMA003-08
GENERAL MAINTENANCE1. GENERAL NOTES
Maintenance items may vary from country to country. Check the owner's manual supplement in whichthe maintenance schedule is shown.Every serice item in the periodic maintenance schedule must be performed.
• Periodic maintenance service must be performed according to whichever interval in the periodic main-tenance schedule occurs first, the odometer reading (miles) or the time interval (months).Maintenance service after the last period should be performed at the same interval as before unlessotherwise noted.
• Failure to do even one item an cause the engine to run poorly and increase exhaust emissions.2. WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUIDCheck that there is sufficient fluid in the tank.3. ENGINE COOLANT LEVELCheck that the coolant level is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the see-through reservoir.4. RADIATOR AND HOSES(a) Check that the front of the radiator is clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt or bugs.(b) Check the hoses for cracks, kinks, rot or loose connections.5. BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVELCheck that the electrolyte level of all battery cells is between the upper and lower level lines on the case.6. BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID LEVELSCheck that the brake and clutch fluid levels are near the upper level line on the see-through reservoirs.7. ENGINE DRIVE BELTSCheck drive belt for fraying, cracks, wear or oiliness.8. ENGINE OIL LEVELCheck the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off.9. POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL
Check the level.• The level should be in the "HOT" or "COLD" range depending on the fluid temperature.
10. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL(a) Park the vehicle on a level surface.(b) With the engine idling and the parking brake applied, shift the selector into all positions from "P" to "L",
and then shift into "P" position.(c) Pull out the dipstick and wipe off the fluid with a clean rag. Re-insert the dipstick and check that the
fluid level is in the HOT range.(d) Do this check with the fluid at normal driving temperature (70 - 80°C, 158- 176°F).HINT:Wait until the engine cools down (approx. 30 min.) before checking the fluid level after extended driving athigh speeds, in hot weather, in heavy traffic or pulling a trailer.11. EXHAUST SYSTEMIf any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell of the exhaust fumes is noticed, have the cause locatedand corrected.
MA-5MAINTENANCE - ENGINE
Outside
Inside
B00324
ENGINEMAOOR-06
INSPECTIONHINT:Inspect these items when the engine is cold.1. INSPECT DRIVE BELT
(See page CH-2)2. REPLACE SPARK PLUGS
(See page IG-1)
3. INSPECT AIR FILTER(a) Visually check that the air filter is not excessively dirty or
oily.HINT:Oiliness may indicate a stuck PCV valve.If necessary, replace the air cleaner element.(b) Clean the air filter with compressed air.
First blow from the inside thoroughly, then blow off theoutside of the element.
4. REPLACE AIR FILTERReplace the air filter with a new one.5. REPLACE ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
(See page LU-3)6. REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT
(See page CO-2)7. REPLACE GASKET IN FUEL TANK CAP
(See page SF-28)8. INSPECT FUEL LINES AND CONNECTIONS
(See page SF-28)9. INSPECT EXHAUST PIPES AND MOUNTINGS
(See page EC-11)10. ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE
(See page EM-4)
MA-6MAINTENANCE - BRAKE
MA0055
BRAKEMAMM-03
INSPECTION1. INSPECT BRAKE LINE PIPES AND HOSESHINT:Check in a well lighted area. Check the entire circumferenceand length of the brake hoses using a mirror as required. Turnthe front wheels fully right or left before checking the front brake.(a) Check all brake lines and hoses for:
Damage• Wear• Deformation
CracksCorrosionLeaks
• Bends• Twists
(b) Check all clamps for tightness and connections for leak-age.
(c) Check that the hoses and lines are clear of sharp edges,moving parts and the exhaust system.
(d) Check that the lines installed in grommets pass throughthe center of the grommets.
2. INSPECT FRONT BRAKE PADS AND DISCS(See page BR-18)
3. INSPECT REAR BRAKE PADS AND DISCS(See page BR-34)
4. INSPECT BRAKE LININGS AND DRUMS(See page BR-39)
MA-7MAINTENANCE - CHASSIS
CHASSISINSPECTION ""1. INSPECT STEERING LINKAGE
Check the steering wheel freeplay (See page SR-8).(a)(b)
2.
Check the steering linkage for looseness or damage.Check that:• Tie rod ends do not have excessive play.
Dust seals and boots are not damaged.Boot clamps are not loose.
INSPECT STEERING GEAR HOUSING OILCheck the steering gear housing for oil leakage.
Boot BootYB00096
3. INSPECT DRIVE SHAFT BOOTSCheck the drive shaft boots for clamp looseness, leakage ordamage.
B00321
4. INSPECT BALL JOINT AND DUST COVERS(a) Inspect the ball joints for excessive looseness.
• Jack up the front of the vehicle and place woodenblocks with a height of 180 - 200 mm (7.09 - 7.87in.) under the front tires.Lower the jack until there is about half a load on thefront coil spring. Place stands under the vehicle forsafety.
• Check that the front wheels are pointing straightahead, and block them with chocks.Using a lever, pry up the end of the lower arm, andcheck the amount of play.
Maximum ball joint vertical play:0 mm (0 in.)
If there is play, replace the ball joint.(b) Check the dust cover for damage.
MA-8MAINTENANCE - CHASSIS
5. CHECK TRANSAXLE OIL (FLUID)Visually check the transaxle for oil (fluid) leakage.If leakage is found, check for the cause and repair.6. REPLACE TRANSAXLE FLUID(a) M/T:
Replace transaxle oil.(C56: See page MX-4)(C60: See page MX-4)
(b) A/T:Replace transaxle (transmission) fluid.(U240E: See page DM57)(U341E: See page DI-220)
7. TIGHTEN BOLTS AND NUTS ON CHASSIS AND BODYIf the vehicle is mainly operated under the rough, muddy roadconditions, Tighten the seat mounting bolts and front and rearsuspension member retaining bolts to specified torque.• Seat mounting bolts
Torque: 37 N m (375 kgf-cm, 27 ftlbf)
BOB796
Front suspension member - to body mounting boltsTorque:Bolt A113 N-m (1,152 kgf-cm, 83 ft-lbf)Bolt B 157 N-m (1,600 kgf-cm, 116 ftlbf)
Rear suspension member - to body mounting boltsTorque:Bolt A 80 N-m (816 kgf-cm, 59 fMbf)Bolt B 130 N-m (1,326 kgf-cm, 96 ft-lbf
PREPARATION
MAINTENANCE PP-1
ENGINE MECHANICAL PP-2
EMISSION CONTROL PP-7SFI PP-8
COOLING PP-11
LUBRICATION PP-15IGNITION PP-19
STARTING PP-21
CHARGING PP-24CLUTCH PP-27
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C56) PP-31
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60) PP-38
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E) PP-46
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E) PP-51
SUSPENSION AND AXLE PP-56
BRAKE PP-62
STEERING PP-67SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM ... PP-74BODY ELECTRICAL PP-77BODY PP-80
AIR CONDITIONING PP-85
pp-1PREPARATION - MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCEEQUIPMENTMirror
Torque wrench
Brake hose
PP-2PREPARATION - ENGINE MECHANICAL
ENGINE MECHANICALSST (Special Service Tools)
09032-00100 Oil Pan Seal Cutter
09201-01055 Valve Guide Bushing Remover & Replacer 5.5
09201-41020 Valve Stem Oil Seal Replacer
09202-70020 Valve Spring Compressor
(09202-00020) Attachment
09213-70010 Crankshaft Pulley Holding Tool
09222-30010 Connecting Rod Bushing Remover& Replacer
09223-15030 Oil Seal & Bearing Replacer
09223-22010 Crankshaft Front Oil SealReplacer
09309—37010 Transmission Bearing Replacer
09330-00021 Companion Flange Holding Tool
o 09816-30010 Oil Pressure Switch Socket
PREPARATION - ENGINE MECHANICALPP-3
09950-50012 Puller C Set
(09951-05010) Hanger 150
(09952-05010) Slide Arm
(09953-05020) Center Bolt 150
(09954-05020) Claw No.2
09950-70010 Handle Set
(09951-07100) Handle 100
PREPARATION - ENGINE MECHANICAL
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09090-04020 Engine Sling Device For suspending engine
09200-00010 Engine Adjust Kit.
09258-00030 Hose Plug Set. Plug for vacuum hose, fuel hoseetc.
PP-5PREPARATION - ENGINE MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENTAbrasive compound
Caliper gauge
CO/HC meter
Compression gauge
Connecting rod aligner
Cylinder gauge
Dial indicator
Dye penetrant
Engine tune-up tester
Groove cleaning tool
Heater
Magnetic finger
Micrometer
OBDII scan tool
Pin hole grinder
Piston ring compressor
Piston ring expander
Plastigage
Precision straight edge
Press
Ridge reamer
Soft brush
Solvent
Spring tester
Steel square
Thermometer
Torque wrench
Torx wrench socket set
Valve seat cutter
V-block
Vernier calipers
Wire brush
Valve
Piston ring groove
Piston pin hole of piston
Cylinder
Valve spring
Valve spring
Stud bolt
Valve
PP-6PREPARATION - ENGINE MECHANICAL
SSM (Special Service Materials)08826-00080 Seal Packing Black or equivalent
(FIPG)
08826-00100 Seal Packing 1282B,THREE BOND 1282B or equivalent(FIPG)
08833-00070 Adhesive 1324,THREE BOND 1324 or equivalent
PP-7PREPARATION - EMISSION CONTROL
EMISSION CONTROLEQUIPMENTTorque wrench
Vacuum gauge
Pressure gauge
Hose clipper
PP-8PREPARATION - SFI
SFISST (Special Service Tools)
09268-21010 Fuel Hose Puller
09268-41047 Injection Measuring Tool Set
(95336-08070) Hose
(09268-41250) T Joint
09268-45014 EF1 Fuel Pressure Gauge
(09268-41200) Gauge
(09268-41220) Hose
(09268-41250) T Joint
J)
09816-30010 Oil Pressure Switch Socket
09842-30080 EFI Inspection Wire "H"
09843-18020 Diagnosis Check Wire
PP-9PREPARATION - SFI
PPOJX-02
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09082-00040 TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
^^ 09258-00030 Hose Plug Set .
<T^^^ jaf
Plug tor vacuum hose, fuel hoseeta.
PP-10PREPARATION - SFI
EQUIPMENTCarburetor cteaner
Graduated cylinder
OBDII scan tool
Soft brush
Sound scope
Torque wrench
Vacuum gauge
Throttle body
Injector
Throttle body
Injector
pp-11PREPARATION - COOLING
COOLINGSST (Special Service Tools)
oo 09230-01010 Radiator Service Tool Set
09231-14010 Punch
09960-10010 variable Pin Wrench Set
(09963-00600) Pin 6
(09963-01000) Pin 10
PP-12PREPARATION - COOLING
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
^—-e^ 09082-00040
PPl 89-01
TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
PP-13PREPARATION - COOLING
PP18A-Q1
EQUIPMENTHeater
Radiator cap tester
Thermometer
Torque wrench
Vernier calipers
ECT switch, Thermostat
ECT switch, Thermostat
PP-14PREPARATION - COOLING
COOLANTItem
Engine coolant 1 ZZ-FE:M/TA/T
2ZZ-GE:
M/TA/T
Capacity
5.7 liters (6.0 US qts, 5.0 Imp. qts)
5.6 liters (5.9 US qts, 4.9 Imp. qts)
5.9 liters (6.2 US qts, 5.2 Imp. qts)5.8 liters (6.1 US qts, 5.1 Imp. qts)
Classification
Ethylene-glycol base
PP-15PREPARATION - LUBRICATION
LUBRICATIONSST (Special Service Tools)
09228-06501 Oil Filter Wrench
3)09816-30010 Oil Pressure Switch Socket
PP-16PREPARATION - LUBRICATION
PPOK5-05
EQUIPMENTOil pressure gauge
Torque wrench
Feeler gauge
Straight edge
PREPARATION - LUBRICATIONPP-17
LUBRICANTItem
Engine oilDrain and refill 1 ZZ-FE:
w/ Oil coolerw/o Oil cooler
2ZZ-FE:
w/ Oil coolerw/o Oil cooler
Dry fill 1ZZ-FE:2ZZ-GE:
Capacity
3.7 liters (3.9 US qts, 3.3 Imp.qts)3.5 liters (3.7 US qts, 3.1 Imp.qts)
4.4 liters (4.8 US qts, 4.0 Imp.qts)
4.2 liters (4.6 US qts, 3.8 Imp.qts)4.1 liters (4.3 US qts, 3.6 Imp.qts)
4.8 liters (5.1 US qts, 4.2 Imp.qts)
Classification
API grade SJ, Energy-Conserving or ILSAC mul-
tigrade engine oil. SAE 5W-30 is the best choicefor your vehicle, for good fuel economy.and goodstarting in cold weather.
PP-18PREPARATION - LUBRICATION
PP2OT-01
SSM (Special Service Materials)08833-00080 Adhesive 1344
THREE BOND 1344
LOCTITE 242 or equivalent
Oil pressure switch
PP-19PREPARATION - IGNITION
IGNITIONRECOMMENDED TOOLS
09082-00040 TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
09200-00010 Engine Adjust Kit.
PP-20PREPARATION - IGNfTION
EQUIPMENTI Spark plug cleaner
PREPARATION - STARTINGPP-21
STARTINGSST (Special Service Tools)
09286-46011 Injection Pump Spline ShaftPuller
09810-38140 Starter Magnet Switch Nut Wrench14
09820-00030 Alternator Rear Bearing Replacer
PP-22PREPARATION - STARTING
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09082-00040 TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
PP-23PREPARATION - STARTING
EQUIPMENTDial indicator
Magnetic finger
Press
Pull scale
Sandpaper
Torque wrench
V-block
Vernier calipers
Commutator
Steel ball
Magnetic switch terminal Kit part
Brush spring
Commutator
Commutator
Commutator, Brush
PP-24PREPARATION - CHARGING
CHARGINGSST (Special Service Tools)
09285-76010 Injection Pump Camshaft BearingCone Replacer
09286-46011 Injection Pump Spline ShaftPuller
09820-00021 Alternator Rear Bearing Puller
09820-00030 Alternator Rear Bearing Replacer
09820-63010 Alternator Pulley Set Nut WrenchSet
09950-60010 Replacer Set
(09951-00350) Replacer 35
(09951-00530) Replacer 53
09950-70010 Handle Set
(09951-07100) Handle 100
PP-25PREPARATION - CHARGING
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09082-00040
PPOKE-02
TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
PP-26PREPARATION - CHARGING
PPOKF-02
EQUIPMENTBattery specific gravity gauge
Belt tension gauge
Torque wrench
Vernier calipers
Except maintenance free battery
Rotor (Slip ring), Brush
PP-27PREPARATION - CLUTCH
CLUTCHSST (Special Service Tools)
09023-00100 Union Nut Wrench 10 mm Clutch line
09301-00210 Clutch Guide Tool
09333-00013 Clutch Diaphragm Spring Aligner
PP-28PREPARATION - CLUTCH
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09031-00030 Pin Punch.
09082-00040 TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
09905-00013 Snap Ring Pliers .
PP-29PREPARATION - CLUTCH
PPOH1-<I2
EQUIPMENTVernier calipers
Dial indicator
Torque wrench
PP-30PREPARATION - CLUTCH
mcx-te
LUBRICANTItem
Brake fluid
Capacity
-
Classification
SAE J1 703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT3
PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (056)PP-31
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C56)SST (Special Service Tools)
ezJ&d>@©
GH>\a£_-
HI
®
iPcg3©
09223-50010
09226-10010
09308-00010
09309-12020
09316-60011
(09316-O0011)
09350-32014
(09351-32120)
(09351-32140)
09564-32011
09608-00071
09612-65014
Crankshaft Front oil SealReplacer
Crankshaft Front & Rear BearingReplacer
Oil Seal Puller
5th Driven Gear Replacer
Transmission & Transfer BearingReplacer
Replacer Pipe
TOYOTA Automatic TransmissionTool Set
Overdrive Bearing Replacer
Oil Seal Replacer
Differential Preload Adaptor
Drive Pinion Rear Bearing ConeReplacer
Steering Worm Bearing Puller
Output shan front bearing inner race
Transmission case oil seal
Output shaft front bearing
Differential tapered roller bearing
Differential tapered roller bearing
Input shaft rear radial ball bearingOutput shaft rear radial ball bearing
Input shaft front bearingDifferential tapered roller bearing
outer race
PP-32PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C561
09628-62011 Ball Joint Puller 5th driven gear
09636-20010 Upper Ball Joint Dust CoverReplacer
No. 3 hub sleeve assembly
09710-28021 Front Suspension Bushing ToolSet
Transaxle case oil seal
(09710-08041) Bushing Replacer
09950-00020 Bearing Remover
09950-00030 Bearing Remover Attachment Differential tapered roller bearing
09950-30011 Puller A Set No. 3 clutch hub
09950-40011 Puller B Set 51h driven gear
09950-60010 Replacer Set
(09951-00230) Replacer 23 5th driven gear
(09951-00350) Replacer 35 Differential tapered roller bearing
(09951-00360) Replacer 36 Input shaft front oil sealDifferential tapered roller bearing
(09951-00400) Replacer 40 Input shaft front bearing
PP-33PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (056)
(09951-00560) Replacer 56 Output shaft front bearing
09950-60020 Replacer Set No.2
Qy iff
(09951-00680) Replacer 68 Differential tapered roller bearingouter race (Transaxle case side)
(09951-00710) Replacer 71 Differential tapered roller bearing
outer race (Transmission case side)
09950-70010 Handle Set
(09951-07150) Handle 150
PP-34PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C56)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09025-00010 Torque Wrench (30 kgf-cm) Differential preload
09031-00030 Pin Punch.
09040-00011 Hexagon Wrench Set.
09042-00010 Tone Socket T30.
09090-04020 Engine Sling Device
09905-00012 Snap Ring No.1 Expander.
PP-35PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (056)
EQUIPMENTDial indicator with magnetic base
Feeler gauge
Micrometer
Torque wrench
Magnetic finger
Wooden block or similar object
PP-36PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C56)
PPOtS-03
LUBRICANTItem
Manual transaxle oil
(w/ Differential oil)
Capacity
1.9 liters (2.0 US qts, 1.7 Imp. qts)
Classification
API GL-4 or GL-5
SAE 75W-90
PP-37PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE(C56)
SSM (Special Service Materials)08826-00090 Seal Packing 1281.
THREE BOND 1281 or equivalent(FIPG)
Transmission case x Transaxle caseTransmission case x Transmissioncase cover
08833-00080 Adhesive 1344THREE BOND 1344LOCTITE 242 or equivalent
PP-38PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C6Q)
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)SST (Special Service Tools)
09223-50010 Crankshaft Front oil SealReplacer
Output shaft front bearing inner race
09226-10010 Crankshaft Front & Rear BearingReplacer
Transmission case oil seal
09308-00010 Oil Seal Puller Output shaft front bearing
09316-60011 Transmission & Transfer BearingReplacer
Differential tapered roller bearing
(09316-00011) Replacer Pipe
09325-12010 Transmission Oil Plug Input shaft rear radial ball bearing6th driven gear
09350-32014 TOYOTA Automatic TransmissionTool Set
Differential case tapered roller bearing
(09351-32120) Overdrive Bearing Replacer
(09351-32140) Oil Seal Replacer
09517-12010 Rear Axle Shaft Oil SealReplacer
Output shaft rear radial ball bearingInput shaft rear radial ball bearing
09564-32011 Differential Preload Adaptor
09608-00071 Drive Pinion Rear Bearing ConeReplacer
Input shaft center radial ball bearing4th driven gear and center radial ball
bearing
PP-39PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
09612-22011 Tilt Handle Bearing Replacer No. 3 clutch hub assembly5th driven gear
09612-65014 Steering Worm Bearing Puller Input shaft tront bearingDifferential tapered roller bearingouter race
09710-28021 Front Suspension Bushing ToolSet
Transaxle case oil seal
(09710-08041) Bushing Replacer
09950-00020 Bearing Remover
09950-00030 Bearing Remover Attachment
09950-30011 Puller A Set
(09951-03010) Upper Plate .
(09953-03010) Center Bolt
(09954-03010) Arm
(09955-03021) Claw No.2
09950-40011 Puller B Set
(09951-04010) Hanger 150
PP-40PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
(09952-04010) Slide Arm
(09953-04020) Center Bolt 150
(09953-04030) Center Bolt 200
(09954-04010) Arm 25
(09955-04021) ClawNo.2
(09955-04061) Claw No.6
(09957-04010) Attachment
(09958-04011) Holder
J-i.
&r*09950-50012 Puller C Set No. 3 clutch hub assembly
(09954-05030) Claw No.3
09950-60010 Replacer Set
(09951-00180) Replacer 18 Transmission case bushing
(09951-00350) Replacer 35 Differential tapered roller bearing
PP-41PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
(09951-00360) Replacer36 Input shaft front oil seal
(09951-00400) Replacer40 Input shaft front bearing
(09951-00560) Replacer56 Output shaft front bearing
09950-60020 Replacer Set No.2
(09951-00680) Replacer 68 Differential tapered roller bearingouter race (Transaxle case side)
(09951-00710) Replacer 71 Differential tapered roller bearingouter race (transmission case side)
09950-70010 Handle Set
(09951-07100) Handle 100
(09951-07150) Handle 150
PP-42PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09025-00010 Torque Wrench (30 kgf-cm) Differential preload
09031-00030 Pin Punch.
09040-00011 Hexagon Wrench Set.
09082-00040 TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
09090-04020 Engine Sling Device
09905-00012 Snap Ring No.1 Expander.
09905-00013 Snap Ring Pliers.
PP-43PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
EQUIPMENTDial indicator with magnetic base
Feeler gauge
Micrometer
Torque wrench
Magnetic finger
Wooden block or similar object
PP-44PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
PPOSK-02
LUBRICANTItem
Manual transaxle oil
(w/ Differential oil)
Capacity
2.3 liters (2.4 US qts, 2.0 Imp. qts)
Classification
API GL-4 or GL-5SAE75W-90
PP-45PREPARATION - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
PP2E4-01
SSM (Special Service Materials)08826-00090 Seal Packing 1 281 ,
THREE BOND 1281 or equivalent(FIPG)
08833-00080 Adhesive 1344THREE BOND 1344LOCTITE 242 or equivalent
Transmission case x Transaxle caseTransmission case x Transmissioncase cover
PP-46PREPARATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)SST (Special Service Tools)
09308-00010 Oil Seal Puller Side gear shaft oil seal
09223-00010 Cover & Seal Replacer
09350-32014 TOYOTA Automatic TransmissionTool Set
(09351-32010) One-way Clutch Test Tool
(09351-32020) Stator Stopper
(09351-32150) Oil Seal Replacer
09950-70010 Handle Set
(09951-O7150) Handle 150
09992-00095 Automatic Transmission OilPressure Gauge Set
Line pressure
(09992-00231) Adaptor C Line pressure
(09992-00271) Gauge Assy Line pressure
PP-47PREPARATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
PP2W-03
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09082-00040 TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
@i 09090-04020 Engine Sling Device
i tf§
PP-48PREPARATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
EQUIPMENTStraight edge
Vernier calipers
Dial indicator or dial indicator with magnetic base
Hexagon wrench (10 mm)
Torque wrench
OBDII scan tool
Torque converter clutch
Torque converter clutch
Drive plate
PP-49PREPARATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
PP2CU-(B
LUBRICANTItem
Automatic transaxle fluid
Dry fillDrain and refill
Capacity
7.6 liters (8.0 US qts, 6.7 Imp.qts)
4.1 liters (4.3 US qts, 3.6 Imp.qts)
Classification
ATF Type T-IV or equivalent
PP-50PREPARATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
PP26M-01
SSM (Special Service Materials)08833-00080 Adhesive 1344
THREE BOND 1344LOCTITE 242 Of equivalent
PP-51PREPARATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341 E)SST (Special Service Tools)
09308-O0010 Oil Seal Puller
^ >. 09223-00010 Cover & Seal Replacer
fC^^f^S 09350-32014 TOYOTA Automatic Transmission
•s^BSlfiJf*' Tool Set
^
(09351-32010) One-way Clutch Test Tool
^==^2^ (09351-32020) Stator Stopper
09992-00095 Automatic Transmission OilPressure Gauge Set
(09992-00231) Adaptor C
(09992-00271) Gauge Assy
Side gear shaft oil seal
Line pressure
Line pressure
Line pressure
PP-52PREPARATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
PP2E6-OI
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09082-00040 TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
i@ 09090-04020 Engine Sling Device
$ ^^0
PP-53PREPARATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
EQUIPMENTStraight edge
Vernier calipers
Dial indicator or dial indicator with magnetic base
Hexagon wrench (10 mm)
Torque wrench
OBOII scan tool
Punch
Torque converter clutch
Torque converter clutch
Drive plate
PP-54PREPARATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
PP2E8-01
LUBRICANTItem
Automatic transaxle fluid
Dry fill
Drain and refill
Capacity
6.9 liters (7.3 US qts, 6.0 lmp.qts)2.9 liters (3.1 US qts, 2.6 lmp.qts)
Classification
ATF Type T-IV or equivalent
PP-55PREPARATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE QJ341E)
SSM (Special Service Materials)08833-00080 Adhesive 1344
THREE BOND 1344LOCTITE 242 or equivalent
PP-56PREPARATION - SUSPENSION AND AXLE
SUSPENSION AND AXLESST (Special Service Tools)
09214—76011 Crankshaft Pulley Replacer Rear axle
09240-00020 Wire Gauge Set Front drive shaft
09506-35010 Differential Drive Pinion RearBearing Replacer
Front drive shaft
09520-00031 Rear Axle Shaft Puller
(09520-00040) Shocker Front axle
Rear axle
(09521-00010) Attachment Front axle
(09521-00020) Rod with Grip Front axle
Rear axle
09520-01010 Drive Shaft Remover Attachment Front drive shaft
09520-24010 Differential Side Gear ShaftPuller
Front drive shaft
(09520-32040) Shocker Set
09521-24010 Drive Shaft Boot Clamping Tool Front drive shaft
09527-17011 Rear Axle Shaft Bearing Remover Front axle
PREPARATION - SUSPENSION AND AXLEPP-57
09555-55010 Differential Drive PinionBearing Replacer
Front axle
09608-16042 Front Hub Bearing Adjusting Tool Front drive shaft
(09608-02021) Bolt & Nut
(09608-02041) Retainer
09608-32010 Steering Knuckle Oil SealReplacer
Front axle
09610-20012 Pitman Arm Puller Front axleFront drive shaftFront suspension
09628-10011 Ball Joint Puller Front axleRear axle
09628-62011 Ball Joint Puller Front axleFront suspension
09710-30021 Suspension Bushing Tool Set Front drive shaft
(09710-03141) Bushing Remover Base
09727-30021 Coil Spring Compressor Front suspensionRear suspension
(09727-00010) Bolt Set
(09727-00021) Arm Set
PP-58PREPARATION - SUSPENSION AND AXLE
(09727-00031) Compressor
09729-22031 Front Spring Upper Seat Holder Front suspension
09930-00010 Drive Shaft Nut Chisel Front axleFront drive shaft
09950-00020 Bearing Remover Front drive shaftRear axle
09950-60010 ReplacerSet
(09951-00380) Replacer38 Front axle
(09951-00550) Replacer 55 Front axle
(09951-00650) Replacer 65 Front axleFront drive shaft
09950-60020 Replacer Set No.2 Front axle
(09951-00730) Replacer 73
09950-70010 Handle Set Front axleFront drive shaft
(09951-07150) Handle 150
PREPARATION - SUSPENSION AND AXLEPP-59
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09025-00010 Torque Wrench (30 kgf-cm)
09042-00010 Torx Socket T30 .
09090-04020 Engine Sling Device
09905-00012 Snap Ring No.1 Expander.
09905-00013 Snap Ring Pliers .
PP-60
woax-oz
EQUIPMENTDial indicator with magnetic base
Drill
Torque wrench
PP-61PREPARATION - SUSPENSION AND AXLE
LUBRICANTDrive shaft joint grease
1ZZ-FE(A/T):
Outboard side Color= Yellow ocherInboard side Color= Yellow ocher
1ZZ-FE (MfT) and 2ZZ-GE:Outboard side Color=Black
Inboard side Color=Gray
Capacity
110 -120 9 (3.9- 4.2 oz.)180-190g(6.3-6.7oz.)
115- 135 g (4.1 -4.8oz.)
100-120g(3.5-4.2oz.)
Application
PP-62PREPARATION - BRAKE
BRAKESST (Special Service Tools)
09023-00100 Union Nut Wrench 10 mm
09214-76011 Crankshaft Pulley Replacer
09520-00031 Rear Axle Shaft Puller
(09520-00040) Shocker
(09521-00020) Rod with Grip
09950-00020 Bearing Remover
09703-30010 Brake Shoe Return Spring Tool
09709-29018 LSPV Gauge Set
09718-00010 Shoe Hold Down Spring Driver
09751-36011 Brake Line Union Nut 10x12 mmWrench
09843-18040 Diagnosis Check Wire No.2
09990-00150 ABS Actuator Checker andSub-harness
PP-63PREPARATION - BRAKE
<y._ 09990-00250
^^^=^ 09990-00300
^*33 09990-00360
ABS Actuator Checker Sub-harness•G-
ABS Actuator Checker Sub-harnessT
ABS Actuator Checker Sub-harnessT."
PP-64PREPARATION - BRAKE
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09082-00040 TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
09905-00013 Snap Ring Pliers . Master cylinder
PP-65PREPARATION - BRAKE
EQUIPMENTTorque wrench
Micrometer
Dial indicator
Vernier calipers
Brake drum gauge
Brake disc
Brake disc
Brake disc
PP-66PREPARATION - BRAKE
PPtGF-02
LUBRICANTItem
Brake fluid
Capacity
-
Classification
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
PREPARATION - STEERINGPP-67
STEERINGSST (Special Service Tools)
09608-04031 Front Hub Inner Bearing ConeReplacer
Tilt steering column
09612-00012 Rack & Pinion Steering RackHousing Stand
PS gear
09612-20010 Power Steering Oil Seal Puller PS gear
09612-22011 Tilt Handle Bearing Replacer PS gear
09616-00010 Steering Worm Bearing AdjustingSocket
PS gear
09617-35020 Power Steering Ring Nut Wrench PS gear
09631-12071 Steering Rack Oil Seal Test Tool PS gear
Cd
09631-20051 Steering Rack Cover "C* PS gear
09631-20081 Seal Ring Tool PS gear
09631-22020 Power Steering Hose Nut14x17 mm Wrench Set
PS vane pumpPS gear
09633-00020 Power Steering Hose Nut Wrench PS gear
&fir
&
09640-10010 Power Steering Pressure GaugeSet
Power steering fluid
PP-68PREPARATION - STEERING
(09641-01010) Gauge Assy
(09641-01030) Attachment B
(09641-01060) Attachment E
09922-10010 Variable Open Wrench PS gear
09950-50012 Puller C Set Tilt steering column
(09951-05010) HangeMSO
(09952-05010) Slide Arm
(09953-05020) Center Bolt 150
(09954-05020) Claw No.2
09950-60010 ReplacerSet
(09951-00210) Replacer2l PS gear
(09951-00240) Replacer 24 PS gear
(09951-00280) Replacer 28 PS vane pumpPS gear
PREPARATION - STEERINGPP-69
(09951-00340) Replacer 34 PS gear
(09951-00350) Replacer 35 PS gear
(09951-00400) Replacer 40 PS gear
(09952-06010) Adapter PS gear
09950-70010 Handle Set
(09951-07100) Handle 100 PS vane pumpPS gear
(09951-07150) Handle 150 PS gear
(09951-07200) Handle 200 PS gear
(09951-07360) Handle 360 PS gear
PP-70PREPARATION - STEERING
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09025-00010 Torque Wrench (30 kgf-cm) PS vane pump
PS gear
09042-00010 Torx Socket T30. Tilt steering column
09904-00010 Expander Set.
(09904-00050) No. 4 Claw
09905-00012 Snap Ring No.1 Expander.
09905-00013 Snap Ring Pliers.
PP-71PREPARATION - STEERING
EQUIPMENTCaliper gauge
Vernier Calipers
Dial incficator
Feeler gauge
Micrometer
Torque wrench
PS vane pump
PS vane pump
PS gear
PS vane pump
PS vane pump
PP-72PREPARATION - STEERING
WOJ&-02
LUBRICANTItem
Power steering fluid
Total
Capacity
1 .0 liters (1 .1 US qts, 0.9 lmp.qts)
Classification
ATF DEXRON® II or III
PP-73PREPARATION - STEERING
PP1W4-01
SSM (Special Service Materials)08833-00080 Adhesive 1344
THREE BOND 1344LOCTITE 242 or equivalent
PS gear
PP-74PREPARATION - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMSST (Special Service Tools)
09082-00700 SRS Airbag Deployment Too)
09082-00750 Airbag Deployment WireSub-harness No.3
09082-00760 Airbag Deployment WireSub-harness No.4
09843-18020 Diagnosis Check Wire
PP-75PREPARATION - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09042-00020 Tone Socket T40 . Airbag sensor assembly
09082-00050 TOYOTA Electrical Tester Set.
09082-00040 TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
(09083-00150) Test Lead Set
PP-76PREPARATION - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
EQUIPMENTTorque wrench
Bolt: Length: 35 mm (1 .38 in.) Pitch: 1 .0 mm (0.039 in.)
Diam.: 6.0 mm (0.236 in.)
Tire Width: 185 mm (7.28 in.) Inner diam.: 360mm (14.17 in.)
Tire with disc wheel Width: 1 85 mm (7.28 in.)
Inner diam.: 360 mm (14.17 in.)
Vinyl bag
Airbag disposal
Airbag disposal
Airbag disposal
Airbag disposal
PP-77PREPARATION - BODY ELECTRICAL
BODY ELECTRICALSST (Special Service Tools)
09843-18020 Diagnosis Check Wire
PP-78PREPARATION - BODY ELECTRICAL
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09082-00040 TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
09041-00030 Tone Driver T30. For removing and installingsteering wheel pad
09042-00010 Tone Socket T30. For removing and installingsteering wheel pad
PREPARATION - BODY ELECTRICALPP-79
EQUIPMENTVoltmeter
Ammeter
Ohmmeter
Test lead
Syphon
Bulb (3.4 W)
Bulb (21 W)
Dry cell battery
Torque wrench
Masking tape
Tinfoil
Brake fluid level warning switch
Fuel sender gauge
Turn signal flasher relay
Fuel sender gauge
Rear window defogger wire
Rear window defogger wire
PP-80PREPARATION - BODY
BODYSST (Special Service Tools)
09082-00700 SRS Airbag Deployment Tool
09082-00740 Airbag Deployment WireSub-harness No.2
09812-00010 Door Hinge Set Bolt Wrench
PP-81PREPARATION - BODY
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09050-20010 Air Riveter.
(09050-02010) Dust Cap.
(09050-02030) Nose Piece No.2.
09060-60350 Revet Cutter.
PP-82PREPARATION - BODY
EQUIPMENTClip remover
Torque wrench
Hog ring pliers
Tape
Adhesive tape
Double - stick tape
Adhesive
Cleaner
Shop rag
Knife
Heat light
Piano wire
Sealer gun
Brush
Putty spatula
Wooden block or similar object
Plastic sheet
Rope (no projections, difficult to break)
Tire Width: 185 mm (7.28 in.)Inner diam: 360 mm (14.17 in.)
Tire with disc wheel Width: 185 mm (7.28 in.)
Inner diam 360 mm (14.17 in.)
Vinyl bag
To avoid surface damage
To avoid surface damage
Regulator handle
Moulding
Moulding
Windshield
For tying both piano wire ends
To avoid surface damage
Seat belt pretenstoner disposal
Seat belt pretenstoner disposal
Seat belt pretinsioner disposal
Seat belt pretensioner disposal
PP-83PREPARATION - BODY
LUBRICANTItem
MP grease
Capacity
-
Classification
-
PP-84PREPARATION - BODY
SSM (Special Service Materials)08833-00070 Adhesive 1324,
THREE BOND 1324 or equivalent
08833-00030 Three cement black or equivalent
08850-00801 Windshield Glass Adhesive Setor equivalent
PP-85PREPARATION - AIR CONDITIONING
AIR CONDITIONINGSST (Special Service Tools)
07110-58060 Air Conditioner Service Tool Set
(07117-78050) Refrigerant Charging Gauge
(07117-88060) Refrigerant Charging Hose Discharge (Red)
(07117-88070) Refrigerant Charging Hose Suction (Blue)
(07117-88080) Refrigerant Charging Hose Utility (Green)
(07117-58060) Refrigerant Drain Service Valve
(07117-58080) Quick Disconnect Adapter Discharge (diam. 16 mm)
(07117-58090) Quick Disconnect Adapter Suction (diam. 13 mm)
(07117-58070) T-Joint
07116-38360 Gas Leak Detector Assembly
07112-76060 Magnetic Clutch Stopper
07112-66040 Magnetic Clutch Remover
PP-86PREPARATION - AIR CONDITIONING
07114-84020 Snap Ring Pliers
07114-84010 Snap Ring Pliers
09870-00015 A/C Quick Joint Puller No.1 Suction tube
09870-00025 A/C Quick Joint Puller No.2 Liquid tube
PP-87PREPARATION - AIR CONDITIONING
RECOMMENDED TOOLS09082-00040 TOYOTA Electrical Tester.
09216-00021 Belt Tension Gauge.
09216-00030 Belt Tension Gauge Cable .
PP-88PREPARATION - AIR CONDITIONING
EQUIPMENTVoltmeter
Ammeter
Ohmmeter
Test lead
Thermometer
Torque wrench
Dial indicator
Plastic hammer
Thermistor, ECT switch
Magnetic clutch
Magnetic clutch
PP-89PREPARATION - AIR CONDITIONING
LUBRICANTItem
Compressor oil
When replacing condenser
When replacing evaporator
When replacing compressor
Capacity
-
40cc(1.4fl.oz.)
40cc(1.4fl.oz.)
120cc{4.1fl.oz.)
Classification
ND-OIL 8 or equivalent
-MEMO-
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - ENGINE MECHANICALSS-11
Connecting rod
1ZZ-FE:
Thrust clearance STDMaximum
Connecting rod thickness
Connecting rod bearing center wall thickness
Reference Mark 1Mark 2MarkS
Connecting rod oil clearance STDMaximum
Rod out-of-alignment Maximum per/100 mm (3.94 in.)
Rod twist Maximum per/100 mm (3.94 in.)Bushing inside diameter
Piston pin diameter
Bushing oil clearance STOMaximum
Connecting rod bolt diameterat tension portion STD
Minimum
2ZZ-GE:
Thrust clearance STDMaximum
Connecting rod thickness
Connecting rod bearing center wall thickness
Reference Mark 1Mark2
Marks
Connecting rod oil clearance STDMaximum
Rod out-of-alignment Maximum per/100 mm (3.94 in.)
Rod twist Maximum per/100 mm (3.94 in.)
Bushing inside diameter Connecting rodPiston
Piston pin diameter
Bushing oil clearance STD Piston x Piston pinPiston pin x Connecting rod
Maximum
Connecting rod bolt diameterat tension portion STD
Minimum
0.160 - 0.342 mm (0.0063 - 0.0135 in.)
0.342 mm (0.0135 in.)
19.788 -19.840 mm (0.7791 - 0.7811 in.)
1.486 -1.490 mm (0.0585 - 0.0587 in.)
1.490 -1.494 mm (0.0587 - 0.0588 in.)1.494 - 1.498 mm (0.0588 - 0.0590 in.)0.028 - 0.060 mm (0.0011 - 0.0024 in.)0.08 mm (0.0031 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
20.012-20.021 mm (0.7879 - 0.7882 in.)
20.004 - 20.013 mm (0.7876 - 0.7879 in.)
0.005 - 0.011 mm (0.0002 - 0.0004 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
6.6 - 6.7 mm (0.260 - 0.264 in.)
6.4 mm (0.252 in.)
0.160 - 0.342 mm (0.0063 - 0.0135 in.)0.342 mm (0.0135 in.)
19.788 -19.840 mm (0.7791 - 0.7811 in.)
1.482 -1.486 mm (0.0583 - 0.0585 in.)1.486 -1.490 mm (0.0585 - 0.0587 in.)1.490 -1.494 mm (0.0587 - 0.0588 in.)
0.028 - 0.052 mm (0.0011 - 0.0020 in.)0.08 mm (0.0031 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
20.011 - 20.023 mm (0.7878 - 0.7883 in.)
20.013 - 20.025 mm (0.7879 - 0.7884 in.)20.004 - 20.016 mm (0.7876 - 0.7880 in.)
0.005 - 0.013 mm (0.0002 - 0.0005 in.)0.005 - 0.009 mm (0.0002 - 0.0004 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
6.6 - 6.7 mm (0.260 - 0.264 in.)
6.4 mm (0.252 in.)
SS-12SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE MECHANICAL
Crankshaft
1ZZ-FE:Thrust clearance
Thrust washer thicknessMain journal oil clearance
Main journal diameter
Main bearing center wall thicknessReference
Crank pin diameterCircle runoutMain journal taper and out-of roundCrank pin taper and out-of round22Z-GE:Thrust clearance
Thrust washer thicknessMain journal oil clearance
Main journal diameter
Main bearing center wall thicknessReference
Crank pin diameterCircle runoutMain journal taper and out-of roundCrank pin taper and out-of round
STDMaximum
STDMaximum
MarkOMarklMark 2Mark3Mark 4Marks
MarklMark 2MarksMark 4
MaximumMaximumMaximum
STDMaximum
STDMaximum
MarkOMarklMark 2MarkSMark 4MarkS
MarklMark2MarkSMark 4Mark5
MaximumMaximumMaximum
0.04-0.24 mm (0.0016-0.0094 in.)0.30 mm (0.0118 in.)2.430 - 2.480 mm (0.0957 - 0.0976 in.)0.015-0.032 mm (0.0006 - 0.0013 in.)0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)47.998 - 48.000 mm (1.8897 -1.8898 in.)47.996 - 47.998 mm (1.8896 - 1.8897 in.)47.994 - 47.996 mm (1.8895 -1.8896 in.)47.992-47.994 mm (1.8894- 1.8895 in.)47.990 - 47.992 mm (1.8893 -1.8894 in.)47.988-47.990 mm (1.8892-1.8893 in.)
1.993 - 1.996 mm (0.0785 - 0.0786 in.)1.996 -1.999 mm (0.0786 - 0.0787 in.)1.999 - 2.002 mm (0.0787 - 0.0788 in.)2.002 - 2.005 mm (0.0788 - 0.0789 in.)43.992 - 44.000 mm (1.7320 -1.7323 in.)0.03 mm (0.0012 in.)0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)
0.04-0.24 mm (0.0016-0.0094 in.)0.30 mm (0.0118 in.)2.430 - 2.480 mm (0.0957 - 0.0976 in.)0.016 - 0.032 mm (0.0006 - 0.0013 in.)0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)47.998 - 48.000 mm (1.8897-1.8898 in.)47.996 - 47.998 mm (1.8896 -1.8897 in.)47.994 - 47.996 mm (1.8895 - 1.8896 in.)
47.992 - 47.994 mm (1.8894 -1.8895 in.)47.990 - 47.992 mm (1.8893 -1.8894 in.)47.988 - 47.990 mm (1.8892 -1.8893 in.)
1.989 - 1.992 mm (0.0783 - 0.0784 in.)1.992- 1.995 mm (0.0784-0.0785 in.)1.995 T 1.998 mm (0.0785 - 0.0787 in.)1.998 - 2.001 mm (0.0787 - 0.0788 in.)2.001 - 2.004 mm (0.0788 - 0.0789 in.)44.992 - 45.000 mm (1.7713 -1.7717 in.)0.03 mm (0.0012 in.)0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)
SS-13SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - ENGINE MECHANICAL
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
Camshaft timing sprocket x Camshaft 1ZZ-FE
2ZZ-GE
Valve timing controller assembly x Camshaft 1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Chain vibration damper x Cylinder block 1 ZZ-FE
2ZZ-GE
Chain tensioner slipper x Cylinder block 1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Timing chain cover
1 ZZ-FE: (See page EM-25) 10mm head bolt A
10 mm head bolt C1 0 mm head bolt others
12 mm head bolt D
Stud (E8)2ZZ-GE: (See page EM-25) Bolt A
BoltB
BoltC
BoltD
Stud (E8)
RH engine mounting bracket x Timing chain cover 1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Driver belt tensioner x Timing chain cover Bolt1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-QE
Nut
Crankshaft position sensor x Timing chain cover
Crankshaft pulley x Crankshaft 1 ZZ-FE
2ZZ-GE
Chain tensioner x Timing chain cover
Cylinder head cover x Cylinder head 1 ZZ-FE w/ Washer
w/o Washer
2ZZ-GE
No. 1 ventilation pipe x Cylinder head cover
No. 1 ventilation pipe x Intake manifold 2ZZ-GE
RH engine mounting insulator
PS pump x Engine
Camshaft bearing cap x Cylinder head 1 ZZ-FE No. 1
No. 32ZZ-GE
Rocker No. 1 and No. 2 shaft x Cylinder head 2ZZ-GE
Oil control valve housing x Cylinder head 2ZZ-GE
Oil pressure switch x Cylinder head 2ZZ-GE
Oil control valve filter x Cylinder head 2ZZ-GE
Cylinder head x Cylinder block 1 ZZ-FE 1st
2nd2ZZ-GE 1st
2nd
Water bypass pipe x Cylinder head
N-m
4554
4554
11
20.5
18.520.5
13911
18.59.321119.09.09.3
4749
6910029
9.0
138120
9.0
9.011
10
10
25
52
36
2313
18.5
7.5
9.0
13
29
49Turn 90°
35Turn 180°
9.0
kgf-cm
460551
460551
113209
189209
1339211318995214113929295
479500
7041,020296
92
1,4091,200
92
92
113100
100
255
530
370
235133189
76
92
130
300
500Turn 90°
375Turn 180°
92
ft-lbf
3340
3340
815
1415
1080 in.-lbf
814
82 in.-lbf
158
80 in.-lbf
80 in.-lbf
82 in.-lbf
3536
517421
80 in.-lbf .
10287
80 in.-lbf
80 in.-lbf
87
7
18
38
27
171014
66 in.-lbf
80
9
22
36Turn 90°
26Turn 180°
80 in.-lbf
SS-14SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - ENGINE MECHANICAL
Intake manifold x Cylinder head1ZZ-FE:2ZZ-GE: (See page EM-65) Bolt A
BoltB
Bolt others
Intake manifold stay 2ZZ-GE
Exhaust manifold x Cylinder head 1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Lower heat insulator x Exhaust manifold 1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Upper heat insulator x Exhaust manifold 1ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Exhaust manifold stay 1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Engine hanger x Cylinder head
LH engine mounting
Rear engine mounting bracket x Transaxle
Rear engine mounting Through bolt
Suspension member Bolt A
(See page EM-60) Bolt B
BoltC
BoltD
BoltENut
PS gear x Suspension member
Exhaust pipe
Clutch release cylinder x Transaxle
Clutch release cylinder bracket Bolt ABoltB
A/C Compressor x Engine
ECM box stay NutBolt
ECM box
ECM cover
Air cleaner case
Bearing cap sub-assembly x Cylinder block 12 pointed head 1 st
2nd3rd4th
Hexagon head 1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Screw plug x Bearing cap sub-assembly 2ZZ-GE
Connecting rod cap 1 ZZ-FE 1 st2nd
2ZZ-GE1st
2nd
Oil strainer
Oil pan baffle 2ZZ-GE
Oil pan
Oil filter union
18.5274634
24
3750
1220
1220
4950
38
80
64
87
52521131573952
45
43
12
124.9
25
1218
6.9
6.9
5.0
2244
Turn 45°
Turn 45'18.518
43
20Turn 90'
30Turn 90°
9.0
9.0
9.0
30
189275469347
245
377510
123204
123204
500510
388
816
653
887
530530
1,1521,600400530
460
440
120
12050
255
120185
70
70
51
225449
Turn 45°
Turn 45'189185
438
204Turn 90°
306Turn 90°
92
92
92
306
14203425
18
2737
915
915
3737
28
59
47
64
3232831162932
33
32
9
943 in.-tbf
18
913
61 in.-lbf
61 in.-lbf
44 in.-lbf
1632
Turn 45°
Turn 45°1413
32
15Turn 90°
22
Turn 90'
80 in.-lbf
80 in.-lbf
80 in.-lbf
21
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - ENGINE MECHANICALSS-15
Engine coolant drain union 1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Knock sensor
Ventilation case 2ZZ-GE
Water bypass pipe x Cylinder block 1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-QE
BoltNut
Dipstick guide 1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Flywheel 1st2nd
Drive plate
2025
39
8.5
9.0
8.510
1125
49Turn 90°
88
200255
400
87
92
87100
113255
500Turn 90°
897
1418
29
75 in.-lbf
80 in.-lbf
75 in.-lbf7
818
36Turn 90°
65
SS-16SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - EMISSION CONTROL
EMISSION CONTROLTORQUE SPECIFICATION
Part tightened
Charcoal canister x Body
N-m
18
kgf-cm
184
ft-lbf
13
SS-17SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - SFI
SFISERVICE DATAFuel pressureregulator
Fuel pump
Injector
Mass air flow me-
ter
Throttle
position
sensor
Camshaft timing
oil control valve
VSV (CCV)
VSV (Pressureswitching valve)
VSV (EVAP)
VSV (Intake air
control valve)
ECT sensor
Vapor pressuresensor
Heated oxygensensor
Fuel cut rpm
Fuel pressure
Resistance
ResistanceInjection volumeDifference between each cylinder
Fuel leakage
Resistance
Clearance between stop screw and lever0 mm (0 in.)Throttle valve fully open
Resistance
Resistance
Resistance
Resistance
Resistance
Resistance
Power source voltage
Remove fuel tank cap
at 20°C (68°F)
at20°C(68°F)
at-20'CHTF)
at 20'C (68°F)at 60°C (140°F)
VTA-E2
VTA-E2VC-E2
at 20°C (68°F)
at20°C(68°F)
at20'C(68°F)
at120°C(248°F)
at20'C(68*F)
at20"C(68"F)
at-20'C(-4*F)atO'C(32"F)
at 20°C (68°F)at40°C(104°F)at60'C(140°F)
at80°C(176°F)
Terminal 2 — 3
Heater coil resistance
Fuel return rpm
301 - 347 kPa (3.1 - 3.5 kgf/cm2, 44 - 50 psi)
0.2 -3.0 ft
13.4- 14.2 ft
47-58 cm3 (2.7 - 3.3 cu in.) per 1 5 seconds10 cm3 (0.6 cu in.) or less
One drop or less per 1 2 minutes
13.6- 18.4 Wi2.21- 2.69 kii0.49- 0.67 kQ
0.2 -5.7 kii2.0-10.2kfl
2.5-5.9kfl
6.9- 7.9 ii
24-30ft
37-44O
51 ±62 ft
27 -33 ft
37-44U
10-20 kft
4-7kft
2-3kft0.9-1.3 kft0.4 -0.7 kft
0.2 -0.4 kft
4.5 -5.5V
3.0 -3.6V
11-16ft
1,500 rpm
SS-18SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - SFI
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
Delivery pipe x Cylinder head 1 ZZ-F E2ZZ-GE
Fuel pump x Fuel tank
Fuel tank band x Body
Throttle body x Intake manifold 1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Camshaft timing oil control valve x Cylinder head 1 ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Knock sensor 1 x Cylinder block
Oxygen sensor x Front exhaust pipe
N-m
1929
4.0
39
2122
7.58.5
44
44
kgf-cm
190290
40
400
210220
8087
450
450
ft-lbf
1421
35 in.-lbf
29
1516
66 in.-lbf
75 in.-lbf
33
33
SS-19SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - COOLING
COOLINGSERVICE DATA
Thermostat
Radiator cap
Electriccooling fan
Valve opening temperatureValve lift at 90°C (194°F)
Relief valve opening pressure STD
Minimum
Rotating amperage
80.0 -84.0°C (176- 183°F)10 mm (0.39 in.)
93 - 1 23 kPa (0.95 - 1 .25 kgf/cm2, 1 3.5 - 1 7.8 psi)
79 kPa (0.8 kgf/cm2, 11. 5 psi)
5.2 -8.2 A
SS-20SERVICE SPECIRCATIONS - COOLING
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
Drain plug x Radiator
Water pump x Timing chain cover 1 ZZ-f E
(See page CO-7) Bolt ABoltB
2ZZ-GE
Water pump pulley x Water pump
Water inlet x Cylinder block
Electric cooling fan x Radiator
Engine coolant reservoir x Radiator upper support
Fan motor x Fan shroud
Fan x Fan motor
N-m
12.7
9.0119.0
15
10
6.0
5.0
2.55
6.18
kgf-cm
130
9211392
153
100
60
51
26
63
ft-lbf
9
80 in.-lbf8
80 in.-lbf
11
7
53 in.-lbf
44 in.-lbf
23 in.-lbf
55 in.-lbf
SS-21SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - LUBRICATION
LUBRICATIONSERVICE DATA
Oil pressure
Oil pump
1ZZ-FE
at idle speed
at 3,000 rpm2ZZ-GE
at idle speed
Oil control valve housing 2ZZ-GE
at idle speed
Side clearance STDMaximum
Tip clearance STDMaximum
Body clearance STDMaximum
29 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 43 psi) or more
294-539 kPa (3.0 - 5.5 kgf/cm2, 43-78 psi)
39.2 kPa (0.4 kgf/cm2, 5.7 psi) or more
39.2 kPa (0.4 kgf/cm2, 5.7 psi) or more
0.025 - 0.075 mm (0.001 0 - 0.0030 in.)0.1 5 mm (0.0059 in.)
0.060-0.180 mm (0.0024-0.0071 in.)0.35 mm (0.01 38 in.)0.100-0.180 mm (0.0039-0.0071 in.)0.30 mm (0.01 18 in.)
SS-22SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - LUBRICATION
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
Oil pressure switch x Cylinder block
Oil pressure switch x Oil control valve housing
Drain plug x Oil pan
Oil pump body cover x Oil pump body
Plug x Oil pump 1ZZ-FE2ZZ-GE
Oil pump x Cylinder block
Oil nozzle x Cylinder block
N-m
13
13
37
10.5
3749
9.0
9.0
kgf-cm
130
130
378
107
375500
92
92
ft-lbl
9
9
27
8
2736
80 in.-lbf
80 in.-lbf
SS-23SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - IGNITION
IGNITIONSERVICE DATASparkplug
Camshatt position-
sensor
Crankshattposition sensor
Recommended spark plug
Resistance
Resistance
1ZZ-FE
DENSO
NGK2ZZ-GE
DENSONGK
at coldat hot
at coldat hot
SK16R11IFR5A11
SK20R11IFR6A11
835-1,4000
1,060-1,6450
1,630-2,74002,065-3,2250
SS-24SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - IGNITION
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
Spark plug x Cylinder head
Ignition coil (w/ Igniter) x Cylinder head cover
Camshaft position sensor x Cylinder head
Crankshaft position sensor x Timing chain cover
N-m
18
7.5
8.8
8.8
kgf-crh
184
77
90
90
ft-lbf
13
66 in.-lbf
78in.-lbf
78 in.-lbf
SS-25SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - STARTING
STARTINGSERVICE DATA
Starter
Rated voltage and output power
No-load characteristics
Brush length
Spring installed load
Commutator
Diameter
Undercut depth
Circle runoutMagnetic switch
Contact plate for wear
Current
rpmSTD
MinimumSTD
1.4KW1.2kW
Minimum
1.4kW1.2kW
STDMinimum
STDMinimumMaximum
Maximum
12V 1.4kW12V 1.2kW90Aorlessat11.5V
3,000 rpm or more15.5 mm (0.610 in.)
10.0 mm (0.394 in.)
1 7.6 - 23.5 N (1 .8 - 2.4 kgf, 4.0 - 5.3 Ibf)13.7- 19.6 N (1.4 -2.0 kgf, 3.1
1 1. 8 N (1.2 kgf ,2.6 Ibf)8.8 N (0.9 kgf, 2.0 Ibf)
30.0 mm (1.181 in.)29.0 mm (1.412 in.)
0.6 mm (0.024 in.)
0.2 mm (0.008 in.)0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
0.9 mm (0.035 in.)
-4.6 Ibf)
SS-26SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - STARTING
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
Starter x Transaxle
End cover x Brush holder
Starter housing x Magnetic switch
End cover x Starter housing
Lead wire x Terminal C of starter
Terminal nut x Terminal C of starter, Terminal 30 of starter
Magnetic switch end cover x Magnetic switch
N-m
37
3.8
9.3
9.3
5.9
17
2.5
kgf-cm
380
39
95
95
60
173
26
ft-tof
28
34in.-lbf
82 in.-lbf
82in.-lbf
52 in.-lbf
12
23 hvlbf
SS-27SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - CHARGING
CHARGINGSERVICE DATA
Battery
Generator
Voltageregulator
VoltageSpecific gravity
Rated outputRotor coil resistance
Slip ring diameter
Brush exposed length
at20°C(68°F)at20°C(68°F)
M/TA/T
STDMinimum
STDMinimum
Regulating voltage
12.7-12.9 V1 .25 - 1 .29
12V 80 A2.7- 3.1 ft
2.1 -2.5Q1 4.2 - 1 4.4 mm (0.559 - 0.567 in.)
12.8 mm (0.504 in.)10.5 mm (0.413 in.)1 .5 mm (0.059 in.)
13.2 -14.8V
SS-28SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - CHARGING
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
Bearing retainer x Drive end frame
Rectifier end frame x Drive end frame Nut ANutB
Generator pulley x Rotor
Rectifier end frame x Brush holder, Voltage regulator
Rectifier holder x Coil lead on rectifier end frame
Rear end cover x Rectifier holder
Plate terminal x Rectifier holder NutBolt
Terminal insulator x Rectifier holder
Generator x RH engine mount bracket
Generator x Cylinder block 1 ZZ-FE
2ZZ-GE
Generator x Generator bracket
N-m
3.0
4.55.4
111
2.0
2.9
4.4
4.4
3.9
4.1
25
54
58
29
kgf-cm
31
4655
1,125
20
30
45
4539
42
20
550
590
295
ft-lbf
27 in.-lbf
40 in.-lbf
48 in.-lbf
81
17in.-lbf
25 in.-lbf
39 in.-lbf
39 in.-lbf35 in.-lbf
36 in.-lbf
18
4043
21
SS-29SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - CLUTCH
CLUTCHSERVICE DATAPedal height from asphalt sheet Standard pedal
Sport pedal
Pedal freeplay
Push rod play at pedal top
Clutch release point from pedal full stroke end position
Slotted spring pin protrusion
Disc rivet head depth
Disc runout
Flywheel runout
Diaphragm spring finger wear
Diaphragm spring finger wear
Diaphragm spring tip non-alignment
Min.
Max.
Max.
Max. depth
Max. width
Max.
1 35.6 - 1 45.6 mm (5.339 - 5.732 in.)136.9 - 146.9 mm (5.390 - 5.783 in.)
1.0-5.0 mm (0.039-0.197 in.)
5.0 -15.0 mm (0.1 97 -0.591 in.)
25 mm (0.98 in.) or more
1 .5 - 2.5 mm (0.059 - 0.098 in.)
0.3 mm (0.01 2 in.)
0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
0.5 mm (0.020 in.)
6.0 mm (0.236 in.)
0.5 mm (0.020 in.)
SS-30SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - CLUTCH
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
Clutch line union
Master cylinder installation nut
Bleeder plug
Release cylinder installation bolt
Clutch line clamp x Clutch line bracket
Flywheel set bolt •
Clutch cover x Rywheel
Release fork support
N-m
15
12
8.4
12
4.9
49
19
37
kgf-cm
155
120
85
120
50
500
195
375
ft-lbf
11
9
74in.-lbf
9
43 in.-lbf
36
14
27
SS-31SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C56)
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C56)SERVICE DATAInput shaft roller bearing journal diameter
Input shaft 3rd gear journal diameter
Input shaft 4th gear journal diameter
Input shaft 5th gear journal diameter
Input shaft runout
Output shaft roller bearing journal diameter
Output shaft 1st gear journal diameter
Output shaft 2nd gear journal diameter
Output shaft runout
Gear thrust clearance 1 st
Gear thrust clearance 2nd
Gear thrust clearance 3rd
Gear thrust clearance 4th
Gear thrust clearance 5th
Gear radial clearance 1 st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th (KOYO made)
Gear radial clearance 1 st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th (NSK made)
No. 3 gear shift fork to No. 3 hub sleeve clearance
No. 2 gear shift fork to No. 2 hub sleeve clearance
No. 1 gear shift fork to reverse gear clearance
Synchronizer ring to gear clearance 1 st, 4th and 5th
Synchronizer ring to gear clearance 3rd
Synchronizer ring to gear clearance 2nd
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
Max.
Max.
Max.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Drive in depth
Input shaft front oil seal
Input shaft front bearing
Transmission case bushing
Transmission case oil seal (Shift and select lever shaft side)
Transmission case oil seal (Differential case side)
Transaxle case oil seal
Select inner lever slotted spring pin
No. 1 shift inner lever slotted spring pin
No. 2 shift inner lever slotted soring pin
24.985 mm (0.9837 in.)
30.985 mm (1.21 99 in.)
28.985 mm (1.1 411 in.)
24.885 mm (0.9797 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012 in.)
32.985 mm (1.2986 in.)
37.985 mm (1.4955 in.)
31 .985 mm (1.2592 in.)
0.03 mm (0.001 2 in.)
0.1 0 - 0.40 mm (0.0039 - 0.01 57 in.)
0.40 mm (0.01 57 in.)
0. 1 0 - 0.55 mm (0.0039 - 0.021 7 in.)
0.55 mm (0.021 7 in.)
0.10-0.35 mm (0.0039 - 0.0138 in.)
0.35 mm (0.01 38 in.)
0.10-0.55 mm (0.0039 - 0.0217 in.)
0.55 mm (0.021 7 in.)
0.10 - 0.57 mm (0.0039 - 0.0224 in.)
0.57 mm (0.0224 in.)
0.01 5 - 0.058 mm (0.0006 - 0.0023 in.)
0.058 mm (0.0023 in.)
0.01 5 - 0.056 mm (0.0006 - 0.0022 in.)
0.056 mm (0.0022 in.)
0.5 mm (0.020 in.)
0.35 mm (0.01 4 in.)
0.35 mm (0.01 4 in.)
0.75 mm (0.0295 in.)
0.65 mm (0.0256 in.)
0.70 mm (0.0276 in.)
1 5.8 ± 0.2 mm (0.622 ± 0.008 in.)
0 - 0.3 mm (0 - 0.01 2 in.)0.80 - 1 .30 mm (0.031 5 - 0.051 2 in.)
10.0 ± 0.3 mm (0.394 ± 0.012 in.)
9.9 ± 0.3 mm (0.390 ± 0.012 in.)
1.9 ± 0.3 mm (0.075 ± 0.012 in.)
0 ± 0.5 mm (0 ± 0.020 in.)
0 ± 0.5 mm (0 ± 0.020 in.)
3.5 ± 0.5 mm (0.138 ± 0.020 in.)
SS-32SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C56)
Input shaft snap ring thicknessNo. 2 clutch hub
Rear radial ball bearing
Output shaft snap ring thickness
No. 1 clutch hub
Front bearing inner race
No. 3 clutch hub
MarkOMarkl
Mark 2
MarksMark 4
Marks
Mark A
MarkB
MarkC
MarkD
MarkE
MarkF
Mark A
MarkBMarkCMarkD
MarkE
MarkF
Mark 7
MarkS
Markl
Mark 2
MarksMark 4
MarkS
Mark 6
Mark AMarkB
MarkC
MarkDMarkEMarkF
MarkG
Differential tapered roller bearing prebad (at starting)(For use with SST)
New bearing
Reused bearing
Differential pinion to side gear backlash
Differential side gear thrust washer thickness
2.30 mm (0.0906 in.)2.36 mm (0.0929 in.)2.42 mm (0,0953 in.)
2.48 mm (0.0976 in.)2.54 mm (0.1 000 in.)2.60 mm (0.1 024 in.)2.29 mm (0.0902 in.)
2.35 mm (0.0925 in.)
2.41 mm (0.0949 in.)
2.47 mm (0.0972 in.)
2.53 mm (0.0996 in.)2.59 mm (0.1 020 in.)
2.50 mm (0.0984 in.)
2.56 mm (0.1 008 in.)£62 mm (0.1 031 in.)2.68 mm (0.1 055 in.)2.74 mm (0.1 079 in.)2.80 mm (0.1 102 in.)1.85 mm (0.0728 in.)1.90 mm (0.0748 in.)
1.95 mm (0.0768 in.)
2.00 mm (0.0787 in.)
2.05 mm (0.0807 in.)2. 10 mm (0.0827 in.)2.1 5 mm (0.0846 in.)
2.20 mm (0.0866 in.)
2.25 mm (0.0886 in.)2.31 mm (0.0909 in.)2.37 mm (0.0933 in.)
2.43 mm (0.0957 in.)
2.49 mm (0.0980 in.)2.55 mm (0.1 004 in.)2.61 mm (0.1 028 in.)
0.8 -1 .6 N-m (8 - 1 6 kgf -cm, 6.9 - 1 3.9 in.-lbf)0.5 -1 .0 N-m (5-10 kgf-cm, 4.3 - 8.7 in.-lof)
0.05 mm - 0.20 mm (0.0020 - 0.0079 in.)
0.95 mm (0.0374 in.)
1.00 mm (0.0394 in.)
1.05 mm (0.041 3 in.)
1.1 Omm (0.0433 in.)1.1 5 mm (0.0453 in.)1.20 mm (0.0472 in.)
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C56)SS-33
Differential tapered roller bearing adjusting shim thicknessMarkAA
MarkBB
MarkCCMark DD
MarkEE
MarkFF
MarkGGMarkHHMarkJJ
WarkKK
MarkLLMark MMMarkNNMarkPP
MarkQQMarkRR
UarkSSMarkTT
MarkUU
2. 10 mm (0.0827 in.)
2. 15 mm (0.0846 in.)
2.20 mm (0.0866 in.)2.25 mm (0.0886 in.)
2.30 mm (0.0906 in.)2.35 mm (0.0925 in.)
2.40 mm (0.0945 in.)2.45 mm (0.0965 in.)2.50 mm (0.0984 in.)
2.55 mm (0.1 004 in.)
2.60 mm (0.1024 in.)2.65 mm (0.1 043 in.)
2.70 mm (0.1 063 in.)
2.75 mm (0.1 083 in.)
2.80 mm (0.1 102 in.)
2.85 mm (0.1 122 in.)
2.90 mm (0.1 142 in.)
2.95 mm (0.1161 in.)
3.00 mm (0.1 181 in.)
SS-34SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C56)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
No. 2 cylinder head cover
Radiator reservoir set bolt
ECM cover x ECM box
ECM box set bolt
Battery carrier x Body > Bolt
Nut
Clutch line set bolt Bolt A
(See page MX-4) Bolt B
Clutch release cylinder x Transaxle
Starter x Transaxle
Transaxle x Engine (From transaxle side)
Transaxle x Engine (From engine side) Bolt A
(See page MX-*) Bolt B
No. 1 and No. 2 engine hangers set bolt
Engine left mounting bracket x Transaxle
Engine left mounting bracket x Engine teft mounting insulator
Oxygen sensor x Front exhaust pipe
Front exhaust pipe
PS gear assembly x Suspension crossmember
Engine rear mounting insulator x Engine rear mounting bracket
Engine rear mounting bracket x Transaxle
Passenger airbag assembly
Airbag sensor assembly x Body
Steering wheel lock nut
Shift lever assembly x Body
Shift cable retainer x Body
Shift and select control cable bracket
Filler and drain plugs
Vehicle speed sensor
Back-up light switch
Control cable bracket x Transaxle case
Control shaft assembly
Selecting bellcrank assembly x Transmission case
Lever lock pin set nut
Transmission case x Transmission case cover
Lock ball assembly (Shift and select lever shaft side)
Control shaft cover x Transmission case
5th driven gear lock nut
No. 1 , No. 2 and No. 3 gear shift forks set bolt
Rear bearing retainer x Transmission case
Reverse idler gear shaft lock bolt
Straight screw plug
Lock ball assembly (Reverse shift fork side)
Transmission case x Transaxle case
N-m
7.0
4.9
6.9
6.9
18
12
12
4.9
12
37
64
47
23
38
60
80
44
43
45
87
64
20
20
34
12
4.9
4.9
39
11
40
25
12
25
12
18
29
20
118
16
27
29
25
39
29
kgf-cm
71
50
70
70
185
120
120
50
120
378
650
480
230
387
610
820
450
440
459
890
650
204
205
350
120
50
50
400
115
410
250
120
250
120
185
300
200
1,200
160
280
300
250
400
300
ft-lbf
62 in.-lbf
43 in.-lbf
61 in.-lbf
61 in.-lbf
13
9
9
43 in.-lbf
9
28
47
35
17
28
44
59
33
32
33
64
47
15
15
25
9
43 in.-lbf
43 in.-lbf
29
8
30
18
9
18
9
13
22
14
87
12
20
22
18
29
22
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (056)SS-35
Oil receiver pipe set bolt
Reverse shift arm bracket x Transaxle case
No. 1 gear shift head set bolt
Output shaft front bearing lock plate set bolt
Transaxle case receiver x Transaxle case
Straight screw plug (Reverse restrict pin)
Differential case x Ring gear
17
17
16
11
11
13
77
175
175
160
115
115
130
790
13
13
12
8
8
9
57
SS-36SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)SERVICE DATAInput shaft roller bearing journal diameter
Input shaft 3rd gear journal diameter
Input shaft 4th gear journal diameter
Input shaft 5th gear journal diameter
Input shaft 6th gear journal diameter
Input shaft runout
Output shaft roller bearing journal diameter
Output shaft 1 st gear journal diameter
Output shaft 2nd gear journal diameter
Output shaft runout
Gear thrust clearance 1st
Gear thrust clearance 2nd
Gear thrust clearance 3rd
Gear thrust clearance 4th
Gear thrust clearance 5th
Gear thrust clearance 6th
Gear radial clearance 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th (KOYO made)
Gear radial clearance 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th (NSK made)
Gear radial clearance 5th
Gear radial clearance 6th
No. 3 gear shift fork to No. 3 hub sleeve clearance
No. 2 gear shift fork to No. 2 hub sleeve clearance
No. 1 gear shift fork to reverse gear clearance
Synchronizer ring to gear clearance 1 st, 4th, 5th and 6th
Synchronizer ring to gear clearance 3rd
Synchronizer ring to gear clearance 2nd
Min.
Mm.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
STD
Max.
STDMax.
STD
Max.
Max.
Max.
Max.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Drive in depth
Input shaft front oil seal
Input shaft front bearing
Transmission case bushing
Transmission case oil seal (Shift and select lever shaft side)
No. 1 and No. 2 shift inner lever slotted spring pin
Transmission case oil seal (Differential case side)
Transaxle case oil seal
Differential side qear backlash
24.985 mm (0.9837 in.)
30.985 mm (1.21 99 in.)
28.985 mm (1.1 411 in.)
24.885 mm (0.9797 in.)
21.991 mm (0.8658 in.)
0.03 mm (0.001 2 in.)
32.985 mm (1.2986 in.)
37.985 mm (1.4955 in.)
31 .985 mm (1.2592 in.)
0.03 mm (0.001 2 in.)
0. 1 0 - 0.40 mm (0.0039 - 0.01 57 in.)
0.40 mm (0.0157 in.)
0.10-0.55 mm (0.0039 -0.021 7 in.)
0.55 mm (0.021 7 in.)
0. 1 0 - 0.35 mm (0.0039 - 0.01 38 in.)
0.35 mm (0.01 38 in.)
0. 1 0 - 0.55 mm (0.0039 - 0.021 7 in.)
0.55 mm (0.021 7 in.)
0.1 0 - 0.62 mm (0.0039 - 0.0244 in.)
0.62 mm (0.0244 in.)
0. 1 0 - 0.60 mm (0.0039 - 0.0236 in.)
0.60 mm (0.0236 in.)
0.1 5 - 0.58 mm (0.0006 - 0.0023 in.)0.058 mm (0.0023 in.)
0.01 5 - 0.056 mm (0.0006 - 0.0022 in.)
0.056 mm (0.0022 in.)
0.01 5 - 0.056 mm (0.0006 - 0.0022 in.)0.056 mm (0.0022 in.)
0.009 - 0.050 mm (0.0003 - 0.0020 in.)
0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
0.89 mm (0.035 in.)
0.35 mm (0.01 4 in.)
0.35 mm (0.014 in.)
0.75 mm (0.0295 in.)
0.65 mm (0.0256 in.)
0.70 mm (0.0276 in.)
15.8 ± 0.2 mm (0.622 ± 0.008 in.)
0 - 0.3 mm (0 - 0.01 2 in.)
0.80 - 1 .30 mm (0.031 5 - 0.051 2 in.)
10.0 ± 0.3 mm (0.394 ± 0.01 2 in.)
0 ± 0.5 mm (0 ± 0.020 in.)
9.9 ± 0.3 mm (0.390 ± 0.012 in.)
1.9 ± 0.3 mm (0.075 ± 0.012 in.)
0.05 - 0.20 mm (0.0020 - 0.0079 in.)
SS-37SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
Differential side gear thrust washer thickness
Differential tapered roller bearing preload (at starting) (For use with SST)
Input shaft snap ring thicknessNo. 2 clutch hub
No. 3 clutch hub
Input shaft center radial ball bearing
Input shaft rear radial ball bearing
New bearingReused bearing
MarkOMarklMarK2Mark 3Mark 4
Mark5Mark AMarkBMarkCMarkDMarkEMarkFMarkGMarkHMarkJMark AMarkBMarkCMarkDMarkEMarkFMark AMarkBMarkCMarkDMarkEMarkFMarkGMarkHMarkJMarkKMarklMarkM
0.95 mm (0.0374 in.)1.00 mm (0.0394 in.)1.05 mm (0.041 3 in.)
1.1 Omm (0.0433 in.)1.1 5 mm (0.0453 in.)1 .20 mm (0.0472 in.)
0.8 - 1 .6 N-rn (8 - 16 kgf-cm, 6.9 - 13.9 in.-lbf)0.5 - 1 .0 N-m (5 - 1 0 kgf-cm, 4.3 - 8.7 in.-lbf)
2.30 mm (0.0906 in.)2.36 mm (0.0929 in.)2.42 mm (0.0953 in.)2.48 mm (0.0976 in.)2.54 mm (0.1000 in.)
2.60 mm (0.1 024 in.)1.75 mm (0.0689 in.)1.80 mm (0.0709 in.)1.85 mm (0.0728 in.)1.90 mm (0.0748 in.)1.95 mm (0.0768 in.)2.00 mm (0.0787 in.)2.05 mm (0.0807 in.)2.1 Omm (0.0827 in.)2. 15 mm (0.0846 in.)2.29 mm (0.0902 in.)2.35 mm (0.0925 in.)2.41 mm (0.0949 in.)2.47 mm (0.0972 in.)2.53 mm (0.0996 in.)2.59 mm (0.1 020 in)1.70 mm (0.0669 in.)1.75 mm (0.0689 in.)1.80 mm (0.0709 in.)1.85 mm (0.0728 in.)1.90 mm (0.0748 in.)1.95 mm (0.0768 in.)2.00 mm (0.0787 in.)2.05 mm (0.0807 in.)2.1 Omm (0.0827 in.)2.1 5 mm (0.0846 in.)2.20 mm (0.0866 in.)2.25 mm (0.0886 in.)
SS-38SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
Output shaft snap ring thicknessNo. 1 dutch hub
Front bearing inner race
Output shaft rear radial ball bearing
Differential tapered roller bearing adjusting shim thickness
Mark AMarkBMarkCMarkDMarkEMarkFMark?MarksMarklMark 2
Mark 3Mark 4MarksMarksMarkBMarkCMarkDMarkEMarkF
MarkGMarkHMarkJMarkK
MarkLMarkM
MarkAAMarkBBMarKCCMark DOMarkEEMarkFF
MarkGGMarkHHMarkJJ
MarkKKMarkLL
Mark MMMarkNNMarkPPMarkQQMarkRRMarkSSMarkTTMarkUU
2.50 mm (0.0984 in.)2.56 mm (0.1 008 in.)2.62 mm (0.1 031 in.)2.68 mm (0.1 055 in.)2.74 mm (0.1 079 in.)2.80 mm (0.1102 in.)1.85 mm (0.0728 in.)1.90 mm (0.0748 in.)1.95 mm (0.0768 in.)2.00 mm (0.0787 in.)2.05 mm (0.0807 in.)2.1 Omm (0.0827 in.)2.15 mm (0.0846 in.)2.20 mm (0.0866 in.)2.31 mm (0.0909 in.)2.37 mm (0.0933 in.)2.43 mm 0.0957 in.)2.49 mm (0.0980 in.)2.55 mm (0.1 004 in.)Z61 mm (0.1028 in.)2.67 mm (0.1 051 in.)2.73 mm (0.1 075 in.)2.79 mm (0.1 098 in.)2.85 mm (0.1 122 in.)2.91 mm (0.1146 in.)
2. 10 mm (0.0827 in.)2. 15 mm (0.0846 in.)2.20 mm (0.0866 in.)2.25 mm (0.0886 in.)2.30 mm (0.0906 in.)2.35 mm (0.0925 in.)2.40 mm (0.0945 in.)2.45 mm (0.0965 in.)2.50 mm (0.0984 in.)2.55 mm (0.1 004 in.)2.60 mm (0.1 024 in.)
2.65 mm (0.1 043 in.)2.70 mm (0.1 063 in.)2.75 mm (0.1 083 in.)2.80 mm (0.1 102 in.)2.85 mm (0.11 22 in.)2.90 mm (0.1142 in.)2.95 mm (0.1161 in.)3.00 mm (0.1181 in.)
SS-39SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
No. 2 cylinder head cover
Radiator reservoir set bolt
ECM cover x ECM box
ECM box set bolt
Battery carrier x Body Bolt
Nut
Clutch line set bolt Bolt A(See page MX-4) Bolt B
Clutch release cylinder x Transaxle
Starter x Transaxle
Transaxle x Engine (From transaxle side)
Transaxle x Engine (From engine side) Bolt A
(See page MX-*) Bolt B
No. 1 and No. 2 engine hangers set bolt
Engine left mounting bracket x Transaxle
Engine left mounting bracket x Engine left mounting insulator
Oxygen sensor x Front exhaust pipe
Front exhaust pipe
PS gear assembly x Suspension crossmember
Engine rear mounting insulator x Engine rear mounting bracket
Engine rear mounting bracket x Transaxle
Passenger airbag assembly
Airbag sensor assembly x Body
Steering wheel lock nut
Shift lever assembly x Body
Shift cable retainer x Body
Shift and select control cable bracket
Filler and drain plug
Plug
Vehicle speed sensor
Back-up light switch
Control cable bracket x Transaxle case
Control shaft assembly
Selecting bellcrank assembly x Transmission case
Lever lock pin set nut
Transmission case cover x Transmission case
Lock ball assembly
Control shaft cover assembly x Transmission case
No. 1 , No. 2 and No. 3 gear shift fork x Gear shift fork shaft
No. 1 gear shift head x Gear shift fork shaft
Rear bearing retainer x Transmission case
Reverse idler gear shaft lock bolt
Straight screw plug (Gear shift fork shaft)
N-m
7.0
4.9
6.9
6.9
18
12
124.9
12
37
64
47
23
38
60
80
44
43
45
87
64
20
20
34
12
4.9
4.9
39
39
11
40
25
12
25
12
18
29
20
16
16
27
29
25
kgf-cm
71
50
70
70
185
120
120
50
120
378
650
480
230
387
610
820
450
440
459
890
650
204
205
350
120
50
50
400
400
115
410
250
120
250
120
185
300
200
160
160
280
300
250
ft-lbf
62 in.-lbf
43 in.-lbf
61 in.-lbf
61 in.-lbf
13
9
9
43 in.-lbf
9
28
47
35
17
28
44
59
33
32
33
64
47
15
15
25
9
43 in.-lbf
43 in.-lbf
29
29
8
30
18
9
18
9
13
22
14
12
12
20
22
18
SS-40SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
Straight screw plug Plug A
(See page MX-1 2) Plug B
Transmission case x Transaxle case
Reverse shift arm bracket x Transaxle case
Output shaft front bearing lock plate set bolt
Transaxle case receiver x Transaxle case
Oil receiver pipe
Ring gear x Differential case
1339
29
17
11
11
17
77
130400
300
175
115
115
175
790
929
22
13
8
8
13
57
SS-41SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)SERVICE DATALine pressure (Wheel locked)
Engine stall revolution
Time lag
Engine idle speed(A/COFF)
Drive plate runoutTorque converter clutch runout
Engine idlingD position
R position
AT stall (Throttle valve fully opened)D position
R position
D position
N -> D positionN -* R position
N position
Max.Max.
Torque converter clutch installation distance
Differential oil seal drive in depth
Shift scheduleD position
(Throttle valve fully opened)
(Throttle valve fully closed)
2 position
(Throttle valve fully opened)
L position
(Throttle valve fully opened)
Lock-up point
3rd gear
O/D gear
LHsideRH side
1 ->22-»33->44-»33-»22-»13-»4
4->3
1 ->2
3->2
2->1
3->2
2->1
Throttle valve opening 5 %Lock-up ON
Lock-up OFF
Lock-up ON
Lock-up OFF
372 - 41 2 kPa (3.8 - 4.2 kgf/cm2, 54-59 psi)
672 - 742 kPa (6.9 - 7.6 kgf/cm2, 97 - 107 psi)
931 - 1 ,031 kPa (9.5 - 1 0.5 kgf/cm2, 1 34 - 1 49 psi)
1 ,768 - 1 ,968 kPa (18.0 - 20.1 kgf/cm2 255 -284 psi)
2,220- 2,520 rpm
Less than 1 .2 secondsLess than 1 .5 seconds
650 ± 50 rpm
0.20 mm (0.0079 in.)0.30 mm (0.01 18 in.)More than 12.75 mm (0.5020 in.)
2.7 ± 0.5 mm (0.106 ± 0.020 in.)
0 ± 0.5 mm (0 ± 0.020 in.)
60 - 67 ktn/h (37 - 42 mph)
1 1 2 - 1 23 km/h (70 - 76 mph)179-191 km/h(111 -119mph)173 - 186 km/h (107- 115 mph)105 - 116 km/h (65 - 72 mph)44-50 km/h (27 - 31 mph).40-45 km/h (25 - 28 mph)14-19 km/h (9- 12 mph)
60 - 67 km/h (37 - 42 mph)1 1 2 - 1 23 km/h (70 - 76 mph)44 -50 km/h (27 -31 mph)
112- 123 km/h (70-76 mph)52-58 km/h (32 - 36 mph)
220 - 234 km/h (1 37 - 1 45 mph)220-234 km/h (137-145 mph)
75 - 81 km/h (47 - 50 mph)64 - 71 km/h (40 - 44 mph)
SS-42SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
Vehicle speed sensor x Transaxle
Input turbine speed sensor x Transaxle
Counter gear speed sensor x Transaxle
ATF temperature sensor x Transaxle
Oil pan x Transaxle
Control cable x Control shaft
Control shaft x Park/neutral position switch
Park/neutral position switch x Transaxle Bolt
Nut
Shift solenoid valve x Valve body 12mm (0.47 in.)
45 mm (1.77 in.)
Valve body x Transaxle
Oil strainer x Valve body
Drain plug x Oil pan
Steering wheel set nut
Front passenger airbag assembly x Instrument panel reinforcement
Floor shift assembly x Body
Hood set bolt
No. 2 cylinder head cover
ECM case set bolt
ECM set bolt
ECM bracket set bolt
ECM bracket set nut
Radiator reservoir set bolt
Ground cable x Transaxle
Starter x Transaxle
Drain plug x Differential
Stabilizer bar link x Shock absorber
Lower suspension arm x Lower ball joint
Drive shaft lock nut
Steering knuckle x Tie rod end
Drive shaft bearing lock bolt
Power steering gear assembly set bolt
Center member x Body
Center member x Engine front mounting
Suspension member x Body Front side
Rear side
Engine rear mounting insulator x Engine rear mounting bracket
Engine rear mounting insulator x Suspension member
Engine hanger set bolt
Engine left mounting x Engine left mounting bracket
Torque converter clutch x Drive plate
Transaxle housing x Engine block
Drive plate x Crankshaft
N-m
5.5
11
11
6.6
7.8
12
13
5.4
6.9
6.6
11
11
11
49
34
20
12
13
7.0
6.9
6.9
18
12
4.9
18
37
54
44
142
216
49
64
45
39
52
113
157
87
52
38
80
41
kgf-cm
56
115
115
67
80
120
130
55
70
67
110
110
110
500
350
204
120
130
71
70
70
185
120
50
185
378
550
450
1,450
2,200
500
650
459
398
530
1,152
1,601
890
530
387
816
418
ft-lbf
49in.-lbf
8
8
58 in.-lbf
69 in.-lbf
9
9
48 in.-lbf
61 n.-lbf
58 in.-lbf
8
8
8
36
25
15
9
9
62 in.-lbf
61 in.-lbf
61 in.-lbf
13
9
43 in.-lbf
13
28
40
32
105
159
33
47
33
29
38
83
116
64
38
28
59
30
See page AX-30
88 897 65
SS-43SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341 E)
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341 E)SERVICE DATALine pressure (Wheel locked)
Engine stall revolution
Time lag
Engine idle speed
(A/C OFF)
Drive plate runout
Torque converter runout
Torque converter installation distance
Differential oil seal drive in depth
Shift scheduleD position
(Throttle valve fully opened)
(Throttle valve fully closed)
2 position
(Throttle valve fully opened)
L position
(Throttle valve fully opened)
Lock-up point3rd gear
O/D gear
Engine idling
D position
R position
at stall (Throttle valve fully opened)D position
R position
D and R positions
N -» D positionN -» R position
N position
Max.Max.
LHside
RHside
1 -»22->3
3-»O/D
O/D -»33-»22-»1
3-* O/DO/D-»3
1 -»23-»22-»1
3-»22->1
ThrotUe valve opening 5 %Lock-up ON
Lock-up OFF
Lock-up ON
Lock-up OFF
372 - 407 kPa (3.8 - 4.2 kgf/cm2, 54-60 psi)
588-683 kPa (6.0 - 7.0 kgf/cm2, 85-100 psi)
1 ,1 53 - 1 ,264 kPa (1 1 .8 - 1 2.9 kgf/cm2, 1 68 - 1 83 psi)
1 ,589 - 1 ,761 kPa (16.2 - 18.0 kgf/cm2, 230 - 256 psi)
2,050 ± 200 rpm
Less than 1 .2 secondsLess than 1 .5 seconds
750 ± 50 rpm
0.20 mm (0.0079 in.)0.30 mm (0.01 18 in.)More than 20.7 mm (0.815 in.)
2.7 ± 0.5 mm (0.106 ± 0.020 in.)0 ± 0.5 mm (0 ± 0.020 in.)
49 - 55 km/h (30 - 34 mph)92 - 1 02 km/h (57 - 63 mph)148-160 km/h (92 - 99 mph)143 - 1 55 km/h (89-96 mph)
86-95 km/h (53 - 59 mph)42 - 47 km/h (26 - 29 mph)40 - 45 km/h (25 - 28 mph)26-31 km/h (16 -19 mph)
49 - 55 km/h (30 - 34 mph)89 - 99 km/h (55 - 62 mph)42 - 47 km/h (26 - 29 mph)
89 -99 km/h (55 -62 mph)46-51 km/h (29 -32 mph)
57 - 63 km/h (35 - 39 mph)55 -60 km/h (34 -37 mph)51 -56 km/h (32 -35 mph)48 - 54 km/h (30 - 34 mph)
SS-44SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341 &
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
Vehicle speed sensor x Transaxle
Direct clutch speed sensor x Transaxle
ATF temperature sensor x Transaxle
Oil pan x Transaxle
Control cable x Control shaft
Control shaft x Park/neutral position switch
Park/neutral position switch x Transaxle Bolt
Nut
Shift solenoid valve x Valve body 1 2 mm (0.47 in.)
45 mm (1.77 in.)
Valve body x Transaxle
Oil strainer x Valve body
Drain plug x Oil pan
Steering wheel set nut
Front passenger airbag assembly x Instrument panel reinforcement
Floor shift assembly x Body
Hood set bolt
No. 2 cylinder head cover
ECM case set bolt
ECM set bolt
ECM bracket set bolt
ECM bracket set nut
Radiator reservoir set bolt
Ground cable x Transaxle
Starter x Transaxle
Drain plug x Differential
Stabilizer bar link x Shock absorber
Lower suspension arm x Lower ball joint
Drive shaft lock nut
Steering knuckle x Tie rod end
Drive shaft bearing lock bolt
Power steering gear assembly set bolt
Center member x Body
Center member x Engine front mounting
Suspension member x Body Front side
Rear side
Engine rear mounting insulator x Engine rear mounting bracket
Engine rear mounting insulator x Suspension member
Engine hanger set bolt
Engine left mounting x Engine left mounting bracket
Torque converter dutch x Drive plate
Transaxle housing x Engine block
Drive plate x Crankshaft
N-m
5.5
7.8
10
7.8
12
13
5.4
6.9
6.6
11
11
11
49
34
20
12
13
7.0
6.9
6.9
18
12
4.9
18
37
54
44
142
216
49
64
45
39
52
113
157
87
52
38
80
25
kgf-cm
56
80
110
80
120
130
55
70
67
110
110
110
500
350
204
120
130
71
70
70
185
120
50
185
378
550
450
1,450
2,200
500
650
459
398
530
1,152
1,601
890
530
387
816
250
ft-lbf
49 in.-lbf
69 in.-lbf
8
69 in.-lbf
9
9
48in.-lbf
61 n.-lbf
58 in.-lbf
8
8
8
36
25
15
9
9
62 in.-lbf
61 in.-lbf
61 in.-lbf
13
9
43 in.-lbf
13
28
40
32
105
159
33
47
33
29
38
83
116
64
38
28
59
18
See page AX-30
78 800 58
SS-45SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - SUSPENSION AND AXLE
SUSPENSION AND AXLESERVICE DATA
Cold tire inflationpressure
Front Wheelalignment
Rear wheelalignment
Front axle
12Z-FE engine models
195/60R1588HP195/60R1587H
Front, rear 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi)
2ZZ-GE engine models
205/55R1587VP205/55R1587V205/50R1687V
Vehicle height
Tiresize:195/60R15,P195/60R15 Front*1
Rear*2
Tire size: 205/55R1 5, P205/55R1 5 Front*1
Rear*2
Tire size: 205/50R1 6 Front*1
Rear*2
Camber
Caster
Steering axis inclination
Toe-in (total)
Wheel angle195/60R15.P195/60R15
205/55R15, P205/55R15
205/50R16
Camber
195/60R15.P195/60R15205/55R15.P205/55R15
205/50R16
Right-left error
195/60R15.P195/60R15205/55R15.P205/55R15
205/50R16
Right-left error
195/60R15.P195/60R15205/55R15.P205/55R15
205/50R16
Right-left error
Rack end length difference
Inside wheelOutside wheel: Reference
Inside wheelOutside wheel: Reference
Inside wheelOutside wheel: Reference
Right-left error
Toe-in (total)Toe-in cross measurement difference
Axle bearing backlash
Axle hub deviation
Maximum
Maximum
Front, rear 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 31 psi)
190 mm (7.48 in.)224 mm (8.82 in.)190 mm (7.48 in.)226 mm (8.90 in.)193 mm (7.60 in.)225 mm (8.86 in.)
-0°28' ± 45' (-0.47* ± 0.75°)-0*25' ± 45' (-0.42* ± 0.75°)-0*29' ± 45' (-0.48* ± 0.75°)
45' (0.75°) or less
2*07' ±45' (2.12° ±0.75")2*01 '±45' (2.02° ±0.75*)2*0? ± 45' (2.03' ± 0.75°)
45' (0.75°) or less
13*09' ±45' (13.1 5° ±0.75')13*04' ± 45' (13.07° ± 0.75°)13*12' ± 45' (13.20° ± 0.75°)
45' (0.75°) Of less
0° ± 121 (0* ± 0.2°, 0 ± 2 mm, 0 ± 0.08 in.)1 .5 mm (0.059 in.) or less
38*41' ±2' (38.68* ±2°)33*20' (33.33°)38*46' ± 2* (38.77* ± 2°)33*25' (33.42*)38*38' ± 2* (38.63* ± 2*)33*19' (33.32*)
-1*11' ±45' (-1.18* ±0.75*)45' (0.75") or less
0*18' ± 12-(0.3* ± 0.2°, 3 ± 2mm, 0.12 ± 0.08 in.)6 mm (0.24 in.) or less
0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
0.07 mm (0.0028 in.)
SS-46SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - SUSPENSION AND AXLE
Front drive shaft
Front suspension
Rear axle
Rear suspension
Drive shaft standard length
1ZZ-FE (AH")
1ZZ-FE (M/T) and 2ZZ-GE
RHLHRHLH
Lower ball joint turning torque
Stabilizer bar link ball joint turning torque
Axle bearing backlash
Axle hub deviation
Maximum
Maximum
Stabilizer bar link ball joint turning torque
851.0 ± 5.0 mm (33.504 ± 0.197 in.)
565.9 ± 5.0 mm (22.279 ± 0.197 in.)845.5 ± 5.0 mm (33.287 ± 0.1 97 in.)
563.7 ± 5.0 mm (22.193 ± 0.197 in.)
1 .0 - 4.9 N-m (1 0 - 50 kgf -cm, 8.7 - 43 in.-lbf)
0.05 - 1 .0 N-m (0.5 - 10 kgf-cm, 0.4 - 8.7 in.-lbf)
0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
0.07 mm (0.0028 in.)
0.05 - 1 .0 N-m (0.5 - 10 kgf-cm, 0.4 - 8.7 in.-lbf)
*1: Front measuring pointMeasure the distance from the ground to the center of the front side lower suspension arm mounting bolt.*2: Rear measuring pointMeasure the distance from the ground to the center of the rear side lower suspension arm suspension mem-ber side set bolt.
SS-47SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - SUSPENSION AND AXLE
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened N-m | kgf-cm ft-lbf
FRONT AXLE
Hub nut
Tie rod end lock nut
Steering knuckle x Shock absorber
Steering knuckle x Brake caliper
Steering knuckle x Tie rod end
Axle hub x Drive shaft
Lower ball joint x Lower suspension arm
Lower baH joint x Steering knuckle
Steering knuckle x Dust cover
ABS speed sensor set bolt
103
74
153
107
49
216
142
103
8.3
8.0
1,050
750
1,560
1,090
500
2,200
1,450
1,050
85
82
76
54
113
79
36
159
105
76
74 in.-lbf
71 in.-lbf
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Drive shaft center bearing case lock bolt 64 650 47
FRONT SUSPENSION
Suspension support x Body
Suspension support x Piston rod
Flexible hose x Shock absorber
ABS speed sensor wire harness x Shock absorber
Lower suspension arm set bolt
PS gear set bolt
Engine front mount x Center member
Engine rear mount x Suspension member
Suspension member set bolt Front side
Rear side
Center member front side set bolt
Stabilizer bar bracket x Suspension member
Stabilizer bar link set nut
39
47
19
8.0
137
45
52
52
113
157
39
19
44
400
475
192
82
1,397
459
530
530
1,152
1,600
400
194
449
29
34
14
71 in.-lbf
101
33
38
38
83
116
29
14
32
REAR AXLE
Hub nut
Brake caliper set bolt
Axle hub set bolt
Upper suspension arm x Axle carrier
Lower suspension arm x Axle carrier
103
47
56
74
74
1,050
475
571
755
755
76
34
41
55
55
REAR SUSPENSION
Shock absorber x Lower suspension arm
ABS speed sensor wire harness x Lower suspension arm
Spring bracket x Body
Shock absorber center nut
Tailpipe set bolt
Parking brake cable set bolt
Upper suspension arm x Suspension member
Lower suspension arm x Suspension member
Lower suspension arm bracket set bolt
140
19
80
56
43
5.4
74
74
115
1,428
194
816
571
440
55
755
755
1,173
103
14
59
41
32
48 in.-lbf
55
55
85
SS-48SERVICE SPECIRCATIONS - SUSPENSION AND AXLE
Lower suspension arm bracket x Lower suspension arm
Stabilizer bar bracket set bolt
Stabilizer bar link set nut
110
18
44
1,122
184
449
81
13
32
SS-49SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - BRAKE
BRAKESERVICE DATABrake pedal height from asphalt sheet
Brake pedal freeplay
Brake pedal reserve distance at 490 N (50 kgf, 1 1 0.2 Ibf)
Brake booster push rod to piston clearance (w/ accessory tool)
Front brake pad thickness (1 ZZ-FE engine)
Front brake pad thickness (2ZZ-GE engine)
Front brake pad thickness
Front brake disc thickness
Front brake disc thickness
Front brake disc runout
Rear brake pad thickness
Rear brake pad thickness
Rear brake disc thickness
Rear brake disc thickness
Rear brake disc runout
Rear brake disc inside diameter
Rear brake disc inside diameter
Rear brake drum inside diameter
Rear brake drum inside diameter
Drum brake shoe lining thickness
STD
STD
Minimum
STD
Minimum
Maximum
STD
Minimum
STD
Minimum
Maximum
STD
Maximum
STD
Maximum
STD
Rear brake drum to shoe clearance
Drum brake shoe lining thickness
Parking brake shoe lining thickness
Parking brake shoe lining thickness
Minimum
STD
Minimum
Parking brake lever travel at 1 96N (20 Kgf, 44.1 Ibf)
Rear brake clearance between rear shoe and lever
139.8 - 1 49.8 mm (5.504 - 5.898 in.)
1-6 mm (0.04 -0.24 in.)
More than 85 mm (3.35 in.)
0 mm (0 in.)
11 .0 mm (0.433 in.)
11. 5 mm (0.453 in.)
1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
25.0 mm (0.984 in.)
23.0 mm (0.906 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
10.0mm (0.394 in.)
1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
9.0 mm (0.354 in.)
7.5 mm (0.295 in.)
0.1 5 mm (0.0059 in.)
173.0 mm (6.811 in.)
174.0 mm (6.850 in.)
200.0 mm (7.874 in.)
201 .Omm (7.91 3 in.)
4.0 mm (0.1 57 in.)
0.6 mm (0.024 in.)
1 .0 mm (0.039 in.)
2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
1 .0 mm (0.039 in.)
5- 8 clicks
Less than 0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)
SS-50SERVICE SPECIRCATIQNS - BRAKE
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
Master cylinder x Brake booster
Brake line union nut
Brake booster clevis lock nut
Brake booster x Pedal bracket
Front disc brake caliper installation bolt
Bleeder plug
Front disc brake torque plate x Steering knuckle
Front disc brake caliper x Flexible hose
Rear drum brake wheel cylinder x Backing plate
Rear disc brake caliper installation bolt
ABS actuator assembly x Body
ABS actuator x ABS actuator bracket assembly
Front speed sensor installation bolt
Front speed sensor harness clamp bolt
Rear speed sensor harness clamp bolt BodyLower arm
Pedal bracket x Reinforcement
Brake pedal x Pedal bracket
N-m
13
15
25
13
34
8.3
107
30
10
47
19
5.4
8.0
8.0
8.0
19
24
37
kgf-cm
130
155
260
130
350
85
1,090
310
100
475
195
55
82
82
82
195
241
375
ft-lbf
9
11
19
9
25
74 in.-lbf
79
22
7
34
14
48in.-lbf
71 in.-lbf
71 in.-lbf
71 in.-lbf
14
17
27
SS-51SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - STEERING
STEERINGSERVICE DATAPOWER STEERING FLUID
Fluid level rise
Fluid pressure at idle speed with valve closed
Maximum
Minimum
5 mm (0.20 in.)
7,355 kPa (75 kgf/cm2, 1 ,067 psi)
STEERING WHEEL
Steering wheel freeplay
Steering effort at idle speed
Maximum
Reference
30 mm (1.1 8 in.)
6.5 N-m (65 kgf-cm, 58 in.-lbf)
POWER STEERING VANE PUMP
Vane pump rotating torque
Vane pump shaft and front housing bushing oil clearance
Vane plate height
Vane plate thickness
Vane plate length
Vane plate and vane pump rotor groove clearance
STDMaximum
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum
Maximum
Vane plate length pump rotor and cam ring mark
0
1
2
3
4
Spring free length Minimum
0.27 N-m (2.8 kgf-cm, 2.4 in.-lbf) or less
0.021 - 0.043 mm (0.0008 - 0.001 7 in.)0.07 mm (0.0028 in.)
7.6 mm (0.299 in.)
1.405 mm (0.0553 in.)
11. 993 mm (0.4722 in.)
0.03 mm (0.001 2 in.)
1 2.001 - 1 2.003 mm (0.47248 - 0.47256 in.)
11.999-12.001 mm (0.47240-0.47248 in.)
11 .997 - 11 .999 mm (0.47232 - 0.47240 in.)
11 .995 - 11 .997 mm (0.47224-0.47232 in.)
1 1 .993 - 1 1 .995 mm (0.4721 6 - 0.47224 in.)
35.8 mm (1.409 in.)
POWER STEERING GEAR
Steering rack runout
Total preload
Maximum
Turning
0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
0.9 - 1 .3 N-m (9 - 1 3 kgf-cm, 8.0 - 11 .5 in.-lbf)
SS-52SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - STEERING
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened N-m kgf-cm ft-lbf
TILT STEERING COLUMN
Adjusting nut
No. 2 tilt lever lock bolt
Tilt steering support x Column tube
No. 2 intermediate shaft assembly x Main shaft assembly
Column assembly set bolt and nut
No. 2 intermediate shaft assembly x Intermediate extension
Steering wheel set nut
Steering wheel pad set screw (Torx screw)
SeepageSR-17
5.4
15
35
21
35
34
8.8
55
155
360
210
360
350
90
48 in.-lbf
11
26
15
26
25
78 in.-lbf
POWER STEERING VANE PUMP
Front housing x Rear housing
Rear bracket set bolt
Oil pressure switch
Pressure port union
Suction port union set bott
PS vane pump assembly set nut
Pressure feed tube clamp set bolt
Pressure feed tube x PS vane pump assembly
22
44
21
69
12
37
7.8
37(44)
220
440
210
700
120
370
80
375 (450)
16
32
15
51
9
27
69 in.-lbf
27 (33)
POWER STEERING GEAR
Engine hanger set bolt
Bearing guide nut
Rack housing cap
Rack end x Steering rack
Tie rod end lock nut
Turn pressure tube x Rack housing
Engine rear mount bracket set bott
Engine rear mount bracket x Engine rear mount insulator
Intermediate extension x Control valve shaft
PS gear assembly set bolt
Front suspension member with lower suspension arm x Frame Bolt C
BoltD
BoltE
Engine front mount insulator x Front suspension member
Engine rear mount insulator x Front suspension member
Stabilizer bar link set nut
Lower suspension arm x Lower baH joint
Engine hood x Hinge
Tube clamp
Pressure feed and return tubes x PS gear assembly
Tie rod end x Steering knuckle
38
40
74
62 (83)
74
20 (25)
64
87
35
45
113
157
39
52
52
44
142
13
7.8
37(44)
49
388
410
750
630(850)
750
200(250)
655
890
360
460
1,150
1,600
400
530
530
449
1,450
130
80
375 (450)
500
28
30
54
46(61)
54
14(18)
47
64
26
33
83
116
29
38
38
32
105
9
69 in.-lbf
27 (33)
36
(): For use without SST
SS-53SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMTORQUE SPECIFICATION
Part tightened
Steering wheel
Steering wheel pad
Front passenger airbag assembly x Instrument panel reinforcement
Seatback assembly x Seat adjuster
Seat cushion assembly x Seat adjuster
Front seat x Body
Airbag sensor assembly
Front airbag sensor
Side airbag sensor assembly x body
Door side airbag sensor x door
N-m
34
8.8
20
43
21
37
20
20
20
8.0
kgf-cm
350
90
205
440
210
375
205
205
205
82
ft-lbf
25
78 in.-lbf
15
32
15
27
15
15
15
71 in.-lbf
SS-54SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - BODY ELECTRICAL
BODY ELECTRICALSERVICE DATASPEEDOMETER (ON-VEHICLE)
USA:
Standard indication (mph)
20
40
60
80
100
120
CANADA:
Standard indication (km/h)
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
TACHOMETER (ON-VEHICLE)/ DC 13.5 V 25 °C at (77 °F)
Standard indication
700
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
7,000
FUEL SENDER GAUGE
Float position mm (in.)
F: Approx. 75.9 (2.99)
1/2: Approx. 17.2(0.68)
E: Approx. 50.8 (2.00)
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENDER GAUGE (Resistance)
Temperature °C("F)
50(122.0)
120(248.0)
Allowable range (mph)
19-22
39-42.5
59.5-63.5
80-85
100-105.5
120-125.5
Allowable range (km/h)
18-23
40-44
60-64.5
80-85
100-105
120-125.5
140-146
160-167
Allowable range
700-770
900-1,100
1,850-2,150
2,800-3,200
3,800-4,200
4,800-5,200
5,800-6,200
6,800-7,200
Resistance (£1)
Approx. 3.0
Approx. 31 .6
Approx. 110.0
Resistance (Q)
160-240
17.1-21.2
SS-55SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - BODY
BODYTORQUE SPECIFICATION
Part tightened
FRONT BUMPER
Front bumper reinforcement x Body
REAR BUMPER
Rear bumper reinforcement x Body
HOOD
Hood hinge x Hood
Hood lock x Body
FRONT DOOR
Door side airbag sensor x Door panel
Outside rear view mirror x Door panel
Upper window stop x Door panel
Door glass x Window regulator
Lower plate x Door panel
Window regulator x Door panel
Door glass female stabilizer x Door panel
Door lock x Door panel Bolt:
Door lock x Door panel Nut:
Door lock x Door panel Screw:
Outside handle x Door panel
Key cylinder x Outside handle
Door hinge x Body
Door hinge x Door panel
Door lock striker x Body
BACK DOOR
Door lock x Door panel
Door handle x Door panel
Door hinge x Door panel
Door hinge x Body
Door lock striker x Body
BACK DOOR STAY
Back door stay x Body
Back door stay x Door panel
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
Wiper motor x Wiper link assembly
Wiper motor and link assembly x Body
Wiper arm x Wiper motor and link assembly
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Rear wiper motor x Door panel
Rear wiper arm x Rear wiper motor
ROOF HEADLINING
Drive gear x Sliding roof assembly
N-m
-
20
-
20
-
13
6.9
-
8.0
8.3
11
7.8
4.9
8.3
4.9
4.9
5.4
4.9
5.4
5.4
25
25
23
-
5.4
5.4
11
19
11
-
8.3
26
-
5.4
5.4
32
-
5.4
5.4
-
5.4
kgf-cm
-
200
-
200
-
130
70
-
82
85
115
80
50
85
50
50
55
50
55
55
260
260
230
-
55
55
115
196
115
-
85
270
-
55
55
323
-
55
55
-
55
ft-lbf
-
14
-
14
-
9
61 in.-lbf
-
71 in.-lbf
74 in.-lbf
8
69 in.-lbf
43in.-lbf
74 in.-lbf
43 in.-lbf
43 in.-lbf
48 in.-lbf
43 in.-lbf
48 in.-lbf
48 in.-lbf
19
19
17
-
48 in.-lbf
48 in.-lbf
8
14
8
-
74 in.-lbf
20
~
48 in.-lbf
48 in.-lbf
23
-
48 in.-lbf
48 in.-lbf
-
48 in.-lbf
SS-56SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - BODY
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Steering wheel set nut
Passenger airbag assembly x Reinforcement
FRONT SEAT
Front seat x Body
Seat cushion assembly x Seat adjuster
Seatback assembly x Seat adjuster
Side airbag assembly x Seatback frame
REAR SEAT
Seatback assembly x Side hinge
Seatback assembly x Center hinge
Side hinge x Body
Center hinge x Body
Seatback lock striker x Body
Seatback lock x Seatback frame
SEAT BELT
Front seat outer belt shoulder anchor x Body
Front seat outer belt floor anchor x Body
Front seat outer belt retractor x Body Upper side:
Front seat outer belt retractor x Body Lower side:
Front seat inner belt x Front seat
Rear seat outer belt retractor x Belt outer anchor bracket
Rear seat outer belt floor anchor x Body
Rear seat inner belt x Body
Belt outer anchor bracket x Body
-
34
20
-
37
21
43
5.5
-
18
18
7.8
18
18
21
-
43
43
7.5
43
43
43
43
43
43
-
350
204
-
375
210
440
56
-
185
185
80
185
185
210
-
440
440
76
440
440
440
440
440
440
-
25
15
-
27
15
32
49 in.-lbf
-
13
13
69 in.-lbf
13
13
15
-
32
32
66 in.-lbf
32
32
32
32
32
32
SS-57SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - AIR CONDITIONING
AIR CONDITIONINGSERVICE DATARefrigerant charge volume
Idle-up speed (1ZZ-FE) M/T:
Magnetic clutch is not engaged
Magnetic clutch is engaged
Idle-up speed (1ZZ-FE) A/T:
Magnetic clutch is not engaged
Magnetic clutch is engaged
Idte-up speed (2ZZ-FE) M/T:
Magnetic clutch is not engaged
Magnetic clutch is engaged
Idle-up speed (2ZZ-FE) A/T:
Magnetic clutch is not engaged
Magnetic clutch is engaged
Magnetic clutch clearance
430 ± 30 g (15.17 ± 1.06oz.)
700 ± 50 rpm
900 ± 50 rpm
750 ± 50 rpm
900 ± 50 rpm
750 ± 50 rpm
850 ± 50 rpm
650 ± 50 rpm
850 ± 50 rpm
0.45 ± 0.10 mm (0.018 ± 0.004 in.)
SS-58SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS - AIR CONDITIONING
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONPart tightened
Suction hose x Compressor
Discharge hose x Compressor
Discharge hose x Condenser
Compressor x Engine
Liquid tube x Condenser
Evaporator x Expansion valve
Pressure switch x Liquid tube
Pressure plate x Compressor
Liquid lines
Discharge lines
Suction lines
N-m
10
10
5.4
25
5.4
5.4
10
13.2
10
10
10
kgf-cm
100
100
55
250
55
55
100
135
100
100
100
tt-lbf
7
7
48 in.-lbf
18
48 in.-lbf
48 in.-lbf
7
9
7
7
7
DIAGNOSTICS
ENGINE DI-1
HOW TO PROCEED WITH
TROUBLESHOOTING DI-1
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ... DI-2
PRE-CHECK DI-3
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART DM 4
PARTS LOCATION DM9
TERMINALS OF ECM DI-20
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE DI-22
CIRCUIT INSPECTION DI-23
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E) DI-155
HOW TO PROCEED WITH
TROUBLESHOOTING DM55
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ... DM56
PRE-CHECK DI-157
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART DM68
PARTS LOCATION DM69
TERMINALS OF ECM DM70
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE DM72
CIRCUIT INSPECTION DM75
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E) DI-218
HOW TO PROCEED WITH
TROUBLESHOOTING DI-218
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ... DI-219
PRE-CHECK DI-220
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART DI-231
PARTS LOCATION DI-232
TERMINALS OF ECM DI-233
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE Dt-234
CIRCUIT INSPECTION DI-238
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH
ELECTRONIC BRAKE FORCE
DISTRIBUTION (EBD) DI-274
HOW TO PROCEED WITH
TROUBLESHOOTING DI-274
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ... DI-275
PRE-CHECK DI-276
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART DI-280
PARTS LOCATION DI-281
TERMINALS OF ECU DI-282
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE DI-284
CIRCUIT INSPECTION DI-285
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM ... DI-324
HOW TO PROCEED WITH
TROUBLESHOOTING DI-324
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ... DI-325PRE-CHECK DI-326
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART DI-332
PARTS LOCATION DI-335
TERMINALS OF ECU DI-336
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE DI-338
CIRCUIT INSPECTION DI-339
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM DM83p«
HOW TO PROCEED WITH
TROUBLESHOOTING DM83
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ... DM84
PRE-CHECK DM85
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART DM90
PARTS LOCATION DM91
TERMINALS OF ECU DM92
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE DM94
CIRCUIT INSPECTION DM96
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DI-535
HOW TO PROCEED WITH
TROUBLESHOOTING DI-535
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ... DI-536
PARTS LOCATION DI-537
TERMINALS OF ECU DI-539
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE DI-542
CIRCUIT INSPECTION DI-544
DMDIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
ENGINEHOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTINGTroubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following page.
(vehicle Brought to Workshop)
<>1 /Customer Problem Analysis P. D I - 2 J pages for detailed explanations.
Titles insldfi// // are titles of pages inthis manual with the page number indicatedin the bottom portion. See the indicated
Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3 P. DI-3If the display indicates a communication fault in the tool, inspect DLC3 P. DI-3
3 // Check PTC and Freezed Frame Data (Precheck)// Record or Print PTC and Freezed Frame Data P. DI-3~
4 If Clear PTC and Freezed Frame Data P. DI-3_
5 If Visual Inspection //
6 If Setting the Check Mode Diagnosis P. DI-3 //
7 Problem Symptom ConfirmationIf the engine does not start perform steps 10 and 12 first
Malfunctionoccurs.
Malfunction does not occur.8 II Symptom Simulation P. IN-20 JJ
PTC Check P. DI-3Normal Malfunction code.
10 II Basic Inspection P. DI-3 // 11 // PTC Chart P. DI-3 ~~J
Problem Symptoms Table P. DI-22 ff
14 If Parts Inspection ff 13// Circuit Inspection P. DI-23
JL 15II Check for Intermittent Problems P. DI-3 //
Identification of Problem
J
16 ft Adjustment, Repair Jj
17 | Confirmation Test
End
7
DI-2DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DO7R-02
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet IS *0''8
Customer's Name
Driver's Name
Data VehicleBrought in
License No.
Model and ModelYear
Frame No.
Engine Model
Odometer Reading mj(es
«0Q.
!m
.O
2Q.
D Engine doesnot Start
D Difficult toStart
D Poor Idling
DPoorDriveaability
D Engine Stall
D Others
D Engine does not crank D No initial combustion D No complete combustion
O Engine cranks slowlyO Other
D Incorrect first idle O Idling rpm is abnormal DHighf rpm) DLow( rpm)D Rough idling D Other
D Hesitation D Back fire D Muffler explosion (after-fire) D SurgingD Knocking O Other
O Soon after startingD After accelerator ped.D Shifting fromN to D
ED After accelerator pedal depressedil released D During A/C operation
D Other
Datas ProblemOccurred
Problem Frequency
Con
ditio
n W
hen
Prob
lem
Occ
urs
Weather
OutdoorTemperature
Place
Engine Temperature
Engine Operation
D Constant D Sometimes ( times per day/month) D Once onlyD Other
O Fine D Cloudy D Rainy O Snowy D Various/Other
a Hot D Warm DCool D Cold (approx. 'Fl *C)
D Highway D Suburbs Dinner city O Uphill D DownhillD Rough road D Other
O Cold D Warming up D After warming up Q Any temperature D Other
D Starting D Just after starting ( min.) D Idling D RacingQ Driving D Constant speed D Acceleration D DecelerationO A/C switch ON/OFF D Other
Condition of MIL
DTC Inspection
Normal Mode(Precheck)
Check Mode
O Remains on D Sometimes light up D Does not light up
D Normal O Malfunction code(s) (code )D Freezed frame data ( )
D Normal D Malfunction code(s) (code )O Freezed frame data ( }
DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINEDI-3
CoCHECK
FI0534
PRE-CHECK1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM(a) Description
When troubleshooting OBD II vehicles, the only dif-ference from the usual troubleshooting procedureis that you connect to the vehicle the OBD II scantool complying with SAE J1978 or TOYOTA hand-held tester, and read off various data output fromthe vehicle's ECM.
• OBD II regulations require that the vehicle's on-board computer lights up the Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL) on the instrument panel when the com-puter detects a malfunction in the emission controlsystem/components or in the power train controlcomponents which affect vehicle emissions, or amalfunction in the computer. In addition to the MILlighting up when a malfunction is detected, the ap-plicable Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) prescribedby SAE J2012 are recorded in the ECM memory(See page DI-14).
If the malfunction does not reoccur in 3 consecutive, the MILgoes off automatically but the DTCs remain recorded in theECM memory.
TOYOTA Hand-Held Tester
D07259
To check the DTCs, connect the OBD II scan tool orTOYOTA hand-held tester to Data Link Connector3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD II scan tool orTOYOTA hand-held tester also enables you toerase the DTCs and check freezed frame data andvarious forms of engine data (For operating instruc-tions, see the OBD II scan tool's instruction book.).DTCs include SAE controlled codes and manufac-turer controlled codes. SAE controlled codes mustbe set as prescribed by the SAE, while manufactur-er controlled codes can be set freely by themanufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTCchart on page DI-14).
DI-4DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
• The diagnosis system operates in normal modeduring normal vehicle use. It also has a check modefor technicians to simulate malfunction symptomsand troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detectionlogic* to prevent erroneous detection, and ensurethorough malfunction detection. By switching theECM to check mode when troubleshooting, thetechnician can cause the MIL to light up for a mal-function that is only detected once or momentarily(TOYOTA hand-held tester only) (See pageDI-3).
• *2 trip detection logic:When a malfunction is first detected, the malfunc-tion is temporarily stored in the ECM memory (1sttrip).
If the same malfunction is detected again during the seconddrive test, this second detection causes the MIL to light up (2ndtrip). (However, the IG switch must be turned OFF between the1 st trip and 2nd trip.)
• Freeze frame data:Freeze frame data records the engine conditionwhen a misfire (DTC P0300 - P0304) or fuel trimmalfunction (DTC P0171, P0172) or other malfunc-tion (first malfunction only), is detected.Because freeze frame data records the engineconditions (fuel system, calculated load, enginecoolant temperature, fuel trim.engine speed, ve-hicle speed, etc.) when the malfunction is detected,when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the en-gine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich,etc. at the time of the malfunction.
Priorities for troubleshooting:If troubleshooting priorities for multiple DTCs are given in theapplicable DTC chart, these should be followed.If no instructions are given troubleshoot DTCs according to thefollowing priorities.
(1) DTCs other than fuel trim malfunction (DTC P0171,P0172) and misfire (DTC P0300 - P0304).
(2) Fuel trim malfunction (DTC P0171, P0172).(3) Misfire (DTC P0300 - P0304).
(b) Check the DLC3.The vehicle's ECM uses ISO 9141-2 for communication.The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with SAEJ1962 and matches the ISO 9141-2 format.
DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINEDI-5
Terminal No.
2
4
5
16
Connection / Voltage or Resistance
Bus © Line / Pulse generation
Chassis Ground <-» Body Ground /1 ii or less
Signal Ground <-> Body Ground /1 fi or less
Battery Positive <-> Body Ground /9 - 1 4 V
Condition
During transmission
Always
Always
Always
HINT:If your display shows "UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE"when you have connected the cable of the OBD II scan tool orTOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3, turned the ignition switchON and operated the scan tool, there is a problem on the ve-hicle side or tool side.• If communication is normal when the tool is connected to
another vehicle, inspect DLC3 on the original vehicle.• If communication is still not possible when the tool is con-
nected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in thetool itself, so consult the Service Department listed in thetool's instruction manual.
CHECK
2. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (Normal Mode)(a) Check the MIL.
(1) The MIL comes on when the ignition switch is turnedON and the engine is not running.
HINT:If the MIL does not light up, troubleshoot the combination meter(See page BE-2).
(2) When the engine started, the MIL should go off. Ifthe lamp remains on, the diagnosis system has de-tected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.
(b) Check the DTC.NOTICE:
If there is no DTC in normal mode, check the 1st tripDTC using.Continuous Test Results function (Mode 7 for SAEJ1979) on the OBDII scan tool or TOYOTA hand-heldtester.TOYOTA hand-held tester only: When the diagnosissystem is switched from normal mode to checkmode, it erases all DTCs and freezed frame data re-corded in normal mode. So before switching modes,always check the DTCs and freezed frame data, andnote them down.(1) Prepare the OBD II scan tool (complying with SAE
J1978) or TOYOTA hand-held tester.(2) Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-
held tester to DLC3 under the instrument panel low-er pad.
(3) Turn the ignition switch ON and turn the OBD II scantool or TOYOTA hand-held tester switch ON.
DI-6____ DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
(4) Use the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-heldtester to check the DTCs and freezed frame data,note them down (For operating instructions, see theOBD II scan tool's instruction book.).
(5) See page DI-3 to confirm the details of the DTCs.NOTICE:When simulating symptoms with an OBD II scan tool (ex-cluding TOYOTA hand-held tester) to check the DTCs, usenormal mode. For code on the DTC chart subject to "2 tripdetection logic", perform the following either action.
Turn the ignition switch OFF after the symptom issimulated the 1st time. Then repeat the simulationprocess again. When the problem has been simulatedtwice, the MIL lights up and the DTCs are recorded inthe ECM.
• Check the 1st trip DTC using Mode 7 (Continuous TestResults) for SAE J1979.
(c) Clear the DTC.The DTC and freezed frasme data will be erased by eitheraction.(1) Operating the OBD II scan tool (complying with SAE
J1998) or TOYOTA hand-held tester to erase thecodes.
(2) Disconnecting the battery terminals or EFI fuse.NOTICE:If the TOYOTA hand-held tester switches the ECM fromnormal mode to check mode or vise-verse, or if the ignitionswitch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during checkmode, the DTCs and freezed frame data will be erased.3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (Check Mode)HINT:TOYOTA hand-held tester only:Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has an in-creased sensitivity to detect malfunctions.Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected inthe normal mode can also be detected in the check mode,(a) Check the DTC.
(1) Initial conditions• Battery positive voltage 11V or more.• Throttle valve fully closed.
Transmission in "P" or "N" position.• Air conditioning switched OFF.
(2) Turn ignition switch OFF.(3) Prepare the TOYOTA hand-held tester.(4) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the
DLC3 under the instrument panel lower pad.If there is no DTC in normal mode, check the 1 st trip DTC usingContinuous Test Results function (Mode 7 for SAE J1979) onthe OBDII scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester.
DI-7DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
(5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the TOYOTAhand-held tester ON.
ON
OFF H
Flashing
uuuuuuui0.13 Second
FI3605
(6) Switch the TOYOTA hand-held tester normal modeto check mode (Check that the MIL flashes.).
NOTICE:If the TOYOTA hand-held tester switches the ECM fromnormal mode to check mode or vise-versa, or if the ignitionswitch is turned from ON to ACC or LOCK during checkmode, the DTCs and freezed frame data will be erased.
(7) Start the engine (The MIL goes out after the enginestart.).
(8) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction de-scribed by the customer.
NOTICE:Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked theDTC, etc.
(9) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use theTOYOTA hand-held tester diagnosis selector tocheck the DTCs and freezed frame data, etc.
HINT:Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF. Turning the ignitionswitch OFF switches the diagnosis system from check mode tonormal mode. So all DTCs, etc. are erased.
(10) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable cir-cuit.
4. FAIL-SAFE CHARTIf any of the following codes is recorded, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
DTC No.
P0100
P0110
P0115
P0120
P0325
P0336
PI 300
Fail-Safe Operation
Ignition timing fixed at 5° BTDC
Intake air temperature is fixed at 20 *C (68 *F)
Engine coolant temperature is fixed at 80"(176°F)
VTA is fixed at 0°
Max. timing retardation
Fuel cut
Fuel cut
Fail-Safe Deactivation Conditions
Returned to normal condition
Returned to normal condition
Returned to normal condition
The following condition must be repeated at least 2 times
consecutivelyVTA g 0.1 V and s 0.95 V
Ignition switch OFF
Returned to normal condition
IGF signal is detected for 4 consecutive ignitions
DI-8DIAGNOSTICS ENGINE
5. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMSTOYOTA HAND-HELD TESTER only:By putting the vehicle's ECM in check mode, 1 trip detection logic is possible instead of 2 trip detection logicand sensitivity to detect open circuits is increased. This makes it easier to detect intermittent problems.
(1) Clear the DTC.(2) Set the check mode.(3) Perform a simulation test (See page IN-20).(4) Check the connector and terminal (See page IN-30).(5) Handle the connector (See page IN-30).
6. BASIC INSPECTIONWhen the malfunction code is not confirmed in the DTC check, troubleshooting should be performed in theorder for all possible circuits to be considered as the causes of the problems. In many cases, by carryingout the basic engine check shown in the following flow chart, the location causing the problem can be foundquickly and efficiently. Therefore, use of this check is essential in engine troubleshooting.
1 Is battery positive voltage 11 V or more when engine is stopped?
NO\ Charge or replace battery.
YES
2 Is engine cranked?
NO\ Proceed to page and continue to troubleshoot.
YES
3 Does engine start?
NO\ Go to step 7.
YES
01-9DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
4 Check air filter.
P00486
OK
5
PREPARATION:Remove the air filter.CHECK:Visual check that the air filter is not dirty or excessive oily.HINT:If necessary, clean the filter with compressed air. First blow frominside thoroughly, then blow from outside of the filter.
NG \ Repair or replace.
Check idle speed.
PREPARATION:(a) Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.(b) Switch off all accessories.(c) Switch off air conditioning.(d) Shift transmission into "N" position.(e) Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3 on the vehicle.CHECK:Use CURRENT DATA to check the idle speed.OK:
Idle speed:1ZZ-FE: 650-750rpm2ZZ-OE (M/T): 750 - 850 rpm2ZZ-GE (A/T): 700-800 rpm
Proceed to problem symptoms table on pageDt-22.
OK
DMODIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check ignition timing.
16
8
15
7
14
6
13
5
12
4
11
3
10
2
9
1
A09083
PREPARATION:(a) Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.(b) Shift transmission into "N" position.(c) Keep the engine speed at idle.(d) Using SST, connect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) of the
DLC3.SST 09843-18020
(e) Connect the timing light.CHECK:Check ignition timing.OK:
Ignition timing:1ZZ-FE: 10-18° BTDC at idle2ZZ-GE: 8 -12° BTDC at idle
Proceed to page and continue to troubleshoot.
OK
Proceed to problem symptoms table on pageDI-22.
Check fuel pressure.
'7697
PREPARATION:(a) Be sure that enough fuel is in the tank.(b) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(c) Turn the ignition switch ON and push TOYOTA hand-held
tester main switch ON.(d) Use ACTIVE TEST mode to operate the fuel pump.(e) Please refer to the TOYOTA hand-held tester operator's
manual for further details.(f) If you have no TOYOTA hand-held tester, connect the
positive (+) and negative (-) leads from the battery to thefuel pump connector (See page SF-6).
CHECK:Check for fuel pressure in the fuel inlet hose when it is pinchedoff.HINT:At this time, you will hear a fuel flowing noise.
DM1DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Proceed to page SF-6 and continue to trouble-shoot.
8
1°*
N
Check for spark.
idli ll ^
AQ9027
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the high-tension cord from the spark plug,(b) Remove the spark plug,(c) Install the spark plug the high-tension cord,(d) Disconnect the injector connector,(e) Ground the spark plug.CHECK:Check if spark occurs while engine is being cranked.NOTICE:To prevent excess fuel being injected from the injectorsduring this test, don't crank the engine for more than 5-10seconds at a time.
Proceed to page 1G-1 and continue to trouble-shoot.
Proceed to problem symptoms table on pageDI-22.
DM 2DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
7. ENGINE OPERATING CONDITIONNOTICE:The values given below for "Normal Condition" are representative values, so a vehicle may still benormal even if its value varies from those listed here. So do not decide whether a part is faulty ornot solely according to the "Normal Condition" here.(a) GARB mandated signals.
TOYOTA hand-held tester display
FUEL SYS #1
CALC LOAD
COOLANT TEMP.
SHORT FT #1
LONG FT#1
ENGINE SPD
VEHICLE SPD
IGN ADVANCE
INTAKE AIR
MAF/AFM
THROTTLE POS
O2S B1 , SI
O2FTB1.S1
O2SB1.S2
Measurement Item
Fuel System Bank 1
OPEN: Air-fuel ratio feedback stopped
CLOSED: Air-fuel ratio feedback operating
Calculator Load:
Current intake air volume as a proportion of max.
intake air volume
Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor Value
Short-term Fuel Trim Bank 1
Long-term Fuel Trim Bank 1
Engine Speed
Vehicle Speed
Ignition Advance:Ignition Timing of Cylinder No. 1
Intake Air Temp. Sensor Value
Air Flow Rate Through Mass Air Flow Meter
Voltage Output of Throttle Position Sensor
Calculated as a percentage:
OV-»0%, 5V ->100%
Voltage Output of Heated Oxygen SensorBank 1 , Sensor 1
Heated Oxygen Sensor Fuel Trim Bank 1 ,
Sensor 1(Same as SHORT FT #1)
Voltage Output of Heated Oxygen Sensor
Bank 1 , Sensor 2
Normal Condition*
Idling after warming up: CLOSED
Idling:1ZZ-FE: 11.3 -16.0%
2ZZ-GE: 9. 1-20.0%
Racing without toad (2,500rpm):
1ZZ-FE: 12.3 -17.9%2ZZ-GE: 11.0-23.0%
After warming up: 80-95°C(176-203°F)
0 ± 20%
0 ± 20%
Idling:
1ZZ-FE:650-750rpm
2ZZ-GE (MT): 750 - 850 rpm2Z2-GE (AT): 700 - 800 rpm
Vehicle Stopped: 0 km/h (0 mph)
Idling: BTDC10-18"
Equivalent to Ambient Temp.
Idling:1 ZZ-FE: 1 .4 - 2.0 gm/sec.2ZZ-GE: 1 .5 - 5.0 gm/sec.
Racing without load (2,500 rpm):
1ZZ-FE: 5.4 - 7.9 gm/sec.
2ZZ-GE: 5.0 - 1 5.0 gm/sec.
Throttle Fully Closed: 6 - 16 %
Throttle Fully Open: 64 - 98 %
Idling: 0.1 -0.9V
0 ± 20 %
Driving at 50 km/h (31 mph): 0.1 - 0.9 V
*: If no conditions are specifically stated for "Idling", it means the shift lever is at N or P position, the A/C switchis OFF and all accessory switches are OFF.(b) TOYOTA Enhanced Signals.
TOYOTA hand-held tester display
MISFIRE RPM
MISFIRE LOAD
Measurement Item
Engine RPM for first misfire range
Engine load for first misfire range
Normal Condition*
Misfire 0: 0 rpm
Misfire 0: 9 g/r
DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINEDM 3
INJECTOR
IAC DUTY RATIO
STARTER SIG
CTPSW
A/C SIG
PNP SIG
ELECTCL LOAD SIG
STOP LIGHT SW
PS OIL PRESS SW
FCIDL
FCTAU
CYL#1 , CYL#2, CYL#3, CYL#4
IGNITION
FUEL PUMP
A/C MAG CLUTCH
EVAP (PURGE) VSV
WTCTRL
INTAKE CTRL VSV
TOTAL FT 81
O2LRB1.S1
O2RLB1.S1
Fuel injection time for cylinder No.1
Intake Air Control Valve Duty RatioOpening ratio rotary solenoid type IAC valve
Starter Signal
Closed Throttle Position Signal
A/C Switch Signal
Park/Neutral Position Switch Signal
Electrical Load Signal
Stop Light Switch Signal
Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Signal
Fuel Cut Idle: Fuel cut when throttle valve fully
closed, during deceleration
Fuel Cut TAU: Fuel cut during very light toad
Abnormal revolution variation for each cylinder
Total number of ignition for every 1 ,000 revolu-
tions
Fuel Pump Signal
A/C switch signal
EVAP VSV signal
VVT control signal
Intake control VSV signal
Total Fuel Trim Bank 1 : Average value For fueltrim system of bank 1
Heated Oxygen Sensor Lean Rich Bank 1, Sen-
sor 1 Response time for oxygen sensor output toswitch from lean to rich
Heated Oxygen Sensor Rich Lean Bank 1, Sen-
sor 1 Response time for oxygen sensor output to
switch from rich to lean
Idling:
1ZZ-FE:1.1 -2.1 ms
2ZZ-GE: 0.8 - 2.0 ms
Idling:
1ZZ-FE:25-35%2ZZ-GE: 22 - 35 %
Cranking: ON
Throttle fully closed: ON
A/C ON: ON
P or N position: ON
OefoggerS/WON:ON
Stop light switch ON: ON
Turn steering wheel: ON
Fuel cut operating: ON
Fuel cut operating: ON
0%
0 - 2,000 rpm
Idling: ON
A/C ON: ON
VSV operating: ON
WT operating: ON
VSV operating: ON
Idling: 0.8 -1.2V
Idling after wanning up: 0 - 1 ,000 msec.
Idling after warming up: 0 - 1 ,000 msec.
*: If no conditions are specifically stated for "Idling", it means the shift lever is at N or P position, the A/C switchis OFF and all accessory switches are OFF.
DM4DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHARTHINT:Parameters listed in the chart may not be exactly the same as your reading due to the type of instrumentor other factors.If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check in check mode, check the circuit for that code listedin the table below. For details of each code, turn to the page referred to under the "See page " for the respec-tive "DTC No." in the DTC chart.SAE CONTROLLED:
DTC No.
P0100(DI-23)
P0101(DI-27)
P0110(DI-28)
P0115(DI-33)
P0116(DI-37)
P0120(Dt-38)
P0121(Di-43)
P0125(DM4)
P0130(DM9)
P0133(DI-53)
P0135(01-56)
Detection Item
Mass Air Flow Circuit Malfunc-tion
Mass Air Flow Circuit Range/Performance Problem
Intake Air Temp. Circuit Malfunc-tion
Engine Coolant Temp. CircuitMalfunction
Engine Coolant Temp. CircuitRange/Performance Problem
Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch "A" Circuit Malfunction
Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch "A" Circuit Range/Perfor-mance Problem
Insufficient Coolant Temp, for
Closed Loop Fuel Control
Heated Oxygen Sensor CircuitMalfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
(Except Calif.)
Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Re-sponse (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
Oxygen Sensor Heater CircuitMalfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
Trouble Area
•Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit• Mass air flow meter• ECM
• Mass air flow meter
• Open or short in intake air temp, sensor circuit• Intake air temp, sensor (built into mass air flow meter)• ECM
• Open or short in engine coolant temp, sensor circuit• Engine coolant temp, sensor• ECM
•Cooling system• Engine coolant temp, sensor
• Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit•Throttle position sensor• ECM
• Throttle position sensor•ECM
•Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1)circuit
• Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1)•Air induction system• Fuel pressure• Injector•Gas leakage on exhaust system•ECM
•Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit• Heated oxygen sensor• Air induction system• EGR system• Fuel pressure• Injector• ECM
• Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit• Heated oxygen sensor•Air induction system• EGR system• Fuel pressure• Injector• ECM
•Open or short in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor• Heated oxygen sensor heater• ECM
MIL'1
0
O
O
O
O
0
O
O
O
O
0
Memory
O
O
0
O
0
O
. 0
O
O
O
O
DI-15DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
P0136
(DI-58)
P0141(DI-56)
P0171(Dl-60)
P0172(Dl-60)
P0300
(DI-64)
P0301(DI-64)
P0302(DI-64)
P0303(DI-64) -
P0304(DI-64)
P0325
(DI-71)
P0335
(DI-74)
P0340
(DI-76)
P0420(DI-78)
Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunc-
tion (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
Oxygen Sensor Heater CircuitMalfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
System too Lean (Fuel Trim)
System too Rich (Fuel Trim)
Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire
Detected
Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected
Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected
Cylinder 4 Misfire Detected
Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunc-
tion (Bank 1)
Crankshaft Position Sensor "A"
Circuit Malfunction
Camshaft Position Sensor Cir-cuit Malfunction
Catalyst System Efficiency Be-low Threshold (Bank 1)
•Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit• Heated oxygen sensor
•Same as DTC No. P0135
•Air induction system
• Injector blockage• Mass air flow meter
• Engine coolant temp, sensor
• Fuel pressure
•Gas leakage on exhaust system•Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1)
circuit• Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1 )
• Injector teak, blockage
• Mass air flow meter
• Engine coolant temp, sensor
• Ignition system• Fuel pressure
•Gas leakage on exhaust system•Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1)
circuit• Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1 )
• Open or short in engine wire
• Connector connection
• Vacuum hose connection
• Ignition system•Injector
• Fuel pressure
• EGR system• Manifold absolute pressure sensor
• Engine coolant temp, sensor•Compression pressure
•Valve clearance• Valve timing• ECM
•Open or short in knock sensor 1 circuit
• Knock sensor 1 (looseness)
• ECM
•Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit
•Crankshaft position sensor
•Signal plate (Timing belt guide)•Crankshaft timing pulley
• ECM
• Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit
•Camshaft position sensor• Camkshaft timing pulley• ECM
•Gas leakage on exhaust system•Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit
• Heated oxygen sensor
•Three-way catalytic converter
O
0
0
0
O
O
O
0
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
DM 6DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
P0440(DI-81)
P0441(DI-87)
P0446(DI-87)
P0450(DI-104)
P0451/r\| -t f\ji\\\J\ — 1 \J*¥)
P0500(DM06)
P0505
Evaporative Emission ControlSystem Malfunction
Evaporative Emission ControlSystem Incorrect Purge Flow
Evaporative Emission ControlSystem Vent Control Malfunction
Evaporative Emission ControlSystem Pressure Sensor Mal-function
Evaporative Emission ControlSystem Pressure Sensor Range/Performance
Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunc-tion
Idle Control System Malfunction
• Hose or tube cracked, hole, damaged or loose seal• Fuel tank cap incorrectly installed• Fuel tank cap cracked or damaged•Vacuum hose cracked, hole, btocked.damaged or discon-nected
• Fuel tank cracked, hole or damaged• Charcoal canister cracked, hole or damaged• Open or short in vapor pressure sensor circuit
• Vapor pressure sensor• Fuel tank over fill check valve cracked or damaged• ECM
•Vacuum hose cracked, hole, blocked damaged or discon-nected
• Open or short in vapor pressure sensor circuit• Vapor pressure sensor• Open or short in VSV circuit for EVAP
WOW tnr (ZWAD• VbV tor bVAr
• Open or short in VSV circuit for vapor pressure sensor• VSV for vapor pressure sensor•Charcoal canister cracked, hole or damaged• Fuel tank over fill check valve cracked or damaged• ECM
•Open or short in vapor pressure sensor circuit• Vapor pressure sensor•ECM
• Combination meter• Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit• Vehicle speed sensor•ECM
• Open or short in IAC valve circuit• IAC valve is stuck or closed• Open or short in A/C switch circuit• Air induction system•ECM
O
o
o
o
o
o
: O • • • MIL lights up
DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINEDM7
MANUFACTURER CONTROLLED:
DTC No.(See Page)
P1300(DI-114)
PI 305(DM14)
P1310(DI-114)
P1315(DI-114)
P1335
(DI-120)
P1346(DM 21)
P1349(DM23)
P1520(DM 30)
P1600
(DM33)
P1645
(DM35)
P1656
(DM36)
P1690*2
(DM39)
P1 692*2
(DM43)
Detection Item
Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No. 1)
Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No.2)
Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No.3)
Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No.4)
Crankshaft Position Sensor Cir-
cuit Malfunction (During engine
running)
WT Sensor/Camshaft PositionSensor Circuit Range/Perfor-
mance Problem (Bank 1 )
WT System Malfunction (Bank
1)
Stop Light Switch Signal Mal-function
ECM BATT Malfunction
BooV ECU Malfunction
OCV Circuit Malfunction (forWT-4)
OCV Circuit Malfunction (forWT-q
OCV Open Malfunction (for
WT-L)
Trouble Area
• Ignition system
•Open or short in IGF1 and IGT1 circuit from No.1 ignition coilwith igniter to ECM
• No.1 ignition coil with igniter
• ECM
• Ignition system
•Open or short in IGF2 and IGT2 circuit from No.2 ignition coil
with igniter to ECM
• No.2 ignition coil with igniter•ECM
• Ignition system
•Open or short in IGF2 and IGT3 circuit from No.3 ignition coilwith igniter to ECM
• No.3 ignition coil with igniter•ECM
• Ignition system
• Open or short in IGF1 and IGT4 circuit from No.4 ignition coilwith igniter to ECM
• No.4 ignition coil with igniter
• ECM
•Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit
• Crankshaft position sensor
• Signal plate
• ECM
• Mechanical system (Jumping teeth of timing belt, belt
stretched)• ECM
•Valve timing•OCV• WT controller assembly
•ECM
• Short in stop light switch signal circuit
• Stop light switch• ECM
•Open in back up power source circuit
• ECM
• Body ECU
•A/C ECU• Communication bus
•Open or short in OCV circuit• OCVforWT-i•ECM
•Open or short in OCV circuit
•OCV for WT-L•ECM
•Open or short in OCV circuit•OCV for WT-L
•ECM
MIL*1
O
0
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Memory
O
O
O
O
O
O
0
O
O
O
O
O
O
DM8DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
P1 693*2
(DM43)
P1780*3
(DI-145)
OCV Close Malfunction (forWT-L)
Park/Neutral Position Switch
Malfunction
•Open or short in OCV circuit
•OCV for WT-L• ECM
• Short in park/neutral position switch circuit
• Park/neutral position switch
• ECM
O
O
O
O
*1:o • • • MIL lights up*2: 2ZZ-GE only*3: A/T only
DM 9DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
PARTS LOCATION
2ZZ-GE:OCV for WL
Ignition Coil and Igniter
PS Oil PressureSensor
Injector
Oxygen Sensor .(Bank 1 Sensor 2) Canister
OCVforWT-i
CrankshaftPositionSensor
Oxygen Sensor(Bank 1 Sensor 1
VSV for PressureSwiting Valve
Knock Se
Camshaft PositionSensor
Vapor PressureSensor
Engine CoolantTemp. Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor
VSV for Intake AirOntr0' VSV for CCV\ PNP Switch Mass Air Flow Meter
VSV for EVAP
VSV for VaporPressure Sensor
A09106
DI-20DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
TERMINALS OF ECMECM Terminals
n n
21
31
9
20
30
8
19
2§
7
ie6
17
21
5
16
27
4
IS
3
14
21
137«
2
12
74
1
11 1d|
3
|7|6t5T4T3l14 13 12 11
21 •181719 1C 17 1C 15 14 13 15 11
22 21
1C
2C
F02094
Symbols (Terminals No.) Wiring Color Condition STD Voltage (V)
BATT(E2-1)-E1 (E4-17) W<->BR Always 9-14
FC(E2-3)-E1 (E4-17) G-R4-»BRIG switch ON 9-14
Idling 0-0.3
PTNK(E2-4)-E1 (E4-17) L-B4-»BR IG switch ON, fuel cap taken off 2.9-3.7
IGSW (E2 - 8) - E1 (E4 -17) B-O<->BR IG switch ON 9-14
W(E2-15)-E1(E4-17) R-BoBRIdling 9-14
IG switch ON Below 3.0
+B(E2-16)-E1 (E4-17) B~R<->BR IG switch ON 9-14
STP(E3-6)-E1 (E4-17) G-WoBRIG sw'rtch ON, brake pedal depressed 7.5-14
IG switch ON, brake pedal depressed Below 1.5
F/PS(E3-8)-E1 (E4-17) IG switch ON Below 1.5
VSV(E3-9)-E1 (E4-17) R-L<->BR IG switch ON 9-14
STA(E3-11)-E1 (E4-17) Cranking 6.0 or more
HT1B (E3 -16) - £03 (E2 - 7) Y-<3<->W-BIdling Below 3.0
IG switch ON 9-14
MREL(E3-21)-E1 (E4-17) L-B<->BR IG switch ON 9-14
SPD(E3-22)-E1 (E4-17) W-R 4-» BR IG switch ON, rotate driving wheel slowly Pulse generation
OX1B (E3 - 25) - E2 (E4 -18) W<-»BR Maintain engine speed at 2,500 rpm for 2 min. after warning upPulse generation(See page DI-78)
TACH(E3-27)-El (E4-17) BR-W <H> BR Idling Pulse generation
VC(E4-2)-E2(E4-18) R<-»BR IG switch ON 9-14
HT1A(E4-3)-E03(E2-7)Idling Below 3.0
IG switch ON 9-14
EVP1 (E4-4)-E01 (E5-21) IG swKch ON 9-14
OVL+ (E4 - 7) - OVL- (E4 - 6) L-W <-* L-B Engine speed at 6,000 rpm or more 9-14
VG(E4-11)-EVG(E4-1) G-WoY-G Idling, A/C switch OFF 1.1-1.5
OX1A(E4-12)-E2(E4-18) Maintain engine speed at 2,500 rpm for 2 min. after warning upPulse generation(See page DI-78)
THW(E4-14)-E2(E4-18) G«->BR Idling, Engine coolant temp, at 80 'C (176 °F) 0.2-1.0
NE+ (E4 -16) - NE- (E4 - 24) OoW IdlingPulse generation(See page DI-74)
OSW(E4-21)-E1(E4-17) GR^BR Idling 9-14
THA (E4 - 22) - E2 (E4 -18) L-R o BR Idling, intake air temp. 20 °C (68 °F) 0.5-3.4
DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINEDI-21
Symbols (Terminals No.)
VTA (E4 - 23) — E2 (E4 - 1 8)
#10(E5-1)-E01 (E5-21)
#20(E5-2)-E01 (E5-21)
#30 (E5 - 3) - E01 (E5 - 21 )
#40(E5-4)-E01 (E5-21)
IQT1 (E5-10)-E1 (E4-17)
IGT2(E5-11)-E1 (E4-17)
IGT3(E5-12)-E1 (E4-17)
IGT4(E5-13)-E1(E4-17)
CCV(E5-17)-E1(E4-17)
RSO (E5- 18) - E01 (E5 - 21)
MOPS (E5 - 22) - E1 (E5 - 17)
OCV+ (E5 - 24) - OCV- (E5 -23)
IGF(E5-25)-E1 (E4-17)
KNK1 (E5 - 27) - E1 (E4 - 1 7)
PS(E5-28)-E1 (E4-17)
Wiring Color
R<-»W-B
R-LoW-B
R-W<-»W-B
R-B^W-B
R-B<->BR
R-WoBR
G-R<-»BR
R-Y<-»BR
V-W<-xBR
B-WoW-B
Y-B <-» BR
G-O<-»W
B-Y*-»BR
W<-»BR
P<-»BR
Condition
IG switch ON, throttle valve fuHy closed
IG switch ON, throttle valve fully open
IG switch ON
Idling
IG switch ON
Idling
IG switch ON
Idling
IG switch ON
Idling
Idling
Idling
Idling
Idling
IG switch ON
IG switch ON, disconnect E4 of E4 connector
Idling
IG switch ON
IG switch ON
Idling
Idling
IG switch ON
STD Voltage (V)
0.3-1.0
3.2-4.9
9-14
Pulse generation(See page DI-64)
9-14
Pulse generation(See page DI-64)
9-14
Pulse generation(See page DI-64)
9-14
Pulse generation(See page DI-64)
Pulse generation(See page DM14)
Pulse generation(See page DM 14)
Pulse generation(See page DM 14)
Pulse generation(See page DM1 4)
9-14
9-14
9-14
Pulse generation(See page DM 23)
4.5-5.5
Pulse generation(See page DM 14)
Pulse generation(See page Dt-71)
9-14
*1: Only for A/T models.*2: Only for 2ZZ-GE models.
DI-22DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLESymptom
Engine does not crank (Does not start)
No initial combustion (Does not start)
No complete combustion (Does not start)
Engine cranks normally (Difficult to start)
Cold engine (Difficult to start)
Hot engine (Difficult to start)
High engine idle speed (Poor idling)
Low engine idle speed (Poor idling)
Rough idling (Poor idling)
Hunting (Poor idling)
Hesitation/Poor acceleration (Poor driveability)
Surging (Poor driveability)
Soon after starting (Engine stall)
During A/C operation (Engine stall)
Suspect Area
1. Starter
2. starter relay
1 . ECM power source circuit
2. Fuel pump control circuit
3. Engine control module (ECM)
1. Fuel pump control circuit
1. Starter signal circuit2. Fuel pump control circuit3. Compression
1. Starter signal circuit2. Fuel pump control circuit
1. Starter signal circuit
2. Fuel pump control circuit
1. A/C switch circuit
2. ECM power source circuit
1. A/C switch circuit
2. Fuel pump control circuit
1. Compression
2. Fuel pump control circuit
1. ECM power source circuit2. Fuel pump control circuit
1. Fuel pump control circuit
2. A/T faulty U240EU341E
1. Fuel pump control circuit
1. Fuel pump control circuit
1. A/C switch circuit
2. Engine control module (ECM)
Seepage
ST-2ST-17
DM46DM49
IN-30
DM49
DM 49EM-3
DM49
DM49
AC-68
DM46
AC-68DM49
EM-3DM49
DM46DM49
DM49
DM72DI-234
DM49
DM49
AC-68IN-30
DI-23DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
CIRCUIT INSPECTION """
DTC P0100 Mass Air Flow Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe mass air flow meter uses a platinum hot wire. The hot wire air flow meter consists of a platinum hot wire,thermistor and a control circuit installed in a plastic housing. The hot wire air flow meter works on the principlethat the hot wire and thermistor located in the intake air bypass of the housing detect any changes in theintake air temp.The hot wire is maintained at the set temp, by controlling the current flow through the hot wire. This currentflow is then measured as the output voltage of the air flow meter.The circuit is constructed so that the platinum hot wire and thermistor provide a bridge circuit.with the powertransistor controlled so that the potential of A and B remains equal to maintain the set temp.
ThermisterPower Transister
Platinum Hot wire
„ OutputVoltage
FI6929SOS741 A06106
DTC No.
P0100
DTC Detecting Condition
Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit with more than 3
sec. engine speed 4,000 rpm or less
Trouble Area
• Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit
• Mass air flow meter
• ECM
If the ECM detects DTC "P0100" it operates the fail-safe function, keeping the ignition timing and injectionvolume constant and making it possible to drive the vehicle.HINT:After confirming DTC P0100 use the OBDII scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to confirm the mass airflow ratio from "CURRENT DATA".
Mass Air Flow Value (gm/sec.)
0.0
271 .0 or more
Malfunction
• Mass air flow meter power source circuit open
• VG circuit open or short
• E2G circuit open
DI-24DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
WIRING DIAGRAM
M1Mass Air Flow Meter
ECM
EVG
VG
MREL
A09118
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
Connect OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester, and read value of massair flow rate.
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Turn ignition switch ON and push the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester main switch ON.(c) Start the engine.
DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINEDI-25
CHECK;Read mass air flow rate on the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester.RESULT:
Type I Type II
Mass air flow rate (gm/sec.) 0.0 271.0 or more
Go to step 2.
Go to step 5.
Check voltage of mass air flow meter power source.
,ON
BE6653P24310 A00099
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector.(b) Turn ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal 4 of mass air flow meter con-nector and body ground.OK:
Voltage: 9-14V
Check for open in harness and connector be-tween EFI main relay (Marking: EFI) and massair flow meter (See page IN-30).
OK
Check voltage between terminal VG of ECM connector and body ground.
VG(+)
A09084
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.{b) Start the engine.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal VG of ECM and bodyground while engine is idling.OK:
Voltage:1.1 -1.5 V (P or N position and A/C switch OFF)
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DI-26DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check for open and short in harness and connector between mass air flow meterand ECM (See page IN-30).
NG Repair or replace harness or connector.
Replace mass air flow meter.
Check continuity between terminal E2 of ECM connector and body ground.
A09084
PREPARATION:Remove the ECM cover.CHECK:Check continuity between terminal E2 of ECM connector andbody ground.OK:
Continuity (1 Q. or less)
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
OK
Check for open in harness and connector between mass air flow meter and ECM(See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Replace mass air flow meter.
DI-27DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DI09C-07
DTC P0101 Mass Air Flow Circuit Range/PerformanceProblem
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONRefer to DTC P0100 (Mass Air Flow Circuit Malfunction) on page DI-23.
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P0101
Conditions (a), (b) and (c) continue 10 sec. or more with
engine speed 900 rpm or less:(2 trip detection logic)
(a) Throttle valve fully closed
(b) Mass air flow meter output > 2.2 V(c) THW > 70°C »Mass air flow meter
Conditions (a) and (b) continue 10 sec. or more with engine
speed 1,500 rpm or more:
(2 trip detection logic)
(a) VTA a 0.63 V(b) Mass air flow meter output < 1.06 V
WIRING DIAGRAMRefer to DTC P0100 (Mass Air Flow Circuit Malfunction) on page DI-23 for the WIRING DIAGRAM.
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
1 Are there any other codes (besides DTC P0101) being output?
NO\ Replace mass air flow meter.
YES
Go to relevant DTC chart.
DI-28
DtTO-oj
DTC P0110 Intake Air Temp. Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
(fig-1)
5 305 2O
« 1CO
8 °5
DC 0.3
Acceptable
-20(-4)
032
2068
40104
60140
80176
100212
Temp.'C (F°)
The intake air temp, sensor is built into the mass air flow meterand senses the intake air temperature.A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance valueaccording to the intake air temperature, the lower the intake airtemperature, the greater the thermistor resistance value, andthe higher the intake air temperature, the lower the thermistorresistance value (See fig.1).The air intake temperature sensor is connected to the ECM(See below). The 5V power source voltage in the ECM is ap-plied to the intake air temp, sensor from the terminal THA viaa resistor R.That is, the resistor R and the intake air temp, sensor are con-nected in series. When the resistance value of the intake airtemp, sensor changes in accordance with changes in the intakeair temperature, the potential at terminal THA also changes.Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection vol-ume to improve driveability during cold engine operation.If the ECM detects the DTC T0110", it operates the fail safefunction in which the intake air temperature is assumed to be20°C (68°F).
DTC No.
P0110
DTC Detecting Condition
Open or short in intake air temp, sensor circuit
Trouble Area
•Open or short in intake air temp, sensor circuit• Intake air temp, sensor (built into mass air flow meter)
•ECM
HINT:After confirming DTC P0110, use the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to confirm the intakeair temperature from CURRENT DATA.
Temperature Displayed
-40°C (-40°F)
140°C(284'F)ormore
Malfunction
Open circuit
Short circuit
DI-29DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
WIRING DIAGRAM
Intake Air Temp. Sensor(Built into mass air flow meter)
ECM
I—AVW-
I RL— H
BR
22 THAW\A_
E2
A00310
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:If DTC P100 (Mass Air Flow Meter Circuit Malfunction), P0101 (Mass Air Flow meter Circuit Range/Per-formance Ploblem), P0110 (Intake Air Temp. Circuit Malfunction), P0115 (Engine Coolant Temp. Cir-cuit Malfunction) and P0120 (Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch "A" Circuit Malfunction) are outputsimultaneously, E2 (sensor ground) may be open.Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. Because freeze framerecords the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful fordetermining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuelratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.
DI-30DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Connect OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester, and read value of intakeair temperature.
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester main switch
ON.CHECK:Read temperature value on the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester.OK:
Same as actual air intake temperature.HINT:
If there is open circuit, OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester indicates - 40"C (- 40°F).If there is short circuit, OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester indicates 140°C (284° F) or more.
-40*C (-40°F) ....Go to step 2.140°C (284° F) or more ....Go to step 4.
OK
Check for intermittent problems(See page DI-3).
2 Check for open in harness or ECM.
Intake Air Temp.Sensor
n 2 22
BE6853R70S5
if(&f
" U \
ECM
E2
AOC391
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the intake temp, sensor connector,(b) Connect sensor wire harness terminals together,(c) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Read temp, value on the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTAhand-held tester.OK:
Temp, value: 140°C (284°F) or more
Confirm good connection at sensor. If OK,replace intake air temp, sensor.
NG
DI-31DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check for open in harness or ECM.
ON
Intake Air Temp.Sensor
ECM
22
A11408
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Connect between terminals THA and E2 of the ECM con-
nector.HINT:In take air temp, sensor connector is disconnected.Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for theECM connector (See page IN-30).(c) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Read temperature value on the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTAhand-held tester.OK:
Temperature value: 140°C (284°F) or more
Open in harness between terminals E2 or THA,repair or replace harness.
Confirm good connection at ECM. If OK,check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
4 Check for short in harness and ECM.
/~^ON
(?)
Intake Air Temp. ECM
^^Ln 2 22Crl
BE66S3H70S4
t\ O ff3l ' rln£ jjif
I ^2- 1 pi
A00393
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector,(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Read temperature value on the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTAhand-held tester.OK:
Temperature value: -40°C (-40° F)
\OK Replace mass air flow meter.
DI-32DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check for short in harness or ECM.
Intake Air Temp.Sensor
YBE66S3H7056A09085
NG
ECM
E4 Connector
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Disconnect the E4 connector of the ECM.HINT:Intake air temp, sensor connector is disconnected.(c) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Read temperature value on the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTAhand-held tester.OK:
Temperature value: -40'C (-40°F)
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DI-33DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
01380-02
DTC P0115 Engine Coolant Temp. Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
A thermistor built into the engine coolant temp, sensor changes the resistance value according to the enginecoolant temp.The structure of the sensor and connection to the ECM is the same as in the intake air temp, circuit malfunc-tion shown on page DI-28.If the ECM detects the DTC P0115, it operates fail safe function in which the engine coolant temperatureis assumed to be 80°C (176°F).
DTC No.
P0115
Detection Item
Open or short in engine coolant temp, sensor circuit
Trouble Area
• Open or short in engine coolant temp, sensor circuit
• Engine coolant temp, sensor• ECM
HINT:After confirming DTC P0115, use the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to confirm the enginecoolant temp, from "CURRENT DATA".
Temp. Displayed
-40'C (-40°F)
140°C(284°F)ormore
Malfunction
Open circuit
Short circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine Coolant Temp.Sensor
ECM
14
5V
R
E2
A00310
DI-34DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:If DTC P0100 (Mass Air Flow Meter Circuit Malfunction), P0101 (Mass Air Flow Meter Circuit Range/Performance Problem), P0110 (Intake Air Temp. Circuit Malfunction), P0115 (Engine Coolant Temp.Circuit Malfunction), P0120 (Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch "A" Circuit Malfunction) are outputsimultaneously, E2 (sensor ground) may be open.Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. Because freeze framerecords the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful fordetermining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuelratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.
Connect OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester, and read value ofengine coolant temperature.
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester main switch
ON.CHECK:Read temperature value on the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester.OK:
Same as actual engine coolant temperatureHINT:
If there is open circuit, OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester indicates -40°C (-40eF).• If there is open circuit, OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester indicates 140°C (284°F) or more.
-40° C (-40 °F)... Go to step 2.140°C (284°F) or more... Go to step 4.
OK
Check for intermittent problems(See page Dl-3).
Dl-35DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check for open in harness or ECM.
Engine CoolantTemp. Sensor
BE 6653R70SS
NG
aECM
14-{E4
lrE1
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the engine coolant temp, sensor connector.(b) Connect the sensor wire harness terminals together.(c) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Read temperature value on the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTAhand-held tester.OK:
Temperature value: 140°C (284°F) or more
Confirm good connection at sensor. If OK,replace engine coolant temp, sensor.
Check for open in harness or ECM.
ON
Engine CoolantTemp. Sensor
NG
ECM
E2it E1
A11408
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Connect between terminals THW and E2 of the ECM con-
nector.HINT:Engine coolant temp, sensor connector is disconnected. Be-fore checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for theECM connector {See page IN-30).(c) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Read temperature value on the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTAhand-held tester.OK:
Temperature value: 140°C (284°F) or more
Open in harness between terminals E2 or THW,repair or replace harness.
Confirm good connection at ECM. If OK,check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DI-36DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check for short in harness and ECM.
.ON
Engine CoolantTemp. Sensor
o-
o-
14-d?
ECM•5V
A00397
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the engine coolant temp, sensor connector.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Read temperature value on the OBDII scan tool or TOYOTAhand-held tester.OK:
Temperature value: - 40°C (- 40°F)
Replace engine coolant temp, sensor.
Check for short in harness or ECM.
ON
Intake Air Temp.Sensor
ECM
o-
rnTT fO\ TTJJ
E4 ConnectorY
BE66S3H70S6A09085 A09091
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Disconnect the E4 connector of the ECM.HINT:Engine coolant temp, sensor connector is disconnected.(c) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Read temperature value on the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTAhand-held tester.OK:
Temperature value: -40*C (-40° F)
Repair or replace harness or connector.
NG
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
Dl-37DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DTC P0116 Engine Coolant Temp. Circuit Range/Performance Problem
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0115 (Engine Coolant Temp. Circuit Malfunction) on page DI-33.
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P0116
When the engine starts, the water temp, is -7*C (20''F) or
less. And, 20 min. or more after the engine starts, the enginetemp, sensor
value is 20°C (68°F) or less
(2 trip detection logic)
When the engine starts, the water temp, is between -7°C(20°F)and10°C(50°F)
And, 5 min. or more after tne engine starts, the engine coolant
temp, sensor value is 20 "C (68° F) or less
(2 trip detection logic)
• Engine coolant temp, sensor• Cooling system
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:If DTC P0115 (Engine Coolant Temp. Circuit Malfunction) and P0116 (Engine Coolant Temp. CircuitRange/Performance Problem) are output simultaneously, engine coolant temp, sensor circuit may beopen. Perform troubleshooting of DTC P0115 first.Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. Because freeze framerecords the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful fordetermining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuelratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.
1 Are there any other codes (besides DTC P0116) being output?
YES\ Go to relevant DTC chart.
NO
2 Check thermostat (See page CO-8).
NG\ Replace thermostat.
Replace engine coolant temp, sensor.
01-38DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DTC P0120 Throttle Position Sensor/Switch "A"Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
ThSe
rattle Positionnsor
I
K*»M~
vcVTA
E2
ECM
Jt I
7
V, f
P24296
The throttle position sensor is mounted in the throttle body anddetects the throttle valve opening angle. When the throttle valveis fully closed, a voltage of approximately 0.3 - 0.8 V is appliedto terminal VTA of the ECM. The voltage applied to the termi-nals VTA of the ECM increases in proportion to the openingangle of the throttle valve and becomes approximately 3.2 - 4.9V when the throttle valve is fully opened. The ECM judges thevehicle driving conditions from this signal input from terminalVTA, and uses it as one of the conditions for deciding the air-fuel ratio correction, power increase correction and fuel-cutcontrol etc.
DTC No.
P0120
DTC Detecting Condition
Condition (a) or (b) continues with more than 5 sec.:
(a) VTA < 0.1 V(b) VTA > 4.9 V
Trouble Area
• Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit
•Throttle position sensor•ECM
HINT:After confirming DTC P0120, use the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to confirm the throttlevalve opening percentage.
Throttle valve opening positionexpressed as percentage
Throttle valve fully closed
0%
Approx. 100%
Throttle valve fully open
0%
Approx. 100%
Trouble Area
VC line openVTA line open or short
E2 line open
DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINEDI-39
WIRING DIAGRAM
Throttle Position Sensor Engine ECU
1 *12*2
B-W
1*2 BR
*1:1ZZ-FE*2:2ZZ-GE
vw-
A00311
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:If DTC P0100 (Mass Air Flow Meter Circuit Malfunction), P0106 (Mass Air Flow Meter Circuit Range/Performance Problem), P0110 (Intake Air Temp. Circuit Malfunction), P0115 (Engine Coolant Temp.Circuit Malfunction), P0120 (Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch "A" Circuit Malfunction) are outputsimultaneously, E2 (sensor ground) may be open.Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. Because freeze framerecords the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful fordetermining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuelratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.
Dk-40DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester, read the throttlevalve opening percentage.
NG
FI7052
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tes-
ter to DLC3.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the OBD II scan tool
or TOYOTA hand-held tester main switch ON.CHECK:Read the throttle valve opening percentage.OK:
Throttle valve
Fully open
Fully closed
Throttle valve opening position
expressed as percentage
Approx. 70%
Approx. 10%
Check for intermittent problems(See page DI-3).
Check voltage between terminal VC of throttle position sensor connector andbody ground.
A01842 A02264
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal VC of the throttle positionconnector and body ground.OK:
Voltage: 4.5-5.5V
Go to step 5.
OK
DMIDIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
3 Check throttle position sensor (See page SF-33).
NG\ Replace throttle position sensor.
OK
Check voltage between terminals VTA and E2 of ECM connector.
BE66S3 VTA(+)A09084 X
E2(-)* '
A09092
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals VTA and E2 of the ECMconnector.OK:
Throttle valve
Fully closed
Fully open
Voltage
0.3 -1.0V
3.2 -4.9V
Check for open and short in harness and con-nector between ECM and throttle position sen-sor (VTA or E2 line) (See page IN-30).
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DI-42DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check voltage between terminals VC and E2 of ECM connector.
A090B4E2(-)
AOS092
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Turn ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals VC and E2 of the ECMconnector.OK:
Voltage: 4.5-5.5V
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
Check for open in harness and connector be-tween ECM and sensor (VC line)(See page IN-30).
DI-43DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DOB3-02
DTC P0121 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/SwitchCircuit Range/Performance Problem
"A"
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0120 (Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch "A" Circuit Malfunction) on page DI-38.
DTC No.
P0121
Detection Item
After the vehicle speed has been exceeded 30 km/h (1 9 mph)
even once, the output value of the throttle position sensor is
out of the applicable range while the vehicle speed between 30km/h (19 mph) and 0 km/h (0 mph).(2 trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
•Throttle position sensor
• ECM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
1 Are there any other codes (besides DTC P0121) being output?
YES\ Go to relevant DTC chart.
NO
Replace throttle position sensor.
DI-44DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DTC P0125 Insufficient Temp, for Closed LoopFuel Control
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
To obtain a high purification rate for the CO, HC and NOx components of the exhaust gas, a three-waycatalytic converter is used, but for the most efficient use of the three-way catalytic converter, the air-fuelratio must be precisely controlled so that it is always close to the stoichiometric air-fuel ratio.The oxygen sensor has the characteristic whereby its output voltage changes suddenly in the vicinity of thestoichiometric air-fuel ratio. This is used to detect the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas and providefeedback to the computer for control of the air-fuel ratio.When the air-fuel ratio becomes LEAN, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust increases and the oxygensensor informs the ECM of the LEAN condition (small electromotive force: < 0.45 V).When the air-fuel ratio is RICHER than the stoichiometric air-fuel ratio the oxygen concentration in the ex-haust gas in reduced and the oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the RICH condition (large electromotiveforce: > 0.45V).The ECM judges by the electromotive force from the oxygen sensor whether the air-fuel ratio is RICH orLEAN and controls the injection time accordingly. However, if malfunction of the oxygen sensor causes out-put of abnormal electromotive force, the ECM is unable to perform accurate air-fuel ratio control.The oxygen sensors include a heater which heats the zirconia element. The heater is controlled by the ECM.When the intake air volume is low (the temp, of the exhaust gas is low) current flows to the heater to heatthe sensor for accurate oxygen concentration detection.
AtmosphereIdeal Air-Fuel Mixture
Range
Platinum Electrode
Solid Electrolyte(Zirconia Element)Platinum ElectrodeHeaterCoating (Ceramic)
3IQ.
O
P21342 F17210Exhaust Gas
Richer- Air Fuel Ratio - Leaner
A04485
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P0125
After the engine is warmed up, oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor
1) output does not indicate RICH (S 0.45 V) even once when
conditions (a), (b), and (c) continue for at least 1.5 min.(a) Engine speed: 1,500 rpm or more
(b) Vehide speed: 40 - 100 km/h (25 - 62 mph)(c) Throttle valve does not fully closed
• Fuel system•Air induction system
• injector
• Ignition system
• Gas leakage on exhaust system• Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1)
circuit• Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1)• ECM
DI-45DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
HINT:After confirming DTC P0125, use the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to confirm voltage outputof oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) from "CURRENT DATA".If voltage output of oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) is less than 0.1 V, oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) circuitmay be open or short.WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine Room J/B
(2
1C
c
y
H)7(2
W-B
c
\
-i
_
37
EFI Relay
1 ^ 2 _/^p
EFINo. 1 3
I
f EFI T EFIJ K I No. 2
| 18I W^F"i »^
21L-B ^
B-W
B-RInstrument Panel J/B
5 10
s J* *\ ,
W-B
^ FLMAIN
Battery J2
p J/C
W-B
^
11 ^Idle Air Control Valve
B-R 2
3 1 &W-B B-W ^^
H8 Oxygen Sensor(Bank 1 Sensor 1 )
— . .,_ .j 3
B-W T° "T Y-R ))^3 Y-R C3
, o n> s n> 12
E1 OX1A ' Vf TA-il ' f^V11 1 >_>>M/> f y^ 1_/M| | v~"l>
B i i B ^i 2 |
H9 Oxygen Sensor /" ' /*•))(Bank 1 Sensor 1)
1C
2 R HT r ' TB-W +B MT Y-G (^
(*1) 25A qi ; s> s
E1 OXIB !w i w ^-^' i
BR
BR BR x-^>Engine Room J/B ^ — y
(2F)27
?cA BR ^FJ* A
(2B)3
A BR A A
W-B A A
^ ,M BR
ECM
MREL
RSO
HT1A
OX1A
HT1B
OX1B
E1
7 V7 Ji^ Y j/c *1: Shielded
A09129
DI-46DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:If the vehicle run out of fuel, the air-fuel ratio is LEAN and DTC P0125 will be recorded .The MIL then comes on.Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. Because freeze framerecords the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful fordetermining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuelratio lean or rich, etc at the time of the malfunction.
1 Are there any other codes (besides DTC P0125) being output ?
YES\ Go to relevant DTC chart.
NO
Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester and read value forvoltage output of oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1).
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Warm up engine to normal operating temp (above 75°C).CHECK:Read voltage output of the oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) when engine is suddenly raced.HINT:Perform quick racing to 4,000 rpm 3 times using accelerator pedal.OK:
Both oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) output a RICH signal (0.45 V or more) at least once.
Go to step 10.
Check for open and short in harness and connector between ECM and oxygensensor (bank 1 sensor 1) (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
DM?DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check whether misfire is occurred or not by monitoring DTC and data list.
Perform troubleshooting for misfire (See paqe
OK
5 Check air induction system (See page SF-1).
NG\ Repair or replace induction system.
OK
Check fuel pressure (See page SF-6).
Check and repair fuel pump, fuel pipe line andfilter (See page SF-1).
OK
7 Check injector injection (See page SF-22).
NG \ Replace injector.
Dk-48DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
8 Check gas leakade on exhaust system.
NG\ Repair or replace.
Replace oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1).
9 Perform confirmation driving pattern (See page DM9).
10 Is there DTC P0125 being output again?
YES\ Check and replace ECM.
NO
11 Did vehicle runs out of fuel in the past?
N0\ Check for intermittent problems.
DTC P0125 is caused by running out of fuel.
DI-49DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DB8S-03
DTC P0130 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunction(Bank 1 Sensor 1)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0125 (Insufficient Coolant Temp, for Closed Loop Fuel Control) on page DI-44.
DTC No.
P0130
DTC Detecting Condition
Voltage output of oxygen sensor remains at 0.4 V or more, or
0.55 V or less, during idling after the engine is warmed up (2trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
• Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit
• Heated oxygen sensor
• Air induction system
•EGR system
• Fuel pressure
•Injector
•ECM
HINT:Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closer to the engine body.The oxygen sensor's output voltage and the short-term fuel trim value can be read using theOBDII scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0125 (Insufficient Coolant Temp, for Closed Loop Fuel Control) on page DI-44 for the WIR-ING DIAGRAM.
DI-50
DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN
Vehicle speed
40 km/h(24 mph)
20 sec.or more
20 sec.or more
20 sec.or more
IG SW OFF
100 sec.or more
20 sec.or more
20 sec.or more 30 sec.
A09299
(1) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(2) Switch the TOYOTA hand-held tester from normal mode to check mode (See page DI-3).(3) Start the engine and let the engine idle for 100 sec. or more.(4) Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (24 mph) or more for 20 sec. or more.(5) Let the engine idle for 20 sec. or more.(6) Let the engine idle for 30 sec.HINT:If a malfunction exists, the MIL will light up during step (6).NOTICE:If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of the malfunction will not be possible.If you do not have a TOYOTA hand-held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps(3) to (6), then perform steps (3) to (6) again.INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
1 Are there any other codes (besides DTC P0130) being output?
YES\ Go to relevant DTC chart.
NO
DI-51DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check the output voltage of oxygen sensor during idling.
PREPARATION:Warm up the oxygen sensor the engine at 2,500 rpm for approx. 90 sec.CHECK:Use the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester read the output voltage of the oxygen sensor duringidling.OK:
Oxygen sensor output voltage:Alternates repeatedly between less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V (See the Following table).
•I W - L -r ._
0.55V
0.4 V
0 V
O K N G
yw
N G H 3
PI 8349
NG
Perform confirmation driving pattern(See page DM9).
Check for open and short in harness and connector between ECM and oxygensensor (bank 1 sensor 1) (See page IN-20).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
4 Check air induction system (See page SF-1).
NG \ Repair or replace induction system.
Di-52DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check fuel pressure (See page SF-6).
NG Check and repair fuel pump, fuel pipe line andfilter (See page SF-1).
OK
6 Check injector injection (See page SF-22).
NG\ Replace injector.
OK
Replace oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1).
Perform confirmation driving pattern (See page DI-49).
8 Are there DTC P0130 being output again?
Check for intermittent problems(See page DI-3).
Check and replace ECM.
DI-53DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DECW-02
DTC P0133 Oxygen Sensor Circuit SlowResponce (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0125 (Insufficient Coolant Temp, for Closed Loop Fuel Control) on page DI-44.
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P0133
Response time for the oxygen sensor's voltage output to-
change from rich to lean, or from lean to rich, is 1 sec. or more
during idling after the engine is warmed up
(2 trip detection logic)
•Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit•Heated oxygen sensor
•Air induction system
• EGR system
• Fuel pressure• Injector
• ECM
HINT:Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closer to the engine body.INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scantool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
1 Are there any other codes (besides DTC P0133) being output?
YES\ Go to relevant DTC chart.
DI-54DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check the output voltage of oxygen sensor during idling.
PREPARATION:Warm up the oxygen sensor the engine at 2,500 rpm for approx. 90 sec.CHECK:Use the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester read the output voltage of the oxygen sensor duringidling.OK:
Oxygen sensor output voltage:Alternates repeatedly between less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V (See the Following table).
1 V
0.55V
0.4 V
0 V
O K N G
yvv
N G N G
P18349
Perform confirmation driving pattern(See page DM9).
Check for open and short in harness and connector between ECM and oxygensensor (bank 1 sensor 1) (See page IN-20).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
4 Check air induction system (See page SF-1).
NG\ Repair or replace induction system.
DI-55DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check fuel pressure (See page SF-6).
Check and repair fuel pump, fuel pipe line andfilter (See page SF-1).
6 Check injector injection (See page SF-22).
NG\ Replace injector.
OK
Replace oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1).
Perform confirmation driving pattern (See page DI-49).
Go
8 Are there DTC P0133 being output again?
Check for intermittent problems(See page DI-3).
Check and replace ECM.
DI-56DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DTC P0135 Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater CircuitMalfunction (Bankt Sensorl)
DTC P0141 Heated Oxygen Sensor Heated CircuitMalfunction (Bankl Sensor2)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONRefer to DTC P0125 (Insufficient Coolant Temp, for Closed Loop Fuel Control) on page DI-44.
DTC No.
P0135P0141
DTC Detecting Condition
When the heater operates, heater current exceeds 2 A(2 trip detection logic)
Heater current of 0.2 A or less when the heater operates(2 trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
• Open or short in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor
• Heated oxygen sensor heater•ECM
HINT:Bank 1 refers to the bank that includes cylinder No.1.Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closer to the engine body.Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farther away from the engine body.
WIRING DIAGRAMRefer to DTC P0125 on page DI-44 for the WIRING DIAGRAM.
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
D[-57DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check voltage between terminals HT1, HT2 of ECM connectors and bodyground.
ON
BE 6653A09084
NG
HT1A
HT1B
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Remove the 3 bolts from ECM.(c) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals HT1A, HT1B of ECM con-nectors and body ground.HINT:• Connect terminal HT1A to bank 1 sensor 1.• Connect terminal HT1B to bank 1 sensor 2.
OK:Voltage: 9-14V
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
2 Check resistance of heated oxygen sensor heater (See page
NG\
SF-70).
Replace heated oxygen sensor.
OK
Check and repair harness or connector between EFI main relay (Marking: EFI), heated oxygensensor and ECM (See page IN-30).
Dl-58DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DTC P0136 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunction(Bank 1 Sensor 2)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0125 (Insufficient Coolant Temp, for Closed Loop Fuel Control) on page DM4.
DTC No.
P0136
DTC Detecting Condition
Voltage output of the heated oxygen sensor remains at 0.40 Vor more, or 0.50 V or less when the vehicle is driven at 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more after the engine is warmed up.
(2 trip detection logic).
Trouble Area
• Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit
• Heated oxygen sensor
HINT:Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farther away from the engine body.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0125 (Insufficient Coolant Temp, for Closed Loop Fuel Control) on page DI-44 for the WIR-ING DIAGRAM.
CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN
Y
(a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)HINT:
Vehicle speed
30 km/h(19 mph)
\r± C\A/ nccILa oW \Jrr >
(a)(b)
Idling (c)
60 sec.or more
Once Twice 11 times40 sec. 40 sec. 40 sec.or more or more or more
t i i^ ^
/(d) \ A(d)Y 7(d) A
/ \ (e) / \ (e) / \ (e)
10 sec. 10 sec. 10 sec.
A09300
Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.Switch the hand-held tester from the Normal Mode to the Check (Test) Mode (See page DI-3).Start the engine and let the engine idle for 60 seconds or more.Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (18 mph) or more for 40 seconds or more.Let the engine idle for 10 seconds or more.Preform steps (d) to (e) 9 times.
If a malfunction exists, the CHK ENG (MIL) will be indicated on the multi information display during step (f).NOTICE:If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of the malfunction will not be possible.If you do not have a hand-held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps (c) to (f),then perform steps (c) to (f) again.
DI-59DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
1 Are there any other codes (besides DTC P0136) being output?
YES\ Go to relevant DTC chart.
Check for open and short in harness and connector between ECM and oxygensensor (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check output voltage of oxygen sensor.
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Warm up the engine to normal operating temp.CHECK:Read voltage output of oxygen sensor when engine suddenly raced.HINT:Perform quick racing to 4,000 rpm 3 min. using accelerator pedal.OK:
Oxygen sensor output voltage: Alternates from 0.40 V or less to 0.50 V or more.
Check that each connector is properlyconnected.
NG
Replace oxygen sensor.
DI-60DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DTC P0171 System too Lean (Fuel Trim)
DTC P0172 System too Rich (Fuel Trim)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Fuel trim refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection time. Fuel trimincludes short-term fuel trim and long-term fuel trim.Short-term fuel trim is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the air-fuel ratio at its idealtheoretical value. The signal from the oxygen sensor indicates whether the air-fuel ratio is RICH or LEANcompared to the ideal theoretical value, triggering a reduction in fuel volume if the air-fuel ratio is rich, andan increase in fuel volume if it is lean.Long-term fuel trim is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviationof the short-term fuel trim from the central value due to individual engine differences, wear over time andchanges in the usage environment.If both the short-term fuel trim and long-term fuel trim are LEAN or RICH beyond a certain value, it isdetected as a malfunction and the MIL lights up.
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P0171When the air-fuel ratio feedback is stable after engine warming
up, the fuel trim is considerably in error on the RICH side(2 trip detection logic)
• Air induction system
• Injector blockage»Mass air flow meter
»Engine coolant temp, sensor• Fuel pressure• Gas leakage on exhaust system
•Open or short in A/F sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) circuit
• A/F sensor (bank 1 sensor 1)
P0172
When the air-fuel ratio feedback is stable after engine wanning
up, the fuel trim is considerably in error on the LEAN side.
(2 trip detection logic)
> Injector leak, blockage
• Mass air flow meter
• Engine coolant temp, sensor
»Ignition system»Fuel pressure
»Gas leakage on exhaust system
»Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1)
circuit»Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1)
HINT:When the DTC P0171 is recorded, the actual air-fuel ratio is on the LEAN side. When DTC P0172 isrecorded, the actual air-fuel ratio is on the RICH side.If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the air-fuel ratio is LEAN and DTC P0171 is recorded. The MIL thencomes on.If the total of the short-term fuel trim value and long-term fuel trim value is within ± 38 %, the systemis functioning normally.The oxygen sensor output voltage and the short-term fuel trim value can be read using the OBDII scantool or TOYOTA hand-held tester.
DI-61DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
1 Check air induction system (See page SF-1).
NG\ Repair or replace.
OK
2 Check injector injection (See page SF-22).
NG\ Replace injector.
OK
Check mass air flow meter and engine coolant temp, sensor(See page SF-63, SF-31).
Repair or replace.
4 Check for spark and ignition (See page IG-1).
NG\ Repair or replace.
OK
DI-62DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check fuel pressure (See page SF-6).
Check and repair fuel pump, pressure regulator,fuel pipe line and filter.
6 Check gas leakade on exhaust system.
NG\ Repair or replace.
OK
Check the output voltage of oxygen sensor during idling.
PREPARATION:Warm up the oxygen sensor the engine at 2,500 rpm for approx. 90 sec.CHECK:Use the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester read the output voltage of the oxygen sensor duringidling.OK:
Oxygen sensor output voltage:Alternates repeatedly between less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V (See the following table).
O K N G
yw
N G
AA.j\r\
N 6
Go to step 9.
DI-63DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
8 Check for open and short in harness and connector between ECM and oxygensensor (See page IN-20).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Replace oxygen sensor.
Perform confirmation driving pattern (See page DI-49).
GO
10 Is there DTC P0171 or P0172 being output again?
YES\ Check and replace ECM.
NO
11 Did vehicle runs out of fuel in the past?
N0\ Check for intermittent problems.
YES
DTC P0171 or P0172 is caused by running outof fuel.
DI-64
0*399-03
DTC P0300 Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
DTC P0302 Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected
DTC P0303 Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected
DTC P0304 Cylinder 4 Misfire Detected
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Misfire: The ECM uses the crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor to monitor changes inthe crankshaft rotation for each cylinder.The ECM counts the number of times the engine speed change rate indicates that misfire has occurred. Andwhen the misfire rate equals or exceeds the count indicating that the engine condition has deteriorated, theMIL lights up.If the misfire rate is high enough and the driving conditions will cause catalyst overheating, the MIL blinkswhen misfiring occurs.
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P0300P0301P0302P0303P0304
Misfiring of random cylinders is detected during any particular200 or 1,000 revolutionsFor any particular 200 revolutions for the engine, misfiring isdetected which can cause catalyst overheating(This causes MIL to blink)
• Open or short in engine wire• Connector connection• Vacuum hose connection• Ignition system• Injector• Fuel pressure• Manifold absolute pressure sensor• Engine coolant temp, sensor• Compression pressure
•Valve clearance• Valve timing• WTL system (Locker arm)• ECM
HINT:When the 2 or more codes for a misfiring cylinder are recorded repeatedly but no random misfire code isrecorded, it indicates that the misfires were detected and recorded at different times.
DI-65DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
WIRING DIAGRAM
Instrument Panel J/B Engine Room J/B ECM
#10
#20
#30
#40
A09119
DI-66DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN
(a) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool.(b) Record DTC and the freeze frame data.(c) Use the TOYOTA hand-held tester to set to Check Mode (See page DI-3).(d) Drive the vehicle several times with the engine speed, load and its surrounding range shown with EN-
GINE SPD, CALC LOAD in the freeze frame data or MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the data list.If you have no TOYOTA hand-held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after the symptom is simulatedthe first time. Then repeat the simulation process again.
HINT:In order to memorize DTC of misfire, it is necessary to drive around MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in thedata list for the following period of time.
Engine Speed
Idling
lOOOrpm
2000 rpm
3000 rpm
Time
3 minutes 30 seconds or more
3 minutes or more
1 minute 30 seconds or more
1 minute or more
(e) Check whether there is misfire or not by monitoring DTC and the freeze frame data. After that, recordthem.
(f) Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds.
DI-67DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:If is the case that DTC besides misfire is memorized simultaneously, first perform the troubleshootingfor them.Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. Because freeze framedata records the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is usefulfor determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuelratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.When the vehicle is brought to the workshop and the misfire is not occurred, misfire can be confirmedby reproducing the condition or freeze frame data. Also, after finishing the repair, confirm that thereis no misfire. (See the confirmation driving pattern)When either of SHORT FT #1, LONG FT #1, SHORT FT #2 or LONG FT #2 in the freeze frame datais besides the range of ±20%, there is a possibility that the air-fuel ratio is inclining either to "rich"(-20% or less) or "lean" (+20% or more).When COOLANT TEMP in the freeze frame data is less than 80'C (176°F), there is a possibility ormisfire only during warming up.In the case that misfire cannot be reproduced, the reason may be because of the driving with lack orfuel, the use of improper fuel, a stain of ignition plug, and etc.
1 Check wire harness, connector and vacuum hose in engine room.
CHECK:(a) Check the connection conditions of wire harness and connector.(b) Check the disconnection, piping and break of vacuum hose.
Repair or replace, then confirm that there is nomisfire (See the confirmation driving pattern).
DI-68DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check spark plug and spark of misfiring cylinder.
1.1 mm (0.043 in.) I
r—'
K3O317IG01S1
A09027 A09093
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the high-tension cord.(b) Remove the spark plug.CHECK:(a)(b)OK:
Check for carbon deposits on electrode.Check electrode gap.
(b) No large carbon deposit present.Not wet with gasoline or oil.(c) Electrode gap: 1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
PREPARATION:(a) Install the spark plug to the high-tension code.(b) Disconnect the injector connector.(c) Ground spark plug.CHECK:Check if spark occurs while engine is being cracked.NOTICE:To prevent excess fuel being injected from the injectorsduring this test, do'nt crank the engine for more than 5-10seconds at a time.OK:
Spark jumps across electrode gap.
Replace or check ignition system (See pageIG-1).
OK
Check voltage of ECM terminal for injector of failed cylinder.
ON
#40 #30 #20 #10
A09084 A09092
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between applicable terminal of the ECM con-nector and body ground.OK:
Voltage: 9-14V
Reference: INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPEINJECTOR SIGNAL WAVEFORMWith the engine idling, measure between terminals #10 - #40 and E01 of the ECM connector.
DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINEDI-S9
HINT:The correct waveforms are shown.
Injector Signal Waveform (Magnification)
10V/Division
GND
FI6588 FI6538
10V/Division
GND100 m sea/Division (Idling)
Injection duration1 m sec./Division (Idling)
A00064
Go to step 5.
NG
4 Check resistance of injector of misfiring cylinder (See page SF-18).
NG\ Replace injector.
OK
Check for open and short in harness and con-nector between injector and ECM (See page
Check fuel pressure (See page SF-6).
Check and repair fuel pump, pressure regulator,fuel pipe line and filter.
DI-70DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
OK
6 Check injector injection (See page SF-22).
NG\ Replace injector.
OK
Check mass air flow meter and engine coolant temp, sensor (See page SF-31,SF-63).
Repair or replace.
OK
Check compression pressure, valve clear-ance valve timing and locker arm (See pageEM-3, EM-4, EM-22, EM-48).
DI-71DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DG8A-03
DTC P0325 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The knock sensor is fitted to the cylinder block to detect engine knocking. This sensor contains a piezoelec-tric element which generates a voltage when it becomes deformed, which occurs when the cylinder blockvibrates due to knocking. If engine knocking occurs, ignition timing is retarded to suppress it.
DTC No.
P0325
DTC Detecting Condition
No knock sensor 1 signal to ECM with engine speed, 2,000
rpm or more
Trouble Area
• Open or short in knock sensor 1 circuit
• Knock sensor 1 (looseness)
•ECM
HINT:If the ECM detects above diagnosis conditions, it operates the fail safe function in which the corrective retardangle value is set to the maximum value.WIRING DIAGRAM
ECM
WW
27
K1Knock Sensor
(Shielded)
KNK1
A09120
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
DI-72DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check continuity between terminal KNK of ECM connector and body ground.
LOCK
BE66S3A09086
KNK1A09094
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Disconnect the E5 connector of the ECM.CHECK:Measure resistance between terminal KNK of the ECM connec-tor and body ground.OK:
Resistance: 1 Mii or higher
Go to step 3.
Check knock sensor 1 (See page SF-68).
OK
Replace knock sensor 1.
Check for open and short in harness and connector between ECM and knocksensor 1 (See page IN-30).
OK
Repair or replace harness or connector.
DI-73DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
4 Does malfunction disappear when a good knock sensor 1 is installed?
YES\ Replace knock sensor 1.
NO
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
0.5V/Division
KNK signal waveform
5 m sec./Division
0.5V/Division
100 H sec./Division
R6510R6675 A00406
Reference: INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPEWith the engine racing (4,000 rpm) measure between ter-minal KNK of the ECM connector and body ground.
HINT:The correct waveforms are as shown.
Spread the time on the horizontal axis, and confirm thatperiod of the wave is 80 ji sec.(Normal mode vibration frequency of knock sensor:12.5 kHz (1ZZ-FE), 7.1 kHz (2ZZ-GE))
HINT:If normal mode vibration frequency is not 7.6 kHz the sensor ismalfunctioning.
Dl-74DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
01338-02
DTC P0335 Crankshaft PositionMalfunction
Sensor "A" Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Crankshaft position sensor (NE signal) consist of a signal plate and pick up coil.The NE signal plate has 34 teeth and is mounted on the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34signals of every engine revolution. The ECM detects the standard crankshaft angle based on the G22 sig-nals, and the actual crankshaft angle the engine speed by the NE signals.
DTC No.
P0335
DTC Detecting Condition
No crankshaft position sensor signal to ECM during cranking.
(2 trip detection logic)
No crankshaft position sensor signal to ECM with enginespeed 600 rpm or more(2 trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
• Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit.
• Crankshaft position sensor
•Signal plate (Timing belt guide)• Crankshaft timing pulley• ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
BR
C4Crankshaft Position Sensor
2
W
C1 Crankshaft Position Sensor2 ~R_r\A/"
J1J/C
(Shielded)
w
(Shielded)
15G
A09121
DI-75DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Perform troubleshooting of DTC 335 1st. If notrouble is found, troubleshoot the following mechanicalsystem.Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. Because freeze framerecords the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful fordetermining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuelratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.
Check resistance of crankshaft position sensor (See page IG-1).
G and NE Signal Waveforms
5V/Division
OK
20 msec./Division (Idling)A03961
Reference: INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE
During cranking or idling, check between terminals G2 andNE-, NE and NE- of the ECMHINT:The correct waveforms are as shown.
Replace crankshaft position sensor.
Check for open and short in harness and connector between ECM andcrankshaft position sensor (See page IN-30).
OK
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Inspect sensor installation and teeth of crankshaft timing pulley(See page IG-11, EM-15).
OK
Tighten the sensor.Replace crankshaft timing pulley.
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DI-76DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DTC P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor CircuitMalfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Camshaft position sensor (G22 signal) consist of signal plate and pick up coil.The G22 signal plate has one tooth on its outer circumference and is mounted on the exhaust camshaft.When the camshafts rotate, the protrusion on the signal plate and the air gap on the pick up coil change,causing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pick up coil.The NE signal plate has 34 teeth and is mounted on the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34signals for every engine revolution. The ECM detects the standard crankshaft angle based on the G22 sig-nals and the actual crankshaft angle and the engine speed by the NE signals.
DTC No.
P0340
DTC Detecting Condition
No camshaft position sensor signal to ECM during cranking.
(2 trip detection logic)
No camshaft position sensor signal to ECM with engine speed600 rpm or more
Trouble Area
•Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit
• Camshaft position sensor
• Camshaft timing pulley• ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0335 (Crankshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit Malfunction) on page DI-74 for the WIRINGDIAGRAM.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
Check resistance of camshaft position sensor (Signal generator) (See pageIG-1).
Reference: INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPERefer to DTC P0335 (Crankshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit Malfunction) on page DI-74 for the INSPEC-TION USING OSCILLOSCOPE.
Replace camshaft position sensor.
DI-77DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check for open and short in harness and connector between ECM and camshaftposition sensor (See page 1N-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Inspect sensor installation and tooth of camshaft timing pulley (See pageEM-15).
Tighten the sensor.Replace camshaft timing pulley.
OK
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DJ-78DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DG3G-C3
DTC P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The ECM compares the waveform of the oxygen sensor located before the catalyst with the waveform ofthe oxygen sensor located behind the catalyst to determine whether or not catalyst performance has deterio-rated.Air-fuel ratio feedback compensation keeps the waveform of the oxygen sensor before the catalyst repeat-edly changing back and forth from rich to lean.If the catalyst is functioning normally, the waveform of the oxygen sensor behind the catalyst switches backand forth between rich and lean much more slowly than the waveform of the oxygen sensor before the cata-lyst.But when both waveforms change at a similar rate, it indicates that catalyst performance has deteriorated.
Waveform of Heated OxygenSensor before Catalyst Normal Catalyst Waveform of Heated Oxygen
Sensor behind Catalyst
FI7081
DTC No.
P0420
DTC Detecting Condition
After the engine and the catalyst are warmed up, and while the
vehicle is driven within the set vehicle and engine speed range,
the waveforms of the oxygen sensors (bank 1 sensor 1 and
bank 1 sensor 2) have the same amplitude
(2 trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
• Gas leakage on exhaust system
• Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit
• Heated oxygen sensor
• Three-way catalytic converter
DI-79DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
CONFIRMATION ENGINE RACING PATTERN
Engine Speed
2,500 ~ 3,000 rpm -
Idling -
IG SW OFFTime
FI7132
(a)
(b)(c)(d)
Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3, or connect the probe of the oscilloscope betweenterminals OX1, OX2 and E1 of the ECM connector.Start engine and warm it up with all accessories switched OFF until water temp, is stable.Race the engine at 2,500 - 3,000 rpm for about 3 min.After confirming that the waveforms of the oxygen sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 (OX1), oscillate around 0.5V during feedback to the ECM, check the waveform of the oxygen sensor, bank 1 sensor 2 (OX2).
HINT:• If there is a malfunction in the system, the waveform of the
oxygen sensor, bank 1 sensor 2 (OX2), is almost thesame as that of the oxygen sensor, bank 1 sensor 1(OX1), on the left.
• There are some cases where, even though a malfunctionexists, the MIL may either light up or not light up.
0
1.0V
ov
X Signal Waveform (Oscilloscope)
\
/-~ \\Jj
rIJ
;i
\\\ 1-1
— v•>
\
y
/
**
200 m sec. /Division FI6514
DI-80DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
1 Are there any other codes (besides DTC P0420) being output?
YES\ Go to relevant DTC chart.
NO
2 Check gas leakade on exhaust system.
NG\ Repair or replace.
OK
3 Check oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) (See page DI-49).
NG\ Repair or replace.
OK
4 Check oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 2) (See page DI-58).
NG\ Repair or replace.
OK
Replace three-way catalytic converter.
DI-81DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
rauz-07
DTC P0440 Evaporative Emission Control SystemMalfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe vapor pressure sensor, VSV for canister closed valve (CCV) and VSV for pressure switching valve areused to detect abnormalities in the evaporative emission control system.The ECM decides whether there is an abnormality in the evaporative emission control system based on thevapor pressure sensor signal.DTC P0440 or P0442 is recorded by the ECM when evaporative emissions leak from the components withinthe dotted line in Fig. 1 below, or when the vapor pressure sensor malfunctions.
Fig-1
V-y- >
y VSV forA ccv
VSV forpressure jSwitching!Valve !
(7)
(1)
Vapor PressureSensor
Fuel Tank OverFill Check Valve
A10140
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P0440Fuel tank pressure is atmospheric pressure after vehicle is
driven for 20 min. (2 trip detection logic)
• Hose or tube cracked, hole, damaged or loose seal ((3) in
Fig-1)• Fuel tank cap incorrectly installed
»Fuel tank cap cracked or damaged
• Vacuum hose cracked, holed, blocked, damaged or discon-
nected ((1) or (2) in Fig. 1)
• Fuel tank cracked, holed or damaged• Charcoal canister cracked, holed or damaged> Open or short in vapor pressure sensor circuit
• Vapor pressure sensor• Fuel tank over fill check valve cracked or damaged
• ECM
01-82DIAGNOSTICS _-_ ENGINE
WIRING DIAGRAM
V6Vapor Pressure Sesnsor
3
ECM
R
L-B
BR
R R
_2_
4
L-B
BR
Instrument Panel J/B (Pressure
BR
b
1
Relay
-0—-0-
— TJ -
13 frL
2
E
[ID.
=H^0. 2
^3^1
;FI^1^OJ
• / ps• i_J
1916
jafc/pr^l
15•^ / p>•^v^ J
12-j^TvcT}
-mf ^Ti^^±2J1
Jk/"oA^
* :r\ ^/^rr> 1 ^^ ^ vfTTn >B_w^^ i!l> B-W ^ nVL -l G-0 (
V4 VSV ~(Canister Closed Valve)
inn 1B-W 2 1 V-W '
V5VSV(EVAP)
rrr\ t
FUW 2 1 G-0 '
L-B
W-B
cy=^o It It \F^/B— R i-i tlAIKl Tf
18
23>" -N
E3
17
21
VC
PTNK
E2
TBP
CCV
EVP1
MREL
A0912S
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:
If DTC P0441, P0446, P0450 or P0451 is output after DTC P0440 or P0442, first troubleshoot DTCP0441, P0446, P0450 or P0451. If no malfunction is detected, troubleshoot DTC P0440 or P0442 next.Ask the customer whether, after the MIL came on, the customer found the fuel tank cap loose and tight-ened it. Also ask the customer whether the fuel tank cap was loose when refuelling. If the fuel tank capwas not loose, it was the cause of the DTC. If the fuel tank cap was not loose or if the customer wasnot sure if it was loose, troubleshoot according to the following procedure.Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. Because freeze framerecords the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful fordetermining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air-fuelratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.When the ENGINE RUN TIME in the freeze frame data is less than 200 seconds, carefully check theVSV for EVAP, charcoal canister and vapor pressure sensor.
DI-33DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check whether hose close to fuel tank have been modified, and check whetherthere are signs of any accident near fuel tank or charcoal canister.
a
OK
A10274
CHECK:Check for cracks, deformation and loose connection of the fol-lowing parts:
• Fuel tank• Charcoal canister
Fuel tank filler pipe• Hoses and tubes around fuel tank and charcoal
canister
Repair or replace.
2 Check that fuel tank cap is TOYOTA genuine parts.
NG\ Replace to TOYOTA genuine parts.
OK
3 Check that fuel tank cap is correctly installed.
NG\ Correctly install fuel tank cap.
4 Check fuel tank cap (See page EC-6).
NG\ Replace fuel tank cap.
OK
DL-34DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check filter neck for damage.
PREPARATION:Remove the fuel tank cap.CHECK:Visually inspect the filler neck for damage.
Replace filler pipe.
Check vacuum hoses between vapor pressure sensor and fuel tank, and char-coal canister and VSV for pressure switching valve and VSV for pressure switch-ing valve and charcoal canister.
CHECK:(a) Check that the vacuum hose is connected correctly.(b) Check the vacuum hose for looseness and disconnection.(c) Check the vacuum hose for cracks, hole and damage.
Repair or replace.
OK
Check hose and tube between fuel tank and charcoal canister.
CHECK:(a) Check for proper connection of the fuel tank and fuel evap pipe (See page EC-6), fuel evap pipe and
fuel tube under the floor, fuel tube under the floor and charcoal canister.(b) Check the hose and tube for cracks, hole and damage.
Repair or replace.
8 Check charcoal canister for cracks, hole and damage (See page EC-6).
NG\ Replace charcoal canister.
DI-85DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check voltage between terminals VC and E2 of ECM connector.
A09084E2(-)
A09092
OK
CHECK:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure the voltage between terminals VC and E2 of the ECMconnector.OK:
Voltage: 4.5 - 5.5 V
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
10 Check voltage between terminals PTNK and E2 of ECM connectors.
M9084
PTNK (+)
E2(-)A09092
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Remove the fuel tank cap.(c) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure the voltage between terminals PTNK and E2 of theECM connectors.OK:
Voltage: 3.3 V
Go to step 12.
DI-86DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
11 Check for open and short in harness and connector between vapor pressuresensor and ECM (See page IN-30).
NG Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Replace vapor pressure sensor.
12 Check fuel tank and fuel tank over fill check valve for cracks and damage.
Replace fuel tank or fuel tank over fill checkvalve.
It is likely that vehicle user did not properly close fuel tank cap. Please explain to customer howto properly install fuel tank cap.
DI-87DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
01603-01
DTC P0441 Evaporative Emission Control SystemIncorrect Purge Flow
DTC P0446 Evaporative Emission Control System VentControl Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe vapor pressure sensor, VSV for canister closed valve (CCV), VSV for pressure switching valve are usedto detect abnormalities in the evaporative emission control system.The ECM decides whether there is an abnormality in the evaporative emission control system based on thevapor pressure sensor signal.DTCs P0441 and P0446 are recorded by the ECM when evaporative emissions leak from the componentswithin the dotted line in Fig. 1 below, or when there is a malfunction in either the VSV for EVAP, the VSV forpressure switching valve, or in the vapor pressure sensor itself.
Fig. 1
Vapor PressureSensor
Fuel Tank Over(1) Fill Check Valve
VSV forPressureSwitching Valve
A10U2
DI-S8DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P0441
Pressure in charcoal canister does not drop during purge con-trol (2 trip detection logic)
During purge cut-off, pressure in charcoal canister is very low
compared with atmospheric pressure (2 trip detection logic)
When VSV for pressure switching valve is turned OFF, pres-
sure in fuel tank is maintained at atmospheric pressure (2 tripdetection logic)
P0446When VSV for pressure switching valve is OFF, ECM judges
that there is no continuity between vapor pressure sensor and
fuel tank (2 trip detection logic)
When VSV for CCV is ON, pressure in charcoal canister and
fuel tank is maintained at atmospheric pressure (2 trip detec-tion logic)
•Open or short in vapor pressure sensor circuit• Vapor pressure sensor•Open or short in VSV circuit for EVAP• VSVforEVAP
• Open or short in VSV circuit for vapor pressure sensor
> VSV for vapor pressure sensor
• Charcoal canister cracked, hole or damaged
• Fuel tank over fill check valve cracked or damaged
• ECM
WIRING DIAGRAMRefer to DTC P0440 on page DI-81.
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:
If DTC P0441, P0446, P0450 or P0451 is output after DTC P0440,first troubleshoot DTC P0441,P0446, P0450 or P0451. If no malfunction is detected, troubleshoot DTC P0440 next.
• Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. Because freeze framerecords the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful fordetermining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air-fuelratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.
• When the ENGINE RUN TIME in the freeze frame data is less than 200 seconds, carefully check theVSV for EVAP, charcoal canister and vapor pressure sensor.
TOYOTA hand-held tester:
Check whether hose close to fuel tank have been modified, and check whetherthere are signs of any accident near fuel tank or charcoal canister (See pageDI-81).
Repair or replace.
2 Check that fuel tank cap is TOYOTA genuine parts.
NG\ Replace to TOYOTA genuine parts.
DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINEDI-89
3 Check that fuel tank cap is correctly installed.
NG\ Correctly install fuel tank cap.
OK
4 Check fuel tank cap (See page EC-6).
NG\ Replace fuel tank cap.
5 Check filler neck for damage.
NG\ Replace filler pipe.
Check vacuum hoses between vapor pressure sensor and fuel tank, and char-coal canister and VSV for pressure switching valve and VSV for pressure switch-ing valve and charcoal canister.
Repair or connect VSV or sensor connector.
OK
7 Check hose and tube between fuel tank and charcoal canister.
NG\ Repair or replace.
DI-90DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
8 Check VSV connector for EVAP, VSV connector for CCV, VSV connector for pres-sure switching valve and vapor pressure sensor connector for looseness anddisconnection.
Repair or connect VSV or sensor connector.
OK
Check vacuum hoses ((8), (9), (10) and (11) in Fig. 1 in circuit description).
CHECK:(a) Check that the vacuum hose is connected correctly.(b) Check the vacuum hose for looseness and disconnection.(c) Check the vacuum hose for cracks, hole, damage and blockage.
Repair or replace.
OK
^ -^
10 Check voltage between terminals VC and E2 of ECM connector (See pageDI-81).
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
OK
11 Check voltage between terminals PTNK and E2 of ECM connectors (See pageDI-81).
Go to step 13.
NG
DI-91DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
12 Check for open and short in harness and connector between vapor pressuresensor and ECM (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Replace vapor pressure sensor.
13 Check purge flow.
To Throttle BodyPREPARATION:(a) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the TOYOTA hand-
held tester.(c) Disconnect the vacuum hose from the VSV for the EVAP
from the charcoal canister.(d) Start the engine.CHECK:When the VSV for the EVAP is operated by the TOYOTA hand-held tester, check whether the disconnected hose applies suc-tion to your finger.OK:
VSV is ON:Disconnected hose applies suction to your finger.VSV is OFF:Disconnected hose applies no suction to your finger.
OK Go to step 16.
DI-92DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
14 Check vacuum hose between intake manifold and VSV for EVAP, and VSV forEVAP and charcoal canister.
CHECK:(a) Check that the vacuum hose is connected correctly.(b) Check the vacuum hose for looseness and disconnection.(c) Check the vacuum hose for cracks, hole, damage and blockage.
Repair or replace.
OK
15 Check operation of VSV for EVAP (See page SF-57).
OK\ Go to step 16.
Replace VSV and charcoal canister,and then clean the vacuum hose between throttle body andVSV for EVAP, and VSV for EVAP and charcoal canister.
16 Check for open and short in harness and connector between EFI main relay(Marking: EFI) and VSV for EVAP, and VSV for EVAP and ECM (See pageIN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DI-93DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
17 Check VSV for CCV.
A10150VSV is ON VSV is OFF
A10281
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Diconnect the vacuum hose for the VSV for the CCV from
the charcoal canister.(c) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the TOYOTA hand-
held tester main switch ON.(d) Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the TOYOTA hand-
held tester.
Check the VSV operation when it is operated by the TOYOTAhand-held tester.OK:
VSV is ON:Air does not flow from port E to port F.VSV is OFF:Air from port E flows out through port F.
Go to step 21.
1 8 Check vacuum hose between VSV for CCV and charcoal canister.
CHECK:(a) Check that the vacuum hose is connected correctly.(b) Check the vacuum hose for looseness and disconnection.(c) Check the vacuum hose for cracks, hole damage and blockage.
Repair or replace.
19 Check operation of VSV for CCV.
Go to step 20.
NG
DI-94DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Replace VSV and charcoal canister, and then clean vacuum hose between charcoal canister andVSVforCCV.
20 Check for open and short in harness and connector between EFI main relay(Marking: EFI) and VSV for CCV, and VSV for CCV and ECM (See page IN-30).
OK
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
21 Check VSV for pressure switching valve.
VSV is OFFA10801
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the TOYOTA hand-
held tester main switch ON.(c) Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the TOYOTA hand-
held tester.CHECK:Check the VSV operation when it is operated by the TOYOTAhand-held tester.OK:
VSV is ON:Air from port E flows out through port F.VSV is OFF:Air does not flow from port E to port F.
Go to step 24.
22 Check operation of VSV for pressure switching valve (See page SF-61).
OK\ Go to step 23.
DI-95DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
NG
Replace VSV and charcoal canister, and then clean vacuum hose between charcoal canister andVSV for pressure switching valve, and VSV for pressure switching valve and fuel tank.
23 Check for open and short in harness and connector between EFI main relay(Marking: EFI) and VSV for pressure switching valve, and VSV for pressureswitching valve and ECM (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
24 Check fuel tank.
,START
VSV lor EVAP
VSV for CCV ON
OFF;
VSV for presume <-)N
Switching Valve OFF
11-(
1II
p
i 30si
X. Measure» /_!*_. _Voltage
PTNK (+)
At 0620A09064
E2(-)
A09095
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(c) Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the TOYOTA hand-
held tester.(d) Start the engine.(e) The VSV for the CCV is ON by the TOYOTA hand-held
tester.(f) The VSV for the EVAP is OFF, and the VSV for the pres-
sure switching valve is ON by the TOYOTA hand-heldtester and remains on for 30 sec.
CHECK:Measure the voltage between terminals PTNK and E2 of theECM connectors after switching the VSV for the EVAP fromOFF to ON, and the VSV for the pressure switching valve fromON to OFF.OK:
Voltage: 2.5 V or less
Replace fuel tank.
OK
DI-96DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
25 Check charcoal canister.
START
VSV for CCV
ON
ON
OFF
VSV for presuure ON
Switching Valve OFF
30 sec*leasure
Voltage
PTNK (+}
BE6653A10621
A09084
E2(-)
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(c) Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the TOYOTA hand-
held tester.(d) Start the engine.(e) The VSV for the CCV and the VSV for the pressure
switching valve are ON by the TOYOTA hand-held tester.(f) The VSV for the EVAP is OFF by the TOYOTA hand-held
tester and remains on for 30 sec.CHECK:Measure the voltage between terminals PTNK and E2 of theECM connectors after switching the VSV for the EVAP fromOFF to ON.OK:
Voltage: 2.5 V or less
Replace charcoal canister.
26 Remove chacoal canister and check it (See page EC-6).
NG\ Replace charcoal canister.
OK
27 Check fuel tank over fill check valve (See page EC-6).
Replace fuel tank over fill check valve or fueltank.
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DI-97DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
OBD II scan tool (excluding TOYOTA hand-held tester):
Check whether hose close to fuel tank have been modified, and check whetherthere are signs of any accident near fuel tank or charcoal canister.
Repair or replace.
OK
2 Check that fuel tank cap is TOYOTA genuine parts.
NG\ Replace to TOYOTA genuine parts.
3 Check that fuel tank cap is correctly installed.
NG\ Correctly install fuel tank cap.
4 Check fuel tank cap (See page EC-6).
NG\ Replace fuel tank cap.
OK
5 Check filler neck for damage.
NG\ Replace filler pipe.
Dl-98DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
OK
Check VSV connector for EVAP, VSV connector for CCV, VSV connector for pres-sure switching valve and vapor pressure sensor connector for looseness anddisconnection.
Repair or connect VSV or sensor connector.
OK
Check vacuum hoses ((8), (9), (10) and (11) in Fig. 1 in circuit description).
CHECK:(a) Check that the vacuum hose is connected correctly.(b) Check the vacuum hose for looseness and disconnection.(c) Check the vacuum hose for cracks, hole damage and blockage.
Repair or replace.
OK
8 Check voltage between terminals VC and E2 of ECM connector (See pageDI-81).
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
OK
Check voltage between terminals PTNK and E2 of ECM connectors (See pageDI-81).
Go to step 11.
NG
DI-99DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
10 Check for open and short in harness and connector between vapor pressuresensor and ECM (See page IN-30).
NG Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Replace vapor pressure sensor.
11 Check VSVfor EVAP.
ON
EVP1
A09084
PI83 VSVisON VSV is OFF A09097
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Check VSV function.
(1) Connect between terminal EVP1 of the ECM con-nector and body ground (VSV ON).
(2) Disconnect between terminal EVP1 of the ECMconnector and body ground (VSV OFF).
OK:(1) VSVisON:Air from port E fows out through port F.(2) VSV is OFF:Air does not flow from port E to port F.
Go to step 14.
NG
DI-100DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
12 Check operation of VSV for EVAP (See page SF-57).
NG\ Go to step 13.
Replace VSV and clean vacuum hoses between throttle body and VSV for EVAP, and VSV forEVAP and charcoal canister, and then check charcoal canister.
13 Check for open and short in harness and connector between EFI main relay(Marking: EFI) and VSV for EVAP, and VSV for EVAP and ECM (See page IN-30)
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
14 Check VSV for CCV.
(2)°"CCV
/
Y
A10312 '\/oi/ • *\u f-fy* VSV fc OFFVoV IS ON iT wv io wn •A10281 ^^\J A09098
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover,(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Check the VSV function.
(1) Connect between terminal CCV of the ECM con-nector and body ground (VSV ON).
(2) Disconnect between terminal CCV of the ECM con-nector and body ground (VSV OFF).
OK:VSV is ON:Air does not flow from port E to port F.VSV is OFF:Air from port E flows out through port F.
OK \ Go to step 17.
DI-101DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
NG
15 Check operation of VSV for CCV (See page SF-59).
OK\ Go to step 16.
NG
Replace VSV and charcoal canister, and then clean vacuum hoses between charcoal canisterand VSV for CCV.
16 Check for open and short in harness and connector between EFI main relay(Marking: EFI) and VSV for CCV, and VSV for CCV and ECM (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DM02DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
17 Check VSV for pressure switching valve.
ON
TBP
Air Air
BEB6S3A09084 VSV JS ONA10278
VSV is OFFA09M9
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Check the VSV function.
(1) Connect between terminal TBP of the ECM connec-tor and body ground (VSV ON).
(2) Disconnect between terminal TBP of the ECM con-nector and body ground (VSV OFF).
OK:(1) VSV is ON:Air from port E flows out through port F.(2) VSV is OFF:Air does not flow from port E to port F.
Go to step 20.
18 Check operation of VSV for pressure switching valve (See page SF-61).
Go to step 19.
NG
Replace VSV and charcoal canister, and then clean vacuum hoses between charcoal canisterand VSV for pressure switching valve, and VSV for pressure switching valve and fuel tank.
DM03DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
19 Check for open and short in harness and connector between EFI main relay(Marking: EFI) and VSV for pressure switching valve, and VSV for pressureswitching valve and ECM (See page iN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
20 Check fuel tank over fill check valve (See page EC-6).
Replace fuel tank over fill check valve or fueltank.
Check and replace charcoal canister (Seepage EC-6).
DM04DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DI1K(H)7
DTC P0450 Evaporative Emission Control SystemPressure Sensor Malfunction
DTC P0451 Evaporative Emission Control SystemPressure Sensor Range/Performance
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe vapor pressure sensor, VSV for canister closed valve (CCV) and VSV for pressure switching valve areused to detect abnormalities in the evaporative emission control system.The ECM decides whether there is an abnormality in the evaporative emission control system based on thevapor pressure sensor signal.DTC P0450 or P0451 is recorded by the ECM when the vapor pressure sensor malfunction.
^VlT *y vsv for
A ccvVSV for
VSV forpressureSwitching Valve
Vapor Pressure Sensor
Fuel Tank OverFill Check Valve
A1014S
DTC No.
P0450
P0451
DTC Detecting Condition
10 seconds or less after engine starting condition (a) or (b)
continues for 7 seconds or more: (2 trip detection logic)
(a) Vapor pressure sensor value < -4-0 kPa (-30 mmHg, -1 .2in.Hg)
(b) Vapor pressure sensor value £ 2.0 kPa (15 mmHg, 0.6in.Hg)
Vapor pressure sensor output extremely changes under condi-tions of (a) or (b): (2 trip detection logic)
(a) Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (Omph), Engine speed: Idling and
VSV for pressure switching valve is OFF(b) High vaver pressure senser
Trouble Area
• Open or short in vapor pressure sensor circuit
• Vapor pressure sensor
• ECM
DM 05DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
WIRING DIAGRAMRefer to DTC P0440 on page DI-81.
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:
If DTC P0441, P0446, P0450 or P0451 is output after DTC P0440, first trouble shoot DTC P0441,P0446 P0450 or P0451. If no malfunction is detected, troubleshoot DTC P0440 next.Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. Because freeze framerecords the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful fordetermining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air-fuelratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.When the ENGINE RUN TIME in the freeze frame data is less than 200 seconds, carefully check theVSV for EVAP, charcoal canister and vapor pressure sensor.
Check voltage between terminals VC and E2 of ECM connector (See pageDI-81).
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
Check voltage between terminals PTNK and E2 of ECM connectors (See pageDI-81).
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
Check for open and short in harness and connector between vapor pressuresensor and ECM (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Replace vapor pressure sensor.
DM06DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Dt38H~Q2
DTC P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The No.1 vehicle speed sensor outputs a 4-pulse signal for every revolution of the rotor shaft, which is ro-tated by the transmission output shaft via the driven gear. After this signal is converted into a more preciserectangular waveform by the waveform shaping circuit inside the combination meter, it is then transmittedto the ECM. The ECM determines the vehicle speed based on the frequency of these pluse signals.
4-Pulse
No.1 Vehicle JUlfUl-Speed Sensor
4-Pulse
JUIR/L
ECM
TransaxleVehicle Speed Sensor
Q00515QOO514
A004U
DTC No.
P0500
DTC Detecting Condition
During vehicle is being driven, no vehicle speed sensor signal
to ECM
(2 trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
• Combination meter
• Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit
•Vehicle speed sensor• ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
ECMCombination Meter
Instrument Panel J/B22
W-RSPD
DM 07DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
Check operation of speedometer.
CHECK:Drive the vehicle and check if the operation of the speedmeter in the combination meter is normal.HINT:The vehicle speed sensor is operating normally if the speedometer display is normal.
Check speedometer circuit. See combinationmeter troubleshooting (See page BE-2).
Check voltage between terminal SPD of ECM connector and body ground.
SPDA09092
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Shift the shift lever to neutral.(c) Jack up one of the front wheels.(d) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal SPD of ECM connector andbody ground when the wheel is turned slowly.OK:
Voltage is generated intermittently.
4.5 - 5.5 V
Turn the wheel
DM08DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check and repair harness and connector be-tween combination meter and ECM.
Check and replace ECM (See page 114-30).
DM09DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DOffl-M
DTC P0505 Idle Control System Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Throttle ValveIntake AirChamber
Signal
Valvey
To CylinderIAC Valve
The rotary solenoid type IAC valve is located on the throttlebody and intake air bypassing the throttle valve is directed tothe IAC valve through a passage.In this way the intake air volume bypassing the throttle valve isregulated, controlling the engine speed.The ECM operates only the IAC valve to perform idle-up andprovide feedback for the target idling speed.
DTC No.
P0505
DTC Detecting Condition
Idle speed continues to vary greatly from the target speed
(2 trip detection logic)
Trouble AreaTrouWe Area
• IAC valve is stuck or closed
• Open or short in IAC valve circuit
• Open or short in A/C switch circuit
• Air induction system
• ECM
DI-110DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine Room J/B 11ISC Valve
i
18
ECM
RSO
MREL
EO1
A09123
DI-111DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
Check engine idle speed.
PREPARATION:(a) Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.(b) Switch off all accessories.(c) Switch off alrconditioning.(d) Shift transmission into "NT or neutral position.(e) Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3 on the vehicle.(f) Using SST, connect terminals TE1 and E1 of the DLC1.CHECK:Check the difference of engine speed between the ones less than 5 sec. and more than 5 sec. after connect-ing terminals TE1 and E1 of the DLC1.OK:
Difference of engine speed: More than 100 rpm.
Go to step 6.
L-.J
DI-112DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check voltage between terminals RSO, RSC of ECM connector and body ground.
E5Connector
BE6653A09086 A09100
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Disconnect the E5 connector of ECM.(c) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals RSO of the ECM connec-tor and body ground,OK:
Voltage: 9-14V
Go to step 4.
Check IAC valve (See page SF-40).
OK
Replace IAC valve.
Check for open and short in harness andconnector between engine room J/B No.2and IAC valve and ECM (See page IN-30).
4 Check operation of the IAC valve (See page SF-40).
NG\ Repair or replace IAC valve.
DI-113DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
5 Check the blockage of IAC valve and the passage to bypass the throttle valve.
NG\ Repair or replace iAC valve.
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
6 Check for A/C signal circuit (See page AC-68).
NG\ Repair or replace.
OK
Check air induction system(See page SF-1).
DM 14
M3HO-05
DTC P1300 Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No.1)
DTC P1305 Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No.2)
DTC P1310 Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No.3)
DTC P1315 Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No.4)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONA DIS (Direct Ignition System) has been adopted. The DIS improves the ignition timing accuracy, reduceshigh-voltage loss, and enhances the the overall reliability of the ignition system by eliminating the distributor.The DIS is a 1-cylinder ignition system which ignites one cylinder with one ignition coil. In the 1-cylinderignition system, the one spark plug is connected to the end of the secondary winding. High voltage generatedin the secondary winding is applied directly to the spark plug. The spark of the spark plug pass from the centerelecrtode to the ground electrode.The ECM determines ignition timing and outputs the ignition signals (IGT) for each cylinder. Based on IGTsignals, the power transistors in the igniter cuts off the current to the primary coil in the ignition coil is suppliedto the spark plug that are connected to the end of the secondary coil. At the same time, the igniter also sendsan ignition confirmation signal (IGF) as a fail-safe measure to the ECM.
DTC No.
P1300P1305P1310P1315
DTC Detecting Condition
No IGF signal to ECM while engine is running
Trouble Area
• Ignition system• Open or short in IGF1 and IGT1 - 4 circuit fromignition coil with igniter
• No.1 - No.4 ignition coil with igniter• ECM
DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINEDM15
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine Room J/B
B-O
InstrumentPanel J/B
B-O
IgnitionSwitch
B-R
InstrumentPanel J/B
B-R
B-R
FL MAIN
Battery
W-B
B-YIgnition Coil andIgniter No. 1
B-Y 2
B 1
R-B
W-B
Ignition Coil andIgniter No. 2
B-Y 2
B 1
3 R-W
W-B
B-Y 2
Ignition Coil and
Igniter No. 3
B 1
G-R
4 W-B
Ignition Coif andIgniter No. 4
B-Y 2
B 1
3 R-Y
4 W-B
B
2W-B
J2J/C
W-B
11
12
13
IGT1
IGT2
IGT3
IGT4
DI-116DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:
If DTC P1300 is displayed, check No.1 ignition coil with igniter circuit.If DTC P1305 is displayed, check No.2 ignition coil with igniter circuit.If DTC P1310 is displayed, check No.3 ignition coil with igniter circuit.If DTC P1315 is displayed, check No.4 ignition coil with igniter circuit.Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. Because freeze framerecords the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful fordetermining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuelratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.
1 Check spark plug and spark (See page Dl-64).
NG\ Go to step 4.
Check for open and short in harness and connector in IGF and IGT signal circuitbetween ECM and ignition coil with igniter (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Disconnect ignition coil with igniter connector and check voltage between termi-nals IGF of ECM connector and body ground.
.ON
Jf JTAD90S4 A09092
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Disconnect the ignition coil with igniter connector.(c) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals IGF of the ECM connectorand body ground.OK:
Voltage: 4.5 - 5.5 V
Replace ignition coil with igniter.
NG
DM17DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
Check for open and short in harness and connector in IGT signal circuit betweenECM and ignition coil with igniter (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Check voltage between terminals IGT1 ~ 4 of ECM connector and body ground.
BE 6653
A090B4
IGT4 IGT2A09092
PREPARATION:Remove the ECM cover.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals IGT1 - 4 of the ECM con-nector and body ground when engine is cranked.OK:
Voltage: More than 0.1 V and less than 4.5 V
IGT
IGF
IGT signal waveform
mliirtliiii Aiilnrl
J,IJ
•
; If:
20 m sec./ Division
5V/Division
«• GND
«• GND
A06097
Reference: INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPEDuring cranking or idling, check waveform between terminalsIGT1 - 4 and E1 of the ECM connector.HINT:Correct waveform appears as sohwn, with rectangle waves.
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
OK
DM18DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Disconnect ignition coil with igniter connector and check voltage between termi-nals IGT1 - 4 of ECM connector and body ground.
IGT4 IGT2
OK
A09092
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Disconnect the ignition coil with igniter connector.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals IGT1 - 4 of the ECM con-nector and body ground when engine is cranked.OK:
Voltage: More than 0.1 V and less than 4.5 V
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
Check ignition coil with igniter power source circuit.
OK
YA01861
PREPARATION:Disconnect the ignition coil with igniter connector.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal 1 of ignition coil with igniterconnector and body ground, when ignition switch is turned to"ON" and "START" position.OK:
Voltage: 9 -14 V
Repair ignition coil with igniter power source-circuit.
8 Check for open and short in harness and connector between ignition switch andignition coil with igniter (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
DM19DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
9 Check EFI main relay (Marking: EFI) (See page SF-52).
NG\ Replace EFI main relay (marking: EFI).
OK
Replace ignition coil with igniter.
DM20DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
(M36K-02
DTC P1335 Crankshaft Position Sensor CircuitMalfunction (During engine running)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0335 (Crankshaft Position "A" Circuit Malfunction) on page DI-74.
DTC No.
P1335
DTC Detecting Condition
If conditions (a) through (c) are met:(a)NE a I.OOOrpm
(b) NE signal is not detected for over 50 m sec.
(c) Not during cranking
Trouble Area
• Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit
• Crankshaft position sensor
•Signal plate
•ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0335 on page DI-74.
INSPECTION PROCEDURERefer to DTC P0335 on page DI-74.
DM21DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DTC P1346 VVT Sensor (Camshaft Position Sensor) Cir-cuit Range/Performance Problem
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWT sensor (VV1 or W2 signal) consist of a signal plate and pickup coil.The W1 or W2 signal plate has 1 tooth on its outer circumference and is mounted on the intake camshafts.When the camshafts rotate, the protrusion on the signal plate and the air gap on the pickup coil change,causing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pickup coil.The actual camshaft angle is detected by the WT sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to controlthe intake valve timing in response to during condition.
DTC No.
P1346
Detection Item
Deviation in crankshaft position sensor signal and WT sensor
(bank 1) signal (2 trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
• Mechanical system malfunction (Skipping teeth of timing belt,
belt stretched)
'ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
C4Crankshaft Position Sensor
2 1f\ A A 'I vVvj
w
C1 Crankshaft Position Sensor
BR
t A
AA
J1
•j 2 "RJ/U"
LI
(Shielded)
ECM
"n~ 16Cfr-£
^ — •*
W ^
(Shielded)
15
vii
NE+
NE-
G
\. y
J/C•w
AOS121
DM 22DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
Check valve timing (Check for loose and jumping teeth of timing belt)(See page EM-18).
OK
Adjust valve timing (Repair or replacetiming belt).
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DM23DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DOHE-06
DTC P1349 VVT System Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWT system controls the intake valve timing to proper timing in response to driving condition.ECM controls OCV (Oil Control Valve) to make the intake valve timing properly, and, oil pressure controlledwith OCV is supplied to the WT controller, and then, WT controller changes relative position between thecamshaft and the crankshaft.
DTC No.
P1349
DTC Detecting Condition
Condition (a) or (b) continues for after the engine is
warmed up and engine speed at 400 - 4,000 rpm :
(a) Valve timing does not change from of current valvetiming
(b) Current valve timing is fixed.
Trouble Area
• Valve timing
•Oil control valve
• WT controller assembly• ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
C3Oil Control Valve (for VVT)
ECM
G-024
W 23
OCV+
ocv-
DM 24DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:
If DTC P1349 is displayed, check left bank VVT system circuit.Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. Because freeze framerecords the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful fordetermining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuelratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.
TOYOTA hand-held tester
1 Check valve timing (See page EM-18).
NG\ Repair valve timing.
OK
Check operation of OCV.
PREPARATION:(a) Start the engine and warmed it up.(b) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester and select VVT from ACTIVE TEST menu.CHECK:Check the engine speed when operate the OCV by the TOYOTA hand-held tester.OK:
OCV is OFF:Normal engine speedOCV is ON:Rough idle or engine stall
WT system is OK.*
*: DTC P1349 is also output after the foreign object is caughtin some part of the system in the engine oil and the system re-turns to normal in a short time. As ECM controls so that foreignobjects are ejected, there is no problem about WT. There isalso no problem since the oil filter should get the foreign objectin the engine oil.
DM 25DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check voltage between terminals OCV+ and OCV- of ECM connector.
OCV Signal Waveform
GND
5V/Division
1 m sec./DivisionA02397
Reference: INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPETurn the ignition switch ON, check waveform between terminalsOCV+ and OCV- of the ECM connector.HINT:• The correct waveform is as shown.
The waveform frequency (A) is lengthened as the enginespeed becomes higher.
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
Check VVT controller assembly (See page EM-48).
Replace WT controller assembly, and then goto step 5.
5 Check oil control valve (See page SF-50).
NG\ Replace oil control valve, and then go to step 6.
OK
6 Check blockage of oil control valve, oil check valve and oil pipe No.1.
NG\ Repair or replace.
OK
DM26DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check whether or not DTC P1349 is stored.
PREPARATION:(a) Clear the DTC (See page DI-3).(b) Perform simulation test.CHECK:Check whether or not DTC P1349/P1354 is stored (See page DI-3).OK:
DTC P1349 is not stored
WT system is OK.*
*: DTC P1349 is also output after the foreign object is caughtin some part of the system in the engine oil and the system re-turns to normal in a short time. As ECM controls so that foreignobjects are ejected, there is no problem about VVT. There isalso no problem since the oil filter should get the foreign objectin the engine oil.
Replace ECM.
OBD II scan tool (excluding TOYOTA hand-held tester)
1 Check valve timing (See page EM-18).
NG\ Repair valve timing.
OK
DM27DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check operation of OCV.
A09088A090S9 A09101
PREPARATION:Start the engine.CHECK:(a) Check the engine speed when disconnect the OCV con-
nector.(b) Check the engine speed when apply battery positive volt-
age between terminals of OCV.RESULT:
Result
1
2
Check (a)
Normal engine speed
Check (b)
Rough idle or engine stall
Except 1
Go to step 4.
Check voltage between terminals OCV+ and OCV- of ECM connector.
OCV Signal Waveform
GND
5V/Division
1 m sea/DivisionA02397
Reference: INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPETurn the ignition switch ON, check waveform between terminalsOCV+ and OCV- of the ECM connector.HINT:• The correct waveform is as shown.
The waveform frequency (A) is lengthened as the enginespeed becomes higher.
WT system is OK.*
*: DTC P1349 is also output after the foreign object is caughtin some part of the system in the engine oil and the system re-turns to normal in a short time. As ECM controls so that foreignobjects are ejected, there is no problem about WT. There isalso no problem since the oil filter should get the foreign objectin the engine oil.
DM 28DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
Check VVT controller assembly (See page EM-48).
Replace VVT controller assembly, and then goto step 5.
OK
5 Check oil control valve (See page SF-50).
NG\ Replace oil control valve, and then go to step 6.
6 Check blockage of oil control valve, oil check valve and oil pipe No.1.
NG\ Repair or replace.
Check whether or not DTC P1349 is stored.
PREPARATION:(a) Clear the DTC (See page DI-3).(b) Perform simulation test.CHECK:Check whether or not DTC P1349/P1354 is stored (See page DI-3).OK:
DTC P1349 is not stored
VVT system is OK.*
DM29DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
*: DTC P1349 is also output after the foreign object is caughtin some part of the system in the engine oil and the system re-turns to normal in a short time. As ECM controls so that foreignobjects are ejected, there is no problem about VVT. There isalso no problem since the oil filter should get the foreign objectin the engine oil.
NG
Replace ECM.
DM30DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DC38M-04
DTC P1520 Stop Light Switch Signal Malfunction(Only for A/T)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This signal is used to detect when the brakes have been applied. The STP signal voltage is the same asthe voltage supplied to the stop lights.The STP signal is used mainly to control the fuel cut-off engine speed. (The fuel cut-off engine speed isreduced slightly when the vehicle is braking.)
DTC No.
P1520
DTC Detecting Condition
The stop light switch does not turn off even once the vehicle isdriven
(2 trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
•Short in stop light switch signal circuit• Stop light switch
•ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
G-B
S8Stop Light Switch
2
ECM
1 G-W
11 do
G-W
G-W
C(J12) J/C C
B-R
AQ13)
G-W
A(J13)
3 BA1
G-W
H10HighMounted
G-W
Stop Light 5W-B
B-R 2 BA1
FL MAIN Battery
W-B
J14J/C
R6Stop LightLH
STP
W-B
R7Stop LightRH
W-B
DM31DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
Check operation of stop light.
PREPARATION:Check if the stop lights go on and off normally when the brake pedal is operated and released.
Check and repair stop light circuit (See pageBE-33).
OK
Check STP signal.
ON
Brake PedalDepressed
Brake PedalReleased
A09102
When using TOYOTA hand-held tester:PREPARATION:(a) Connect the to the DLC3.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and TOYOTA hand-held tes-
ter main switch ON.CHECK:Read the STP signal on the TOYOTA hand-held tester.OK:
Brake pedal is depressed: STP... ONBrake pedal is released: STP ... OFF
When not using TOYOTA hand-held tester:PREPARATION:Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Check voltage between terminal STP of ECM and body ground.OK:
Brake pedal
Depressed
Released
Voltage
7.5-14V
Below 1.5V
OK Check for intermittent problems (See pageDI-3).
NG
DI-132DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check harness and connector between ECM and stop light switch (See pageIN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DI-133DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DQW-OJ
DTC P1600 ECM BATT Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Battery positive voltage is supplied to terminal BATT of the ECM even when the ignition switch is OFF foruse by the DTC memory and air-fuel ratio adaptive control value memory, etc.
DTC No.
P1600
DTC Detecting Condition
Open in back up power source circuit
Trouble Area
• Open in back up power source circuit
• ECM
HINT:If DTC P1600 appear, the ECM does not store another DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
ECMEngine Room J/B
B-REFl
W
FLMain
Battery
BATT-W-
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
DM34DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check voltage between terminal BATT of ECM connector and body ground.
BE6653A09084 A09092
PREPARATION:Remove the ECM cover.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal BATT of the ECM connectorand body ground.OK:
Voltage 9-14V
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
Check EFI fuse.
Engine Room J/B
EFI Fuse A11409
PREPARATION:Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room J/B.CHECK:Check continuity of EFI fuse.OK:
Continuity
Check for short in all the harness andcomponents connected to EFI fuse.
OK
Check and repair harness or connectorbetween battery and EFI fuse and ECM(See page IN-30).
DM35DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DIlMG-M
DTC P1645 Body ECU Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONECM receives the operating condition (ON/OFF) of A/C from A/C ECU and it also receives the electrical loadinformation from the body ECU.ECM uses these information to control the engine (idle up, etc.).
DTC No.
PI 645
DTC Detecting Condition
Condition (a) or (b) continues for 3.0 sec.
(a) No communication from body ECU
(b) No communication from A/C ECU
Trouble Area
• Body ECU•A/C ECU• Communication bus
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.Perform troubleshooting the Multiplex Communication System (See page DI-600).
DM 36DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
M1MH-09
DTC P1656 OCV Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONRefer to DTC P1349 (VVT System Malfunction) on page DI-123.
DTC No.
P1656
P1663
DTC Detecting Condition
Open or short in oil control valve circuit
Trouble Area
•Open or short in oil control valve circuit
•Oil control valve
•ECM
WIRING DIAGRAMRefer to DTC P1349 (VVT System Malfunction) on page DI-123 for theWIRING DIAGRAM.
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine wanned up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
TOYOTA hand-held tester
1 Check OCV circuit.
PREPARATION:(a) Start the engine and warmed it up.(b) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester and select WT from ACTIVE TEST menu.CHECK:Check the engine speed when operate the OCV by the TOYOTA hand-held tester.OK:
WT system is OFF (OCV is OFF):Normal engine speedWT system is ON (OCV is ON):Rough idle or engine stalled
Check for intermittent problems(See page DI-3).
DM37DIAGNOSTICS ENGINE
Check operation of OCV.
START PREPARATION:(a) Start the engine and warmed it up.(b) Disconnect the OCV connector.(c) Apply battery positive voltage between terminals of the
OCV.CHECK:Check the engine speed.OK:
Rough idle or engine stalled.
Replace OCV.
Check voltage between terminals OCV+ and OCV- of ECM connector(See page DM23).
NG Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
Check for open and short in harness and connector between OCV and ECM(See page IN-30).
Repair or replace.
Check for intermitent problems(See page DI-3).
DM 38DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
OBDII scan tool (excluding TOYOTA hand-held tester)
Check operation of OCV.
START
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Start the engine and warmed it up.(b) Disconnect the OCV connector.(c) Apply battery positive voltage between terminals of the
OCV.CHECK:Check the engine speed.OK:
Rough idle or engine stalled
Replace OCV.
Check voltage between terminals OCV+ and OCV- of ECM connector(See page DM23).
OK
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
Check for open and short in harness and connector between OCV and ECM(See page IN-30).
Repair or replace.
Check for intermitent problems(See page DI-3).
DM 39DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
OKOU-Oi
DTC P1690 OCV for VVTL Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen the engine speed reaches 6,000b rpm, the VVTL system switches the locker arm from low speed tohigh speed. The ECM control the OCV to apply hydraulic pressure to the piston in the locker arm and switchthe locker arm by locking the slipper for high speed.
DTC No.
P1690
DTC Detecting Condition
Open or short in oil control valve for VVTL circuit
Trouble Area
• Open or short in oil control valve circuit
• Oil control valve (for VVTL)
•ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
C2Oil Control Valve (For VVT)
ECM
L-W
L-B
02Oil Pressure Switch
Y-B22
OVL+
OVL-
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.
DI-140DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
TOYOTA hand-held tester
Check OCV for VVTL circuit.
PREPARATION:(a) Start the engine and warmed it up.(b) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester and select VVTL from ACTIVE TEST menu.(c) Maintain engine speed at 1,500 - 2,500 rpm.CHECK:Check the engine speed when operate the OCV by the TOYOTA hand-held tester.OK:
VVTL system is OFF (OCV is OFF):Normal engine speedVVTL system is ON (OCV is ON):Rough engine speed or engine stalled
Check for intermittent problems (See pageDh-3).
Check operation of OCV for VVTL.
A09090
PREPARATION:(a) Start the engine and warmed it up.(b) Disconnect the OCV for VVTL connector.(c) Maintain engine speed at 1,500 - 2,500 rpm.(d) Apply battery positive voltage between terminals of the
OCV.CHECK:Check the engine speed.OK:
Engine stalled.
Replace OCV for VVTL.
DM 41DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check for open and short in harness and connector between OCV for VVTL andECM (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace.
OK
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
OBDII scan tool (excluding TOYOTA hand-held tester)
Check operation of OCV for VVTL.
START PREPARATION:(a) Start the engine and warmed it up.(b) Disconnect the OCV connector.(c) Maintain engine speed at 1,500 - 2,500 rpm.(d) Apply battery positive voltage between terminals of the
OCV.CHECK:Check the engine speed.OK:
Rough engine speed or engine stalled
Replace OCV for VVTL.
OK
Check voltage between terminals OVL+ and OVL- of ECM connector (See pageDI-20).
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
OK
DM 42DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check for open and short in harness and connector between OCV for VVTL andECM (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace.
OK
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DM43DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DKOV-Oi
DTC P1692 OCV for VVTL Open Malfanction
DTC P1693 OCV for VVTL Close Malfanction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONRefer to DTC P1690 (OCV for VVTL Circuit Malfanction) on page DI-139.
DTC No.
P1692
P1693
DTC Detecting Condition
In the condition that the engine speed is 6,000 rpm or less andthe oil pressure switch on for 5 sec. or more.
In the condition that the water temperature is 60 " C or more,
the engine speed is 6,000 rpm or more, and the oil pressureswitch OFF for 1 sec. or more.
Trouble Area
• Open or short in oil control valve circuit
• Oil control valve (for WTL)
'ECM
WIRING DIAGRAMRefer to DTC P1690 (OCV for VVTL Circuit Malfanction) on page DI-139.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check oil pressure switch for WTL (See page LU-1).
NG\ Reprace oil pressure switch.
Check for open and short in harness and connector between oil pressure switchfor VVTL and ECM (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace.
3 Check oil pressure for VVTL (See page LU-1).
OK\ Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DM 44DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
NG
4 Check OCV for VVTL (See page SF-50) and oil filter.
NG\ Repiar or replace OCV or filter.
OK
Check for open and short in harness and connector between OCV for VVTL andECM (See page IN-30).
NG Repair or replace.
OK
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DM45DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
DTC P1780 Park/Neutral Position Switch Malfunction(Only for A/T)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The park/neutral position switch goes on when the shift lever is in the N or P shift position. When it goes onterminal NSW of the ECM is grounded to body ground via the starter relay thus the terminal NSW voltagebecomes 0V. When the shift lever is in the D, 2, L, or R position, the park/neutral position switch goes off,so the voltage of ECM. Terminal NSW becomes battery positive voltage, the voltage of the ECM internalpower source.If the shift lever is moved from the N position to the D position, this signal is used for air-fuel ratio correctionand for idle speed control (estimated control), etc.
DTC No.
P1780
DTC Detecting Condition
2 or more switches are ON simultaneously for "N", "2", "L"and"R" position
(2 trip detection logic)
When driving under conditions (a) and (b) for 30 sec. or morethe park/neutral position switch is ON (N position):(2 trip detection logic)
(a) Vehicle speed: 80 km/h (50 mph) or more
(b) Engine speed: 2,000 ~ 5,000 rpm
Trouble Area
•Short in park/neutral position switch circuit• Park/neutral position switch• ECM
HINT:After confirming DTC P1780, use the TOYOTA hand-held tester to confirm the PNP switch signal from"CURRENT DATA".
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P1780 on page U240E:DI-202, U341E:DI-261 for the WIRING DIAGRAM.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio lean or rich, etc.at the time of the malfunction.Refer to DTC P1780 on U240E:DI-202, U341E:DI-261 for the INSPECTION PROCEDURE.
DM 46DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
ECM Power Source Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When the ignition switch is turned ON, battery positive voltage is applied to the coil, closing the contacts ofthe EFI main relay (Making: EFI) and supplying power to the terminal +B of the ECM.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Battery
Engine Room J/B
BR
ECM
17
BR
1
A
J1J/C
A
+B
MREL
E1
A09126
DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINEDM 47
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check voltage between terminals + B and E1 of ECM connector.
ON
NG
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals + B and E1 of the ECMconnector.OK:
Voltage: 9-14V
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onProblem symptoms table (See page DI-22).
Check for open in harness and connector between terminal E1 of ECM and bodyground (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check EFI main relay (Marking: EFI) (See page SF-52).
Replace EFI main relay.
Check EFI fuse (See page DM33).
Check for short in all the harness and compo-nents connected to EFI fuse.
DI-148DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
OK
Check for open in harness and connector between EFI main relay (Marking: EFI)and battery, EFI main relay (Marking: EFI) and ECM (See page IN-30).
OK
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check EFI No. 1 fuse.
Engine Room J/B
OK
OK
EFI No. 1 A11409
PREPARATION:Remove IGN fuse from engine room J/B.CHECK:Check continuity of EFI No. 1 fuse.OK:
Continuity
Check for short in all the harness and compo-nents connected to EFI No. 1 fuse.
7 Check ignition switch (See page BE-14).
NG\ Replace ignition switch.
Check for open in harness and connector be-tween IG switch and EFI main relay and bodyground (See page IN-30).
DM49DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Fuel Pump Control Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
In the diagram below, when the engine is cranked, current flows from terminal ST of the ignition switch tothe starter relay coil and also current flows to terminal STA of ECM (STA signal).When the STA signal and NE signal are input to the ECM, Tr is turned ON, current flows to coil of the circuitopening relay, the relay switches on, power is supplied to the fuel pump and the fuel pump operates.While the NE signal is generated (engine running), the ECM keeps Tr ON (circuit opening relay ON) and thefuel pump also keeps operating.
EFI Main Relay Circuit Opening Relay Fuel Pump
Ignition Park/NeutralSwitch Position Switch
FI7241
DI-150DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
WIRING DIAGRAM
ECM
Engine Room J/B
W~B
B-R
FL MAIN
iBattery
L-B
G-R
21
^E
3
L-B
7 pjT]s,
L-BF17Fuel PumpvM
J14J/C
W-B
FC
A09127
DM51DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
TOYOTA hand-held tester:
Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester and check operation of fuel pump (Seepage DI-3).
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See page DI-22).
NG
2 Check for ECM power source circuit (See page DM46).
NG\ Repair or replace.
OK
3 Check circuit opening relay (Marking: CIR OPN) (See page SF-53).
NG\ Replace circuit opening relay.
OK
DM52DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check voltage between terminal FC of ECM and body ground.
A09084 A09092
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal FC of the ECM and bodyground.OK:
Voltage 9 -14 V
Check for open in harness and connector be-tween EF| main relay and circuit opening relayand ECM (See page IN-30).
Check fuel pump (See page SF-6).
OK
Repair or replace fuel pump.
Check for open in harness and connector between circuit opening relay (Mark-ing: CIR OPN) and fuel pump and body ground (See page IN-30).
OK
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DI-153DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
OBDII scan tool (excluding TOYOTA hand-held tester):
Check operation of fuel pump.
Fuel Inlet Hose
A09104
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECM cover.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:(a) Connect between terminal FC of the ECM connector and
body ground.(b) Check for fuel pressure in the fuel inlet hose when it is
pinched off.OK:
There is pressure in fuel inlet hose.HINT:At this time, you will hear a fuel return flowing noise.
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See page DI-22).
2 Check for ECM power source circuit (See page DM46).
NG\ Repair or replace.
OK
3 Check circuit opening relay (Marking: CIR OPN) (See page SF-53).
NG\ Replace circuit opening relay.
OK
DM 54DIAGNOSTICS - ENGINE
Check voltage between terminal FC of ECM and body ground (See page DI-149,step 4).
Check for open in harness and connector be-tween EFI main relay and circuit opening relayand ECM (See page IN-30).
OK
Check fuel pump (See page SF-6).
Repair or replace fuel pump.
Check for open in harness and connector between circuit opening relay (Mark-ing: CIR OPN) and fuel pump and body ground (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Check and replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DI-155DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
(Vehicle Brought to Workshop)Items inside^L^ are titles of pages in this manual, with thepage number indicated in the bottom portion. See the indicatedpages for detailed explanations.
_1 Customer Problem Analysis'
P. DI-156
.^Connect an OBDII scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3./If the display shows "UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE" when you have connected they
scan tool/TOYOTA hand-held tester, inspect DLC3 P. DI-157
3 //Check PTC and Freeze Frame Data (Precheck) ARecord or Print PTC and Freeze Frame Data P. DI-157 ff
3 //
_ „4 /Clear PTC and Freeze Frame Data P. DI-1 57 //
5// Visual Inspection^
6/Setiing the Check Mode Diagnosis P. DI-157 /ri symptom does not occur
111 Problem Symptom ConfirmationH\ SA/SvmptomSimulation[~| symptom occur •"-— K^IN-20
9// PTC Check J. OK Code 11 K j B , |nspection / NG
/ P.DI-157Z/' =T>/ p. DM57 /t=
10^_^ , - ^OKu// PTC Chart /// P. DI-168 /
Q ut^'^/Mechanical System Test//r
If P. DM57 ~7/L
OK 133 ,TJ, OK
I/ Manual Shifting Test /r/ P. DI-157 /% r. ui— io/ //
Problem Symptoms Table-P. DI-172J.
15//circuiT 7/ -O/D Main Switch & O/D OFF Indicator Light Circuitition// •[
I Parts InspectionInspecti •E-Shift Main Switch Circuit Check
P. DI-206toDI-216 $17 18
j-Identification of Problem |CZZ / Repair / CHl|) I Confirmation Test |CZz|)C End
DM 56DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK
Automatic TransaxleSystem Check Sheet
Inspector'sName
Customer's Name
Date VehicleBrought In / /
Registration No.
Registration Year
Frame No.
Odometer Reading
/ /
kmmile
Date ProblemOccurred
How Often DoesProblem Occur?
1 '
D Continuous D Intermittent ( times a day)
Symptoms
D Vehicle does not move (D Any position D Particular position)
D Noup-shift (nist-*2r|d DD No down-shift ( D O/D -> 3rd
2nd -^ 3rd D 3rd -> O/D)
n 3rd -» 2nd Q 2nd -> 1 st)
G Lock-up malfunction
D Shift point too high or too low
D Harsh engagement Q N' -> D [I] Lock-up D Any drive position)
G Slip or shudder
D No kick-down
D Others
Check ItemMalfunctionIndicator Lamp D Normal D Remains ON
DTC Check1st Time
2nd Time
O Normal code
D Normal code
n Malfunction code (DTC )
n Malfunction code (DTC )
DI-157DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
csCHECK
PRE-CHECK1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM(a) Description
• When troubleshooting OBD II vehicles, the only dif-ference from the usual troubleshooting procedureis that you connect to the vehicle an OBD II scantool complying with SAE J1987 or TOYOTA hand-held tester, and read off various data output fromthe vehicle's ECM.
OBD II regulations require that the vehicle's on-board computer lights up the Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL) on the instrument panel when the com-puter detects a malfunction in the computer itself orin drive system components which affect vehicleemissions. In addition to the MIL lighting up whena malfunction is detected, the applicable DTCs pre-scribed by SAE J2012 are recorded in the ECMmemory (See page DI-14).
If the malfunction only occurs in 3 trips, the MIL goes off but theDTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory.
TOYOTA hand-held tester
DLC3N X \\ D072S9
To check the DTCs, connect an OBD II scan tool orTOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3 on the vehicle.The OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held testeralso enables you to erase the DTCs and checkfreeze frame data and various forms of engine data(For instruction book).DTCs include SAE controlled codes and Manufac-turer controlled codes.SAE controlled codes must be set as prescribed bythe SAE, while Manufacturer controlled codes canbe set freely by the manufacturer within the pre-scribed limits (See DTC chart on page DI-168).
DM58DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
• The diagnosis system operates in normal modeduring normal vehicle use, and also has a checkmode for technicians to simulate malfunction symp-toms and perform troubleshooting. Most DTCs use2-trip detection logic (*) to prevent erroneousdetection. By switching the ECM to check modewhen troubleshooting, the technician can cause theMIL to light up and for a malfunction that is only de-tected once or momentarily.(TOYOTA hand-held tester) (See page DI-157)*2-trip detection logic:When a logic malfunction is first detected, the mal-function is temporarily stored in the ECM memory.
If the same malfunction is detected again during the 2nd testdrive, this 2nd detection causes the MIL to light up .
(b) Inspect the DLC3.The vehicle's ECM uses ISO 9141-2 for communication.The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with SAEJ1962 and matches the ISO 9141-2 format.
Tester connection
7 (Bus e Line) - 5 (Signal ground)
4 (Chassis Ground) - Body
5 (Signal Ground) - Body
16 (B+)- Body
Condition
During communication
Always
Always
Always
Specified condition
Pulse generation
1 fl or less
1 O or less
9-14V
HINT:If your display shows "UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE"when you have connected the cable of OBD II scan tool orTOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3, turned the ignition switchON and operated the scan tool, there is a problem on the ve-hicle side or tool side.• If communication is normal when the tool is connected to
another vehicle, inspect DLC3 on the original vehicle.• If communication is still not possible when the tool is con-
nected connected to another vehicle, the problem is prob-ably in the tool itself, so consult the Service Departmentlisted in the tool's instruction manual.
DM59DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
csCHECK
TOYOTA hand-held tester
D07259
2. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (NORMAL MODE)(a) Check the MIL.
(1) The MIL comes on when the ignition switch is turnedON and the engine is not running.
HINT:If the MIL does not light up, troubleshoot the combination meter(See page BE-2).
(2) When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.If the lamp remains on, the diagnosis system hasdetected a malfunction or abnormality in the sys-tem.
(b) Check the DTC.NOTICE:TOYOTA hand-held tester only: When the diagnostic sys-tem is switched from normal mode to check mode, it erasesall DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode.So before switching modes, always check the DTCs andfreeze frame data, and note them down.
(1) Prepare an OBD II scan tool (complying with SAEJ1978) or TOYOTA hand-held tester.
(2) Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3 at the lower of the instrumentpanel.
(3) Turn the ignition switch ON and turn the OBD II scantool or TOYOTA hand-held tester switch ON.
(4) Use the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-heldtester to check the DTCs and freeze frame data andnote them down (For operating instructions, see theOBD II scan tool's instruction book).
(5) See page DM 68 to confirm the details of the DTCs.NOTICE:When simulating symptoms with an OBD II scan tool (ex-cluding TOYOTA hand-held tester) to check the DTCs, usenormal mode. For codes on the DTCs chart subject to"2-trip detection logic", turn the ignition switch OFF afterthe symptoms have been simulated the 1st time. Then re-peat the simulation process again. When the program hasDTCs are recorded in the ECM.
DM60DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (CHECK MODE)HINT:TOYOTA hand-held tester only: Compared to the normalmode, the check mode has high sensing ability to detect mal-functions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which aredetected in Normal mode can also be detected in Check mode,(a) Check the DTC.
(1) Check the initial conditions.Battery positive voltage 11 V or more.Throttle valve fully closed.
• Transaxle in P position.Air conditioning switched off.
(2) Turn the ignition switch OFF.(3) Prepare a TOYOTA hand-held tester.
TOYOTA hand-held tester
D07259
(4) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3 atthe lower of the instrument panel.
(5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the TOYOTAhand-held tester ON.
0.13 sec.-
ON
OFF.
0.13 sec.
BR3904
(6) Switch the TOYOTA hand-held tester from Normalmode to Check mode (Check that the MIL flashes).
(7) Start the engine (MIL goes out after the enginestarts).
(8) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction de-scribed by the customer.
NOTICE:Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked theDTCs, etc.
(9) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use theTOYOTA hand-held tester diagnosis selector tocheck the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc.
HINT:Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF, as turning it off thediagnosis system from Check mode to Normal mode, so allDTCs, etc. are erased.
(10) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable cir-cuit.
DM61DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
(b) Clear the DTC.The following operation will erase the DTC and freezeframe data. Operating an OBD II scan tool (complyingwith SAE J1978) or TOYOTA hand-held tester to erasethe codes.(See the OBD II scan tool's instruction book for operatinginstructions.)
NOTICE:If the TOYOTA hand-held tester switches the ECM fromNormal mode to Check mode or vice-versa, of if the igni-tion switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during chickmode, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased.
4. PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATIONTaking into consideration the results of the customer problem analysis, try to reproduce the symptoms of thetrouble. If the problem is that the transaxle does not up-shift, down-shift, or the shift point is too high or toolow, conduct the following road test to confirm the automatic shift schedule and simulate the problem symp-toms.5. ROAD TESTNOTICE:Perform the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 - 80 °C (122 -176 °F).(a) D position test
Shift into the D position and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points.(1) Check up-shift operation.
Check to see that 1 -» 2,2 -» 3 and 3 -»O/D up-shift takes place, and that the shift points con-form to the automatic shift schedule (See page SS-41).
HINT:O/D Gear Up-shift Prohibition Control (1. Coolant temp, is 60 °C (140 °F) or less. 2. If there is a 10km/h (6 mph) difference between the set cruise control speed and vehicle speed.)O/D Gear Lock-up Prohibition Control (1. Brake pedal is depressed. 2. Coolant temp, is 60 °C(140°F)orless.)(2) Check for shift shock and slip.
Check for shock and slip at the 1 -> 2, 2 -» 3 and 3 -»O/D up-shifts.(3) Check for abnormal noises and vibration.
Drive in the D position lock-up or O/D gear and check for abnormal noises and vibration.HINT:The check for the cause of abnormal noises and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also bedue to loss of balance in the differential torque converter clutch, etc.
(4) Check kick-down operation.While running in the D position, 2nd, 3rd and O/D gears, check to see that the possible kick-downvehicle speed limits for 2 -> 1, 3 -» 2 and O/D -> 3 kick-downs conform to those indicated onthe automatic shift schedule (See page SS- 1).
(5) Check abnormal shock and slip at kick-down.(6) Check the lock-up mechanism.
Drive in D position, O/D gear, at a steady speed (lock-up ON) of about 60 km/h (37 mph),• Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change
abruptly.If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
DM 62DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
(b) M position testShift to the M position, depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points.Shift operations.Pressing the transmission shift switch to "UP" or" Down" makes the transmission up-shifted or down-shifted respectively.Without pressing the switch, it is not automatically shifted to neither up or down.When a vehicle is stopped, it is automatically down-shifted to 1st gear.
HINT:Manual shift prohibition control (1. When the ATF temperature is low. 2. When down-shifting causes engineoverrun. 3. When down-shifting is required continuously, down-shifting to 1st gear may not be performed.4. When the ATF temp, is high, up-shifting to O/D is not performed.(c) 2 position test
Shift into the 2 position and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points.(1) Check up-shift operation.
Check to see that the 1 -> 2 up-shift takes place and that the shift point conforms to the automaticshift schedule (See page SS-41).
HINT:There is no O/D up-shift and lock-up in the 2 position.
(2) Check engine braking.While running in the 2 position and 2nd gear, release the accelerator pedal and check the enginebraking effect.
(3) Check for abnormal noises during acceleration and deceleration, and for shock at up-shift anddown-shift.
(d) L position testShift into the L position and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points.(1) Check no up-shift.
While running in the L position, check that there is no up-shift to 2nd gear.(2) Check engine braking.
While running in the L position, release the accelerator pedal and check the engine braking ef-fect.
(3) Check for abnormal noises during acceleration and deceleration.(e) R position test
Shift into the R position and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping.CAUTION:Before conducting this test ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction.(f) P position test
Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5°) and after shifting into the P position, release the parkingbrake. Then, check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place.
DI-163DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)_
6. BASIC INSPECTION(a) Check the fluid level.HINT:• Drive the vehicle so that the engine and transaxle are at
normal operating temperature.Fluid temp.: 70 - 80 °C (158 - 176 °F)
« Only use the COOL range on the dipstick as a rough refer-ence when the fluid is replaced or the engine does notrun.
OK if hot
Add if hot
AT3417
(1) Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the park-ing brake.
(2) With the engine idling and the brake pedal de-pressed, shift the shift lever into all positions from Pto L position and return to P position.
(3) Pull out the dipstick and wipe it clean.(4) Push it back fully into the pipe.(5) Pull it out and check that the fluid level is in the HOT
range.If the level is at the low side, add new fluid.
Fluid type: ATF Type T-IVCapacity: 4.1 liters (4.3 US qts, 3.6 Imp. qts)
NOTICE:Do not overfill.(b) Check the fluid condition.If the fluid smells burnt or is black, replace it.
(c) Replace the ATF.(1) Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.(2) Reinstall the drain plug securely.
AT8582
(3) With the engine OFF add new fluid through the oilfiller pipe.
Fluid type: ATF Type T-IVCapacity: 4.1 liters (4.3 US qts, 3.6 Imp. qts)(4) Start the engine and shift the shift lever into all posi-
tions from P to L position and then shift into P posi-tion.
DM64DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE CU240E)
OK if hot
Add if ho
AT3417
(5) With the engine idling, check the fluid level. Addfluid up to the COOL level on the dipstick.
(6) Check the fluid level at the normal operating tem-perature, 70 - 80 °C (158 - 176 °F), and add asnecessary.
NOTICE:Do not overfill.(d) Check the fluid leaks.
Check for leaks in the transaxle.If there are leaks, it is necessary to repair or replace O-rings,gaskets, oil seals, plugs or other parts.
D07258
o
N P 007260
BoltNeutral BasicLine
Bolt
D07257Groove
(e) Inspect and adjust the shift lever position.When shifting the shift lever from the N position to otherpositions, check that the lever can be shifted smoothlyand accurately to each position and that the position indi-cator is not aligned with the correct position.
If the indicator is not aligned with the correct position, carry outthe following adjustment procedures.
(1) Loosen the nut on the shift lever.(2) Push the control shaft fully downward.
(3) Return the control shaft lever 2 notches to N posi-tion.
(4) Set the shift lever to N position.(5) While holding the shift lever lightly toward the R
position side, tighten the shift lever nut.Torque: 13 N-m (130 kgf-cm, 9 ft-lbf)(6) Start the engine and make sure that the vehicle
moves forward when shifting the lever from the N toD position and reverses when shifting it to the Rposition.
(f) Inspect and adjust the park/neutral position.Check that the engine can be started with the shift leveronly in the N or P position, but not in other positions.
If it is not as stated above, carry out the following adjustmentprocedures.
(1) Loosen the park/neutral position switch bolt and setthe shift lever to the N position.
(2) Align the groove and neutral basic line.
DM65DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
(3) Hold in position and tighten the bolt.Torque: 5.4 N-m (55 kgf-cm, 48 in-lbf)
For continuity inspection of the park/neutral positionswitch, see page DI-202.
(g) Check the idle speed.Idle speed: 650 ± 50 rpm(In N position and air conditioner OFF)
7. MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS(a) Measure the stall speed.
The object of this test is to check the overall performance of the transaxle and engine by measuringthe stall speeds in the D and R positions.
NOTICE:Do the test at normal operating fluid temperature 50 - 80 °C (122 -176 °F).Do not continuously run this test longer than 10 seconds.To ensure safety, conduct this test in a wide, clear level area which provides good traction.The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the condi-tions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.(1) Chock the 4 wheels.(2) Connect an OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3.(3) Fully apply the parking brake.(4) Keep your left foot pressed firmly on the brake pedal.(5) Start the engine.(6) Shift into the D position. Press all the way down on the accelerator pedal with your right foot.
Quickly read the stall speed at this time.Stall speed: 2,370 ±150 rpm
Evaluation:
Problem
(a) Stall speed low in D and R positions
(b) Stall speed high in D position
(c) Stall speed high in R position
(d) Stall speed high in D and R positions
Possible cause
• Engine output may be insufficient
•Stator one-way clutch is operating properly
HINT: If more than 600 rpm below the specified value, the torqueconverter clutch could be faulty.
• Line pressure too low
• Forward clutch slipping
• No.2 one-way clutch not operating properly
•O/D clutch slipping
• Line pressure too low
• Direct clutch slipping
• 1st & reverse brake slipping
•O/D clutch slipping
• Line pressure too low
• Improper fluid level
• O/D one-way clutch not operating properly
(b) Measure the time lag.When the shift lever is shifted while the engine is idling, there will be a certain time lapse or lag beforethe shock can be felt. This is used for checking the condition of the O/D direct clutch, forward clutch,and 1st & reverse brake.
NOTICE:Do the test at normal operating fluid temperature 50 - 80 °C (122 -176 °F).
• Be sure to allow 1 minute interval between tests.Take 3 measurements and take the average value.(1) Connect an OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3.
DI-166DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
(2) Fully apply the parking brake.(3) Start the engine and check idle speed.Idle speed: 650 ± 50 rpm (In N position and air conditioner OFF)(4) Shift the shift lever from N to D position. Using a stop watch, measure the time from when the
lever is shifted until the shock is felt.Time lag: N - D Less than 1.2 seconds(5) In the same manner, measure the time lag for N -> R.Time lag: N -> R Less than 1.5 seconds
Evaluation (If N -» D time or N -> R time lag is longer than specified):
Problem
N -> D time lag is longer
N -» R time lag is longer
Possible cause
• Line pressure too low• Forward clutch worn• O/D one-way clutch not operating
• Line pressure too low• Direct clutch worn• 1st & reverse brake worn•O/D one-way clutch not operating properly
8. HYDRAULIC TESTMeasure the line pressure.NOTICE:
Do the test at normal operation fluid temperature 50 - 80 °C (122 -176 °F)The line pressure test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observethe conditions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.Be careful to prevent SSTs hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe.(1) Warm up the ATF.(2) Remove the test plug on the transaxle case front left side and connect SST.
(See page AX-30 for the location to connect SST)SST 09992-00095(09992-00231,09992-00271)(3) Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels.(4) Connect an OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3.(5) Start the engine and check idling speed.(6) Keep your left foot pressed firmly on the brake pedal and shift into D position.(7) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling.(8) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. Quickly read the highest line pressure when
engine speed reaches stall speed.(9) In the same manner, do the test in R position.
Specified line pressure:
Condition
Idling
Stall
D position kPa (kgf/cm2, psi)
372-412(3.8-4.2,54-59)
931 - 1 ,031 (9.5 - 1 0.5, 1 34 - 1 49)
R position kPa (kgf/cm2, psi)
672 - 742 (6.9 - 7.6, 97 - 1 07)
1,768-1,968(18.0-20.1,255-284)
DM 67DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
Evaluation:
Problem
tf the measured values at all position are higher
If the measured values at all position are lower
If pressure is low in the D position only
If pressure is low in the R position only
Possible cause
• Throttle valve defective« Regulator valve defective
•Throttle valve defective
• Regulator valve defective
• Oil pump defective
• O/D direct clutch defective
• 0 position circuit fluid leakage
• Forward clutch defective
• R position circuit fluid leakage• Direct clutch defective
• 1st & reverse brake defective
9. MANUAL SHIFTING TESTHINT:With this test, it can be determined whether the trouble is withinthe electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transaxle.(a) Disconnect the solenoid wire.(b) Inspect the manual driving operation.
Check that the shift and gear positions correspond withthe table below.While driving, shift through the L, 2 and D positions.Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift posi-tion.
Shift Position
D
2
L
R
P
Gear Position
O/D
O/D
1st
Reverse
Pawl Lock
HINT:If the L, 2 and D position gear positions are difficult to positionsare difficult to distinguish, do the following read test.If any abnormality is found in the above test, the problem is inthe transaxle itself.(c) Connect the solenoid wire.(d) Cancel out DTC (See page DI-157).
DM68DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHARTIf a DTC is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code in the table below and pro-ceed to the page given.* : -...MIL does not light /•...MIL light up
DTC No.
(See Page)
P0500
(DM75)
P0710(DM79)
P0750
(DM81)
P0753
(DM83)
P0755
(DM81)
P0758
(DM83)
P0765(DM81)
P0768
(DM83)
P0770
(DM89)
P0773
(DM91)
P1520
(DM94)
P1725
(DM95)
P1730
(DM97)
P1760(DM99)
P1780(DI-202)
Detection Item
Vehicle Speed Sensor
Malfunction
Transmission Fluid TemperatureSensor Malfunction
Shift Solenoid A Malfunction
(Shift Solenoid Valve SL1)
Shift Solenoid A Electrical Mal-
function
(Shift Solenoid Valve SL1 )
Shift Solenoid B Malfunction
(Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)
Shin Solenoid B Electrical Mal-
function
(Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)
Shift Solenoid D Malfunction
(Shift Solenoid Valve S4)
Shift Solenoid D Electrical Mal-function(Shift Solenoid Valve S4)
Shift Solenoid E Malfunction
(Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)
Shift Solenoid E Electrical Mal-
function
(Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)
Stop Light Switch Circuit
NT Revolution Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
(Input Turbine Speed Sensor)
NC Revolution Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
(Counter Gear Speed Sensor)
Linear Solenoid for Accumulator
Pressure Control Circuit Mal-function
(Shift Solenoid Valve SLT)
Park/Neutral Position Switch
Malfunction
Trouble Area
•Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit
•Vehicle speed sensor
•Combination meter
•ECM
• Automatic transaxle assembly
•Open or short in ATF temperature sensor circuit
• ATF temperature sensor• ECM
• Shift solenoid valve SL1 is stuck open or closed
• Valve body is blocked up or stuck
•Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL1 circuit
• Shift solenoid valve SL1
•ECM
• Shift solenoid valve SL2 is stuck open or closed
•Valve body is blocked up or stuck
•Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL2 circuit
•Shift solenoid valve SL2
• ECM
• Shift solenoid valve S4 is stuck open or closed
• Valve body is blocked up or stuck
• Open or short in shift solenoid valve S4 circuit
• Shift solenoid valve S4
• ECM
• Shift solenoid valve DSL is stuck open or closed
• Valve body is blocked up or stuck
• Lock-up clutch
• Open or short in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit
• Shift solenoid valve DSL
• ECM
• Open or short in stop light switch circuit
•Stop light switch
• ECM
• Open or short in input turbine speed sensor circuit
• Input turbine speed sensor
• ECM
• Open or short in counter gear speed sensor circuit
• Counter gear speed sensor
• ECM
•Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit
• Shift solenoid valve SLT
• ECM
• Short in park/neutral position switch circuit
• Park/neutral position switch
• ECM
MIL*
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Memory
O
O
O
O
O
O
0
O
O
0
O
O
O
O
O
DM 69DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
PARTS LOCATION
M Position and GearPosition IndicatorLight
Shift PositionIndicator Light
O/D MainSwitch
Transmission Shift SwitchDLC3
Counter GearSpeed Sensor
Vehicle SpeedSensor
Shift SolenoidValve SLT
Shift SolenoidValve SL1
Input Turbine Speed Sensor
Shift SolenoidValve DSL
Shift Solenoid"Valve SL2 Shift Solenoid
Valve S4
ATF TemperatureSensor
Park/Neutral Position Switch
D07775
DM70DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
TERMINALS OF ECM
<S> CS> CS> C55R |'t=i=l| n
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1212CI9I81716I514I3I211 10313029 2827 2f252'2c2£
n lfc=dl
|7 |6 |54 |3 | |2|1615141312111019242322 212019|t8
nF]8
17
^^n rb=dl q9
1928
81827
717
261625
6
1524
514
23
4
13
31222
211
21
1
1020
n \t=*\ x7
1522
614
211320
51219
41118
310
29
17
18
16
D05962
Symbols (Terminals No.)
SL1* (E5-7) <-> SL1- (E5-9)
SL2+ (E5-8) <-> SL2- (E5-20)
DSL (E5-1 9) <-» Body ground
NC+ (E5-14) 4-> NO (E5-26)
NT+ (E5-16) o NT- (E5-15)
SLT+ (E5-6) <-> SLT- (E5-5)
OD1 (E3-1)<->E1 (E4-17)
ODLP (E3-19) <-> E1 (E4-17)
L(E4-9)<->E1 (E4-17)
2(E4-19)«-»E1 (E4-17)
R(E3-2)<->E1(E4-17)
D (E3-24) <-> E1 (E4-17)
N(E4-8)<->E1(E4-17)
THO (E4-13) <-> E2 (E4-18)
S4 (E5-29) <-» E1 (E4-17)
P (E4-20) <-» E1 (E4-17)
SFTU (E2-9) <* El (E4-17)
Wiring Color
G4->V
BR-Y<->O
G-W«->Body
ground
P-B <-» G-W
W-LoB
Y-R «-> Y-G
B<->BR
BR-Y *-> BR
Y— B <-» BR
L— Y o BR
R-BoBR
L-W <-> BR
P-LoBR
GR-L<->BR
YoBR
P*-»BR
L<-»BR
Condition
IGON
1 st or 2nd gear
3rd or O/D gear
IGON
1st or 2nd gear
3rd or O/D gear
IGON
Vehicle driving under lock-up position
Engine is running
Engine is running
IG ON
IGON
O/D main switch ON
O/D main switch OFF
IG ON and Shift lever L position
IG ON and Shift lever other than L position
IG ON and Shift lever 2 position
IG ON and Shift lever other than 2 position
IG ON and Shift lever R position
IG ON and Shift lever other than R position
IG ON and Shift lever D position
IG ON and Shift lever other than D position
IG ON and Shift lever P or N position
IG ON and Shift lever other than P or N position
IG ON and ATF temperature 11 0 °C (230 °F)
IGON
IG ON and O/D gear
IG ON and Shift lever P position
IG ON and Shift lever other P position
IG ON and "UP" transmission shift switch pressed
IG ON and "UP" transmission shift switch repressed
STD Voltage (V)
10-14
10-14
Below 1
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
Below 1
10-14
Pulse signal is output
Below 1 <-> 4 - 5
Pulse signal is output
Below 1 <-» 4 - 5
10-14
5-6
10-14
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
Below 1
Below 1
10-14
10-14
Below 1
Below 1
10-14
DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)DM71
SFTD (E2-17) <-» E1 (E4-1 7)
SPD(E3-22)<-»E1(E4-17)
ODMS (E2-5) *-» El (E4-17)
PoBR
W-R <-> BR
BR-Y<-»BR
IG ON and "Down" transmission shift switch pressed
IG ON and "Down" transmission shift switch repressed
IG ON and Vehicle stationary
IG ON and Turn one front wheel slowly
ICON
IG ON and Press continuously O/D main switch
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
Pulse signal is output
Below 1 <-> 4 - 6
Below 1
10-14
DI-172DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
UttOl-OZ
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLEIf a normal code is displayed during the diagnostic trouble code check but the trouble still occurs, check thecircuits for each symptom in the order given in the charts on the following pages and proceed to the pagegiven for troubleshooting.The Matrix Chart is divided into 3 chapters.Chapter 1: Electronic circuit matrix chartChapter 2: On-vehicle repair matrix chartChapter 3: Off-vehicle repair matrix chartIf the instruction "Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on matrix chart" is given in the flow chart for eachcircuit, proceed to the circuit with the next highest number in the table to continue the check.If the trouble still occurs even though there are no abnormalities in any of the other circuits, then check andreplace the ECM.Chapter 1: Electronic circuit matrix chart
Symptom
No up-shift (A particular gear, from 1st to 3rd gear, is not up-
shifted)
No up-shift (3rd -» O/D)
No down-shift (O/D -» 3rd)
No down-shift (A particular gear, from 3rd to 1st gear, is not
down-shifted)
No lock-up or No lock-up off
Shift point too high or too low
Up-shift to 2nd while in L position
Up-shift to 3rd while in 2 position
Up-shift to O/D from 3rd while O/D main switch is OFF
Up-shift to O/D from 3rd white engine is cold
Harsh engagement (N -» D)
Harsh engagement (Lock-up)
Harsh engagement (Any driving position)
Poor acceleration
Engine stalls when starting off or stopping
No E-shift system
Suspect Area
ECM
1 . O/D main switch circuit
2. O/D cancel signal circuit
3. ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
1 . O/D main switch circuit
2. ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
1 . Transmission shift main switch circuit
2. Transmission shift switch circuit
3. ECM
Seepage
IN-30
DI-206
DI-209
IN-30
IN-30
IN-30
IN-30
IN-30
IN-30
IN-30
DI-206IN-30
IN-30
IN-30
IN-30
IN-30
IN-30
IN-30
DI-216
DI-212
IN-30
DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)DM73
Chapter 2: On-vehicle repair(*: U240E automatic transaxle repair manual Pub. No. RM740U)
Symptom
Vehicle does not move in any forward position and reverse posi-
tion
Vehicle does not move in R position
No up-shift (1st-» 2nd)
No up-shift (2nd -» 3rd)
No up-shift (3rd -> O/D)
No down-shitt (O/D -» 3rd)
No down-shitt (3rd -> 2nd)
No down-shift (2nd -» 1st)
No lock-up or No lock-up off
Harsh engagement (N -» D)
Harsh engagement (N -> R)
Harsh engagement (Lock-up)
Harsh engagement (2nd -> 3rd)
Harsh engagement (3rd -» O/D)
Harsh engagement (O/D -» 3rd)
Slip or shudder (Forward and reverse)
No engine braking (1st: L position)
No engine braking (2nd: 2 position)
No kick-down
Suspect Area
1. Manual valve
2. Primary regulator valve
3. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
Off— vehicle repair matrix chart
1. 1-2 shift valve
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. 2-3 shift valve
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. 3-4 shift valve
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
3-4 shift valve
2-3 shift valve
1-2 shift valve
1 . Lock-up relay valve
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. Ci accumulator
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. Cg accumulator
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. Lock-up relay valve
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
C2 accumulator
B0 accumulator
1. CQ accumulator
2. BQ accumulator
1. Oil strainer
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
Off— vehicle repair matrix chart
Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. 1-2 shift valve
2. 2-3 shift valve
3. 3-4 shift valve
See page
**
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
-
A
*
*
DM74DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
Chapter 3: Off-vehicle repair(A: U240E automatic transaxle repair manual Pub. No. RM740U)
Symptom
Vehicle does not move in any forward position and reverse posi-tion
Vehicle does not move in R position
No up-shift (1st -» 2nd)
No up-shift (2nd -> 3rd)
No up-shift (3rd -> O/D)
No lock-up or No lock-up off
Harsh engagement (N -> D)
Harsh engagement (N -> R)
Harsh engagement (Lock-up)
Slip or shudder (Forward position: After warm-up)
Slip or shudder (R position)
Slip or shudder (1st)
Slip or shudder (2nd)
Slip or shudder (3rd)
Slip or shudder (O/D)
No engine braking (1 st - 3rd: D position)
No engine braking (1 st: L position)
No engine braking (2nd: 2 position)
Poor acceleration (All position)
Poor acceleration (O/D)
Large shift shock or engine stalls when starting off or stopping
Suspect Area
1 . Front and rear planetary gear
2. U/D planetary gear
3. U/D one-way clutch (F2)4. Forward clutch (CO
5. U/D brake (B3)
1 . Front and rear planetary gear unit
2. U/D planetary gear unit
3. Direct clutch (C2)
4. U/D brake (C3)
5. 1st& reverse brake (B2)
1. No. 1 one-way clutch (F,)
2. 2nd brake (B^
Direct clutch (C2)
U/D clutch (63)
Torque converter clutch
1 . Forward clutch (Ci )
2. U/D one-way clutch (F2)
3. No. 1 one-way clutch (F^
1. Direct clutch (C2)
2. 1st & reverse brake (B2)
Torque converter clutch
1. Torque converter clutch
2. Forward clutch (C^)
3. Direct clutch (€2)4. U/D brake (C3)
5. No. 1 one-way clutch (Ft)
6. U/D one-way clutch (F2)
1 . Direct clutch (C2)
2. lst& reverse brake (82)
No. 1 one-way clutch (F^
1 . U/D one-way clutch (F^
2. 2nd brake (B,)
Direct clutch (C^
U/D clutch (Cg)
U/D brake (B3)
1 st & reverse brake (B2)
2nd brake (B,)
1. Torque converter clutch
2. U/D planetary gear
1. U/D clutch (C3)
2. U/D planetary gear
Torque converter clutch
See page
*
**
**if
if
**A
**
*A
AX-36
Aifif
A
*AX-36
AX-36ififififif
*
*
*ifif
if
if
if
if
if
AX-36
*ifif
AX-36
DM75DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe vehicle speed sensor outputs a 4-pulse signal for every revolution of the transaxle output shaft.After this signal is converted into a more precise rectangular wave form by the wave form shaping circuitinside the combination meter, it is then transmitted to the ECM.
4-Pulse
VehicleSpeed Sensor
jimui4-Pulse
JUUUL
ECM
TransaxleD06036
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P0500
When all of the following conditions continues for 1 sec. or
more:
1. After the ignition switch is turned on, 0.5 second or more
elapses.
2. Counter gear rpm is equal to or greater then vehicle speed.
3. Vehicle speed sensor signal can not be input to the ECM.
4. The condition that engine coolant temp, is 20 "C or more(no error in engine coolant temp, sensor circuit is detected)
and the park/neutral position switch is set to P or N contin-
ues for 2 for. or more, or the condition that engine coolant
temp, is less than 20 °C (an error in engine coolant temp.
sensor circuit is detected) and the park/neutral position
switch is set to P or N continues for 30 sec. or more.
• Combination meter
> Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit
• Vehicle speed sensor
• ECM
• Automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc,)
Clutch or brake slips or gear is broken
DM76DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Combination MeterECM
Instrument Panel J/B
W-R W-R SPD
D07932
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check operation of speedometer.
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio was leanor rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.CHECK:Drive the vehicle and check if the operation of the speedometer in the combination meter is normal.HINT:The vehicle speed sensor is operating normally if the speedometer display is normal.
Check speedometer (See page BE-2).
DM 77DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
Check for short in harness and connector between terminal SPD of ECM connec-tor and body ground.
SPD
OK
D07776
PREPARATION:Disconnect the connector of the ECM.CHECK:Check continuity between terminal SPD of the ECM connectorand body ground.OK:
No continuity (1M £1 or higher)
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check voltage between terminal SPD of ECM connector and body ground.
D07252
PREPARATION:Turn ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal SPD of ECM connector andbody ground.OK:
Voltage: 9 -14V
Check for open in harness and connector be-tween J/B No. 1 and ECM (See page IN-30).
OK
Check for open in harness and connector between J/B No. 1 and combinationmeter (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
DM 78DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
5 Check ECM (See page IN-20).
NG\ Replace ECM.
Check and repair transaxle (clutch, brake orgear etc.).
DI-179DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
D15QO-03
DTC P0710 Transmission Fluid Temperature SensorMalfunction (ATF Temperature Sensor)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe ATF temperature sensor converts fluid temperature into a resistance value which is input into the ECM.
DTC No.
P0710
DTC Detecting Condition
Either (a) or (b) is detected for 0.5 sec. or more.
(1 -trip detection logic)
(a) Temp, sensor resistance is less than 79 Q.
(b) After the engine has been operating for 1 5 minutes or
more, the resistance at the temp, sensor is more than 1 56 kfl.
Trouble Area
•Open or short in ATF temp, sensor
• ATF temp, sensor
• ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
Transaxle
THO
OE2 BR
ECM
18
THO
E2
D07931
DI-180DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check ATF temperature sensor.
OK
002967
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the solenoid wire connector.(b) Remove the oil pan.(c) Disconnect all solenoid valve connectors.(d) Remove the transmission wire harness.CHECK:Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 6 of solenoid con-nector at 25 °C (77 °F) and 110 °C (230 °F).OK:
Resistance (Approx.):25 °C (77 °F): 3.5 kfi110 °C (230 °F): 231 - 263 fl
Replace the ATF temperature sensor (transmis-sion wire).
Check harness and connector between ATF temperature sensor and ECM(See page IN-30).
OK
Repair or replace the harness or connector.
Check and replace the ECM(See page IN-30).
DM 81DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
0422-03
DTC P0750 Shift Solenoid A Malfunction(Shift Solenoid Valve SL1)
DTC P0755 Shift Solenoid B Malfunction(Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)
DTC P0765 Shift Solenoid D Malfunction(Shift Solenoid Valve S4)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONThe ECM uses signals from the vehicle speed sensor to detect the actual gear position (1 st, 2nd, 3rd or O/Dgear).Then the ECM compares the actual gear with the shift schedule in the ECM memory to detect mechanicaltrouble of the shift solenoid valves and valve body.
DTC No.
P0750
P0755
P0765
DTC Detecting Condition
During normal driving, the gear required by the ECM does not
match the actual gear(2-trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
•Shift solenoid valve SL1/SL2/S4 is stuck open or closed
•Valve body is blocked up or stuck
HINT:Check the shift solenoid valve SL1 when DTC P0750 is output, check the shift solenoid valve SL2 when DTCP0755 is output and check shift solenoid S4 when DTC P0765 is output.
DM82DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check shift solenoid valve SL1, SL2 or S4 operation.
Shift solenoid valve SL1 and SL2
2
Shift solenoid valve S4
D03445003*46D03424 D03423
PREPARATION:(a) Jack up the vehicle.(b) Remove the oil pan.(c) Remove the shift solenoid valve SL1, SL2 or S4.CHECK:Check Solenoid Resistance:(a) Shitt solenoid valve SL1 or SL2:
Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of sole-noid connector.
(b) Shift solenoid valve S4:Measure resistance between terminal 1 of solenoid con-nector and solenoid body.
Check Solenoid Operation:(a) Shift solenoid valve SL1 or SL2:
Connect the positive (+) lead with an 23-W bulb to termi-nal 1 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 2 of solenoidconnector, then check the movement of the valve.
(b) Shift solenoid valve S4:Connect the positive (+) lead with an 23-W bulb to termi-nal 1 of solenoid connector and the negative (-) lead tothe solenoid valve body, then check the movement of thevalve.
OK:(a) Resistance: 5.1 - 5.5 &(b) The shift solenoid valve makes operation noise.
Replace the shift solenoid valve SL1, SL2 or S4.
Check the valve body (See page DM72).
DM83DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
DTC P0753 Shift Solenoid A Electrical Malfunction(Shift Solenoid Valve SL1)
DTC P0758 Shift Solenoid B Electrical Malfunction(Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)
DTC P0768 Shift Solenoid D Electrical Malfunction(Shift Solenoid Valve S4)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONShifting from 1 st to O/D is performed in combination with ON and OFF of the shift solenoid valves SL1 andSL2 controlled by ECM. If an open or short circuit occurs in either of the shift solenoid valves, the ECM con-trols the remaining normal shift solenoid valve to allow the vehicle to be operated smoothly (Fail safe func-tion).
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P0753
P0758
P0768
The ECM checks for an open or short circuit in the shift sole-
noid valves SL1 and SL2.
(a) When the solenoid is energized, the duty ratio exceed 75
%.
(b) When the solenoid is not energized, the duty ratio is lessthan 3 %.
The ECM checks for an open or short circuit in the shift sole-
noid valve S4 circuit when it changes.
The ECM records DTC P0768 if condition (a) or (b) is de-
tected.
(a.) When the solenoid is energized, the solenoid resistance is
8 Q or less and is counted.
(b) When the solenoid is not energized, the solenoid resistance
is 100 kn or more and is counted.
• Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL1/SL2/S4 circuit
• Shift solenoid valve SL1/SL2/S4
• ECM
HINT:Check the shift solenoid valve SL1 when DTC P0753 is output, check the shift solenoid valve SL2 when DTCP0758 is output and check the shift solenoid valve S4 when DTC P0768 is output.
DM 84DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
Fail safe function:If either of the shift solenoid valve circuits develops an open or short, the ECM turns the other shift solenoidON and OFF to shift to the gear positions shown in the table below. The ECM also turns the shift solenoidvalve DSL OFF at the same time. If both solenoids are malfunction, hydraulic control cannot be performedelectronically and must be done manually.Manual shifting as shown in the following table must be done (In the case of a short circuit, the ECM stopssending current to the short circuited solenoid).
NORMAL
Solenoid ValveSL1
ON
OFF
SL2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
S4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Gear
1st
2nd
3rd
O/D
SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 MALFUNCTIONINGDriving at 3rd or O/D
Solenoid Valve
SL1
X
X
X
X
SL2ON
OFFON
OFF
OFF
OFF
S4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Gear
3rd
3rd
3rd
O/D
Driving at 1 st or 2ndSolenoid Valve
SL1
X
X
X
X
SL2
ON
ON
TON
TON
S4
OFF
OFF
TON
ON
Gear
2nd
2nd
3rd
3rd
SHIFT SOLENOID SL2MALFUNCTIONINGSolenoid Valve
SL1ON
OFF
OFF
SL2
X
X
X
X
S4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Gear
3rd
3rd
3rd
O/D
SHIFT SOLENOID S4MALFUNCTIONING
Solenoid Valve
SL1
ON
OFF
SL2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
S4
X
X
X
X
Gear
1st
2nd
3rd
3rd
SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 ANCSL2 MALFUNCTIONING
Solenoid Valve
SL1
X
X
X
X
SL2
X
X
X
X
S4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Gear
3rd
3rd
3rd
O/D
SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 AND S4 MALFUNCTIONINGDriving at 3rd or O/D
Solenoid Valve
SL1
X
X
X
X
SL2ON
OFFON
OFF
OFF
OFF
S4
X
X
X
X
Gear
3rd
3rd
3rd
3rd
Driving at 1 st or 2nd
Solenoid ValveSL1
X
X
X
X
SL2
ON
ON
TONOFF
ON
S4
X
X
X
X
Gear
2nd
2nd
2nd
2nd
SHIFT SOLENOID SL2 ANDS4 MALFUNCTIONING
Solenoid ValveSL1ON
OFF
OFF
SL2
X
X
X
X
S4
X
X
X
X
Gear
3rd
3rd
3rd
3rd
SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 , SL2AND S4 MALFUNCTIONING
Solenoid Valve
SL1
X
X
X
X
SL2
X
X
X
X
S4
X
X
X
X
Gear
3rd
3rd
3rd
3rd
DM85DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Automatic Transaxle
N
Shift Sc>lenoid Valve SL1
W
B
Shift Solenoid Valve SL2
J
Shift
Y
BR
Solenoid Valve S4R
5
10
G
V
IDT) BR~Y
9
m Y BJil/
O
J2J/C
7
9
8
20/F?VHiJ
'B Y ^v£2>
"ffrom CruiseControl ECU
ECM/* "X
SL1 +
SL1-
SL2-
S4
V J
D04379
DM86DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Measure resistance between terminals of ECM.
D07867
NG
PREPARATION:Disconnect the connector from ECM.CHECK:(a)
(b)
(c)
OK:
Measure resistance between terminals SL1+ and SL1~ ofECM connector.Measure resistance between terminals SL2+ and SL2~ ofECM connector.Measure resistance between terminal S4 of ECM con-nector and body ground.
Resistance:(a) SL1+ - SL1-: 5.3 ± 0.2 SI(b) SL2+ - SL2-: 5.3 ± 0.2 SI(c) S4 - Body ground: 13 ± 2 SI
Check and replace the ECM.
DI-187DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
Measure harness and connector between ECM and automatic transaxle solenoidconnector.
SL2-
SLV
Solenoid ConnectorSL1-
SL2+
' SL2-Solenoid Connector
SolenoidConnector
D0786S
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the solenoid connector from the automatic
transaxle.(b) Disconnect the connector from the ECM.CHECK:(a) Measure the harness and connector between terminal
SL1+ or SL1~ of ECM and terminal SL1+ or SL1~ of sole-noid connector.
(b) Measure the harness and connector between terminalSL2+ or SLT of ECM and terminal SL2+ or SL2- of sole-noid connector.
(c) Measure the harness and connector between terminal S4of ECM and terminal S4 of solenoid connector.
OK:Resistance: 0 &
Repair or replace the harness or connector.
OK
DM 88DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
3 Check shift solenoid valve SL1, SL2 or S4 (See page DM81).
NG\ Replace the solenoid valve.
OK
Repair or replace the solenoid wire, harnessand connector between ECM and automatictransaxle solenoid connector.
DM89DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
DTC P0770 Shift Solenoid E Malfunction(Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONThe ECM uses the signals from the throttle position sensor, air-flow meter and crankshaft position sensorto monitor the engagement condition of the lock-up clutch.Then the ECM compares the engagement condition of the lock-up clutch with the lock-up schedule in theECM memory to detect mechanical trouble of the shift solenoid valve DSL, valve body and torque converterclutch.
DTC No.
P0770
DTC Detecting Condition
Lock-up does not occur when driving in the lock-up range
(normal driving at 80 km/h [50 mph]), or lock-up remains ON
in the lock-up OFF range.
(2-trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
•Shift solenoid valve DSL is stuck open or closed
• Valve body blocked up or stuck
• Lock-up clutch
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check solenoid valve DSL operation.
D03447 003725
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the oil pan.(b) Remove the shift solenoid valve DSL.CHECK:(a)
(b)
OK:
Applying 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) of compressed air,check that the solenoid valve does not leak air.When battery positive voltage is supplied to the shift sole-noid valve, check that the solenoid valve opens.
(a) Solenoid valve does not leak air.(b) Solenoid valve opens.
Replace the solenoid valve DSL.
OK
DM 90DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
2 Check valve body (See page DM72).
NG\ Repair or replace the valve body.
OK
Replace the torque converter clutch(See page AX-30).
DM91DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
DU2W-C3
DTC P0773 Shift Solenoid E Electrical Malfunction(Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe shift solenoid valve DSL is turned ON and OFF by signals from the ECM to control the hydraulic pressureacting on the lock-up relay valve, which then controls operation of the lock-up clutch.
DTC No.
P0773
DTC Detecting Condition
Either (a) or (b) are detected for 1 time.
(2-trip detection logic)
(a) Solenoid resistance is 8 il or less short circuit when sole-
noid is energized,(b) Solenoid resistance is 100 kil or more open circuit when
solenoid is not energized.
Trouble Area
•Open or short in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit
•Shift solenoid valve DSL
• ECM
Fail safe function:If the ECM detects a malfunction, it turns the shift solenoid valve DSL OFF.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Transaxle ECM
Shift SolenoidValve DSL
G-W19
DSL
D07933
DM92DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check harness and connector between ECM and automatic transaxle solenoidconnector.
DSL Solenoid ConnectorD07253
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the solenoid connector from the transaxle.(b) Disconnect the connector from the ECM.CHECK:Measure the harness and connector between terminal DSL ofECM and terminal DSL of solenoid connector.OK:
There is continuity.
Repair or replace the harness or connector.
DM 93DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
Check shift solenoid valve DSL.
D03728
PREPARATION:(a) Jack up the vehicle.(b) Remove the oil pan.(c) Disconnect the shift solenoid valve DSL connector.(d) Remove the shift solenoid valve DSL.CHECK:(a)
(b)
OK:
Measure resistance between terminal DSL of shift sole-noid valve and solenoid body.Connect positive (+) lead to terminal of solenoid connec-tor, negative (-) lead to solenoid body.
(a) Resistance: 11 -15 Q(b) The shift solenoid valve DSL makes operationnoise.
Replace the shift solenoid valve DSL.
OK
Check and replace or repair the solenoidwire.
DM 94DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXUE (U240E)
DMZl-03
DTC P1520 Stop Light Switch Signal Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling, while driving in lock-up condition, whenbrakes are suddenly applied.When the brake pedal is operated, this switch sends a signals to ECM. Then the ECM cancels operationof the lock-up clutch while braking is in progress.
DTC No.
PI 520
DTC Detecting Condition
No stop light switch signal to ECM during driving.
(2-trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
•Open or short in stop light switch circuit
• Stop light switch
•ECM
WIRING DIAGRAMSeepage DI-130.
INSPECTION PROCEDURESeepage DI-130.
DM 95DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
DTC P1725 NT Revolution Sensor Circuit Malfunction(Input Turbine Speed Sensor)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis sensor detects the rotation speed of the input turbine. By comparing the input turbine speed signal (NT)and the counter gear speed sensor signal (NC), the ECM detects the shift timing of the gears and appropri-ately controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure in response to various conditions, thus performingsmooth gear shifting.
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P1725
The ECM detects conditions (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) continuityfor 5 seconds or more.
(1-trip detection logic)
(a) Gear change not being performed
(b) Gear position: 2nd, 3rd or O/D gear
(c) Solenoid valves and park/neutral position switch are normal
(d) T/M input shaft rpm: 300 rpm or less
(e) T/M output shaft rpm: 1,000 rpm or less
(a) Gear change not being performed
(b) Gear position: 2nd, 3rd or O/D gear
(c) Solenoid valves and park/neutral position switch are normal
(d) T/M input shaft rpm: 300 rpm or less
(e) T/M output shaft rpm: 1,000 rpm or less
•Open or short in input turbine (NT) speed sensor circuit
• Input turbine (NT) speed sensor
ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
ECM
16
2/"
GI
— I P8^V
I Input TurbineI Speed Sensor
15B /"E?"
^±>
NT+
NT~
V J
c007934
DM96DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check resistance between terminals NT+ and NT~ of ECM.
INT+
N
r/A
%
>
t-ff.
4
NG
""1•gH v"lit 1 rryJJHUM
;§}
KTiy r itnnitnlffMnll^ P ^^i^ ^i \ V \ V V \
S NT-
D07245
PREPARATION:Disconnect the connector from ECM.CHECK:Check resistance between terminals NT+ and NT~ of ECM.OK:
Res
OK\
istance: 620 ± 60 Q
Check and replace the ECM(See page IN-30).
Check NT revolution speed sensor.
OK
Magnet
Q08218
PREPARATION:Remove the NT revolution speed sensor from transaxle.CHECK:(a)
(b)
OK:
Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of speedsensor.Check voltage between terminals 1 and 2 of the speedsensor when a magnet is put close to the front end of thespeed sensor then taken away quickly.
(a) Resistance: 620 ± 60 Q at 20 °C (68 °F)(b) Voltage is generated intermittently.
HINT:The voltage generated is extremely low.
Replace the NT revolution speed sensor.
Check and repair the harness and connectorbetween ECM and NT revolution speed sen-sorJSee page IN-30).
DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)DM97
DMZU-03
DTC P1730 NC Revolution Sensor Circuit Malfunction(Counter Gear Speed Sensor)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis sensor detects the rotation speed of the counter gear. By comparing the counter gear speed signal (NC)and the input turbine speed sensor signal (NT), the ECM detects the shift timing of the gears and appropriate-ly controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure in response to various conditions, thus performingsmooth gear shifting.
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P1730
The ECM detects conditions (a), (b), (c) and (d) continuity for 5
sees or more.
(1-trip detection logic)
(a) IG SW: ON
(b) Park/neutral position switch: Except P, N position
(c) T/M input shaft rpm: 300 rpm or less
(d) T/M output shaft rpm: 1,000 rpm or more
• Open or short in NC revolution sensor circuit
• NC revolution speed sensor
• ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
ECM
14P-B SZ^
2f
\ili1
*v
3 Counter GearI Speed Sensor
26G-W /^^
^^
MP+
NC~
V J
CD0793S
DM98DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check resistance between terminals NC+ and NC~ of ECM.
NG
007244
PREPARATION:Disconnect the connector from ECM.CHECK:Check resistance between terminals NC+ and NC~ of ECM.OK:
Resistance: 620 ± 60 Q
Check and replace the ECM(See page IN-30).
2 Check NC revolution speed sensor.
rCSHf
\®%^SP* Magnet
lP
008218
PREPARATION:Remove the NC revolution speed sensor from transaxle.CHECK:(a) Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of speed
sensor,(b) Check voltage between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed
sensor when a magnet is put close to the front end of thespeed sensor then taken away quickly.
OK:(a) Resistance: 620 ± 60 n at 20 °C (68 °F)(b) Voltage is generated intermittently.
HINT:The voltage generated is extremely low.
NG \ Replace the NC revolution speed sensor.
OK
Check and repair the harness and connectorbetween ECM and NC revolution speed sen-sor (See page IN-30).
DI-199DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
DTC P1760 Linear Solenoid for Line Pressure ControlCircuit Malfunction (Solenoid Valve SLT)
Line Pressure Con-trol Pressure
Current Flow to Solenoid 002290
OFF
BE4056
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe throttle pressure that is applied to the primary regulatorvalve (which modulates line pressure) causes the solenoidvalve SLT, under electronic control, to precisely and minutelymodulate and generate line pressure according to the accelera-tor pedal effort, or engine power output detected.This reduces the function of line pressure and provides smoothshifting characteristics.Upon receiving the throttle valve opening angle signal, ECMcontrols the line pressure by sending a predetermined (*) dutyratio to the solenoid valve, modulating the line pressure, gener-ating throttle pressure.O Duty RatioThe duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle.For example, if 'A" is the period of continuity in one cycle, and"B" is the period of non-continuity, then
Duty Ratio • A + B x100(%)
DTC No.
P1760
DTC Detecting Condition
(a) or (b) condition below is detected 1 second or more,
(a) SLT- terminal: 0V(b) SLT- terminal: 12V
Trouble Area
•Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit
• Shift solenoid valve SLT• ECM
GNDf*~ ^ff
1 msec. / Div.
5V/ Div.
D01875
Reference:Wave form between terminals SLT+ and SLT~ during engine id-ling.
DI-200DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Shift SolenoidValve SLT
Transaxle
<<<
O
>>•>
G
2 6
1:?) Y~R rpJiU <JL
7 5ir Y-° r >sj_y VJ_>
ECM/" N
SLT+
SLT-
L yD01772
DI-201DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check shift solenoid valve SLT.
D03445OO3446002968 D03729
PREPARATION;(a) Jack up the vehicle.(b) Remove the oil pan.(c) Disconnect the solenoid connector.Check solenoid resistance:CHECK:Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of solenoid con-nector.OK:
Resistance: 5.0 - 5.6 QCheck solenoid operation:CHECK:Connect positive (+) lead with an 8 - 10W bulb to terminal 1 ofsolenoid connector and negative {—) lead to terminal 2, thencheck the movement of the valve.OK:
When battery positive voltage is applied.
When battery positive voltage is cut off.
Valve moves in • • iin illustration at right.
Valve moves in - ^^"in illustration at left.
^ direction
•• direction
NG \ Replace shift solenoid valve SLT.
OK
Check harness and connector between shift solenoid valve SLT and ECM (Seepage IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Replace ECM.
DI-202DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [U240E1
DUZS-03
DTC P1780 Park/Neutral Position Switch Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends signals to the ECM.The ECM receives signals (R, R, N, D 2 and L) from the park/neutral position switch.
DTC No. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area
P1780
When more than one of the following conditions continue for
500 sec. or more.
(a) P, N position input signal is ON.(b) P position input signal is ON.
(c) N position input signal is ON.
(d) L position input signal is ON.
(e) 2 position input signal is ON.
(f) 3 position input signal is ON.
(g) 4 position input signal is ON.
(h) D position input signal is ON.
(i) R position input signal is ON.
> Short in park/neutral position switch circuit
• Park/neutral position switch
•ECM
When any of following conditions for 500 msec, or more in the
M position.
(a) P. N position input signal is ON.
(b) P position input signal is ON.
(c) N position input signal is ON.
(d) L position input signal is ON.
DI-203DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
WIRING DIAGRAM
B-R
L-R
f
i
P1Park/NeutralPosition Switch
R-L
NL
LL
2L
RB
DL
RL
P-L
Y-B
L-Y
B-O
R-B
Instrument Panel J/B
Engine Room J/B
R-L
W-B
Engine Room J/B
—O<%*D—FL MAIN
B-R
Battery
ECM
8
9
19
20
From_CruiseControl
L-W
D07936
DI-204DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Read PNP, REVERSE, 2ND and LOW signals.
007262
When using TOYOTA hand-held tester:PREPARATION:(a) Remove the DLC3 cover.(b) Connect a TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(c) Turn the ignition switch ON and TOYOTA hand-held tes-
ter main switch ON.CHECK:Shift lever into the P, R, N, D, 2 and L positions, and read theNSW, REVERSE, 2ND DRIVE and LOW signals on the TOYO-TA hand-held tester.OK:
Shift position
2
L
D
R
P, N
Signal
2ND OFF -* ON
LOW OFF -> ON
DRIVE OFF -> ON
REVERSE OFF -> ON
NSW OFF -> ON
When not using TOYOTA hand-held tester:PREPARATION:Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals P. R. N. D. 2 and L of ECMand body ground when the shift lever is shifted to the followingpositions.OK:
Position
P
R
N
D
2
L
P-Bodyground
9-14V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
R-Bodyground
0V
9-14V
0V
0V
0V
0V
N-Bodyground
0V
0V
9-14V
0V
0V
0V
D-Bodyground
0V
0V
0V
9-14V
0V
0V
2-Bodyground
0V
0V
0V
0V
9-14V
0V
L-Bodyground
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
9-14V
HINT:*: The voltage will drop slightly due to lighting up of the back uplight.
Check and replace the ECM (See page IN-30).
DI-205DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
Check park/neutral position switch.
D06561
PREPARATION:(a) Jack up the vehicle.(b) Remove the park/neutral position switch.CHECK:Check continuity between each terminal shown below when theshift lever is moved to each position.
Shift position
P
R
N
D
2
L
Terminal No. to continuity
6-9
2-3
6-9
3-7
3-4
3-8
1 -3
-
3-5
-
-
- .
OK:There is continuity.
Replace the park/neutral position switch.
Repair or replace harness and connector between battery and park/neutral positionswitch, park/neutral position switch and ECM (See page IN-30).
DL-206DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
O/D Main Switch & O/D OFF Indicator Light Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe O/D main switch is a momentary type switch. When pressing the O/D main switch, the O/D OFF indicatorlight lights up and ECM prohibits shifting to O/D, and when pressing it again, the O/D OFF indicator light goesoff and ECM allows shifting to O/D. Turning the IG switch OFF will reset the O/D OFF indicator light.
WIRING DIAGRAM
ECM
CombinationMeter
D07937
DI-207DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check operation of O/D main switch
PREPARATION:Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:(a) Check O/D OFF indicator light when O/D main switch is
pushed in to ON.(b) Check O/D OFF indicator light when O/D main switch is
pushed again.OK:
(a) O/D OFF indicator light lights up.(b) O/D OFF indicator light goes off.
Proceed to next inspection shown on problemsymptoms tables (See page DM72).
NG
2 Check and replace the combination meter (See page BE-2).
NG \ Replace the combination meter.
OK
Check O/D main switch.
D07778
PREPARATION:Disconnect the O/D main switch connector.CHECK:Check continuity between terminals 5 and 6 of O/D main switchconnector.OK:
O/D main switch condition
Press continuously O/D main switch
Release O/D main switch
Specified condition
Continuity
No continuity
Replace and repair O/D main switch.
OK
DI-208DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
4 Check voltage between terminal ODMS of ECM and body ground.
0)°N
i *yj ^f(N D07265
NG
PREPARATION:Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Check voltage between terminal ODMS of ECM and bodyground when O/D main switch is ON and OFF.OK:
O/D main switch
Press continuously O/D main switch
Release O/D main switch
Specified voltage
Below 1.0V
10-14V
OK \ Check and replace the ECM (See page IN-20).
5 Check voltage between terminal ODLP of ECM and body ground.
ffi\ ON ODLP
H/\/V* \^y^
N ~~ D07266
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the connector of ECM.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK-Check voltage between terminal ODLP of ECM and bodyground.OK:
Volt
OK\
age: 7.5 -14V
Check and replace the ECM (See page IN-20).
Check and replace harness and connector between combination meter and ECM, O/D mainswitch and ECM, O/D main switch and body ground (See page IN-20).
DI-209DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
O/D Cancel Signal Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhile driving uphill with cruise control activated, in order to minimize gear shifting and provide smooth cruis-ing overdrive may be prohibited temporarily under some condition.The cruise control ECU sends O/D cut signals to the ECM as necessary and the ECM cancels overdriveshifting until these signals are discontinued.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Cruise Control ECU
OD14
ECM
B_7_IE31 B OD1
D07938
DI-210DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check voltage between terminal O01 of ECM and body ground.
NG
D07264
PREPARATION:Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal OD1 of ECM and bodyground.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onmatrix chart (See page DM72).
Check voltage between terminal OD of cruise control ECU harness side connec-tor and body ground.
,00742
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the cruise control ECU connector.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal OD of cruise control ECUharness side connector and body ground.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
Check and replace the cruise control ECU.
NG
DI-211DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
Check harness and connector between cruise control ECU and ECM(See page IN-30).
Repair or replace the harness or connector.
Check and replace the ECM(See page IN-30).
DI-212DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
Transmission Shift Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen shifting the shift lever in M position, using the transmission shift switch, it is possible to shift in 2 - 4positions.Pressing "Up switch" once shifts up 1 position, "Down switch" once shifts down 1 position respectively.
WIRING DIAGRAM
C16 Transmission Shift Switch
V
A
/-BA
J10J/C
J9J/C
W-BA 3
Ecq
Left-Up
Right-Up
Left-Down
Right-Do wn
°
L v|5 ^
P yl6 'I
11IPS}
22Hal
ECM
9
Mi;
17
SFTU
SFTD
DI-213DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check the shift lock control unit assembly (See page AX-16).
Replace the shift lock control unit assembly.
OK
Check operation of transmission shift switch.
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch ON.(b) Shift the shift lever into the M position.CHECK:Check the odo trip display panel when the transmission shiftswitch is pressed.OK:
Switch condition
"Up" switch press
"Down" switch press
Odo trip display panel
Shift up
Shift down
Go to step 5
OK
DI-214DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
Check voltage between each of terminals SFTU and SFTD of ECM and bodyground.
SFTU
D07263
PREPARATION:(a) Turn ignition switch ON.(b) Remove the ECM with connectors still connected.CHECK:Check voltage between each terminals of SFTU and SFTD ofECM and body ground.OK:
Switch condition
"Up" switch held pressing
"Up" switch released
"Down" switch heldpressing
"Down" switch released
Tester connection
SFTU — Body ground
SFTD - Body ground
Specified condition
10-14V
Below 1.5V
10-14V
Below 1.5V
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptoms table (See page DM72).
Check harness and connector between battery and ECM, ECM and odo trip dis-play panel (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace ECM(See page IN-30).
DI-215DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
Check transmission shift switch.
5 6
D07B12
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the steering wheel pad.(b) Disconnect the transmission shift switch connector.CHECK:Check continuity between each terminal of transmission shiftswitch connector.OK:
Switch condition
"Up" switch pressed
"Up" switch released
"Down" switch pressed
"Down" switch released
Tester connection
3-5
— o
Specified value
No continuity
Continuity
No continuity
Continuity
Replace the steering wheel.
Check and replace combination meter (Seecombination meter troubleshooting sectionon page BE-2).
DI-216DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240B
E-Shift Main Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen the shift lever is shifted from the D to M position (the E-shift main switch is pressed), "M" on the com-bination meter lights up. When the "M" on the combination meter turns off. When the "M" on the combinationmeter is flashing, the system may be defective or the ATF temperature may be excessively high or low.
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-594.
DI-217DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE"M" position indicator light flashes.When the ATF temperature is too high or low, the M position indicator light flashes. If this happens, shift theshift lever to the D position and shift it back to the M position after the ATF temperature increase or decrease.If the M position indicator light is still flashing, check if DTC P0710 is displayed or not and inspect the trans-mission shift main switch circuit."M" position indicator light does not light up.
1 Check operation of M indicator light.
D07774
OK
CHECK:Check if the M indicator light normally when the shift lever is setto D position and M position.OK:
Shift Lever Position
M
Except M
Specified Condition
"M" indicator Bght comes on
"M" indicator light goes off
Check and repair the M indicator light (See pageBE-2).
Check E-shift main switch.
D07811
CHECK:Check continuity between each terminal of the E-shift shiftmain switch.OK:
Shift Lever Position
M
Except M
Tester connection
3-4
3-4
Specified value
Continuity
No continuity
If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
DI-218DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
(Vehicle Brought to Workshop)Items inside41_/ are titles of pages in this manual, with thepage number indicated in the bottom portion. See the indicatedpages for detailed explanations.
_1 /Customer Problem Analysisff P. DI-219 /
^Connect an OBDII scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3.f\f the display shows "UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE" when you have connected the/scan tool/TOYOTA hand-held tester, inspect DLC3 P. DI-220
3/Check PTC and Freeze Frame Data (Precheck)/Record or Print DTC and Freeze Frame Data P. DI-220
_ ,4 /Clear DTC and Freeze Frame Data P. DI-22Q /
5/ Visual Inspection/
_ „6/Setting the Check Mode Diagnosis P. Dl-220~/
FT. symptom does not occur
7/ Problem Symptom Confirmation j\symptom occur
Symptom SimulationP. IN-20
Q/ DTC Check 7 OK Code 11 K/Basic Inspection / NGg P. DI-220 / ' //- R DI-220 J^^
10DTC ChartP. DI-231
Mechanical System Test-1^P. DI-220
OK 13Manual Shifting Test
P. DI-220
Problem Symptoms Table - P. DI-234
15,
NG
Chapter 2(On-Vehicle)P. DI-234
OKi \}V
Chapter 3/Off Vohirlo^
P. DI-234
Circuit 7f-lnspection/_*
•O/D Main Switch & O/D OFF Indicator Light CircuitO/D Cancel Signal Circuit Check
P. DI-268 to DI-271
—j NG
;irni »t IIlit Parts Inspection !!
/ <
[ Identification of Problem]!—I / Repair If CZZJ)I Confirmation TestlE End
DI-219DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK
Automatic TransaxleSystem Check Sheet
Inspector'sName
Customer's Name
Date VehicleBrought In / /
Registration No.
Registration Year
Frame No.
Odometer Reading
/ /
kmmile
Date ProblemOccurred
How Often DoesProblem Occur?
' '
G Continuous G Intermittent ( times a day)
Symptoms
G Vehicle does not move (G Any position G Particular position)
Q No up-shift ( G 1 st -» 2nd G 2nd -> 3rd G 3rd -» 0/D)
G No down-shift (GO/D->3rd G3rd-»2ndG 2nd -» 1st)
G Lock-tip malfunction
G Shift point too high or too low
G Harsh engagement (G N -> D G Lock-up G Any drive position)
G Slip or shudder
G No kick-down
Q Others
Check ItemMalfunctionIndicator Lamp G Normal Q Remains ON
DTC Check1st Time
2nd Time
G Normal code
G Normal code
Q Malfunction code
G Malfunction code
(DTC )
(DTC )
DI-220DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
CDCHECK
PRE-CHECK1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM(a) Description
When troubleshooting OBDII vehicles, the only dif-ference from the usual troubleshooting procedureis that you connect to the vehicle an OBD II scantool complying with SAE J1987 or TOYOTA hand-held tester, and read off various data output fromthe vehicle's ECM.
OBD II regulations require that the vehicle's on-board computer lights up the Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL) on the instrument panel when the com-puter detects a malfunction in the computer itself orin drive system components which affect vehicleemissions. In addition to the MIL lighting up whena malfunction is detected, the applicable DTCs pre-scribed by SAE J2012 are recorded in the ECMmemory (See page DI-14).
If the malfunction only occurs in 3 trips, the MIL goes off but theDTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory.
TOYOTA hand-held tester
D07259
To check the DTCs, connect an OBD II scan tool orTOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3 on the vehicle.The OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held testeralso enables you to erase the DTCs and checkfreeze frame data and various forms of engine data(For instruction book).DTCs include SAE controlled codes and Manufac-turer controlled codes.SAE controlled codes must be set as prescribed bythe SAE, while Manufacturer controlled codes canbe set freely by the manufacturer within the pre-scribed limits (See DTC chart on page DI-231).
DI-221DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
The diagnosis system operates in normal modeduring normal vehicle use, and also has a checkmode for technicians to simulate malfunction symp-toms and perform troubleshooting. Most DTCs use2-trip detection logic (*) to prevent erroneousdetection. By switching the ECM to check modewhen troubleshooting, the technician can cause theMIL to light up and for a malfunction that is only de-tected once or momentarily.(TOYOTA hand-held tester) (See page DI-220)
• *2-trip detection logic:When a logic malfunction is first detected, the mal-function is temporarily stored in the ECM memory.
If the same malfunction is detected again during the 2nd testdrive, this 2nd detection causes the MIL to light up .
N09214
(b) Inspect the DLC3.The vehicle's ECM uses ISO 9141-2 for communication.The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with SAEJ1962 and matches the ISO 9141-2 format.
Tester connection
7 (Bus © Line) - 5 (Signal ground)
4 (Chassis Ground) - Body
5 (Signal Ground) - Body
16 (B+)- Body
Condition
During communication
Always
Always
Always
Specified condition
Pulse generation
1 a or less
1 £1 or less
9-14V
HINT:If your display shows "UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE"when you have connected the cable of OBD II scan tool orTOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3, turned the ignition switchON and operated the scan tool, there is a problem on the ve-hicle side or tool side.• If communication is normal when the tool is connected to
another vehicle, inspect DLC3 on the original vehicle.• If communication is still not possible when the tool is con-
nected connected to another vehicle, the problem is prob-ably in the tool itself, so consult the Service Departmentlisted in the tool's instruction manual.
DI-222DIAGNOSTICS AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
CHECKFI0534
TOYOTA hand-held tester
D07259
2. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (NORMAL MODE)(a) Check the MIL.
(1) The MIL comes on when the ignition switch is turnedON and the engine is not running.
HINT:If the MIL does not light up, troubleshoot the combination meter(See page BE-2).
(2) When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.If the lamp remains on, the diagnosis system hasdetected a malfunction or abnormality in the sys-tem.
(b) Check the DTC.NOTICE:TOYOTA hand-held tester only: When the diagnostic sys-tem is switched from normal mode to check mode, it erasesall DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode.So before switching modes, always check the DTCs andfreeze frame data, and note them down.
(1) Prepare an OBD II scan tool (complying with SAEJ1978) or TOYOTA hand-held tester.
(2) Connect the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3 at the lower of the instrumentpanel.
(3) Turn the ignition switch ON and turn the OBD II scantool or TOYOTA hand-held tester switch ON.
(4) Use the OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-heldtester to check the DTCs and freeze frame data andnote them down (For operating instructions, see theOBD II scan tool's instruction book).
(5) See page DI-231 to confirm the details of the DTCs.NOTICE:When simulating symptoms with an OBD II scan tool (ex-cluding TOYOTA hand-held tester) to check the DTCs, usenormal mode. For codes on the DTCs chart subject to"2-trip detection logic", turn the ignition switch OFF afterthe symptoms have been simulated the 1st time. Then re-peat the simulation process again. When the program hasDTCs are recorded in the ECM.
DI-223DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (CHECK MODE)HINT:TOYOTA hand-held tester only: Compared to the normalmode, the check mode has high sensing ability to detect mal-functions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which aredetected in Normal mode can also be detected in Check mode,(a) Check the DTC.
(1) Check the initial conditions.Battery positive voltage 11 V or more.
• Throttle valve fully closed.Transaxle in P position.
• Air conditioning switched off.(2) Turn the ignition switch OFF.(3) Prepare a TOYOTA hand-held tester.
TOYOTA hand-held tester
D07259
(4) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3 atthe lower of the instrument panel.
(5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the TOYOTAhand-held tester ON.
0.13 sec.—•
ON
OFF.
0.13 sec.
(6) Switch the TOYOTA hand-held tester from Normalmode to Check mode (Check that the MIL flashes).
(7) Start the engine (MIL goes out after the enginestarts).
(8) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction de-scribed by the customer.
NOTICE:Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked theDTCs, etc.
(9) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use theTOYOTA hand-held tester diagnosis selector tocheck the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc.
HINT:Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF, as turning it off thediagnosis system from Check mode to Normal mode, so allDTCs, etc. are erased.
(10) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable cir-cuit.
01-224DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
(b) Clear the DTC.The following operation will erase the DTC and freezeframe data. Operating an OBD II scan tool (complyingwith SAE J1978) or TOYOTA hand-held tester to erasethe codes.(See the OBD II scan tool's instruction book for operatinginstructions.)
NOTICE:If the TOYOTA hand-held tester switches the ECM fromNormal mode to Check mode or vice-versa, of if the igni-tion switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during chickmode, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased.
4. PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATIONTaking into consideration the results of the customer problem analysis, try to reproduce the symptoms of thetrouble. If the problem is that the transaxle does not up-shift, down-shift, or the shift point is too high or toolow, conduct the following road test to confirm the automatic shift schedule and simulate the problem symp-toms.5. ROAD TESTNOTICE:Perform the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 - 80 °C (122 -176 °F).(a) D position test
Shift into the D position and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points.(1) Check up-shift operation.
Check to see that 1 -> 2,2 -» 3 and 3 -> O/D up-shift takes place, and that the shift points con-form to the automatic shift schedule (See page SS-43).
HINT:O/D Gear Up-shift Prohibition Control (1. Coolant temp, is 60 °C (140 °F) or less. 2. If there is a 10km/h (6 mph) difference between the set cruise control speed and vehicle speed.)
• O/D Gear Lock-up Prohibition Control (1. Brake pedal is depressed. 2. Coolant temp, is 60 °C(140°F)orless.)(2) Check for shift shock and slip.
Check for shock and slip at the 1 -> 2, 2 -> 3 and 3 -»O/D up-shifts.(3) Check for abnormal noises and vibration.
Drive in the D position lock-up or O/D gear and check for abnormal noises and vibration.HINT:The check for the cause of abnormal noises and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also bedue to loss of balance in the differential torque converter clutch, etc.
(4) Check kick-down operation.While running in the D position, 2nd, 3rd and O/D gears, check to see that the possible kick-downvehicle speed limits for 2 -*1, 3 -> 2 and O/D -> 3 kick-downs conform to those indicated onthe automatic shift schedule (See page SS-43).
(5) Check abnormal shock and slip at kick-down.(6) Check the lock-up mechanism.
Drive in D position, O/D gear, at a steady speed (lock-up ON) of about 60 km/h (37 mph).• Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change
abruptly.If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
DI-225DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE(U341E)
(b) 2 position testShift into the 2 position and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points.(1) Check up-shift operation.
Check to see that the 1 -» 2 up-shift takes place and that the shift point conforms to the automaticshift schedule (See page SS-43).
HINT:There is no O/D up-shift and lock-up in the 2 position.
(2) Check engine braking.While running in the 2 position and 2nd gear, release the accelerator pedal and check the enginebraking effect.
(3) Check for abnormal noises during acceleration and deceleration, and for shock at up-shift anddown-shift.
(c) L position testShift into the L position and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points.(1) Check no up-shift.
While running in the L position, check that there is no up-shift to 2nd gear.(2) Check engine braking.
While running in the L position, release the accelerator pedal and check the engine braking ef-fect.
(3) Check for abnormal noises during acceleration and deceleration.(d) R position test
Shift into the R position and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping.CAUTION:Before conducting this test ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction.(e) P position test
Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5°) and after shifting into the P position, release the parkingbrake. Then, check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place.
OK if hot
Add if hot
6. BASIC INSPECTION(a) Check the fluid level.HINT:• Drive the vehicle so that the engine and transaxle are at
normal operating temperature.Fluid temp.: 70 - 80 *C (158 -176 °F)
• Only use the COOL range on the dipstick as a rough refer-ence when the fluid is replaced or the engine does not
AT3417
run.
0)
(2)
(3)(4)(5)
Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the park-ing brake.With the engine idling and the brake pedal de-pressed, shift the shift lever into all positions from Pto L position and return to P position.Pull out the dipstick and wipe it clean.Push it back fully into the pipe.Pull it out and check that the fluid level is in the HOTrange.
If the level is at the low side, add new fluid.
DI-226DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
Capacity: 2.9 liters (3.1 US qts, 2.6 Imp. qts)NOTICE:Do not overfill.(b) Check the fluid condition.If the fluid smells burnt or is black, replace it.
Q09265
(c) Replace the ATF.(1) Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.(2) Reinstall the drain plug securely.
OK if hot
Add if h
AT3417
(3) With the engine OFF add new fluid through the oilfiller pipe.
Fluid type: ATF Type T-IVCapacity: 2.9 liters (3.1 US qts, 2.6 Imp. qts)(4) Start the engine and shift the shift lever into all posi-
tions from P to L position and then shift into P posi-tion.
(5) With the engine idling, check the fluid level. Addfluid up to the COOL level on the dipstick.
(6) Check the fluid level at the normal operating tem-perature, 70 - 80 °C (158 - 176 °F), and add asnecessary.
NOTICE:Do not overfill.(d) Check the fluid leaks.
Check for leaks in the transaxle.If there are leaks, it is necessary to repair or replace O-rings,gaskets, oil seals, plugs or other parts.
01-227DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
D07814
o
Neutral BasicLine
(e) Inspect and adjust the shift lever position.When shifting the shift lever from the N position to otherpositions, check that the lever can be shifted smoothlyand accurately to each position and that the position indi-cator is not aligned with the correct position.
If the indicator is not aligned with the correct position, carry outthe following adjustment procedures.
(1) Loosen the nut on the shift lever.(2) Push the control shaft fully downward.
(3) Return the control shaft lever 2 notches to N posi-tion.
(4) Set the shift lever to N position.(5) While holding the shift lever lightly toward the R
position side, tighten the shift lever nut.Torque: 13 N-m (130 kgf-cm, 9 ft-lbf)(6) Start the engine and make sure that the vehicle
moves forward when shifting the lever from the N toD position and reverses when shifting it to the Rposition.
(f) Inspect and adjust the park/neutral position.Check that the engine can be started with the shift leveronly in the N or P position, but not in other positions.
If it is not as stated above, carry out the following adjustmentprocedures.
(1) Loosen the park/neutral position switch bolt and setthe shift lever to the N position.
(2) Align the groove and neutral basic line.(3) Hold in position and tighten the bolt.Torque: 5.4 N-m (55 kgf-cm, 48 in-lbf)
For continuity inspection of the park/neutral positionswitch, see page Dl-261.
(g) Check the idle speed.Idle speed: 750 ± 50 rpm(In N position and air conditioner OFF)
7. MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS(a) Measure the stall speed.
The object of this test is to check the overall performance of the transaxle and engine by measuringthe stall speeds in the D and R positions.
NOTICE:Do the test at normal operating fluid temperature 50 - 80 °C (122 -176 °F).Do not continuously run this test longer than 10 seconds.To ensure safety, conduct this test in a wide, clear level area which provides good traction.The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the condi-tions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.(1) Chock the 4 wheels.(2) Connect an OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3.(3) Fully apply the parking brake.(4) Keep your left foot pressed firmly on the brake pedal.(5) Start the engine.
Groove
DI-228DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE(U341E)
(6) Shift into the D position. Press all the way down on the accelerator pedal with your right foot.Quickly read the stall speed at this time.
Stall speed: 2,350 - 2,800 rpm(7) Do the same test in R position.Stall speed: 2,350 - 2,800 rpm
Evaluation:
Problem
(a) Stall speed low in D and R positions
(b) Stall speed high in D position
(c) Stall speed high in R position
(d) Stall speed high in D and R positions
Possible cause
• Engine output may be insufficient•Stator one-way clutch is operating properly
HINT: If more than 600 rpm below the specified value, the torqueconverter clutch could be faulty.
• Line pressure too tow• Forward clutch slipping
• No.2 one-way clutch not operating properly
• Line pressure too low• Reverse clutch slipping
• 1st & reverse brake slipping
• Line pressure too low
• Improper fluid level
(b) Measure the time lag.When the shift lever is shifted while the engine is idling, there will be a certain time lapse or lag beforethe shock can be felt. This is used for checking the condition of the No. 2 one-way clutch, reverseclutch, forward clutch, and 1 st & reverse brake.
NOTICE:Do the test at normal operating fluid temperature 50 - 80 °C (122 -176 " F).Be sure to allow 1 minute interval between tests.
• Take 3 measurements and take the average value.(1) Connect an OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3.(2) Fully apply the parking brake.(3) Start the engine and check idle speed.Idle speed: 750 ± 50 rpm (In N position and air conditioner OFF)(4) Shift the shift lever from N to D position. Using a stop watch, measure the time from when the
lever is shifted until the shock is felt.Time lag: N -> D Less than 1.2 seconds(5) In the same manner, measure the time lag for N -> R.Time lag: N -» R Less than 1.5 seconds
Evaluation (If N -» D time or N -> R time lag is longer than specified):
Problem
N -> D time lag is longer
N -> R time lag is longer
Possible cause
• Line pressure too tow• Forward clutch worn
• No. 2 one-way clutch not operating
• Line pressure too tow
• Reverse clutch worn
• 1 st & reverse brake worn
DI-229DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
8. HYDRAULIC TESTMeasure the line pressure.NOTICE:
Do the test at normal operation fluid temperature 50 - 80 °C (122 -176 °F)The line pressure test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observethe conditions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.Be careful to prevent SSTs hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe.(1) Warm up the ATF.(2) Remove the test plug on the transaxle case front left side and connect SST.
(See page AX-30 for the location to connect SST)SST 09992-00095 (09992-00231, 09992-00271)(3) Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels.(4) Connect an OBD II scan tool or TOYOTA hand-held tester to DLC3.(5) Start the engine and check idling speed.(6) Keep your left foot pressed firmly on the brake pedal and shift into D position.(7) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling.(8) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. Quickly read the highest line pressure when
engine speed reaches stall speed.(9) In the same manner, do the test in R position.
Specified line pressure:
Condition
Idling
Stall
D position kPa (kgf/cm2, psi)
372 - 41 2 (3.8 - 4.2, 54 - 60)
1,157-1,265(11.8-12.9, 168-183)
R position kPa (kgf/cm2, psi)
588 - 686 (6.0 - 7.0, 85 - 1 00)
1 ,589 - 1 ,765 (1 6.2 - 1 8.0, 230 - 256)
If the measured pressure is not up to specified value, recheck the throttle cable adjustment and retest.Evaluation:
Problem
If the measured values at all position are higher
If the measured values at all position are lower
If pressure is low in the 0 position only
If pressure is low in the R position only
Possible cause
• Shift solenoid valve SLT
• Regulator valve defective
• Shift solenoid valve SLT
• Regulator valve defective
• Oil pump defective
• D position circuit fluid leakage
• Forward clutch defective
• R position circuit fluid leakage
• Reverse clutch defective
• 1 st & reverse brake defective
DI-230DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXIE (U341E)
9. MANUAL SHIFTING TESTHINT:With this test, it can be determined whether the trouble is withinthe electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transaxle.(a) Disconnect the solenoid wire.(b) Inspect the manual driving operation.
Check that the shift and gear positions correspond withthe table below.While driving, shift through the L, 2 and D positions.Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift posi-tion.
Shift Position
D
2
L
R
P
Gear Position
3rd
3rd
3rd
Reverse
Pawl Lock
HINT:If the L, 2 and D position gear positions are difficult to positionsare difficult to distinguish, do the following read test.If any abnormality is found in the above test, the problem is inthe transaxle itself.(c) Connect the solenoid wire.(d) Cancel out DTC (See page DI-220).
DI-231DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
OI4ZIMQ
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHARTIf a DTC is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code in the table below and pro-ceed to the page given.* : -...MIL does not light /•...MIL light up
DTC No.
(See Page)
P0500
(Dt-238)
P0710
(DI-242)
P0750
(DI-244)
P0753
(DI-246)
P0755(DI-244)
P0758
(DI-246)
P0770
(DI-250)
P0773(DI-252)
P1520
(DI-255)
P1725
(DI-256)
P1760
(Dl-258)
P1780
(DI-261)
P1790
(DI-265)
Detection Item
Vehicle Speed Sensor
Malfunction
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Sensor Malfunction
(ATF Temperature Sensor)
Shift Solenoid A Malfunction
(Shift Solenoid Valve No. 1)
Shift Solenoid A Electrical Mal-
function
(Shift Solenoid Valve No. 1)
Shift Solenoid B Malfunction
(Shift Solenoid Valve No. 2)
Shift Solenoid B Electrical Mal-
function
(Shift Solenoid Valve No. 2
Shift Solenoid E Malfunction
(Shift Solenoid Valve SL)
Shift Solenoid E Electrical Mal-function
(Shift Solenoid Valve SL)
Stop Light Switch Circuit
NT Revolution Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
(Input Turbine Speed Sensor)
Linear Solenoid for Accumulator
Pressure Control Circuit Mal-
function
(Shift Solenoid Valve SLT)
Park/Neutral Position Switch
Malfunction
ST Solenoid Valve Circuit
Malfunction
Trouble Area
• Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit
• Vehicle speed sensor
• Combination meter
• ECM
• Automatic transaxle assembly
• Open or short in ATF temperature sensor circuit
• ATF temperature sensor
• ECM
• Shift solenoid valve No. 1 is stuck open or closed
• Valve body is blocked up or stuck
• Open or short in shift solenoid valve No. 1 circuit
• Shift solenoid valve No. 1
• ECM
• Shift solenoid valve No. 2 is stuck open or closed
• Valve body is blocked up or stuck
• Open or short in shift solenoid valve No. 2 circuit
• Shift solenoid valve No. 2•ECM
• Shift solenoid valve SL is stuck open or closed
• Valve body is blocked up or stuck
• Lock-up clutch
• Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL circuit
• Shift solenoid valve SL•ECM
• Open or short in stop light switch circuit
•Stop light switch• ECM
• Open or short in input turbine speed sensor circuit
• Input turbine speed sensor
• ECM
• Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit
• Shift solenoid valve SLT
• ECM
• Short in park/neutral position switch circuit
• Park/neutral position switch
• ECM
• Open or short in shift solenoid valve ST circuit
• Shift solenoid valve ST
• ECM
MIL'
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Memory
O
0
O
O
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
O
0
DI-232DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
PARTS LOCATION
Shift PositionIndicator Light
Stop Light Switch
DLC3 Vehicle Speed Sensor
Shift SolenoidValve ST
ATF TemperatureSensor
Shift SolenoidValve SL
Park/Neutral PositionSwitch
0/D Main Switch
Input TurbineSpeed Sensor
Shift SolenoidValve SLT
Shift SolenoidValve No. 1
Shift SolenoidValve No. 2
D07816
DI-233DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
TERMINALS OF ECM
& <s> <S> C3Dn 1*=*} n
2131
92C3C
8192£
7
186
17?8
b1627
415
3142t
1325
21224
1112i
102J
n F 3]
|7|6|5|4|3| |1624
1525
1422
13 1221
11
201019
?T9
18
n~|8
17
^n lt==3] q91926
81827
71726
1625
61524
51423
413
31222
21121
11020
n lt=a"l q
71522
61421
132C
51219
41118
310
29
17
18
16
D05962
Symbols (Terminals No.)
S1 (E5-8)<-»E1 (E4-17)
S2 (E5-20) <-> E1 (E4-17)
SLT+ (E5-6) <-> SLT- (E5-5)
OD1(E3-1)<-»E1 (E4-17)
ODLP (E3— 10) o E1 (E4— 17)
L (fc4— 9) «-» tl (fc4— 1 /)
2 (E4— 1 9) «-> E1 (E4— 1 7)
(Eo— 2)*-*fc1 (b4— 17)
U (E3— 24) «-» bl (t4— 1 /)
N (E4-8) «-» E1 (E4-17)
THO (E4-1 3) <-> E2 (E4-1 8)
ST (E5— 29) «-» E1 (E4— 1 7)
SPD (E3-22) o E1 (E4-17)
ODMS (E5— 5) «-» E1 (E4— 17)
Wiring Color
BR-Y <-> BR
Y«BR
Y-R « Y-G
B^BR
BR-Y «-> BR
Y— B <-> BR
L— Y <-> BR
B-O<-> BR
- W «-» BR
P-L <-> BR
GR-L *-> BR
BR— W <-» BR
r <-> fc>H
W-R <-> BR
BR-Y «-* BR
Condition
IGON
1 st or 2nd gear
3rd or O/D gear
IGON
1st or 2nd gear
3rd or 070 gear
IGON
Vehicle driving under lock-up position
IGON
IGON
O/D main switch ON
O/D main switch OFF
IG ON and Shift lever L position
IG ON and Shift lever other than L position
IG ON and Shift lever 2 position
IG ON and Shift lever other than 2 position
IG ON and Shift lever R position
IG ON and Shift lever other than R position
IG ON and Shift lever D position
IG ON and Shift lever other than D position
IG ON and Shift lever N position
IG ON and Shift lever other than N position
IG ON and ATF temperature 110 °C (230 °F)
IGON
IG ON and R gear
IG ON and Shift lever P position
IG ON and Shift fever other than P position
IG ON and rotate driving wheel slowly
IGON
IG ON and Press continuously O/D main switch
STD Voltage (V)
10-14
10-14
Below 1
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
Below 1
10-14
10-14
5-6
10-14
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
10-14
Below 1
Below 1
Below 1
10-14
10-14
Below 1
Pulse generation
Below 1
10-14
DI-234DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OJ341E)
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLEIf a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the trouble still occurs, check the circuits for eachsymptom in the order given in the charts on the following pages and proceed to the page given for trouble-shooting.The Matrix Chart is divided into 3 chapters.Chapter 1: Electronic circuit matrix chartChapter 2: On-vehicle repair matrix chartChapter 3: Off-vehicle repair matrix chartIf the instruction "Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on matrix chart" is given in the flow chart for eachcircuit, proceed to the circuit with the next highest number in the table to continue the check.If the trouble still occurs even though there are no abnormalities in any of the other circuits, then check andreplace the ECM.Chapter 1: Electronic Circuit Matrix Chart
Symptom
No up-shift
(A particular gear, from 1st to 3rd gear, is not up-shifted)
No up-shift
(3rd -> O/D)
No down-shift(A particular gear, from 1 st to 3rd gear, is not down-shifted)
No down-shift(O/D -> 3rd)
No lock-up
No lock-up OFF
Shift point too high or too low
Up-shift to O/D from 3rd while O/D main switch is OFF
Up-shift to O/D from 3rd while engine is cold
No kick-down
Engine stalls when starting off or stopping
Suspect Area
ECM
1. O/D main switch and O/D OFF indicator light circuit
2, O/D cancel signal circuit
3. ECM
ECM
1 . O/D main switch and O/D OFF indicator light circuit
2. ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
Seepage
-
DI-268D 1-271
-
DI-268
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)DI-235
Chapter 2: On-vehicle Repair(*: U341E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. No. RM735U)
Symptom
Vehicle does not move in any forward position and reverse posi-
tion
Vehicle does not move in R position
No up-shift (1st-> 2nd)
No up-shift (2nd -> 3rd)
No up-shift (3rd -> O/D)
No down-shift (O/D -> 3rd)
No down-shift (3rd -> 2nd)
No down-shift (2nd -> 1st)
No lock-up or No lock-up off
Harsh engagement (N -» D)
Harsh engagement (N -> R)
Harsh engagement (Lock-up)
Harsh engagement (1st -» 2nd)
Harsh engagement (2nd -> 3rd)
Harsh engagement (3rd -» O/D)
Harsh engagement (O/D -» 3)
Harsh engagement (D, 2, L position)
Slip or shudder (Forward and reverse)
No engine braking (1st: L position)
No engine braking (2nd: 2 position)
Suspect Area
1. Manual valve
2. Primary regulator valve3. Secondary regulator valve
4. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. Manual valve
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. 1-2 shift valve
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. 2-3 shift valve
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. 3-4 shift valve
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
3-4 shift valve
2-3 shift valve
1-2 shift valve
1. Lock-up relay valve
2. Lock-up control valve
3. Solenoid relay valve
4. Solenoid modulator valve
5. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. GI accumulator
2. Accumulator control valve
3. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. Ca accumulator
2. Accumulator control valve
3. Reverse control valve
4. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. Lock-up relay valve
2. Accumulator control valve
3. Lock-up control valve
4. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1. 82 accumulator
2. Accumulator control valve
1. Ca accumulator
2. Accumulator control valve
1. BI accumulator
2. Accumulator control valve
3. 3—4 shift timing valve
1. 3—4 shift timing valve
2. 4—3 shift timing valve
Coat relay valve
1. Oil strainer
2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
1 . Reverse control valve2. Off-vehicle repair matrix chart
3-4 shift valve
Seepage
*
**
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*A
*
*
*
*
A
*A
*
*
*
*
*
*A
AX-9
A
*
DI-236DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341 E)
No kick-down
Poor acceleration
1. 1-2 shift valve2. 2-3 shift valve3. 3-4 shift valve
SLT damper
*
**
*
DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)DI-237
Chapter 3: Off-vehicle Repair(*: U341E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. No. RM735U)
Symptom
Vehicle does not move in any forward position and reverse posi-
tion
Vehicle does not move in R position
No up-shift (1st-* 2nd)
No up-shift (2nd -> 3rd)
No up-shift (3rd -> O/D)
No lock-up or No lock-up off
Harsh engagement (N -» D)
Harsh engagement (N -> R)
Harsh engagement (Lock-up)
Harsh engagement (1st -» 2nd)
Harsh engagement (2nd -» 3rd)
Harsh engagement (3rd -» O/D)
Slip or shudder (Forward position)
Slip or shudder (Reverse position)
Slip or shudder (1st)
Slip or shudder (2nd)
Slip or shudder (3rd)
Slip or shudder (O/D)
No engine braking (1st: L position)
No engine braking (2nd: 2 position)
Poor acceleration (All position)
Large shift shock or engine stalls when starting off or stopping
Suspect Area
1. Planetary gear unit
2. Forward clutch
3. One-way clutch No. 2
4. Reverse Clutch
5. 1 st and reverse brake
1. Planetary gear unit
2. Reverse Clutch
3. 1st and reverse brake
1. 2nd brake
2. One-way clutch No. 1
Direct clutch
O/D and 2nd brake
Torque converter clutch
1. Forward clutch
2. One-way clutch No. 2
1. Reverse clutch
2. 1st and reverse brake
Torque converter clutch
1. 2nd brake
2. One-way clutch No. 1
Direct clutch
O/D and 2nd brake
1. Torque converter clutch
2. Forward clutch
3. Direct clutch
4. O/D and 2nd brake
5. 2nd brake
6. One-way clutch No. 1
7. One-way clutch No. 2
1. Reverse clutch
2. 1 st and reverse brake
One-way clutch No. 2
1. 2nd brake
2. One-way dutch No. 1
Direct clutch
O/D and 2nd brake
1 st and reverse brake
O/D and 2nd brake
Torque converter clutch
Torque converter clutch
See page
**^
**
**if
*if
*
*AX-36
**
**
AX-36
**
*if
AX-36
******ifit:
if
**
*if
if
if
AX-36
AX-36
D1-238DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe vehicle speed sensor outputs a 4-pulse signal for every revolution of the transaxle output shaft.After this signal is converted into a more precise rectangular wave form by the wave form shaping circuitinside the combination meter, it is then transmitted to the ECM.
4-Pulse
mmSpeed Sensor
4-Pulse
JlRJUl
ECM
TransaxleD06036
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
When all of the following conditions continues for 1 sec. or
more:1. After the ignition switch is turned on, 0.5 second or more
P0500
2. Counter gear rpm is equal to or greater then vehicle speed.
3. Vehicle speed sensor signal can not be input to the ECM.
4. The condition that engine coolant temp, is 20 °C or more(no error in engine coolant temp, sensor circuit is detected)
and the park/neutral position switch is set to P or N contin-
ues for 2 for. or more, or the condition that engine coolanttemp, is less than 20 °C (an error in engine coolant temp,
sensor circuit is detected) and the park/neutral positionswitch is set to P or N continues for 30 sec. or more.
• Combination meter
• Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit
> Vehicle speed sensor•ECM
•Automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc,)
Clutch or brake slips or gear is broken
DI-239DIAGNOSTICS AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341 E)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Combination MeterECM
Instrument Panel J/B
, 5
®<W-R
22SPD
D07932
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check operation of speedometer.
HINT:Read freeze frame data using TOYOTA hand-held tester or OBDII scan tool. Because freeze frame recordsthe engine conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting it is useful for determiningwhether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air-fuel ratio was leanor rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.CHECK:Drive the vehicle and check if the operation of the speedometer in the combination meter is normal.HINT:The vehicle speed sensor is operating normally if the speedometer display is normal.
Check speedometer (See page BE-2).
DJ-240DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OI341E)
Check for short in harness and connector between terminal SPD of ECM connec-tor and body ground.
SPD
D07776
PREPARATION:Disconnect the connector of the ECM.CHECK:Check continuity between terminal SPD of the ECM connectorand body ground.OK:
No continuity (1M fl or higher)
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check voltage between terminal SPD of ECM connector and body ground.
D07252
PREPARATION:Turn ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal SPD of ECM connector andbody ground.OK:
Voltage: 9 -14 V
NG Check for open in harness and connector be-tween instrument panel J/B and ECM (See pageIN-30).
OK
Check for open in harness and connector between instrument panel J/B andcombination meter (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
DI-241DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
5 Check ECM (See page IN-30).
NG\ Replace ECM.
Check and repair transaxle (clutch, brake orgear etc,).
DL-242DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
DQRU-M
DTC P0710 Transmission Fluid Temperature SensorMalfunction (ATF Temperature Sensor)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The ATF temperature sensor converts fluid temperature into a resistance value which is input into the ECM.
DTC No.
P0710
DTC Detecting Condition
Either (a) or (b) is detected for 0.5 sec. or more.
{2-trip detection logic)
(a) Temperature sensor resistance is less than 79 ft(b) After the engine has been operating for 15 minutes or
more, the resistance at the temp, sensor is more than 1 56 kn
Trouble Area
• Open or short in ATF temperature sensor
• ATF temperature sensor• ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
ECM
Transaxle
o
ATF TemperatureSensor
GR-L
18
THO
E2
D07931
DI-243DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE(U341E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check ATF temperature sensor.
D02967
PREPARATION:Remove the solenoid wiring (See page AX-9).CHECK:Measure resistance between terminals of ATF temperaturesensor at 25 °C (77 °F) and 110 °C (230 °F).OK:
Resistance (Approx.):25 °C (77 °F): 3.5 ka110 °C (230 *F): 247 ft
Replace the solenoid wiring.
OK
Check harness and connector between solenoid wiring and ECM (See pageIN-30).
Repair or replace the harness or connector.
OK
Check and replace the ECM (See pageIN-30).
DI-244DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
DUZZ-02
DTC P0750, P0755 Shift Solenoid A/B Malfunction(Shin Solenoid Valve No. 1/No. 2)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONThe ECM uses signals from the vehicle speed sensor to detect the actual gear position (1st, 2nd, 3rd or O/Dgear).Then the ECM compares the actual gear with the shift schedule in the ECM memory to detect mechanicaltrouble of the shift solenoid valves and valve body.
DTC No.
P0750
P0755
DTC Detecting Condition
During normal driving, the gear required by the ECM does not
match the actual gear
(2-trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
• Shift solenoid valve No. 1/No. 2 is stuck open or closed
• Valve body is blocked up or stuck
HINT:Check the shift solenoid valve No. 1 when DTC P0750 is output and check the shift solenoid valve No. 2when DTC P0755 is output.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check shift solenoid valve No. 1 or No. 2 operation.
N
D07869
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the oil pan.(b) Remove the shift solenoid valve No. 1 or No. 2.CHECK:(a)
(b)
OK:
By applying 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) of compressedair, check that the solenoid valve does not leak air.When battery positive voltage is supplied to the shift sole-noid valve, check that the valve opens.
(a) Solenoid valve does not leak air.(b) Solenoid valve opens.
Replace the shift solenoid valve No. 1 or No. 2.
DI-245DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
2 Check the valve body (See page DI-234).
NG\ Repair or replace the valve body.
O\K
Repair or replace the transaxle.
DI-246DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
DTC P0753,P0758 Shift Solenoid A/B Electrical Malfunc-tion (Shift Solenoid Valve No. 1/No. 2)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONShifting from 1 st to O/D is performed in combination with ON and OFF of the shift solenoid valve No. 1 andNo. 2 controlled by ECM. If an open or short circuit occurs in either of the solenoid valves, the ECM controlsthe remaining normal solenoid valve to allow the vehicle to be operated smoothly (Fail safe function).
Range
D
2
L
NORMAL
Solenoid valveNo. 1ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
No. 2ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
1st
2nd
3rd
O/D
1st
2nd
3rd
1st
2nd
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVENO. 1 MALFUNCTIONING
Solenoid valveNo. 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
No. 2ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Gear
3rd
3rd
3rd
O/D
3rd
3rd
3rd
1st
2nd
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVENO. 2 MALFUNCTIONING
SolenoNo. 1ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
d valveNo. 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Gear
1st
O/D
O/D
O/D
1st
3rd
3rd
1st
1st
BOTH SHIFT SOLENOIDVALVES MALFUNCTIONING
Gear when shift selector ismanually operated
O/D
O/D
O/D
O/D
3rd
3rd
3rd
1st
1st
X: Malfunctions
HINT:Check the sift solenoid valve No. 1 when DTC P0753 is output and check the shift solenoid valve No. 2 whenDTC P0758 is output.
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P0753/62
P0758/63
The ECM checks for an open or short circuit in the shift sole-
noid valve No. 1/No. 2 circuit when it changes.
The ECM records DTC P0753 or P0758 if condition (a) or (b) is
detected once, but it does not blink the MIL
After ECM detects condition (a) or (b) continuously 2 times or
more in 1-trip, it causes the MIL to light up until condition (a) or
(b) disappears.
After that, if the ECM detects condition (a) or (b) once, it starts
lighting up MIL again.
(a) Solenoid resistance is 8 ii or less (short circuit) when the
solenoid is energized.
(b) Solenoid resistance is 100 kO or more (open circuit) when
the solenoid is not energized.
'Open or short in shift solenoid valve No. 1/No. 2 circuit
• Shift solenoid valve No. 1/No. 2
•ECM
Fail safe function:If either of the solenoid valve circuits develops an open or short, the ECM turns the other solenoid valve ONand OFF to shift to the gear positions shown in the table above. The ECM also turns the shift solenoid valveST OFF at the same time. If both solenoids malfunction, hydraulic control cannot be performed electronicallyand must be done manually.Manual shifting as shown in the above table must be done (In the case of a short circuit, the ECM stops send-ing current to the short circuited solenoid).
DI-247DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
WIRING DIAGRAM
AutomaticTransaxle
C
ShVa
SV
ift SolenoidIve No. 1
omr\ W
hift Solenoidalve No. 2
B
'nh BR~Y
<£L)
J2
in J/C
4) YkEy B I
8fp^\V±L
Y A( r-cfB Vf^
Tfrom CruiseControl ECU
ECMA ^\
S1
S2
V J
D07940
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Measure resistance between terminal S1 or S2 of ECM and body ground.
D07757
PREPARATION:Disconnect the connector from ECM.CHECK:Measure resistance between terminal S1 or S2 of ECM andbody ground.OK:
Resistance: 11 -15 n at 20 °C (68 °F)
Check and replace the ECM (See page IN-30).
NG
01-248DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
Measure harness and connector between ECM and automatic transmission sole-noid connector.
D07758
PREPARATION:Disconnect the solenoid connector from the automatic trans-axle.CHECK:Measure the harness and connector between terminal S1 or S2of ECM and terminal S1 or S2 of solenoid connector.OK:
Resistance: 0 £1
Repair or replace the harness or connector (Seepage IU-30).
3 Check connection of the connectors.
NG\ Connect the connectors correctly.
OK
Dl-249DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE(U341E)
Check shift solenoid valve No. 1 or No. 2.
D07870
Repair or replace the solenoid wire.
PREPARATION:(a) Jack up the vehicle.(b) Remove the oil pan.(c) Disconnect the solenoid connector.(d) Remove the shift solenoid valve No. 1 or No. 2.CHECK:Measure resistance between solenoid connector and bodyground.OK:
Resistance: 11 -15 Q at 20 °C (68 °F)
NG Replace the solenoid valve.
DI-250DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
DTC P0770 Shift Solenoid E Malfunction(Shift Solenoid Valve SL)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONThe ECM uses the signals from the throttle position sensor, air-flow meter and crankshaft position sensorto monitor the engagement condition of the lock-up clutch.Then the ECM compares the engagement condition of the lock-up clutch with the lock-up schedule in theECM memory to detect mechanical trouble of the shift solenoid valve SL, valve body and torque converterclutch or automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.).
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P0770
> Lock-up does not occur when driving in the lock-up range
(normal driving at 80 km/h [50 mphj), or lock-up remains ON
in the lock-up OFF range.(2 rip detection logic)
• When lock-up is ON, clutch or brake slips or gear is broken.
(2-trip detection logic)
»Shift solenoid valve SL is stuck open or closed
»Valve body blocked up or stuck• Lock-up clutch
•Automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check solenoid valve SL operation
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the oil pan.(b) Remove the solenoid valve SLCHECK:
Applying 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2(a)
(b)
OK:
71 psi) of compressed air,check that the solenoid valve does not leak air.When battery positive voltage is supplied to the shift sole-noid valve, check that the solenoid valve opens.
(a) Solenoid valve does leak air.(b) Solenoid valve opens.
Replace the solenoid valve SL.
OK
DI-251DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
2 Check valve body (See page DI-234).
NG\ Repair or replace the valve body.
OK
3 Check the torque converter clutch (See page AX-36).
NG\ Repair the torque converter clutch.
OK
Repair the transaxle (See page AX-30).
01-252DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANS AXLE OJ341E)
DIOCV-07
DTC P0773 Shift Solenoid E Electrical Malfunction(Shift Solenoid Valve SL)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe shift solenoid valve SL is turned ON and OFF by signals from the ECM to control the hydraulic pressureacting on the lock-up relay valve, which then controls operation of the lock-up clutch.Fail safe function:If the ECM detects a malfunction, it turns the shift solenoid valve SL OFF.
DTC No.
P0773
DTC Detecting Condition
Either (a) or (b) is detected for 1 time.(2-trip detection logic)
(a) Solenoid resistance is 8 a or less when solenoid is ener-
gized,(b) Solenoid resistance is 1 00 kA or more when solenoid is not
energized.
Trouble Area
• Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL circuit
• Shift solenoid valve SL
• ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
Transaxle ECM
Shift SolenoidValve SL
LG P-L19
SL
D07933
DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)DI-253
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Measure resistance between terminal SL of ECM and body ground.
NG
D07810
PREPARATION:Disconnect the connector from ECM.CHECK:Measure resistance between terminal SL of ECM and bodyground.OK:
Resistance: 11 -15 Oat 20 °C (68 °F)
Check and replace the ECM (See page IN-30).
Measure resistance of harness and connector between ECM and automatictransaxle solenoid connector.
D07809
PREPARATION:Disconnect the solenoid connector from the transaxle.CHECK:Measure resistance of the harness and connector between ter-minal SL of ECM and terminal SL of solenoid connector.OK:
Resistance: 0 n
Repair or replace the harness or connector.
DI-254DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE(U341E)
Check shift solenoid valve SL.
D07870
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Jack up the vehicle.(b) Remove the oil pan.(c) Disconnect the shift solenoid valve SL connector.(d) Remove the shift solenoid valve SL.CHECK:Measure resistance between terminal SL of shift solenoid valveand solenoid body.OK:
Resistance: 11 -15 £1 at 20 °C (68 *F)
Replace the shift solenoid valve SL.
Replace or repair the solenoid wire, harnessand connector between ECM and automatictransaxle solenoid connector.
DI-255DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
ou*^
DTC P1520 Stop Light Switch Signal Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling, while driving in lock-up condition, whenbrakes are suddenly applied.When the brake pedal is operated, this switch sends a signals to ECM. Then the ECM cancels operationof the lock-up clutch while braking is in progress.
DTC No.
P1520
DTC Detecting Condition
No stop light switch signal to ECM during driving.
(2-trip detection logic)
Trouble Area
• Open or short in stop light switch circuit
• Stop light switch
•ECM
WIRING DIAGRAMSeepage DI-130.
INSPECTION PROCEDURESee page DM 30.
DI-256DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (11341 E)
DW7V-03
DTC P1725 NT Revolution Sensor Circuit Malfunction(Input Turbine Speed Sensor)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis sensor detects the rotation speed of the input turbine. By comparing the input turbine speed signal (NT)and the counter gear speed sensor signal (NC), the ECM detects the shift timing of the gears and appropri-ately controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure in response to various conditions, thus performingsmooth gear shifting.
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P1725
The ECM detects conditions (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) continuityfor 5 sees or more.
(1-trip detection logic)
(a) Gear change not being performed
(b) Gear position: 2nd, 3rd or O/D gear
(c) Solenoid valves and park/neutral position switch are normal(d) T/M input shaft rpm: 300 rpm or less
(e) T/M output shaft rpm: 1,000 rpm or more
'Open or short in input turbine (NT) speed sensor circuit
• Input turbine (NT) speed sensor• ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
ECM
W-L &
([
\£2,
2^ V2
a Input Turbine
I'J Speed Sensor
1
B x^>^Si,
/^ N
N1T+IN 1
MT-1 <l 1
V J
CD07934
DI-257DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check resistance between terminals NT* and NT~ of ECM.
D07245
PREPARATION:Disconnect the connector from ECM.CHECK:Check resistance between terminals NT+ and NT~ of ECM.OK:
Resistance: 620 ± 60 a
Check and replace the ECM.
Check NT revolution sensor.
Magnet
Q08218
PREPARATION:Remove the NT revolution speed sensor from transaxle.CHECK:(a) Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of speed
sensor.(b) Check voltage between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed
sensor when a magnet is put close to the front end of thespeed sensor then taken away quickly.
OK:(a) Resistance: 620 ± 60 n at 20 °C (68 *F)(b) Voltage is generated intermittently.
HINT:The generated voltage is extremely low.
Replace the NT input shaft speed sensor.
Check and repair the harness and connectorbetween ECM and Turbine speed sensor (Seepage IN-30).
DI-258DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
DTC P1760 Linear Solenoid for Line Pressure ControlCircuit Malfunction (Soleniod valve SLT)
Line Pressure Con-trol Pressure
Current Flow to Solenoid 002290
OFF
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe throttle pressure that is applied to the primary regulatorvalve (which modulates line pressure) causes the shift solenoidvalve SLT, under electronic control, to precisely and minutelymodulate and generate line pressure according to the accelera-tor pedal effort, or engine power output detected.This reduces the function of line pressure and provides smoothshifting characteristics.Upon receiving the throttle valve opening angle signal, ECMcontrols the line pressure by sending a predetermined (*) dutyratio to the solenoid valve, modulating the line pressure, gener-ating throttle pressure.(*) Duty RatioThe duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle.For example, if A is the period of continuity in one cycle, and Bis the period of non-continuity, then
Duty Ratio = x100(%)
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P1760/77(a) or (b) condition below is detected 1 second or more.
(a) SLT-terminal: 0V
(b) SLT-terminal: 12V
> Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit
'Shift solenoid valve SLT
•ECM
GND
5V/Div.
msee7Div. D01875
HINT:Refer to the chart for the wave form between terminals SLT+and SLT" during engine idling.
DI-259DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341 E)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Transaxle
Shift SolenoidValve SLT
G
GR
Y-R
Y-G
ECM
5
E5
SLT+
SLT-
D01772
DI-260DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check shift solenoid valve SLT.
2x
L^
rO03445O03446
Hf
(Q)
f>^r^
<B
^ I
r
1
Li1\ (+) j
• B^^-
D03729
PREPARATION:a) Jack up the vehicle,
(b) Remove the oil pan.(c) Disconnect the solenoid connector.Check solenoid resistance:CHECK:Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of solenoid con-nector.OK:
Resistance: 5.0 - 5.6 n at 20 °C (68 °F)Check solenoid operation:CHECK:Connect positive (+) lead with <solenoid connector and negatcheck the movement of the valHINT:The solenoid valve operates wOK:
When battery positive voltage is applied.
When battery positive voltage is cut off.
an 5 - 6 W bulb to terminal 1 ofve (-) lead to terminal 2, thenve.
th the current of 0 9 — 1 0 A
Valve moves in •• i - directionin illustration.
Valve moves in ^ ••H directionin illustration.
OK
Replace SLT solenoid valve.
Check harness and connector between shift solenoid valve SLT and ECM (Seepage IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Replace ECM (See page IN-30).
DI-261DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
OMC2-09
DTC P1780 Neutral Start Switch Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe neutral start switch detects the shift lever position and sends signals to the ECM.The ECM receives signals (P, R, N, D, 2 and L) from the park/neutral position switch.
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
P1780
When more than one of the following conditions continue for
500 sec. or more.
(a) P, N position input signal is ON.
(b) P position input signal is ON.
(c) N position input signal is ON.
(d) L position input signal is ON.
(e) 2 position input signal is ON.
(f) 3 position input signal is ON.
(g) 4 position input signal is ON.
(h) D position input signal is ON.
(i) R position input signal is ON.
> Shot in park/neutral position switch circuit
> Park/neutral position switch
• ECM
When any of following conditions for 500 msec, or more in the
M position.
(a) P, N position input signal is ON.
(b) P position input signal is ON.
(c) N position input signal is ON.
(d) L position input signal is ON.
Dl-262DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
WIRING DIAGRAM
PIPark/NeutralPosition Switch
R-L
ML
LL
2L
RB>
DL
RL
P-L
Y-B
B-O
R-B
Instrument Panel J/B
B-R
L-R
Engine Room J/B
L-Y
17
18!C_••
3
22
19
Engine Room J/B
R-L
W-B
B-R
FLMAIN
Battery
ECM
19
<E20
N
L
2
PfromCruiseControl
L-W
R-B
D07936
DI-263DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Read PNP, REVERSE, 2ND and LOW signals.
D07262
When using TOYOTA hand-held tester:PREPARATION:(a) Connect a hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and TOYOTA hand-held tes-
ter main switch ON.CHECK:Shift lever into the P, R, N, 2 and L positions, and read the NSW,REVERSE, 2ND and LOW signals on the hand-held tester.OK:
Shift range
2
L
R
P, N
Signal
2ND OFF -» ON
LOW OFF -» ON
REVERSE OFF -> ON
NSW OFF -> ON
When not TOYOTA using hand-held tester:PREPARATION:Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between each of terminals P, R, N, D, 2 andL of ECM and body ground when the shift lever is shifted to thefollowing positions.OK:
Position
P
R
N
D
2
L
P-Bodyground
9-14V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
R-Bodyground
0V
9-14V
0V
0V
0V
0V
N-Bodyground
0V
0V
9-14V
0V
0V
0V
D-Bodyground
0V
0V
0V
9-14V
0V
0V
2-Bodyground
0V
0V
0V
0V
9-14V
0V
L-Bodyground
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
9-14V
HINT:*: The voltage will drop slightly due to lighting up of the back uplight.
OK Check and replace the ECM.
DI-264DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
Check park/neutral position switch.
OK
JLr-LJL
5|4|3|2|1|8 7
D06601
PREPARATION:Remove the park/neutral position switch.CHECK:Check continuity between each terminal shown below when theshift lever is moved to each position.
Shift position
P
R
N
D
2
L
Terminal No. to continuity
1-3
2-3
3-5
3-7
3-4
3-8
6-9
-
6-9
-
-
-
OK:There is continuity.
Replace the park/neutral position switch.
Check harness and connector between battery and park/neutral position switch,park/neutral position switch and ECM (See page IN-30).
OK
NG Repair or replace the harness and connector.
Check and replace the ECM (See pageIN^SO).
DI-265DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
W7X-03
DTC P1790 ST Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Shift solenoid valve ST is switched ON-OFF by a signal from ECM so that let in or out timing of 2nd brakeis adjusted by operating orifice control valve. Therefore, ST solenoid operates when letting in or out reverseclutch.If it is broken, the shift shock becomes big.
DTC No.
P1790
DTC Detecting Condition
ECU memorizes DTC PI 790 if (a) or (b) condition below is
detected once or more, but ECU does not start MIL blinking,
(a) Solenoid resistance is 30 Q or lower (short circuit) when
solenoid energized,
(b) Solenoid resistance is 1 00 kQ or higher (open circuit) when
solenoid is not energized.
Trouble Area
•Open or short in shift solenoid valve ST circuit
• Shift solenoid valve ST
• MIL
WIRING DIAGRAM
Transaxle ECM
Shift SolenoidValve ST
Y BR-W29
ST
D07933
DI-266DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341 El
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Measure resistance between terminal ST of ECM a.td body ground.
NG
D07759
PREPARATION:Disconnect the connector from ECM.CHECK:Measure resistance between terminal ST of ECM and bodyground.OK:
Resistance: 11 -15 ft at 20 °C (68 °F)
Check and replace the ECM See page IN-30).
Measure harness and connector between ECM and automatic transaxle solenoidconnector.
OK
D07760
PREPARATION:Disconnect the solenoid connector from the automatic trans-axle.CHECK:Measure the harness and connector between terminal ST ofECM and terminal ST of solenoid connector.OK:
Repair or replace the harness or connector.
3 Check connection of the connectors.
i
NG\ Connect the connectors correctly.
OK
DI-267DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
Check shift solenoid valve ST.
/_'
D06602
Electrical check:PREPARATION:(a) Jack up the vehicle.(b) Remove the oil pan.(c) Disconnect the solenoid connector.(d) Remove the shift solenoid valve ST.CHECK:(a)
(b)
OK:
Measure resistance between solenoid connector andbody ground.Connect positive © lead to terminal of solenoid connec-tor, negative © lead to solenoid body.
(a) Resistance: 11 -15 a at 20 °C (68 °F)(b) The solenoid makes an operating noise.
Mechanical check:PREPARATION:(a) Jack up the vehicle.(b) Remove the oil pan.(c) Disconnect the solenoid connector.(d) Remove the shift solenoid valve ST.CHECK:(a)
(b)
OK:
Applying 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) of compressed air,check that the solenoid valves do not leak air.When battery positive voltage is supplied to the shift sole-noid valves, check that the solenoid valve opens.
(b) Solenoid valve does not leak air.(a) Solenoid valve opens.
OK
Replace the solenoid valve.
Repair or replace the solenoid wire.
DI-268DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXIE(U341E)
O/D Main Switch & O/D OFF Indictor Light Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe O/D main switch is a momentary type switch. When pressing the O/D main switch, the O/D OFF indicatorlight lights up and ECM prohibits shifting to O/D, and when pressing it again, the O/D OFF indicator light goesoff and ECM allows shifting to O/D. Turning the IG switch OFF will reset the O/D OFF indicator light.
WIRING DIAGRAM
ECM
CombinationMeter Instrument Panel J/B
13
C1, _ _ _
19C12
BR-Y12
BR-Y19
W-B
22R-Y
Instrument Panel J/B
W
L-R
WARNING
1 5liT> BR-Y
BR-Y
O/D MainSwitch
W-B
ODLP
ODMS
W-B
Engine Room J/B
B-R
B-R
FL Main
Battery
D07937
DI-269DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check operation of O/D main switch.
PREPARATION:Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:(a) Check O/D OFF indicator light when O/D main switch is
pushed in to ON.(b) Check O/D OFF indicator light when O/D main switch is
pushed again.OK:
(a) O/D OFF indicator light lights up.(b) O/D OFF indicator light goes off.
Proceed to next inspection shown on problemsymptoms tables (See page DI-234).
2 Check and replace the combination meter (See page BE-2).
NG\ Replace the combination meter.
OK
Check O/D main switch.
D07778
PREPARATION:Disconnect the O/D main switch connector.CHECK:Check continuity between terminals 5 and 6 of O/D main switchconnector.OK:
O/D main switch condition
Press continuously O/D main switch
Release O/D main switch
Specified condition
Continuity
No continuity
Replace and repair O/D main switch.
OK
DI-270DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (1)341 E)
4 Check voltage between terminal ODMS of ECM and body ground.
<2)°N
knniTinlfeTffffif liiiiijiiij'kj~11
^™^\_[ W ^ffN D07265
PREPARATION:Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Check voltage between termground when O/D main switchOK:
O/D main switch
Press continuously O/D main switch
Release O/D main switch
OK \ Check and replace
nal ODMS of ECM and bodys ON and OFF.
Specified voltage
Below 1 .0 V
10-14V
the ECM (See page IN-30).
""-•-.
5 Check voltage between terminal ODLP of ECM and body ground.
i ON(47) ODLP
If 1 1 inTi 1 1 "Nli" ""*' "l fflUTTirflttiOTTfl
H/TT^w \^y^
N ~ D07266
[ ' |
NG
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the connector of ECM.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Check voltage between terminal ODLP of ECM and bodyground.OK:
Voltage: 7.5 - 14 V
OK \ Check and replace the ECM (See page IN-30).
Check and replace harness and connector between combination meter and ECM, O/D mainswitch and ECM, O/D main switch and body ground (See page IN-30).
DI-271DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE(U341E)
O/D Cancel Signal Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhile driving uphill with cruise control activated, in order to minimize gear shifting and provide smooth cruis-ing overdrive may be prohibited temporarily under some condition.The cruise control ECU sends O/D cut signals to the ECM as necessary and the ECM cancels overdriveshifting until these signals are discontinued.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Cruise Control ECU ECM
OD14 B B
OD1
D07938
DI-272DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check voltage between terminal OD1 of ECM and body ground.
NG
007264
PREPARATION:Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal OD1 of ECM and bodyground.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See page DI-234).
2 Check voltage between terminal OD of cruise control ECU harness side connec-tor and body ground.
S^~~~\ON
\<y) 0/D
/ \ \\P\e3^nj u 8 v (Tin
H/r^W {Vf-^l( W \ /i Y(
AB0119
N19917 I00742
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the cruise control ECU connector,(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal OD of cruise control ECUharness side connector and body ground.OK:
Voltage: 10 -14V
Check and replace the cruise control ECU.
NG
DI-273DIAGNOSTICS - AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
Check harness and connector between cruise control ECU and ECM(See page IN-30).
Repair or replace the harness or connector.
OK
Check and replace the ECM(See page
DI-274 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC BRAKEFORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD)
DKU
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTINGTroubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following pages.
(Vehicle Brought to Workshop)
/^Customer Problem Analysis //ff P. Dt-275 7
Items inside^ ff are titles of pages in this manual,with the page number in the bottom portion. Seethe pages for detailed explanations.
2 ff Check and Clear PTC (Precheck)/ P . Dl-276 ~_"~~~~
Symptomdoes not occur
Problem Symptom Confirmation
Symptomoccurs
• \ 4 ff Symptom Simulation ffv // P. IN-20 /
i>/ DTC Check / -Norrnarcooe/ P. DI-276 / ' 1
£Malfunction code 1 *6 // DTC Chart /I ' // Problem Symptoms Table //
// P. DI-280 / IL P. DI-284 ff
"L^
V/4>Ident
4>
HI
EZZTl .JrCircuit Inspection /I Censor oneck// if y Check for F|ujd Leakage »
P Dl °85 01^321 ff ff R D|-323 /
fy I
10/ Repair /
Confirmation Test
Step 2, 5,8, 9,11: Diagnostic steps permitting the use of theTOYOTA hand-held tester or TOYOTAbreak-out-box.
Fail safe function:When a failure occurs in the ABS system, the ABS warning light is lit and the ABS operation is prohibited. In additionto this, when the failure which disables the EBD operation occurs, the brake warning light is lit as well and the EBDoperation is prohibited.
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-275
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK
ABS Check SheetInspector'sName
Customer's Name
Date VehicleBrought In / /
Registration No.
Registration Year
Frame No.
Odometer Reading
/ /
kmmiles
Date Problem First Occurred
Frequency Problem Occurs
/
D Continuous D Intermittent ( times a day)
Symptoms
D ABS does not operate.
D ABS does not operate efficiently.
ABS Warning Light p RemainsONAbnormal
BRAKE Warning _ 0 . *..Light Abnormal D RemainsON
D Does not Light Up
D Does not Light Up
DTC Check1st Time
2nd Time
D Normal Code O Malfunction Code (Code )
Q Normal Code O Malfunction Code (Code )
DI-276 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
F09703
PRE-CHECK1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
Release the parking brake lever.(a)(b) Check the indicator.
When the ignition switch is turned ON, check that the ABSwarning light and BRAKE warning light goes on forapprox. 3 seconds.
HINT:
(c)
When the parking brake is applied or the level of the brakefluid is low, the BRAKE warning light is lit.If the indicator check result is not normal, proceed to trou-bleshooting for the ABS warning light circuit or BRAKEwarning light circuit (See page DI-314 or DI-317).In case of not using TOYOTA hand -held tester:Check the DTC.
DLC3
i m MMMMu
MMu
CGF09750
HINT:
(1) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and CG of DLC3.SST 09843-18040(2) Turn the ignition switch ON.(3) Read the DTC from the ABS warning light on the
combination meter.
If no code appears, inspect the diagnostic circuit or ABSwarning light circuit (See page DI-319 or DI-314).
Normal Code2 sec.
ON -i
OFF
0.25 sec.0.25 sec.
Code 11 and 210.5 sec.0.5 sec.
1.5 sec.
Code 11 Code 21
R01346
As an example, the blinking patterns for normal code andcodes 11 and 21 are shown on the left.(4) Codes are explained in the code table on page
DI-280.(5) After completing the check, disconnect terminals Tc
and EI, and turn off the display.If 2 or more malfunctions are indicated at the same time the low-est numbered DTC will be displayed 1st.
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-277
TOYOTAHand-held Tester
\L"|
D07259
(d) In case of using TOYOTA hand-held tester:Check the DTC.(1) Hook up the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the
DLC3.(2) Turn the ignition switch ON.(3) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tes-
ter screen.Please refer to the TOYOTA hand-held tester oper-ator's manual for further details.
(e) In case of not using TOYOTA hand-held tester:Clear the DTC.(1) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and CG of DLC3.SST 09843-18040(2) Turn the ignition switch ON.(3) Clear the DTC stored in ECU by depressing the
brake pedal 8 or more times within 5 seconds.(4) Check that the warning light shows the normal
code.(5) Remove the SST from the terminals of DLC3.SST 09843-18040
TOYOTAHand-held Tester
D07259
TOYOTAHand-held Tester
TOYOTABreak-out-box
N09348
(f) In case of using TOYOTA hand-held tester:Clear the DTC.(1) Hook up the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the
DLC3.(2) Turn the ignition switch ON.(3) Operate the TOYOTA hand-held tester to erase the
codes. (See hand-held tester oprater's manual.)
(g) Reference:Using TOYOTA break-out-box and TOYOTA hand-heldtester, measure the ECU terminal values.(1) Hook up the TOYOTA hand-held tester and
TOYOTA break-out-box to the vehicle.(2) Read the ECU input/output values by following the
prompts on the tester screen.
DI-278 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
HINT:TOYOTA hand-held tester has a "Snapshot" function. This re-cords the measured values and is effective in the diagnosis ofintermittent problems.Please refer to the TOYOTA hand-held tester/TOYOTA break-out-box operator's manual for further details.
DLC3
1 M1 I I II I I Iu
1 1 1u
CG
0.13 sec.
ON
OFF
0.13 sec.
BR3904
2. SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL(a) In case of not using TOYOTA hand-held tester:
Check the speed sensor signal. '(1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.(2) Using SST, connect terminals Ts and CG of DLC3.SST 09843-18040(3) Start the engine.
(4) Check that the ABS warning light blinks.HINT:If the ABS warning light does not blink, inspect the ABS warninglight circuit (See page DI-314).
(5) Drive vehicle straight forward.HINT:Drive vehicle faster than 45 km/h (28 mph) for several seconds.
(6) Stop the vehicle.(7) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and CG of DLC3.SST 09843-18040(8) Read the number of blinks of the ABS warning light.:See the list of DTC shown on the next page.If every sensor is normal, a normal code is output (A cycleof 0.25 sec. ON and 0.25 sec. OFF is repeated).If 2 or more malfunctions are indicated at the same time,the lowest numbered code will be displayed 1st.
HINT:
Malfunction Code (Example Code 72, 76)
7 2 7
0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.4 sec.
.0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. Repeat
BR3893
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-279
(9) After doing the check, disconnect the SST from ter-minals Ts and CG, Tc and CG of DLC3, and turnignition switch OFF.
SST 09843-18040
TOYOTAx; Hand-held Tester
\r
(b) Using TOYOTA hand-held tester:Check the DTC.(1) Hook up the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the
DLC3.(2) Do step (3) to (6) on the previous page and this
page.(3) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tes-
ter screen.Please refer to the TOYOTA hand-held tester oper-ator's manual for further details.
DTC of speed sensor check function:
Code No.
C1271/71
C1 272/72
C1 273/73
C1 274/74
C1 275/75
C1 276/76
C1 277/77
C1278/78
Diagnosis
Low output voltage of right front speed sensor
Low output voltage of left front speed sensor
Low output voltage of right rear speed sensor
Low output voltage of left rear speed sensor
Abnormal change in output voltage of right front speed sen-
sor
Abnormal change in output voltage of left front speedsensor
Abnormal change in output voltage of right rear speed
sensor
Abnormal change in output voltage of left rear speed sensor
Trouble Area
• Right front speed sensor• Sensor installation
• Right front speed sensor rotor
• Left front speed sensor
• Sensor installation
• Left front speed sensor rotor
• Right rear speed sensor
• Sensor installation
• Right rear speed sensor rotor
• Left rear speed sensor
• Sensor installation
• Left rear speed sensor rotor
Right front speed sensor rotor
Left front speed sensor rotor
Right rear speed sensor rotor
Left rear speed sensor rotor
DI-280 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHARTHINT:
Using SST 09843-18040, connect the terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3.• If any abnormality is not found when inspection parts, inspect the ECU.• If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for the code. For details
of each code, turn to the page referred to under the "See page" for respective "DTC No." in the DTCchart.
DTC No.
(See Page)
C0278/11
(DI-300)
C0279/12
(Dl-300)
C0273/13
(Df-295)
C0274/14
(DI-295)
C0226/21(DI-292)
C0236/22(DI-292)
C0246/23(DI-292)
C0256/24(DI-292)
C0200/31(DI-285)
C0205/32
(DI-285)
C0210/33(DI-285)
C0215/34
(DI-285)
C1 235/35(DI-285)
C1 236/36(DI-285)
C1 238/38
(DI-285)
C1 239/39(DI-285)
C1 241/41
(DI-305)
C1 249/49
(DI-308)
C1 251/51(DI-310)
Always ON
(Dt-312)
Detection Item
Open circuit in ABS solenoid relay circuit
Short circuit in ABS solenoid relay circuit
Open circuit in ABS motor relay circuit
Short circuit in ABS motor relay circuit
Open or short circuit in 2-position solenoid circuit for right front
wheel
Open or short circuit in 2-position solenoid circuit for left front
wheel
Open or short circuit in 2-position solenoid circuit for right rear
wheel
Open or short circuit in 2-position solenoid circuit for left rear
wheel
Right front wheel speed sensor signal malfunction
Left front wheel speed sensor signal malfunction
Right rear wheel speed sensor signal malfunction
Left rear wheel speed sensor signal malfunction
Right front wheel speed sensor have the sensor tips
Legt front wheel speed sensor have the sensor tips
Right rear wheel speed sensor have the sensor tips
Legt raer wheel speed sensor have the sensor tips
Power source voltage down
Open circuit in stop light switch circuit
Pump motor is locked
Malfunction in ECU
Trouble Area
• ABS solenoid relay
• ABS solenoid relay circuit
•ABS motor relay
•ABS motor relay circuit
•ABS actuator
•SFRR or SFRH circuit
• ABS actuator•SFLR or SFLH circuit
• ABS actuator
•SRRR or SRRH circuit
• ABS actuator
• SRLR or SRLH circuit
• Right front, left front, right rear and left rear speed sensor
• Each speed sensor circuit
• Speed sensor rotor
• Rear axle hub• Right rear, left rear speed sensor
• Each speed sensor circuit
• Speed sensor rotor
• Right front, toft front, right rear and left rear speed sensor
• Each speed sensor circuit
• Speed sensor rotor
•Battery
• Charging system
• Power source circuit
•Stop light switch
•Stop light switch circuit
•Stop light valve
•ABS pump motor
•ECU
•Battery
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-281
PARTS LOCATION
ABS Solenoid Relay
Stop Light Valve
ABS Motor Relay
Level Warning Switch
Front Speed Sensor
Rear Speed Sensor
Stop Light Switch
ABS Actuator
Sensor RotorFront Speed Sensor
ABS Warning LightBRAKE Warning Light
DLC3
Parking Brake SwitchF09774
DI-282 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
TERMINALS OF ECUDKMC-Ol
<$ft> <$TJ>
n6
12
T 1 '
__Icr
5
11
J/
4
10
3
9
n2
8
u
17
n13
26
12
25
n1124
10
23LJ
9
22
Er
8
21
7
20
rd
6
19
5
18
n4
17
3
16LJ
n2
15
1
14
\ I
F07155
Symbols (Terminals No.)
IG1 (A11 -13)-GND(A11 -12,25)
R+(A11-26)-SR(A10-7)
R+(A11-26)-MR(A10-1)
SFRR(A11 -1)-GND(A11-12,25)
SFRH (A1 1 - 2) - GND (A1 1 -12, 25)
SFLR(A10-6)-GND(A11 -12,25)
SFLH (A10 - 5) - GND (A11 -12,25)
SRRR (A10-12)-GND (A11-12,25)
SRRH{A10-11)-GND(A11-12,25)
SRLR (A11 - 14) - GND (A11 -12,25)
SRLH (A1 1 - 1 5) - GND (A1 1 -12,25)
WA(A11-11)-GND(A11 -12,25)
STP (A11 - 5) - GND (A11 -12,25)
D/G (A11 - 24) - GND (A11 -12,25)
Tc(A11-8)-GND(A11-12,25)
Ts (A11 -21) -GND (A11 - 12,25)
FR+ (A1 0 - 3) - FR- (A1 0 - 9)
FL+(A10-8)-FL-{A10-2)
RR+ (A11 - 10) - RR- (A11 -23)
RL+ (A1 1 - 22) - RL- (A1 1 - 9)
Wiring Color
B-Y<-»W-B
GR-R<-»GR
GR-R <-> R-Y
LG-B^W-B
LG<->W-B
R-W<-»W-B
LG-RoW-B
Y-R<->W-B
Y-G^W-B
B-R<-»W-B
GR-L<-»W-B
V^W-B
G-WoW-B
W<-»W-B
P-B<^W-B
W-R*->W-B
PoL
YoBR
W^B
R<->G
Condition
IG switch ON
IG switch ON, ABS warning light OFF
IG switch ON
IG switch ON, ABS warning light OFF
IG switch ON, ABS warning light OFF
IG switch ON, ABS warning light OFF
IG switch ON, ABS warning light OFF
IG switch ON, ABS warning light OFF
IG switch ON, ABS warning light OFF
IG switch ON, ABS warning light OFF
IG switch ON, ABS warning light OFF
IG switch ON, ABS warning light ON
IG switch ON, ABS warning light OFF
Stop light switch OFF
Stop light switch ON
IG switch ON, ABS warning light OFF
IG switch ON
IG switch ON
IG switch ON, slowly turn right front wheel
IG switch ON, slowly turn left front wheel
IG switch ON, slowly turn right rear wheel
IG switch ON, slowly turn left rear wheel
STD Voltage (V)
10-14
9-14
Below 1 .0
10-14
10-14
10-14
10-14
10-14
10-14
10-14
10-14
10-14
Below 2.0
Below 1.5
8-14
10-14
8-14
8-14
AC generation
AC generation
AC generation
AC generation
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
Oi-283
MT(A10-10)-GND(A11 -12,25)
PKB(A11-6)-GND(A11-
21,25)
BRL(A11 -18}-GND(A11 -21,25)
LG-B<->W-B
R-B <-> W-B
GR<-»W-B
IG switch ON
IG switch ON, parking brake switch ON
IG switch ON, parking brake switch OFF
IG switch ON, BRAKE indicator light ON
IG switch ON, BRAKE indicator light OFF
Below 1 .5
Below 2.0
10-14
10-14
Below 2.0
DK-284 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
UJMLM11
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLEIf a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs, check the circuits for eachproblem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting page.NOTICE:When replacing ABS ECU, sensor or etc., turn the IG switch OFF.
Symptom
ABS does not operate
ABS does not operate efficiently
ABS warning light abnormal
BRAKE warning light abnormal
DTC check cannot be done
Speed sensor signal check cannot be done
Suspect Area
Only when 1 . to 4. are aH normal and the problem is still
occurring, replace the ABS ECU.
1 . Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is
output.
2. IG power source circuit
3. Speed sensor circuit
4. Check the ABS actuator with a checker or TOYOTA
hand-held tester.
If abnormal, check the hydraulic circuit for leakage
(See page DI-323).
Only when 1 . to 4. are all normal and the problem is still
occurring, replace the ABS ECU.
1 . Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is
output.
2. Speed sensor circuit
3. Stop light switch circuit
4. Check the ABS actuator with a checker or TOYOTA
hand-held tester.
If abnormal, check the hydraulic circuit for leakage
(See page DI-323).
1. ABS warning light circuit
2. ABS ECU
1. BRAKE warning light circuit
2. ABS ECU
Only when 1 . and 2. are all normal and the problem is still
occurring, replace the ABS ECU.
1 . ABS warning light circuit
2. Tc terminal circuit
1 . Ts terminal circuit
2. ABS ECU
Seepage
DI-276
DI-305
DI-285
BR-48
DI-276
DI-285
DI-308
BR-48
DI-314
DI-317
DI-314
DI-319
DI-321
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-285
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC C0200/31-C1239/39 Speed Sensor Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Speed SensorRotor !
Low Speed
High Speed
+V
BR3583BR35S2 F00010
The speed sensor detects wheel speed and sends the ap-propriate signals to the ECU. These signals are used to controlthe ABS system. The front and rear rotors each have 48 serra-tions.When the rotors rotate, the magnetic field emitted by the perma-nent magnet in the speed sensor generates an AC voltage.Since the frequency of this AC voltage changes in direct propor-tion to the speed of the rotor, the frequency is used by the ECUto detect the speed of each wheel.
DTC No.
C0200/31
C0205/32C0210/33C0215/34
C1 235/35
C1 236/36
C1 238/38
C1 239/39
C0210/33
C0215/34
DTC Detecting Condition
Detection ol any of conditions from 1. through 3.:
1 . Vehicle speed is at 1 0 km/h (6 mph) or more and the
speed sensor signal circuit is open or short circuit con-
tinues for 15 sec. or more.2. Momentary interruption of the speed sensor signal oc-
curs 7 times or more.
3. Open circuit condition of the speed sensor signal circuit
continues for 0.5 sec. or more.
Vehicle speed is at 20 km/h (1 2mph) or more and interfer-
ence on the speed sensor signal continues for 5 sec. or
more.
The condition that the both rear side wheels' speed is lowerthan the front wheels' speed at 20 km/h (1 2 mph) or more
for 20 sec. or more when the IG switch turns ON and OFF,
which is repeated in a sequence more than 8 times.
Trouble Area
• Right front, left front, right rear, left rear speed sensor• Each speed sensor circuit
•Speed sensor rotor
• Right front, toft front, right rear, teft rear speed sensor
• Speed sensor rotor
• Rear axle hub
• Right rear, left rear speed sensor
• Rear speed sensor circuit
HINT:DTC No. C0200/31 and C1235/35 is for the right front speed sensor.DTC No. C0205/32 and C1236/36 is for the left front speed sensor.DTC No. C0210/33 and C1238/38 is for the right rear speed sensor.
DI-286 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTH.OCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Y f — \
AS rnLeft Front I &Speed Sensor IT ) 2
*| ] ft* -t n
P i P ) _L5 P @
A7 (TjRight Front BSpeed Sensor Ml g g 9
9 R 22
A15 r"nLeft Rear feSpeed Sensor 111 0 Q
\J,,X « ^ ^*
B< w ©Aie mRight Rear feSpeed Sensor IT I 23
[JF2JC.V. ^ — )
C
ABS ECU
PI j.
Clrl_—
FR+
CDrn—
Dl _LnL+
pi
RR+
RRv y
F09792
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-287
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:Start the inspection from step 1 in case of using the TOYOTA hand-held tester and start from step 2 in caseof not using the TOYOTA hand-held tester.
1 Check output value of speed sensor.
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the TOYOTA hand-held tester main switch ON.(c) Select the DATALIST mode on the TOYOTA hand-held tester.CHECK:Check that there is no difference between the speed value output from the speed sensor displayed on theTOYOTA hand-held tester and the speed value displayed on the speedometer when driving the vehicle.OK:
There is almost no difference from the displayed speed value.HINT:There is tolerance of ± 10 % in the speedometer indication.
NG
Check and replace ABS ECU.
Check speed sensor.
rR1420S
Front:PREPARATION:(a) Remove the front fender liner.(b) Make sure that there is no looseness at the connector
lock part and connecting part of the connector.(c) Disconnect the speed sensor connector.CHECK:Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of speed sensorconnector.OK:
Resistance: 1.4 -1.8 k& at 20 °CCHECK:Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of speed sensorconnector and body ground.OK:
Resistance: 10 M& or higher
DI-288 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
Rear speed sensor:PREPARATION:(a) Make sure that there is no looseness at the connector
lock part and connecting part of the connector.(b) Disconnect the speed sensor connector at hub bearing .CHECK:Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of speed sensorconnector.OK:
Resistance: 0.9 -1.3 kn at 25 ± 5 *CCHECK:Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of speed sensorconnector and body ground.OK:
Resistance: 1 M& or higher
Connector 1
N Connector 2 F10180
Rear speed sensor sub-wire harness:PREPARATION:(a) Remove the seat cushion and seatback.(b) Make sure that there is no looseness at the connector
lock part and connecting part of the connector.(c) Disconnect the speed sensor connector inside vehicle.CHECK:(a) Measure resistance between terminal 1 of connector 1
and terninal 2 of connector 2.{b) Measure resistance between terminal 2 of connector 1
and terninal 1 of connector 2.OK:
Resistance: below 1 nCHECK:Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of speed sensorconnector 1 and body ground.OK:
Resistance: 10 M£i or higher
Replace speed sensor or sub-wire harness.
NOTICE:Check the speed sensor signal last (See page DI-276).
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC DI-289BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
Check for open and short circuit in harness and connector between each speedsensor and ABS ECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Check speed sensor installation.
Front
1OK
BH3795F10178
Rear
OKNG
F10452
CHECK:Check the speed sensor installation.OK:
The installation bolt is tightened properly and there isno clearance between the sensor and steeringknuckle or rear axle carrier.
Replace speed sensor.
NOTICE:Check the speed sensor signal last (See page DI-276).
OK
DI-290 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
Check speed sensor and sensor rotor serrations.
Normal Signal Waveform
' 2 m/s / Division1 V/Division
NG
GND
W04200
REFERENCE: INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPEPREPARATION:(a) Remove the ABS ECU with connectors still connected.(b) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminals FR+, FL+, RR+
or RL+ and GND of the ABS ECU.CHECK:Drive the vehicle with about 30 km/h (19 mph), and check thesignal waveform.
Check and replace ABS ECU.
Check sensor rotor and sensor tip.
R00948
Front:PREPARATION:Remove the front drive shaft (See page SA-20).CHECK:Check the sensor rotor serrations.OK:
No scratches or missing teeth or foreign objects.PREPARATION:Remove the front speed sensor (See page BR-56).CHECK:Check the sensor tip.OK:
No scratches or foreign objects on the sensor tip.
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-291
Rear:PREPARATION:Remove the rear speed sensor (See page BR-59).CHECK:Check the sensor rotor serrations.OK:
No scratches or missing teeth or foreign objects.CHECK:Check the sensor tip.OK:
No scratches or foreign objects on the sensor tip.
Replace sensor rotor or speed sensor.
NOTICE:Check the speed sensor signal last (See page DI-276).
Check and replace ABS ECU.
DI-292 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DTC C0226/21 - C0256/24 ABS Actuator Solenoid Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis solenoid goes on when signals are received from the ECU and controls the pressure acting on the wheelcylinders thus controlling the braking force.
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
C0226/21
Condition 1. or 2. continues for 0.05 sec. or more:
1. IG1 terminal voltage of ABS ECU is 9.5 -18.5 V, thereis open or short circuit in actuator solenoid SFRR or
SFRH.
2. IG1 terminal voltage of ABS ECU is 9.5 -18.5 V, and
while ABS is control in operation.*1
•ABS actuator
•SFRR or SFRH circuit
C0236/22
Condition 1. or 2. continues for 0.05 sec. or more:
1. IG1 terminal voltage of ABS ECU is 9.5 -18.5 V, there
is open or short circuit in actuator solenoid SFLR or
SFLH.2. IG1 terminal voltage of ABS ECU is 9.5 -18.5 V, and
while ABS is control in operation.*1
•ABS actuator
•SFLR or SFLH circuit
C0246/23
Condition 1. or 2. continues for 0.05 sec. or more:
1. IG1 terminal voltage of ABS ECU is 9.5 -18.5 V, there
is open or short circuit in actuator solenoid SRRR orSRRH.
2. IG1 terminal voltage of ABS ECU is 9.5 -18.5 V, and
while ABS is control in operation.*1
• ABS actuator
•SRRR or SRRH circuit
C0256/24
Condition 1. or 2. continues for 0.05 sec. or more:1. IG1 terminal voltage of ABS ECU is 9.5 -18.5 V, there
is open or short circuit in actuator solenoid SRLR or
SRLH.2. IG1 terminal voltage of ABS ECU is 9.5 -18.5 V, and
while ABS is control in operation.*1
1 ABS actuator
'SRLR or SRLH circuit
*1 Solenoid relay contact ON condition:All of solenoid terminal voltage is half of IG1 terminal voltage or less than.
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-293
WIRING DIAGRAM
B-W
Engine Room J/B
ABSNo. 2
ALT
B-R
FLMain
Battery
ABS ECU
fej^Hj^
> ? -11 ir 2
TJsfe———(AT? SFRH
A
\J10 |J/C
W-B
W-B
12
25
GND1
GND2V
F09787
DI-294 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check ABS actuator solenoid.
W00714
PREPARATION:Disconnect the 2 connectors from ABS actuator.CHECK:Check continuity between terminals A5 - 4 and A4 -1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 of ABS actuator connector.OK:
ContinuityHINT:Resistance of S##H solenoid coil is approx. 8 ilResistance of S##R solenoid coil is approx. 4 ii
Replace ABS actuator.
OK
Check for open and short circuit in harness and connector between ABS ECUand actuator (See page IN-30).
NG Repair or replace harness or connector.
If the same code is still output after the DTC is deleted, check the contact condition of each con-nection. If the connections are normal, the ECU may be defective.
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
01-295
OWMH-01
DTC C0273/13, C0274/14 ABS Motor Relay Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe ABS motor relay supplies power to the ABS pump motor. While the ABS is activated, the ECU switchesthe ABS motor relay ON and operates the ABS pump motor.
DTC No.
C0273/13
C0274/14
DTC Detecting Condition
Condition 1 . or 2. continues for 0.2 sea or more:
1 . ABS ECU terminal K31 voltage is 9.5 V to 1 8.5 V, andwhen motor relay is ON in the midst of initial check or in
operation of ABS control.*1
2. Motor relay is ON driving in the midst of initial check orin operation of ABS control, ABS ECU terminal IG1 volt-age becomes 9.5 V or less.*2
Condition below continues for 4 sec. or more:
When the motor relay is OFF, there is open circuit in MT
terminal of ABS ECU.
Trouble Area
•ABS motor relay• ABS motor relay circuit
*1 Relay contact OFF condition: MT terminal voltage is below 3.6 V.*2 Relay contact ON condition: MT terminal voltage is 3.6 V or above.
DI-296 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTH.OCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
WIRING DIAGRAM
GR-R
B-R
Engine Room R/B No. 1ABS Motor Relay
1
Engine Room J/B
j_ Battery
W-B
W-B
W-B
J10J/C
ABS ECU
R+
MR
MT
GND1
GND2
F10341
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-297
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:Start the inspection from step 1 in case of using the TOYOTA hand-held tester and start from step 2 in caseof not using TOYOTA hand-held tester.
Check ABS motor relay operation.
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the TOYOTA hand-held tester main switch ON.(c) Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the TOYOTA hand-held tester.CHECK:Check the operation sound of the ABS motor relay when operating it with the TOYOTA hand-held tester.OK:
The operation sound of the ABS motor relay should be heard.
OK Go to step 5.
NG
Check voltage between terminal 5 of engine room RIB No. 1 (for ABS motorrelay) and body ground.
LOCK Engine Room R/B No. 1~o—o—cr
F09761
PREPARATION:Remove the ABS motor relay from engine room R/B No. 1.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal 5 of engine room R/B No. 1(for ABS motor relay) and body ground.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
Check and repair harness or connector.
DI-298 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
Check continuity between terminal 3 of ABS motor relay and terminal MT (A1010) of ABS ECU.
Engine Room R/B No. 1
F09762
CHECK:Check continuity between terminal 3 of engine room R/B No.1(for ABS motor relay) and terminal MT (A10 -10) of ABS ECU.OK;
ContinuityHINT:There is a resistance of 4 - 6 £1 between terminals A5 - 2 andA5 - 3 of ABS actuator.
NG Repair or replace harness or ABS actuator.
OK
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC DI-299BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
4 Check ABS motor relay.
F09763
CHECK:Check continuity between each terminal of ABS motor relay.OK:
Terminals 1 and 2
Terminals 3 and 5
Continuity (Reference value 62 il)
Open
CHECK:(a) Apply battery positive voltage between terminals 1 and 2.(b) Check continuity between terminals of ABS motor relay.
OK:
Terminals 3 and 5 Continuity
OK
NG Replace ABS motor relay.
Check for open and short circuit in harness and connector between ABS motorrelay and ABS ECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
If the same code is still output after the DTC is deleted, check the contact condition of each con-nection. If the connections are normal, the ECU may be defective.
DI-300 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DWMMH
DTC C0278/11, C0279/12 ABS Solenoid Relay Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis relay supplies power to each ABS solenoid. After the ignition switch is turned ON, if the initial check isOK, the relay goes on.
DTC No.
C0278/11
C0279/12
DTC Detecting Condition
Condition 1 . or 2. continues for 0.2 sec. or more:1 . IG1 terminal voltage of ABS ECU is 9.5 - 1 8.5 V, and
when the solenoid relay is ON.*1
2. With solenoid relay ON driving, when IG1 terminal of
ABS ECU is less than 9.5 V.*1
Immediately after IG switch has been turned ON, when the
solenoid relay is OFF.*2
Trouble Area
•ABS solenoid relay
• ABS solenoid relay circuit
*1 Solenoid relay contact OFF condition:All of solenoid terminal voltage is half of IG1 terminal voltage or less than.*2 Solenoid relay contact ON condition:All of solenoid terminal voltage is half of IG 1 terminal voltage or more.
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-301
WIRING DIAGRAM
B-W
Engine Room J/B
ABSNo. 2
ALT
B-R
FL Main
Battery
ABS ECU
—^^^fEngine RoomR/B No. 1 7
£3 @SR
W-B
J10J/C
12
<S25
SRLR
GND1
GND2
"N
F09787
DL-302 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:Start the inspection from step 1 in case of using the TOYOTA hand-held tester and start from step 2 in caseof not using the TOYOTA hand-held tester.
Check ABS solenoid relay operation.
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the TOYOTA hand-held tester main switch ON.(c) Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the TOYOTA hand-held tester.CHECK:Check the operation sound of the ABS solenoid relay when operating it with the TOYOTA hand-held tester.OK:
The operation sound of the ABS solenoid relay should be heard.
Go to step 5.
NG
Check voltage between terminal 5 of engine room R/B No. 1 (for ABS solenoidrelay) and body groud.
Engine Room R/B No. 1
F09758
PREPARATION:Remove the ABS solenoid relay from engine room R/B No. 1.CHECK:Measure the voltage between terminal 5 of engine room R/BNo. 1 (for ABS solenoid relay) and body ground. iOK:
Voltage: 10-14V
Check and repair harness or connector.
OK
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
01-303
Check continuity between terminal 3 of engine room R/B No. 1 (for ABS solenoidrelay) and each solenoid terminal of ABS ECU.
Engine Room R/B No. 1 CHECK:Check continuity between terminal 3 of engine room R/B No. 1(for ABS solenoid relay) and terminal SRLR, SRLH, SRRR,SRRH, SFLR, SRLH, SFRR or SFRH of ABS ECU.OK:
ContinuityHINT:Resistance of each solenoid coilSRLR, SRRR, SFLR, SFRR: 4.3 HSRLH, SRRH, SFLH, SFRH: 8.8 n
Repair or replace harness or ABS actuator.
DL-304 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
Check ABS solenoid relay.
Continuity 2 5
"=0 X. Continuity
F09760
OK
CHECK:Check continuity between each terminal of ABS solenoid relay.OK:
Terminals 1 and 2
Terminals 3 and 5
Continuity (Reference value 100 £1)
Open
CHECK:(a) Apply battery positive voltage between terminals 1 and 2.(b) Check continuity between each terminal of ABS solenoid
relay.OK:
Terminals 3 and 5 Continuity
Replace ABS solenoid relay.
Check for open and short circuit in harness and connector between ABS sole-noid relay and ABS ECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
If the same code is still output after the DTC is deleted, check the contact condition of each con-nection. If the connections are normal, the ECU may be defective.
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-305
DWMJ-Ct
DTC C1 241 741 IG Power Source Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis is the power source for the ECU, hence the actuators.
DTC No.
C1241/41
DTC Detecting Condition
Condition 1 . or 2. is detected:1 . Vehicle speed is at 3 km/h (1 .9 mph) or more and ECU
terminal IG1 voltage is 9.5 V or less , which continuesfor 10 sec. or more.
2. When IG1 terminal voltage is less than 9.5 V, there isopen circuit in the motor relay or in the solenoid relay, or
the solenoid circuit malfunction.
Trouble Area
• Battery
•Charging system
• Power source circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Instrument Panel J/BABS ECU
B-R
IgnitionSwitch L-R
ABS-IG 3,-,. . .-..-, ^-—>
IG
'-o*""*S-
r-'H*-]
1
A'— ' ^^
3
IG1Relay
i
212
B-Y13
Engine Room J/B
FL Main B~R
W-B
W-B
Battery
W-B
J10J/C
IG1
GND1
GND2
DI-306 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION fEBD) _
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check ECU-IG fuse.
Instrument Panel J/B
ECU-IG
F09704
PREPARATION:Remove ECU-IG fuse from Instrument Panel J/B.CHECK:Check continuity of ECU-IG fuse.OK:
Continuity
Check for short circuit in all the harness andcomponents connected to ECU-IG fuse (See at-tached wiring diagram).
OK
Check battery positive voltage.
OK:Voltage: 10-14V
Check and repair the charging system. (Seepage CH-2)
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-307
Check voltage of the ABS-IG power source.
In case of using TOYOTA hand-held tester:PREPARATION:(a) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the TOYOTA hand-held tester main switch ON.(c) Select the DATALIST mode on the TOYOTA hand-held tester.CHECK:Check the voltage condition output from the ECU displayed on the TOYOTA hand-held tester.OK:
"Normal" is displayed.In case of not using TOYOTA hand-held tester:PREPARATION:Remove ABS ECU with connectors still connected.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch ON.(b) Measure voltage between terminals A11 - 13 and A11
12, 25 of ABS ECU connector.OK:
Voltage: 10-14VT 13 F07151
Check and replace ABS ECU.
NG
Check continuity between terminals GND (A11 -12,25) of ABS ECU connectorand body ground.
LOCK
BE 6853
F07152
-)l m 01
rr*"4
-_ X— j
GND F07216
PREPARATION:Disconnect the connector from the ABS ECU.CHECK:Measure resistance between terminal A11 -12,25 of ABS ECUharness side connector and body ground.OK:
Resistance: 1 Q or less
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check for open circuit in harness and connector between ABS ECU and ECU-IG fuse (See pageIN-30).
DI-308 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTt-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DEMK-01
DTC C1 249/49 Stop Light Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONDTC No.
C1 249/49
DTC Detecting Condition
ABS ECU terminal IG1 vottage is 9.5 V to 18.5 V and ABS
is in non-operation, the open circurt of the stop light switch
circuit continues for 0.3 sec. or more.
Trouble Area
• Stop light switch•Stop light switch circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Instrument Panel J/B
G-
s-
^
-B 0-\o2
S8Stop LighlSwitch
Instrument PC
2 STOP
K^-f ^T-
G-W1
t
mel J/B
~^^FV Ift
9 1
": cl* IC
nOo)
G-W
J«.C(J12) C^Jl
. _ .
A ( M O 1rt^J ^J
B-R _aEngine Room J/B
fr
<
1 1 ALT 2
iA)*- -
> 1
~^^(2E,
FL Main_ryea^-r%— — _
fi,(J
G-W
3 BA1|
2
(=W-B
G-
b1
-W
H10HighMourStop
tedLight
2
^
G-W
iJ/C
G-W
R6 2k Left ~s-
?) St°P VSLiahtuyiu
0
\
R7
3/ Stop5 Light
Battery
2 BA1
W-BJ14J/C
W-B W-B
ABS ECU
STP
F09789
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC DI-309BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check operation of stop light.
CHECK:Check that stop light lights up when brake pedal is depressed and turns off when brake pedal is released.
Repair stop light circuit (See page BE-33).
Check voltage between terminal STP (A11 - 5) of ABS ECU and body ground.
STP
PREPARATION:Remove ABS ECU with connectors still connected.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal A11 - 5 of ABS ECU andbody ground when brake pedal is depressed.OK:
Voltage: 8 -14 V
OK Check and replace ABS ECU.
NG
Check for open circuit in harness and connector between ABS ECU and stoplight switch (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on problem symptoms table (See page DI-284).
DI-310 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
OKML-OT
DTC C1 251 751 ABS Pump Motor Lock
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONDTC No.
C1 251/51
DTC Detecting Condition
ABS actuator pump motor is not operating normally.
Trouble Area
ABS pump motor
WIRING DIAGRAM
GR-R
Engine Room R/B No. 1ABS Motor Relay
Engine Room J/B
Battery
ABS Actuator
A5,•••"
3
1 CA5)
GR-R
R~Y
W
LG~B
W-B
W_8
J10J/C
ABS ECU
R+
MR
MT
GND1
GND2
F10341
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-311
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check operation of ABS pump motor.
v~VWl
F03291
PREPARATION:Disconnect the ABS actuator connector.CHECK:/"^ * '+' /T\ 1 *J -fr + ° 1 D k A / A C *")\ .4i/onnect positive ® leao to terminal DIVI (Ao — £) ana negative0 lead to terminal GND (A5 - 1 ) of the ABS actuator connector,check that the pump motor is operates.OK:
The running sound of the pump motor shouldheard.
be
Check for open circuit in harness and connec-tor between ABS motor relay, ABS actuator andABS ECU (See page IN-30).
NG
Replace ABS actuator.
DI-312 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP1
DBMM-01
DTC Always ON ABS ECU Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC No.
Always ON
DTC Detecting Condition
ABS ECU internal malfunction is detected.
Trouble Area
• Combination meter
• Combination meter circuit
• Battery
•ABS ECU
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Is DTC output?
Check DTC on page Dr-276.
Repair circuit indicated by the code output.
2 Is normal code displayed?
YES\ Check and replace ABS ECU.
NO
3 Is ABS warning light go off?
YES\ Check and replace ABS ECU.
NO
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC DI-313BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
Check battery positive voltage.
CHECK:Check the battery positive voltage.OK:
10-14V
OK
Check and repair the charging system. (Seepage CH-2)
Check ABS warning light.
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the connector from the ABS ECU.(b) Connect the terminal WA (A11 -11) of wire harness and the terminal GND (A11 -12,25) of wire har-
ness.(c) Turn the ignition switch ON.CHECK:Check the ABS warning light goes off.
OK Check and replace ABS ECU.
Check for short circuit in harness and connector between ABS warning light, combination meterand ABS ECU (See page IN-30).
01-314 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTM.OCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
ABS Warning Light Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONIf the ECU detects trouble, it lights the ABS warning light while at the same time prohibiting ABS control. Atthis time, the ECU records a DTC in memory.Connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 to make the ABS warning light blink and output the DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Instrument Panel J/B Combination MeterABS ECU
WA
F09785
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-315
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:Troubleshoot in accordance with the chart below for each trouble symptom.
ABS warning light does not light up
ABS warning light remains on
•1
'2
*1: Start the inspection from step 1 in case of using the TOYOTA hand-held tester and start from step 2 incase of not using TOYOTA hand-held tester.*2: After inspection of step 3, start the inspection from step 4 in case of using the TOYOTA hand-held testerand start from step 5 in case of not using TOYOTA hand-held tester.
Check operation of the ABS warning light.
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the TOYOTA hand-held tester main switch ON.(c) Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the TOYOTA hand-held tester.CHECK:Check that "ON" of the ABS warning light can be shown on the combination meter using the TOYOTA hand-held tester.HINT:ABS warning light turns "OFF" automatically 2 seconds after it is turnd "ON".
Check and replace ECU.
NG
Check ABS warning light.
See combination meter troubleshooting on page BE-2.
Repair buib or combination meter assembly.
DI-316 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
3 Check that the ECU connectors are securely connected to the ECU.
NO\ Connect the connector to the ECU.
YES
Check for open circuit in harness and connector between combination meter and ABS ECU (Seepage IN-30).
4 Check operation of the ABS warning light (See step 1).
OK\ Check and replace ABS ECU.
NG
Is DTC output?
Check DTC on page DI-276.
Repair circuit indicated by the output code.
NO
Check for short circuit in harness and connector between DLC3 and ABS ECU (See pageIN-30).
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTH.OCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC DI-317BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP) _^
BRAKE Warning Light Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe BRAKE warning light lights up when the brake fluid is insufficient, the parking brake is applied or theEBD is defective.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Instrument Panel J/BCombination Meter
WARNING 11—{0^33-A 6
B2Brake FluidLevel WarningSwitch
ABS ECU
BRL
PKB
P3ParkingBrakeSwitch
F09786
DI-318 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check parking brake switch circuit (See page BE-2).
NG\ Repair or replace parking brake switch circuit.
OK
Check brake fluid level warning switch circuit (See page BE-2).
Repair or replace brake fluid level warningswitch circuit.
OK
Is DTC output for ABS?
Check DTC on page DI-276.
Repair circuit indicated by the output code.
No
Check BRAKE warning light.
See combination meter troubleshooting on page BE-2.
Repair or replace combination meter.
Check and replace ABS ECU.
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC DI-319BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
Tc Terminal Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONConnecting between terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 causes the ECU to display the DTC by flashing theABS warning light.
WIRING DIAGRAM
DLC3 Instrument Panel J/BABS ECU
P-B P-B
W-B
J3J/C
Tc
F09790
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check voltage between terminals Tc and CG of DLC3.
DLC3
Tc._n lr~M n
CG
F09578
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch ON.(b) Measure voltage between terminals Tc and CG of DLC3.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
If ABS warning light does not blink even after Tcand CG are connected, the ECU may be defec-tive.
DI-320 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTM.OCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
Check for open and short circuit in harness and connector between ABS ECUand DLC3, DLC3 and body ground (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace ABS ECU.
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-321
Ts Terminal Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe sensor check circuit detects abnormalities in the speed sensor signal which cannot be detected withthe DTC check.Connecting terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3 starts the check.
WIRING DIAGRAM
c
DLC3
TQ
CG
14
W-B4
VI=7
W-R <jgy
J3J/C
ABS ECU
To
v y
F09791
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check voltage between terminals Ts and CG of DLC3.
.ON
Ts
DLC3
n
CG
F09679
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch ON.(b) Measure voltage between terminals Ts and CG of DLC3.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
NG
OK' If ABS warning light does not blink even after Tsand CG are connected, the ECU may be defec-tive.
DI-322 DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
Check for open and short circuit in harness and connector between ABS ECUand DLC3, DLC3 and body ground (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace ABS ECU.
DIAGNOSTICS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBP)
DI-323
Check for Fluid Leakage
Check for fluid leakage from actuator or hydraulic lines.
DI-324DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMHOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
( Vehicle Brought to Workshop )
II Customer Problem Analysis jj
II P. DI-325 II
Items inside / / are titles of pages in this manual,with the page number in the bottom portion. See thepages for detailed explanations.
Warning Light Check
P. DI-326Remains OFF
Remains ON
PTC Check (Read Present PTC)P. DI-326 ~
PTC Check (Read Past PTC)P. DI-326
DTC Chart
P. DI-332
( END )
/
Circuit Inspection jf
P. DI-339 to 01^79 //
Malfunction Code
Identification of Problem
Repair1
Normal \7\ II Symptom Simulation //
II P. IN-20
Warning LightRemains OFF
I! Clear DTC (Present and Past DTC) //I P. DI-326
* •
II
\ll Warning Light Check //II P. DI-326 II
Remains ON
Remains OFF
If DTC Check (Read Past DTC) //
II P. DI-326
iII
Confirmation Test
i
//Warning LightON
PTC Check ffP. DI-326 II
Steps, 4,6,8,9,11 : Piagnostic steps permitting the useof the TOYOTA hand-held tester.
DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMDI-325
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK
Supplemental Restraint System Check Sheet Inspector'sName
Customer's Name
Date Vehicle Brought In / /
Registration No.
Registration Year
Frame No.
Odometer Reading
/ /
kmMiles
Date Problem Occurred
Weather
Temperature
/ /
a Fine a Cloudy D Rainy n Snowy D Other
Approx.
Vehicle Operationn Starting D Idling
a Driving [ a Constant speed D Acceleration a DecelerationD Other ]
Road Conditions
Details Of Problem
Vehicle Inspection, Repair Histo-ry Prior to Occurrence of Mal-function (Including Supplemen-tal Restraint System)
Diagnosis System Inspection
SRS Warning LightInspection
DTC Inspection
1st Time
2nd Time
1st Time
2nd Time
D Remains ON
D Remains ON
D Normal Code
O Normal Code
n Sometimes Lights Up a Does Not Light Up
O Sometimes Lights Up D Does Not Light Up
D Malfunction Code [ Code. ]
D Malfunction Code [ Code. ]
DI-326DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
UIWJY-OI
PRE-CHECK1. SRS WARNING LIGHT CHECK(a) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check that
the SRS warning light lights up.(b) Check that the SRS warning light goes out after approx.
6 seconds.HINT:
When the ignition switch is at ON and the SRS warninglight remains on or flashes, the airbag sensor assemblyhas detected a malfunction code.
• If, after approx. 6 seconds have elapsed, the SRS warn-ing light sometimes lights up or the SRS warning lightlights up even when the ignition switch is OFF, a short inthe SRS warning light circuit can be considered likely.Proceed to "SRS warning light circuit malfunction" onpage DI-474.
DLC3
TcH10658
2. DTC CHECK (Using diagnosis check wire)(a) Present troubles codes:
Output the DTC.(1) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for approx. 20 seconds.(2) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and CG of the
DLC3.SST 09843-18020
NOTICE:Pay due attention to the terminal connecting position toavoid a malfunction.(b) Past troubles codes:
Output the DTC.(1) Using service wire, connect terminals Tc and CG of
the DLC3.SST 09843-18020(2) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for approx. 20 seconds.NOTICE:Pay due attention to the terminal connecting position toavoid a malfunction.
DI-327DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Normal Code0.25
ON
OFF J miuuum0.25
Code 11 and 31
0.5 2.5 4.0
UULfl| Repeat
DTC 11 DTC 31AT0716AS0056 H08231
(c) Read the DTC.Read the 2-digit DTC as indicated by the number of timesthe SRS warning light blinks. As an example, the blinkingpatterns, normal, 11 and 31 are shown in the illustration.
• Normal code indicationThe light will blink 2 times per second.Malfunction code indicationThe first blinking output indicates the first digitof a 2-digit DTC. After a 1.5-second pause,the second blinking output will indicate thesecond digit.
If there are 2 or more codes, there will be a 2.5-second pausebetween each code. After all the codes have been output, therewill be a 4.0-second pause and they will all be repeated.HINT:• In the event of a number of trouble codes, indication will
start from the smallest numbered code.• If a DTC is not output or a DTC is output without terminal
connection, proceed to the Tc terminal circuit inspectionon page DI-479.
TOYOTA Hand-held Tester 3. DTC CHECK (Using TOYOTA hand-held tester)(a) Hook up the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Read the DTCs by following the prompts on the tester
screen.HINT:Please refer to the TOYOTA hand-held tester operator's manu-al for further details.4. DTC CLEARANCE (Not using service wire)When the ignition switch is turned off, the diagnostic troublecode is cleared.HINT:DTC might not be cleared by turning the ignition switch OFF.In this case, proceed to the next step.5. DTC CLEARANCE (Using service wire)(a) Connect the 2 service wires to terminals Tc and A/B of
DLC3.(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait for approx. 6 se-
conds.
DI-328DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(c) Starting with the Tc terminal, ground alternately terminalTc and terminal A/B twice each in cycles of 1.0 second.Make sure that the terminals are grounded. Ensure theterminal Tc remain grounded.
HINT:When alternately grounding terminals Tc and A/B, releaseground from one terminal and immediately ground the other ter-minal within an interval of 0.2 seconds.If DTCs are not cleared, repeat the above procedure until thecodes are cleared.
A/B
H10687
Terminal
Tc
A/B
OFF
BodyGround
(±0.5 see.1 second
(±0.5 sec.) ((
OFF
BodyGround
ON
OFF
Several — ••
(( .
50 m sec.
50 m sec.
H120U
(d) Several seconds after doing the clearing procedure, theSRS warning light will blink in a 50 - m sec. cycle to indi-cate the codes which have been cleared.
TOYOTA Hand-held Tester 6. DTC CLEARANCE (Using TOYOTA hand-held tester)(a) Hook up the TOYOTA hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Clear the DTCs by following the prompts on the tester
screen.HINT:Please refer to the TOYOTA hand-held tester operation'smanual for further details.
DI-329DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
7. RELEASE METHOD OF AIRBAG ACTIVATION PRE-VENTION MECHANISM
An airbag activation prevention mechanism is built into the con-nector for the squib circuit of the SRS.When release of the airbag activation prevention mechanism isdirected in the troubleshooting procedure, as shown in the il-lustration of the connectors on the next pages, insert paperwhich has the same thickness as the male terminal between theterminal and the short spring.CAUTION:Never release the airbag activation prevention mechanismon the squib connector.NOTICE:• Do not release the airbag activation prevention mech-
anism unless specifically directed by the trouble-shooting procedure.If the inserted paper is too thick the terminal and shortspring may be damaged, so always use paper withthe same thickness as the male terminal.
Dk-330DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (RH)
Side AirbagAssembly (RH) (Squib)
Seat BeltPretensioner (RH)
Door Side AirbagSensor (RH)
Front Airbag Sensor (RH)
Front Passenger AirbagAssembly (Squib)
Steering WheelPad (Squib)
Front Airbag Sensor (LH)
Door Side AirbagSensor(LH)
Seat BeltPretensioner (LH)
Side AirbagAssembly (LH) (Squib)
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (LH)
H12007
DI-331DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Airbag Sensor Assembly Connector
;T
Short Spring Short Spring Short Spring
Before Release
Paper
After Release
Connector ©©(6)
Short Spring
Connector® ©
Short Spring
H01356H01233H02248 H02249H09672 H09658
Before Release
Paper
Paper
After Release
i
«
DI-332DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHARTIf a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code in the tablebelow (Proceed to the page given for that circuit.).
DTC No.
(See Page)
B0100/13
(DI-339)
B0101/14
(DI-344)
B01 02/11
(DI-348)
B0103/12
(DI-352)
B01 05/53
(DI-356)
B01 06/54
(DI-360)
B01 07/51
(DI-363)
B01 08/52
(DI-366)
B0110/43
(DI-369)
B0111/44
(Dl-373)
B01 12/41
(DI-379)
B0113/42
(DI-379)
B01 15/47
(DI-382)
B01 16/48
(DI-386)
Detection Item
• Short in D squib circuit
• Open in D squib circuit
• Short in D squib circuit (to ground)
•Short in D squib circuit (to B+)
•Short in P squib circuit
•Open in P squib circuit
•Short in P squib circuit (to ground).
• Short in P squib circuit (to B+)
• Short in side squib (RH) circuit
•Open in side squib (RH) circuit
• Short in side squib (RH) circuit
(to ground)
• Short in side squib (RH) circuit
(to 8+)
•Short in side squib (LH) circuit
• Open in side squib (LH) circuit
Trouble Area
• Steering wheel pad (squib)
• Spiral cable
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Steering wheel pad (squib)
• Spiral cable
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
•Steering wheel pad (squib)
•Spiral cable
• Airbag sensor assembly
•Wire harness
•Steering wheel pad (squib)
• Spiral cable
•Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Front passenger airbag assembly (squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Front passenger airbag assembly (squib)
•Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Front passenger airbag assembly (squib)
•Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Front passenger airbag assembly (squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly• Wire harness
• Side airbag assembly RH (squib)
•Airbag sensor assembly
•Wire harness
•Side airbag assembly RH (squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
•Side airbag assembly RH (squib)
•Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Side airbag assembly RH (squib)
•Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
•Side airbag assembly LH (squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly
•Wire harness
• Side airbag assembly LH (squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
SRS
Warning Light
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Blink
Blink
Blink
Blink
Blink
Blink
DI-333DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DTC No.
(See Page)
B01 17/45
(DI-389)
B01 18/46(DI-392)
B01 30/63
(DI-395)
B0131/64
(Dt-399)
B01 32/61
(DI-402)
B01 33/62
(DI-405)
B01 35/73
(DM08)
B0 136/74
(DI-412)
80137/71
(DI-415)
B01 38/72
(DM18)
B1100/31
(DM21)
B11 40/32
(DM23)
B1141/33(DM31)
B1142/B1143/34
(DM39)
B1144/B1145/35
(DI-447)
B1156/B1157/15
(DM55)
Detection Item
•Short in side squib (LH) circuit
(to ground)
• Short in side squib (LH) circuit
(to B+)
•Short in PfT squib (RH) circuit
•Open in P/T squib (RH) circuit
• Short in P/T squib (RH) circuit
(to ground)
• Short in P/T squib (RH) circuit
(to B-0
• Short in P/T squib (LH) circuit
• Open in P/T squib (LH) circuit
• Short in P/T squib (LH) circuit
(to ground)
• Short in P/T squib (LH) circuit
(to B+)
• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
• Side airbag sensor assembly (RH)malfunction
•Side airbag sensor assembly (LH)
malfunction
• Door side airbag sensor (RH)
malfunction
• Door side airbag sensor (LH)
malfunction
• Front airbag sensor (RH) malfunction
Trouble Area
• Side airbag assembly LH (squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Side airbag assembly LH (squib)
•Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Seat belt pretensioner RH (squib)
•Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Seat belt pretensioner RH (squib)
•Airbag sensor assembly
•Wire harness
•Seat belt pretensioner RH (squib)
•Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
•Seat belt pretensioner RH (squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
•Seat belt pretensioner LH (squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Seat belt pretensioner LH (squib)
•Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
•Seal belt pretensioner LH (squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly
•Wire harness
• Seat belt pretensioner LH (squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Airbag sensor assembly
•Side airbag sensor assembly (RH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Side airbag sensor assembly (LH)
•Airbag sensor assembly
•Wire harness
• Door side airbag sensor (RH)
•Airbag sensor assembly
• Instrument panel wire harness• RH front door wire harness
• Door side airbag sensor (LH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Instrument panel wire harness
• LH front door wire harness
• Front airbag sensor (RH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Instrument panel wire harness
• Engine room No. 2 wire harness
SRS
Warning Light
Blink
Blink
Blink
Blink
Blink
Blink
Blink
Blink
Blink
Blink
ON
Blink
Blink
ON
ON
ON
DI-334DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DTC No.(See Page)
B1158/B1159/16
(DM63)
Normal(DM71)
Detection Item
• Front airbag sensor (LH) malfunction
• System normal
• Voltage source drop
Trouble Area
• Front airbag sensor (LH)•Airbag sensor assembly• Instrument panel wire harness• Engine room main wire harness
-
• Battery• Airbag sensor assembly
SRSWarning Light
ON
OFF
ON
HINT:When the SRS warning light remains lit up and the DTC is the normal code, this means a voltage sourcedrops.This malfunction is not stored in memory by the airbag sensor assembly and if the power source volt-age returns to normal, the SRS warning light will automatically go out.When 2 or more codes are indicated, the codes will be displayed in numeral order starting from thelowest numbered code.If a code not listed on the chart is displayed, the airbag sensor assembly is faulty.
DI-335DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
PARTS LOCATION
Steering Wheel Pad(with Airbag)
Spiral Cable
Combination Meter(Warning Light)
Front AirbagSensor(LH)
Front Passenger Airbag Assembly
Door Side AirbagSensor(LH)
Airbag Sensor Assembl;
Door Side Airbag Sensor (RH)
Side Airbag Assembly (RH)
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (RH)
Front AirbagSensor (RH)
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (LH) Seat Belt
Pretensioner (LH)
Seat Belt Pretensioner (RH)
Side Airbag Assembly (LH)
H11996
DI-336DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
TERMINALS OF ECU
r6
1 1 ,| 1 1 ,| [-
B
5A
4
12 I 11 J10A A *
A
3
9
2
8
X1
7
6 54 *
17J16A A
28\27
4
15
26
B
MJ 13,
25j 24
A
12
23
11
22
10
21
3 2
9 I 8A *
20 19
1
7
18
I, ,|
x6
12
B
5 4
"K
A
3
9
2
8
1
7
H01357
No.
A
B
C6-3
C6-5
C6-6
C6-7
C6-8
C6-9
C6-10
C6-11
C6-12
C6-13
C6-14
C6-15
C6-16
C6-17
C6-19
C6-20
C6-23
C6-26
C6-27
C6-28
C7-1
C7-2
C7-5
Symbol
-
-
LA
IG2
IG1
DMR+
DMR-
+SR
P+
P-
SIL
D-
D+
+SL
DML-
DML+
Tc
-SR
GSW2
-SL
E1
E2
PL-
PL+
SFL+
Terminal Name
Electrical Connector Check Mechanism
Electrical Connector Check Mechanism
SRS Warning Light
Power Source
Power Source
Door Side Airbag Sensor (RH)
Door Side Airbag Sensor (RH)
Front Airbag Sensor (RH)
Squib (Passenger)
Squib (Passenger)
Diagnosis
Squib (Driver)
Squib (Driver)
Front Airbag Sensor (LH)
Door Side Airbag Sensor (LH)
Door Side Airbag Sensor (LH)
Diagnosis
Front Airbag Sensor (RH)
ECM
Front Airbag Sensor (LH)
Ground
Ground
Squib (Seat Belt Pretensioner, LH)
Squib (Seat Belt Pretensioner, LH)
Squib (Side, LH)
DI-337DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
No.
C7-6
C7-7
C7-9
C7-10
C7-11
C7-12
C8-1
C8-2
C8-5
C8-6
C8-7
C8-9
C8-10
C8-12
Symbol
SFL-
VUPL
SSL+
FSL
LBE+
ESL
SFR-
SFR+
PR+
PR-
ESR
FSR
SSR+
VUPR
Terminal Name
Squib (Side, LH)
Side Airbag Sensor (LH)
Side Airbag Sensor (LH)
Side Airbag Sensor (LH)
Body ECU
Side Airbag Sensor (LH)
Squib (Side, RH)
Squib (Side, RH)
Squib (Pretensioner, RH)
Squib (Pretensioner, RH)
Side Airbag Sensor (RH)
Side Airbag Sensor (RH)
Side Airbag Sensor (RH)
Side Airbag Sensor (RH)
DI-338DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLEProceed with troubleshooting of each circuit in the table below.
Symptom
• With the ignition switch in ON position, the SRS warning light
sometimes lights up after approx. 6 seconds have elapsed.
« SRS warning light is always lit up even when ignition switch is in
the LOCK position.
• With the ignition switch in ON position, the SRS warning light
does not light up.
• DTC is not displayed.
• SRS warning light is always lit up at the time of DTC check pro-
cedure.
• DTC is displayed without Tc and El terminal connection.
Suspect Area
•SRS warning light circuit
•Tc terminal circuit
Seepage
DM74
DI-479
DI-339DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC B0100/13 Short in D Squib Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly, spiral cable and steering wheel pad.It causes the airbag to deploy when the airbag deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0100/13 is recorded when a short is detected in the D squib circuit.
DTC No.
B0100/13
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit between D+ wire harness and D- wire har-
ness of squib
• D squib malfunction
•Spiral cable malfunction
• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Steering wheel pad (D squib)
• Spiral cable
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Airbag Sensor Assembly
D Squib
1 Y-B14
13
SpiralCable
D+
D-
H01451
DI-340DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check D squib circuit.
PREPARATION:Release the airbag activation prevention mechanism of theconnector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) between theairbag sensor assembly and the spiral cable(See page DI-326).CHECK:For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the spiralcable and the steering wheel pad, measure the resistance be-tween D+ and D-.OK:
Resistance: 1 Ma or Higher
Go to step 5.
OK
DI-341DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
cflfflD Squib
ON
DLC3
CG TcH01002AB0119H10600 FI1390
OK
DTCB0100/13
H10598
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0100/13 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code 80100/13 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-342DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check D squib.
D Squib
ON
DLC3 DTCB0100/13
HO1003AB0119H106OO F11380
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the steering wheel pad connector.(d) Connect negative {-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(c) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(d) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(e) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(f) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0100/13 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0100/13 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace steering wheel pad.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-343DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check spiral cable.
H02195
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the connector between the airbag sensor as-
sembly and the spiral cable.(b) Release the airbag activation prevention mechanism of
the spiral cable connector on the airbag sensor assemblyside (See page DI-326).
CHECK:For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the spiralcable and the steering wheel pad, measure the resistance be-tween D+ and D-.OK:
Resistance: 1 M& or Higher
Repair or replace spiral cable.
6 Check harness between airbag sensor assembly and spiral cable.
H10601
PREPARATION:Release the airbag activation prevention mechanism of theconnector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) between theairbag sensor assembly and the spiral cable(See page DI-326).CHECK:For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the airbagsensor assembly and the spiral cable, measure the resistancebetween D+ and D-.OK:
Resistance: 1 MQ or Higher
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween airbag sensor assembly and spiral cable.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-344
DI6P4-O1
DTC B0101/14 Open in D Squib Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly, spiral cable and steering wheel pad.It causes the airbag to deploy when the airbag deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0101/14 is recorded when an open is detected in the D squib circuit.
DTC No.
B0101/14
DTC Detecting Condition
• Open circuit in D+ wire harness or D- wire harness ofsquib
• D squib malfunction• Spiral cable malfunction• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Steering wheel pad (D squib)• Spiral cable•Airbag sensor assembly• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-339.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check D squib circuit.
CHECK:For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the spiralcable and the steering wheel pad, measure the resistance be-tween D+ and D-.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 Q
Go to step 5.
OK
DI-345DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
D Squib
DLC3
TcH01002H02144AB0119H1Q600 WOP044
DTCB0101/14
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect D+ and D- of the connector
(on the spiral cable side) between the spiral cable and thesteering wheel pad.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0101 /14 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0101/14 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
OK
Dl-346DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check D squib.
D Squib
cflH
ON
DLC3
CG TcH01003AB0119H10600 W02044
OK
DTCB0101/14
H10603
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the steering wheel pad connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0101 /14 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0101/14 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace steering wheel pad.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-347DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check spiral cable.
H02195
PREPARATION:Disconnect the connector between the airbag sensor assemblyand the spiral cable.CHECK:For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the spiralcable and the steering wheel pad, measure the resistance be-tween D+ and D-.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 Q.
Repair or replace spiral cable.
OK
Check harness between airbag sensor assembly and spiral cable.
CflfflD Squib
H01004H02142 H10604
CHECK:For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the airbagsensor assembly and the spiral cable, measure the resistancebetween D+ and D-.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 £>
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween airbag sensor assembly and spiral cable.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-348
W6P5-01
DTC B01 02/11 Short in D Squib Circuit (to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly, spiral cable and steering wheel pad.It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0102/11 is recorded when a ground short is detected in the D squib circuit.
DTC No.
B01 02/11
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in D squib wire harness (to ground)
• D squib malfunction
• Spiral cable malfunction
• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Steering wheel pad (D squib)
• Spiral cable
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-339.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
kJ2 Check D squib circuit.
j-r-, ra_ Spiral-U H- Cable
D Pni ilh
nlt>
yss&
1 AirbagIj 1 ) — [\ J Sensor
"I Assembly
DHOJ ^^- D+
H02198
CHECK:For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the spiralcable and the steering wheel pad, measure the resistance be-tween D+ and body ground.OK:
Resistance: 1 MQ. or Higher
NG \ Go to step 5.
DI-349DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
DLC3
TcH01002H02144AB0118H10600W02042
DTCB0102/11
H10605
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect D+ and D- of the connector
(on the spiral cable side) between the spiral cable and thesteering wheel pad.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0102/11 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0102/11 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
OK
DI-350DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
4 Check D squib.
— v «— . ,
Airbagj-fT]- bpirai -n-| — "I sensor- U- Cable -LU-J Assembly
D Squih ]
\°N
®
DLC3 DTC B01 02/11
>^\iffi *=£>CG Tc
H01003AB0119H10600W02042 H10606
I I
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
and wait at least for 90 seconds,(c) Connect the steering wheel pad connector.(O) v_>onneci negative \ ) lerr unai CSLOIS 10 ins uanery, ano
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds,(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds,(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds,(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B01 02/11 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B01 02/1 1 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
NG \ Replace steering wheel pad.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-351DIAGNOSTICS SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check spiral cable.
H02200
OK
PREPARATION:Disconnect the connector between the airbag sensor assemblyand the spiral cable.CHECK:For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the steer-ing wheel pad and the spiral cable, measure the resistance be-tween D+ and body ground.OK:
Resistance: 1 Mfl or Higher
Repair or replace spiral cable.
Check harness between airbag sensor assembly and spiral cable.
<=QD:D Squib
H01004H0214S H10607
OK
CHECK:For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the spiralcable and the airbag sensor assembly, measure the resistancebetween D+ and body ground.OK:
Resistance: 1 M& or Higher
Repair or replace harness between airbag sen-sor assembly and spiral cable.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-352
DBPW1
DTC B0103/12 Short in D Squib Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly, spiral cable and steering wheel pad.It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0103/12 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the D squib circuit.
DTC No.
B0 103/1 2
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in D squib wire harness (to B+)• D squib malfunction• Spiral cable malfunction• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Steering wheel pad (D squib)• Spiral cable• Airbag sensor assembly• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-339.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check D squib circuit.
ON
cflfiD Squib
AB0119H01001H0214S
OK
CHECK:(a)
OK:
Turn ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between thespiral cable and the steering wheel pad, measure the volt-age between D+ and body ground.
Voltage: 0 V
Go to step 5.
DI-353DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
D Squib
DLC3 DTC B0103/12
CG TCH01002H02144AB0119H10600W02043 H10608
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect D+ and D- of the connector
(on the spiral cable side) between the spiral cable and thesteering wheel pad.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0103/12 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code 80103/12 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-354DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check D squib.
ON
DLC3DTCB0103/12
Tc
H01003AB0019H10600 W02043 H10609
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the steering wheel pad connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0103/12 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0103/12 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace steering wheel pad.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-355DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check spiral cable.
D
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect the connector between the airbag sensor as-
sembly and the spiral cable.CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn the ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between thespiral cable and the steering wheel pad, measure the volt-age between D+ and body ground.
Voltage: 0 V
Repair or replace spiral cable.
OK
6 Check harness between airbag sensor assembly and spiral cable.
0ON •_n r,- spiral _n «_ n i AirbaaCQ t cable U 1=0 ] S°r
blyU oQUID I
V
IDHCD
AB0119 _L \M/H01004 ~=~ ^~^H02146 H10610
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.(b) For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the
spiral cable and airbag sensor assembly, measure thevoltage between D+ and body ground.
OK:Voltage: 0 V
3 Repair or replace harness between airbag sen-sor assembly and spiral cable.
OK
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace ail SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-356DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
CWFT-OJ
DTC B01 05/53 Short in P Squib Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and front passenger airbag assembly.It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0105/53 is recorded when a short is detected in the P squib circuit.
DTC No.
B01 05/53
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in P squib wire harness
• P squib malfunction
•Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Front passenger airbag assembly (P squib)
•Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Airbag Sensor Assembly
P Squib
Y-R10
!*•• ^
C6
Y-G11C6
P+
P-
DI-357DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page 01-471).
Check P squib circuit.
R14286H02142
PREPARATION:Release the airbag activation prevention mechanism of theconnector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) between thefront passenger airbag assembly and the airbag sensor assem-bly (See page DI-326).CHECK:For the connector (on the front passenger airbag assemblyside) between the front passenger airbag assembly and the air-bag sensor assembly, measure the resistance between P+ andP-.OK:
Resistance: 1 M& or Higher
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween front passenger airbag assembly and air-bag sensor assembly.
OK
DI-358DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
P Squib
DTC B0105/53
CG Tc
H01023AB0119H10600 H01077
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0105/53 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0105/53 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-359DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check P squib.
ON
DLC3 DTCB0105/53
CG TcH01024AB0119H10600 H01077
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the front passenger airbag assembly connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOOK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.{b) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(c) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(d) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(e) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(f) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0105/53 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0105/53 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace front passenger airbag assembly.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-360DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DBP8-01
DTC B01 06/54 Open in P Squib Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and front passenger airbag assembly.It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0106/54 is recorded when an open is detected in the P squib circuit.
DTC No.
B01 06/54
DTC Detecting Condition
• Open circuit in P+ wire harness or P— wire harness of
squib
• P squib malfunction
• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Front passenger airbag assembly (P squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-356.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check P squib circuit.
P Squib
R14286HQ2142 H02251
CHECK:For the connector (on the front passenger airbag assemblyside) between the front passenger airbag assembly and the air-bag sensor assembly, measure the resistance between P+ andP-.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 ft
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween front passenger airbag assembly and air-bag sensor assembly.
OK
DI-361DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
DLC3 Code B0106/54
Tc
H01023H02144 AB0119H10600 H01078
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect P+ and P- of the connector
(on the front passenger airbag assembly side) betweenthe front passenger airbag assembly and the airbag sen-sor assembly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0106/54 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0106/54 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-362DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check P squib.
P Squib
ON
HOI 024AB0119H10600 H01078
OK
DTCB0106/54
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the front passenger airbag assembly connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0106/54 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0106/54 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace front passenger airbag assembly.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-363
««M>,
DTC B01 07/51 Short in P Squib Circuit (to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and front passenger airbag assembly.It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0107/51 is recorded when ground short is detected in the P squib circuit.
DTC No.
B01 07/51
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in P squib wire harness (to ground)
• P squib malfunction
•Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Front passenger airbag assembly (P squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-356.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check P squib circuit.
P Squib
H01227H02145
CHECK:For the connector (on the front passenger airbag assemblyside) between the front passenger airbag assembly and the air-bag sensor assembly, measure the resistance between P+ andbody ground.OK:
Resistance: 1 M£l or Higher
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween front passenger airbag assembly and air-bag sensor assembly.
DI-364DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
P Squib
DLC3
CGH01023H021+4 AB0118H10600H01075
OK
ON
Code B0107/51
JlMX
H10615
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect P+ and P- of the connector
(on the front passenger airbag assembly side) betweenthe front passenger airbag assembly and the airbag sen-sor assembly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0107/51 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0107/51 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-365DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check P squib.
ON
0DLC3
H01024AB0119H10600 H01075
OK
DTC B0107/51
H10616
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the front passenger airbag assembly connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0107/51 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0107/51 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace front passenger airbag assembly.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-366DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
CH6PA-OI
DTC B01 08/52 Short in P Squib Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and front passenger airbag assembly.It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0108/52 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the P squib circuit.
DTC No.
B01 08/52
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in P squib wire harness (to B+)
• P squib malfunction• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Front passenger airbag assembly (P squib)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-356.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check P squib circuit.
H04524
CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn the ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the front passenger airbag assem-bly side) between the front passenger airbag assemblyand the airbag sensor assembly, measure the voltage be-tween the P+ and body ground.
Voltage: 0 V
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween front passenger airbag assembly and air-bag sensor assembly.
DI-367DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
P Squib
ON
DLC3 DTC B0108/52
H01023H02144 AB0118H10600 H01076
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect P+ and P- of the connector
(on the front passenger airbag assembly side) betweenthe front passenger airbag assembly and the airbag sen-sor assembly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0108/52 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0108/52 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-368DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check P squib.
DTCB0108/52
H01024AB0119H10600 H01076 H1Q618
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the front passenger airbag assembly connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0108/52 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0108/52 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace front passenger airbag assembly.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-369DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DI6PB-01
DTC B0110/43 Short in Side Squib (RH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe side squib (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and side airbag assembly (RH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0110/43 is recorded when a short is detected in the side squib (RH) circuit.
DTC No.
B01 10/43
DTC Detecting Condition
•Short circuit between FR+ wire harness and FR- wire
harness of squib
•Side squib (RH) malfunction
• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
•Side airbag assembly (RH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Airbag Sensor Assembly
Side Squib (RH)
Y-R2
C8
Y-G1
C8
SFR+
SFR-
DI-370DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check side squib (RH) circuit.
Squib (RH)
H12946
PREPARATION:Release the airbag activation prevention mechanism of theconnector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) between theairbag sensor assembly and the side airbag assembly (RH)(See page DI-326).CHECK:For the connector (on the side airbag assembly side) betweenthe side airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag sensor assembly,measure the resistance between FR+ and FR-.OK:
Resistance: 1 M£> or Higher
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag assembly (RH) and airbagsensor assembly.
OK
DI-371DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Squib (RH)
ON
DLC3 DTCB0110/43
H01020 AB0119H10600 H01069 H12017
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch or ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0110/43 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0110/43 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-372DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check side squib (RH).
Squib (RH)
ON
DTCB0110/43
H01020 AB0119H10600 H01069 H12018
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the side airbag assembly (RH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOOK, and wait at least for 20
second.(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(c) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(d) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(e) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(f) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0110/43 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0110/43 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace side airbag assembly (RH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-373
DI6PG-01
DTC B0111/44 Open in Side Squib (RH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe side squib (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and side airbag assembly (RH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0111/44 is recorded when an open is detected in the side squib (RH) circuit.
DTC No.
B01 11/44
DTC Detecting Condition
•Open circuit in FR+ wire harness or FR- wire harness of
squib• Side squib (RH) malfunction•Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Side airbag assembly (RH)
• Airbag sensor assembly• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-369.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
2 Check front side squib (RH) circuit.
J AirbagSquib (RH) I Sensor
CO B=TJ 1 *""**
Si
H01019 V — XH09668 H12947
CHECK:For the connector (on the front side airbag assembly side) be-tween the front side airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag sen-sor assembly, measure the resistance between FR+ and FR-.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 Q,
NG\ Repair or replace harness or connector be-y tween side airbag assembly (RH) and airbag/ sensor assembly.
OK
DI-374DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Squib (RH)
FR-
J AirbagI Sensor
DLC3
H01020H09671 AB0119H10600 H01070
Assembly
ON
DTCB0111/44
H13039
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect FR+ and FR- of the con-
nector (on the side airbag assembly side) between theside airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag sensor assem-bly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0111/44 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0111 /44 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
OK
DI-375DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check side squib (RH).
Squib (RH)
OTJ
AirbagSensorAssembly
ON
DLC3 DTCB0111/44
=>_iuiiMinn_
H01021 AB0119H10600 H01070
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the front side airbag assembly (RH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to or ON, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0111/44 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0111 /44 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace side airbag assembly (RH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-376DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DTC B0112/41 Short in Side Squib (RH) Circuit(to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe side squib (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and side airbag assembly (RH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0112/41 is recorded when ground short is detected in the side squib (RH) circuit.
DTC No.
B01 12/41
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in side squib (RH) wire harness (to ground)
•Side squib (RH) malfunction
•Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
•Side airbag assembly (RH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-369.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DM71).
Check side squib (RH) circuit.
Squib (RH)
H01019H09668 H12949
CHECK:For the connector (on the side airbag assembly side) betweenthe side airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag sensor assembly,measure the resistance between FR+ and body ground.OK:
Resistance: 1 M& or Higher
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag assembly (RH) and airbagsensor assembly.
OK
DI-377DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Squib (RH)
cOi=]
FR-
ON
FR+
DLC3 DTCB0112/41
H01020H09671 A80119H10600 H01070 H13040
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect FR+ and FR- of the con-
nector (on the side airbag assembly side) between theside airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag sensor assem-bly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0112/41 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0112/41 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-378DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check side squib (RH).
Squib (RH)
DLC3
H01021 AB0119H10600 H01070
OK
ON
DTCB0112/41
H12022
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the side airbag assembly (RH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0112/41 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0112/41 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace side airbag assembly (RH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-379DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DifiPE-fti
DTC B01 13/42 Short in Side Squib (RH) Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe side squib (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and side airbag assembly (RH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0113/42 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the side squib (RH) circuit.
DTC No.
B01 13/42
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in side squib (RH) wire harness (to B+)
• Side squib (RH) malfunction
• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Side airbag assembly (RH)
•Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-369.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-326).
Check side squib (RH) circuit.
Squib (RH)
cDB=fJ
AB0119H01019H09670 H12951
CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn the ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side)between the side airbag assembly (RH) and the airbagsensor assembly, measure the voltage between FR+ andbody ground.
Voltage: 0 V
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag assembly (RH) and airbagsensor assembly.
OK
DI-380DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Squib (RH)
FR-
=! AirbagJ Sensor
ra — "I AssemblyH — J
FR+
DLC3
H01020H09671 AB0119H10600 H01068
OK
ON
DTCB0113/42
H13041
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect FR+ and FR- of the con-
nector (on the front side airbag assembly side) betweenthe front side airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag sensorassembly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0113/42 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0113/42 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-381DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check side squib (RH).
Squib (RH)
cfflz]
ON
DLC3 DTC B0113/42
H01021 AB0119H10600 H0106B H12024
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the front side airbag assembly (RH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page Dl-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page Dl-326).OK:
DTC B0113/42 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0113/42 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace side airbag assembly (RH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-382
OWPF-Ot
DTC B01 15/47 Short in Side Squib (LH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe side squib (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and side airbag assembly (LH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0115/47 is recorded when a short is detected in the side squib (LH) circuit.
DTC No.
80115/47
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit between FL+ wire harness and FL- wire har-
ness of squib• Side squib (LH) malfunction•Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
•Side airbag assembly (LH)• Airbag sensor assembly•Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Airbag Sensor Assembly
Side Squib (LH)
Y-R
Y-G
SFL+
SFL-
H01454
DI-383DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check side squib (LH) circuit.
<=Oi=QSquib (LH)
H01019H09668
PREPARATION:Release the airbag activation prevention mechanism of theconnector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) between theairbag sensor assembly and the side airbag assembly (LH)(See page DI-326).CHECK:For the connector (on the side airbag assembly side) betweenthe side airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly,measure the resistance between FL+ and FL-.OK;
Resistance: 1 MQ or Higher
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag assembly (LH) and airbagsensor assembly.
OK
DI-384DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Squib (LH)
ON
DLC3 DTC B0115/47
TcH01017 AB0119H10600 H01073 H12025
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch or ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0115/47 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0115/47 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-385DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check side squib (LH).
Squib (LH)
DLC3
H01018 AB0119H10600 H01073
OK
ON
DTC B0115/47
H12026
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the front side airbag assembly (LH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOOK, and wait at least for 20
second.(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(c) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(d) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(e) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(f) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0115/47 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0115/47 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace side airbag assembly (LH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-386
DKPG-OI
DTC B0116/48 Open in Side Squib (LH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe side squib (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and side airbag assembly (LH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0116/48 is recorded when an open is detected in the side squib (LH) circuit.
DTC No.
B0 11 6/48
DTC Detecting Condition
• Open circuit in FL+ wire harness or FL- wire harness ofsquib
• Side squib (LH) malfunction
•Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Side airbag assembly (LH)• Airbag sensor assembly• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-382.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection. (See step 1 on page DI-471)
2 Check side squib (LH) circuit.
^— LI Is— U JAirbaqSquib (LH) ] Sejr
n -i Assembly
V
H01019 > fH09668 H12954
CHECK:For the connector (on the front side airbag assembly side) be-tween the front side airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sen-sor assembly, measure the resistance between FL+ and FL-.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 Q.
NG\ Repair or replace harness or connector be-\ tween side airbag assembly (LH) and airbag/ sensor assembly.
OK
DI-387DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Squib (LH)
FL-ON
FL+
DLC3 DTC B0116/48
CG TcH01017HO9671 AB0119H10600 H01074 H13042
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect FL+ and FL- of the connec-
tor (on the side airbag assembly side) between the sideairbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0116/48 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0116/48 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace side airbag sensor assembly.
OK
DI-388DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check side squib (LH).
Squib (LH)
DLC3
ON
DTCB0116/48
H01018 AB0119H10600 HOI 074 H12028
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the side airbag assembly (LH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0116/48 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0116/48 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace side airbag assembly (LH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-389DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DTC B0117/45 Short in Side Squib (LH) Circuit(to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe side squib (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and side airbag assembly (LH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0117/45 is recorded when ground short is detected in the side squib (LH) circuit.
DTC No.
B01 17/45
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in side squib (LH) wire harness (to ground)
• Side squib (LH) malfunction
• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Side airbag assembly (LH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-382.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
2 Check
Squib (LH)
^
H01016 =H09669
side squib (LH) circuit.
— U J AirbagT SensorT Assembly
Nl -•M
B^g iJHI 2956
CHECK:For the connector (on the side airbag assembly side) betweenthe side airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly,measure the resistance between FL+ and body ground.OK:
Resistance: 1 MQ. or Higher
NG\ Repair or replace harness or connector be-) tween side airbag assembly (LH) and airbag/ sensor assembly.
OK
DI-390DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Squib (LH)
FL-
DLC3 DTCB0117/45
HO1017H09671 AB0119H10600 H01071 H13043
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect FL+ and FL- of the connec-
tor (on the side airbag assembly side) between the sideairbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK;
DTC B0117/45 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0117/45 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-391DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check side squib (LH).
Squib (LH)
DLC3
H01018 AB0119H10600 H01071
ON
DTCB0117/45
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the front side airbag assembly (LH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0117/45 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0117/45 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace front side airbag assembly (LH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-392
CH6PW11
DTC B0118/46 Short in Side Squib (LH) Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe side squib (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and side airbag assembly (LH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0118/46 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the side squib (LH) circuit.
DTC No.
B01 18/46
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in side squib (LH) wire harness (to B+)•Side squib (LH) malfunction• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Side airbag assembly (LH)• Airbag sensor assembly• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-382.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check side squib (LH) circuit.
Squib (LH)
AB0119HOI 016HO9670 H12958
CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn the ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the side airbag assembly side) be-tween the side airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sen-sor assembly, measure the voltage between FL+ andbody ground.
Voltage: 0 V
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag assembly (LH) and airbagsensor assembly.
OK
DI-393DIAGNOSTICS SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Squib (LH)
FL-
DLC3 DTCB0118/46
CG TcH01017H09671 AB0119H10600 H01072 H13044
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect FL+ and FL- of the connec-
tor (on the side airbag assembly side) between the sideairbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0118/46 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0118/46 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-394DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check side squib (LH).
Squib (LH)
DLC3
H01018 AB0119H10600 H01072
OK
ON
DTCB0118/46
H13118
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the side airbag assembly (LH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0118/46 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0118/46 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace side airbag assembly (LH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-395DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
D16PJ-01
DTC B01 30/63 Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe P/T squib (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt pretensioner (RH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0130/63 is recorded when a short is detected in the P/T squib (RH) circuit.
DTC No.
B0130/63
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit between PR+ wire harness and PR- wire
harness of squib• P/T squib (RH) malfunction
•Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Seat belt pretensioner (RH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
•Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Airbag Sensor Assembly
P/T Squib (RH)
Y-B .5C8
6C8
PR+
PR-
H01454
DI-396DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
2 Check P/T squib (RH) circuit.
P/T Squib (RH)
*°\PR+ $
/
1
I (+)/H01019 \H02141
jAirbag"jSensor
1 -[Assembly
v&
Jn)
PR-™
H .
H02203
PREPARATION:Release the airbag activation prevention mechanism of theconnector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) between theairbag sensor assembly and the seat belt pretensioner (RH)(See page DI-326)CHECK:For the connector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) betweenthe seat belt pretensioner (RH) and the airbag sensor assem-bly, measure the resistance between PR+ and PR-.OK:
Resistance: 1 MQ. or Higher
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween seat belt pretensioner (RH) and airbagsensor assembly.
OK
DI-397DIAGNOSTICS SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
P/T Squib (RH)
<=DD=Q
ON
DLC3 DTC B0130/63
CG Tc
H01020AS0119H10600 H01082
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page Dl-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page Dl-326).OK:
DTC B0130/63 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0130/63 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
OK
DI-398DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check PfT squib (RH).
P/T Squib (RH)
cot]ON
DLC3 DTCB0130/63
HOI021AB0119H10600 H01082
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (RH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOOK, and wait at least for 20
second.(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(c) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(d) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(e) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(f) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0130/63 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0130/63 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace seat belt pretensioner (RH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-399DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
WPK-Ot
DTC B01 31/64 Open in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe P/T squib circuit (RH) consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt pretensioner (RH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0131/64 is recorded when an open is detected in the P/T squib (RH) circuit.
DTC No.
B0131/64
DTC Detecting Condition
• Open circuit in PR+ wire harness or PR- wire harness of
squib
• P/T squib (RH) malfunction
• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Seat belt pretensioner (RH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
•Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-395.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
2 Check P/T squib (RH) circuit.
J AirbagP/T Squib (RH) ] Sensor
<~f] 0 — Tl 1 Assemb|y
PR+Jr^stPR~
1 LJ 1H01019 \~ "/H02141 ^-^ H02205
CHECK:For the connector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) betweenthe seat belt pretensioner (RH) and the airbag sensor assem-bly, measure the resistance between PR+ and PR-.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 D
NG\ Repair or replace harness or connector be-\ tween seat belt pretensioner (RH) and airbag
/ sensor assembly.
OK
DM00DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
P/T Squib (RH)
PR+
DLC3
ON
DTC B0131/64
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect PR+ and PR- of the con-
nector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between theseat belt pretensioner (RH) and the airbag sensor assem-bly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0131/64 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0131/64 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
Dk-401DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check P;T squib (RH).
PfT Squib (RH)AirbagSensorAssembly
ON
DLC3 DTCB0131/64
TcH01021AB0119H10600H01083 H10622
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (RH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0131/64 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0131/64 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace seat belt pretensioner (RH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
01-402DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DTC B0132/61 Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit(to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe P/T squib (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt pretensioner (RH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0132/61 is recorded when a ground short is detected in the P/T squib (RH) circuit.
DTC No.
B01 32/61
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in P/T squib (RH) wire harness (to ground)
• P/T squib (RH) malfunction
• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Seat belt pretensioner (RH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-395.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check P/T squib (RH) circuit.
P/T Squib (RH)
H01019H08392 H08393
CHECK:For the connector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) betweenthe seat belt pretensioner (RH) and the airbag sensor assem-bly, measure the resistance between PR+ and body ground.OK:
Resistance: 1 MQ or Higher
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween seat belt pretensioner (RH) and airbagsensor assembly.
OK
DI-403DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
P/T Squib (RH)
PR+
DLC3 DTC B0132/61
H01020H02139AB0118AB0119H10600 H01079 H10623
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect PR+ and PR- of the con-
nector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between theseat belt pretensioner (RH) and the airbag sensor assem-bly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0132/61 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0132/61 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
NG Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-404DIAGNOSTICS SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check P/T squib (RH).
P/T Squib (RH)
ON
DLC3 DTC B0132/61
Tc
AB0119mnfioo H01079 H10624
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (RH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0132/61 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0132/61 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace seat belt pretensioner (RH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-405
CH6PM-01
DTC B01 33/62 Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe P/T squib (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt pretensioner (RH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0133/62 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the P/T squib (RH) circuit.
DTC No.
B01 33/62
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in seat belt pretensioner (RH) wire harness(to B+)
• P/T squib (RH) malfunction• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Seat belt pretensioner (RH)• Airbag sensor assembly• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-395.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check P/T squib (RH) circuit.
ON
P/T Squib (RH)
H01019AB0119H08394 H08268
CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn the ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) be-tween the seat belt pretensioner (RH) and the airbag sen-sor assembly, measure the voltage between PR+ andbody ground.
Voltage: 0 V
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween seat belt pretensioner (RH) and airbagsensor assembly.
OK
DI-406DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
P/T Squib (RH)
tOt=]
PR+
-» <-
ON
DLC3 DTCB0133/62
H01020H02139 AB0119H10600 H010B1 H10625
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect PR+ and PR— of the con-
nector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between theseat belt pretensioner (RH) and the airbag sensor assem-bly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0133/62 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0133/62 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DM07DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check P/T squib (RH).
P/T Squib (RH)
ON
DLC3 DTC B0133/62
TcH01021AB0119H10600 H01081 H10626
PREPARATION:(a) Turn ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (RH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0133/62 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0133/62 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace seat belt pretensioner (RH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-408
EB6PCMH
DTC B01 35/73 Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe P/T squib (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt pretensioner (LH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0135/73 is recorded when a short is detected in the P/T squib (LH) circuit.
DTC No.
B0 135/73
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit between PL+ wire harness and PL- wire har-ness of squib
• P/T squib (LH) malfunction• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Seat belt pretensioner (LH)
• Airbag sensor assembly• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Airbag Sensor Assembly
P/T Squib (LH)
Y-B PL+
PL-
DM09DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check P/T squib (LH) circuit.
P/T Squib (LH)
H01016H02141
PREPARATION:Release the airbag activation prevention mechanism of theconnector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) between theairbag sensor assembly and the seat belt pretensioner (LH)(See page DI-326).CHECK:For the connector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) betweenthe seat belt pretensioner (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly,measure the resistance between PL+ and PL-.OK:
Resistance: 1 M& or Higher
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween seat belt pretensioner (LH) and airbagsensor assembly.
OK
DL-410DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
P/T Squib (LH) —»
ON
0
DTC B0135/73
CG Tc
H01017AB0119H1060QH01086 H10627
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Connect negative (-} terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0135/73 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0135/73 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
OK
DI-411DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check P/T squib (LH).
P/T Squib (LH)
ON
DLC3 DTCB0135/73
Tc
H01018AB0119H10600 H01086 H10628
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (LH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOOK, and wait at least for 20
second.(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(c) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(d) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(e) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(f) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0135/73 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0135/73 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace seat belt pretensioner (LH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-412
DBPO-Ot
DTC B01 36/74 Open in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe P/T squib circuit (LH) consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt pretensioner (LH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0136/74 is recorded when an open is detected in the P/T squib (LH) circuit.
DTC No.
B01 36/74
DTC Detecting Condition
• Open circuit in PL+ wire harness or PL- wire harness of
squib
• P/T squib (LH) malfunction
• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Seat belt pretensioner (LH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-408.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
2 C
C
P/T Squib
H01016
heck P/T squib (LH) circuit.
(LH)
^
|
J Airbag1 Sensor-i Assembly
14 pL-
1\
H02213
CHECK:For the connector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) betweenthe seat belt pretensioner (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly,measure the resistance between PL+ and PL-.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 £
NG\ Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween seat belt pretensioner (LH) and airbagsensor assembly.
OK
DI-413DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
P/T Squib (LH)
PL+ON
DLC3DTC B0136/74
CG TcH01017H02139AB0119H10600 H01087
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect PL+ and PL- of the connec-
tor (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between the seatbelt pretensioner (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0136/74 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0136/74 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
OK
D1-414DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
4 Check P/T squib (LH).
P/T Squib (LH)
ON
DLC3 DTCB0136/74
H01018AB0119H10600 H01087 H10630
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (LH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0136/74 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0136/74 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace seat belt pretensioner (LH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-415DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DTC B0137/71 Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit(to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe P/T squib (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt pretensioner (LH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0137/71 is recorded when a ground short is detected in the P/T squib (LH) circuit.
DTC No.
B01 37/71
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in P/T squib (LH) wire harness (to ground)
• P/T squib (LH) malfunction
•Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Seat belt pretensioner (LH)
• Airbag sensor assembly• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page Dl-408.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
2 Che
P/T Squib (U-
cO!
rr-
H01016 - r
ck P/T squib (LH) circuit.
<)
M l-1 Airbag| Sensor
- =! Assembly
\l
X"""X PI -i. ' 'JQ ) Y$-£i/V_J(+) ^4^
! «
CHECK:For the connector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) betweenthe seat belt pretensioner (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly,measure the resistance between PL+ and body ground.OK:
Res
NG\
istance: 1 M& or Higher
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween seat belt pretensioner (LH) and airbagsensor assemblv.
OK
DI-416DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
P/T Squib (LH)
PL+ PL-ON
DLC3DTCB0137/71
TcH01017H02139A80119H10600 H01084 H10631
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect PL+ and PL- of the connec-
tor (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between the seatbelt pretensioner (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0137/71 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0137/71 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
OK
DI-417DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check P/T squib (LH).
<=OJ=DP/T Squib (LH)
ON
DLC3 DTCB0137/71
Tc
H01018AB0118 AB0119H10600 H01084 H10632
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (LH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0137/71 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0137/71 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace seat belt pretensioner (LH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-418
DKPO-Ol
DTC B01 38/72 Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe P/T squib (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt pretensioner (LH).It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B0138/72 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the P/T squib (LH) circuit.
DTC No.
B01 38/72
DTC Detecting Condition
• Short circuit in seat belt pretensioner (LH) wire harness
(to B+)
• P/T squib (LH) malfunction
• Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Seat belt pretensioner (LH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-408.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check P/T squib (LH) circuit.
P/T Squib (LH)
AB0119H01016H08334_
CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn the ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) be-tween the seat belt pretensioner (LH) and the airbag sen-sor assembly, measure the voltage between PL+ andbody ground.
Voltage: 0 V
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween seat belt pretensioner (LH) and airbagsensor assembly.
OK
DI-419DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
P/T Squib (LH)
DLC3 DTCB0138/72
H01017H02139 AB0119H10600 H01085 H10633
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(b) Using a service wire, connect PL+ and PL- of the connec-
tor (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between the seatbelt pretensioner (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly.
(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0138/72 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0138/72 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-420DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check P/T squib (LH).
P/T Squib (LH)
ON
DTC B0138/72
H01018AB0119H10600 H01085 H10634
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (LH) connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B0138/72 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B0138/72 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace seat belt pretensioner (LH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not bedetected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.
DI-421DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DttPR-01
DTC B1 100/31 Airbag Sensor Assembly Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe airbag sensor assembly consists of a airbag sensor, safing sensor, drive circuit, diagnosis circuit andignition control, etc.It receives signals from the airbag sensor, judges whether or not the SRS must be activated, and detectsdiagnosis system malfunction.DTC B1100/31 is recorded when occurrence of a malfunction in the airbag sensor assembly is detected.
DTC No.
B11 00/31
DTC Detecting Condition
•Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
Trouble Area
• Airbag sensor assembly
INSPECTION PROCEDUREHINT:When a malfunction code other than code B1100/31 is displayed at the same time, first repair the malfunctionindicated by the malfunction code other than code B1100/31.
1 Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check voltage at IG1 and IG2 of airbag sensor assembly.
Airbag Sensor Assembly
AB0119H01298 H01299
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.(b) Measure the voltage between body ground and each of
terminals IG1 and IG2 of the airbag sensor assembly con-nector.
OK:Voltage: 10-14V
Check that an abnormality occurs on the batteryand charging system.
OK
DI-422DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Is DTC B1100/31 output again?
DLC3
CG Tc
AB0119H10600 FI1394
DTC B1100/31
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
PREPARATION:Clear the DTC (See step 5 on page DI-326).CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(c) Repeat operation in step (a) and (b) at least 5 times.(d) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).HINT:Codes other than code B1100/31 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Using simulation method, reproduce malfunc-tion symptoms (See page IN-20).
DM>23DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DKPS-OI
DTC B1 140/32 Side Airbag Sensor Assembly (RH)Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe side airbag sensor assembly (RH) consists of the sating sensor, diagnosis circuit and lateral decelera-tion sensor, etc.It receives signals from the lateral deceleration sensor, judges whether or not the SRS must be activated,and detects diagnosis system malfunction.DTC B1140/32 is recorded when occurrence of a malfunction in the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) isdetected.
DTC No.
B1 140/32
DTC Detecting Condition
• Side airbag sensor assembly (RH) malfunction
Trouble Area
• Side airbag sensor assembly (RH)
• Wire harness
• Airbag sensor assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
Side Airbag Sensor Assembly (RH)
ESR
FSR
SSR+
VUPR
GR
LG
L-Y
Airbag Sensor Assembly
7C8
10
12C8
ESR
FSR
SSR+
VUPR
H01450
DI-424DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Is DTC B1140/32 out put?
ON
DLC3DTC B1140/32
CG Tc
AB0119H10600 H09528
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).HINT:Codes other than code B1140/32 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
The malfunctioning part can now be considerednormal. To make sure of this, use the simulationmethod to check.
NO
Is connector of side airbag sensor assembly (RH) properly connected?
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on DI-471).
DI-425DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check wire harness.
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (RH)
SSR+Airbag SensorAssembly
H01015HOI 053 H01036
ESR
H01160
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) con-
nector.(b) Using a service wire, connect SSR+ and ESR of the con-
nector (on the side airbag sensor assembly side) betweenthe side airbag sensor assembly (RH) and airbag sensorassembly.
CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) and the airbagsensor assembly, measure the resistance between SSR+ andESR.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 &
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag sensor assembly (RH) andairbag sensor assembly.
OK
DI-426DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check wire harness.
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (RH)
Airbag SensorVUPR / Assemb|y
QQD
H01161
PREPARATION:Using a service wire, connect VUPR and FSR of the connector(on the side airbag sensor assembly side) between the side air-bag sensor assembly (RH) and airbag sensor assembly.CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) and the airbagsensor assembly, measure the resistance between VUPR andFSR.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 &
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag sensor assembly (RH) andairbag sensor assembly.
OK
DI-427DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check wire harness (to ground).
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (RH)
Airbag Sensor Assembly
FSR
H01162
CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) and the airbagsensor assembly, measure the resistance between bodyground and each of SSR+, VUPR and FSR.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 £1
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag sensor assembly (RH) andairbag sensor assembly.
OK
Check wire harness (to B+).
ON
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (RH)
Airbag Sensor Assembly
AB0119H01013HOI039
FSR
CHECK:(a) Turn ignition switch to ON.(b) For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side)
between the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) and theairbag sensor assembly, measure the voltage betweenthe body ground and each of SSR+, VUPR, ESR andFSR.
OK:Voltage: 0 V
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag sensor assembly (RH) andairbag sensor assembly.
OK
DM28DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
8 Is DTC B1140/32 out put again?
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (RH)
DLC3
Tc
H01012AB0119H10600 H01065
ON
DTC B1140/32
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the side airbag sensor assem-
bly (RH).(b) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B1140/32 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B1140/32 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Go to step 9.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DM29DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
•bag Sensor>ly{RH}
[
J Airbag1 SensorT Assembly
—>
DLC3
ON
DTC B1140/32
Tc
H01012AB0119H10600 H01065 H13119
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Disconnect the side airbag sensor (RH) from the connec-
tor and connect the side airbag sensor (LH) to the con-nector.
(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B1140/32 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B1140/32 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
Dl-430DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
10 Check side airbag sensor assembly (RH).
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (RH)
~ AirbagJ Sensor1 Assembly
ON
DTCB1141/33
To
H01007AB0119H10600 HOI 066 H12033
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the side airbag sensor (RH) to the connector that
the side airbag sensor (LH) was connected to.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B1141/33 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B1141 /33 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace side airbag sensor assembly (RH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DM31DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(M6PT-01
DTC B1 141/33 Side Airbag Sensor Assembly (LH)Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe side airbag sensor assembly (LH) consists of the safing sensor, diagnosis circuit and lateral decelerationsensor, etc.It receives signals from the lateral deceleration sensor, judges whether or not the SRS must be activated,and detects diagnosis system malfunction.DTC B1141/33 is recorded when occurrence of a malfunction in the side airbag sensor assembly (LH) isdetected.
DTC No.
B1 141/33
DTC Detecting Condition
•Side airbag sensor assembly (LH) malfunction
Trouble Area
• Side airbag sensor assembly (LH)
• Wire harness
• Airbag sensor assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
Side Airbag Sensor Assembly (LH)
ESL
FSL
SSL+
VUPL
Airbag Sensor Assembly
4
3
2
1
GR-L• - - • • • -
LG-B1
L-W(
P-L t\
ESL
FSL
SSL+
VUPL
H01450
DI-432DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Is DTC B1141/33 out put?
ON
AB0119H10600 H09530
DTC B1141/33
JUUUUUL
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).HINT:Codes other than code B1141 /33 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
The malfunctioning part can now be considerednormal. To make sure of this, use the simulationmethod to check.
NO
Is connector of side airbag sensor assembly (LH) properly connected?
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
DI-433DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
4 Check wire harness.
<—>
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (LH)
V VSSL+
Airbag SensorAssembly
ESL
H01010H01058H01050
SSL+
H01166
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the side airbag sensor assembly (LH).(b) Using a service wire, connect SSL+ and ESL of the con-
nector (on the side airbag sensor assembly side) betweenthe side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and the airbag sen-sor assembly.
CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and the airbagsensor assembly, measure the resistance between SSL+ andESLOK:
Resistance: Below 1 &
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and air-bag sensor assembly.
OK
DI-434DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check wire harness.
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (LH)
Airbag SensorAssembly
nno
VUPL
PREPARATION:Using a service wire, connect VUPL and FSL of the connector(on the side airbag sensor assembly side) between the side air-bag sensor assembly (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly.CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and the airbagsensor assembly, measure the resistance between VUPL andFSL.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 &
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and air-bag sensor assembly.
DI-435DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check wire harness (to ground).
Side Airbag Sensor Assembly(LH)
Airbag Sensor Assembly
FSL
HOIDOSH01052 H01168
CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and the airbagsensor assembly, measure the resistance between bodyground and each of SSL+, VUPL and FSL.OK:
Resistance: 1 MQ or Higher
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and air-bag sensor assembly.
Check wire harness (to B+).
ON Side Airbag SensorAssembly (LH)
FS
CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side)between the side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and theairbag sensor assembly, measure the voltage betweenbody ground and each of SSL+, ESL, VUPL and FSL.
Voltage: 0 V
Repair or replace harness or connector be-tween side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and air-bag sensor assembly.
OK
DI-436DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
8 Is DTC B1141/33 out put again?
Side Airbag Sensor Assembly (LH)
[-» <—
1 Airbag
J Sensor1 Assembly
DLC3
H01007AB0119H10600 H01066
YES
ON
DTC B1141/33
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the connector to the side airbag sensor assem-
bly (LH).(b) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC 81141/33 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B1141 /33 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Go to step 9.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-437DIAGNOSTICS SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Side Airbag SensorAssembly (RH)
DLC3
H01007AB0119H10600 H01066
ON
DTC B1141/33
H12033
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Disconnect the side airbag sensor (LH) from the connec-
tor and connect the side airbag sensor (RH) to the con-nector.
(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, andwait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B1141/33 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B1141/33 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-438DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
10 Check side airbag sensor assembly (LH).
bag Sensely (LH)
[
rJ Airbag1 SensorT Assembly
DLC3
H01012AB0119H10600 H01065
OK
ON
DTC B1140/32
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the side airbag sensor (LH) to the connector that
the side airbag sensor (RH) was connected to.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory
(See step 5 on page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B1140/32 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B1140/32 may be output at this time, butthey are not relevant to this check.
Replace side airbag sensor assembly (LH).
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-439DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Dt6PLM51
DTC B1142/B1 143/34 Door Side Airbag Sensor (RH)Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe door side airbag sensor (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and door side airbag sensor(RH).For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B1142/B1143/34 is recorded when a malfunction is detected in the door side airbag sensor (RH) circuit.
DTC No.
B1142/B1143/34
DTC Detecting Condition
• Door side airbag sensor (RH) malfunction
Trouble Area
• Door side airbag sensor (RH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Instrument panel wire harness
• RH front door wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Door Side Airbag Sensor (RH)
DMR+
DMR-
W-G
R-w
Airbag Sensor Assembly
R-W
DMR+
H02750
DI-440DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
2 (
Door Side
/^~\°
H03355AB0119H12922
Dheck wire harness (to B+).
s Airbag Sensor
[D=at=aJLVAir
N As
J Airbag] Sensor-i Assembly
bag Sensorsembly
ODD/OvDMR-
fM^pi— DBfi—Soa^oBaDMR+QQQQDQDQQQuJJ
S r"H12934
CHECK:a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.(b) For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side)
between the door side airbag sensor (RH) and the airbagsensor assembly, measure the voltage between bodyground and each of DMR+ and DMR-.
OK:Voll
NG\
age: Below 1 V
Go to step 8.
3 C
Door Side >Sensor (Rl-
[
heck wire harness (to ground).
Mrbag1)
:D=tu=aiV
AA;
J Airbag] Sensor-| Assembly
rbag Sensorssembly N
QQDflpffl
/^^DMR-m!=LW DMR+
H03355H 12923
OK
-J^-S(+) (ji
^_
s"S"srsi\ "IDDQODDdDODlJ
" — 4(
H12835
CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the door side airbag sensor (RH) and the airbag sensorassembly, measure the resistance between body ground andeach of DMR+ and DMR-.OK:
Res
NG\
i stance: 1 MQ or Higher
Go to step 9.
DI-441DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
4 Check wire harness.
Door Side AirbagQdncrvr /RH
J Airbag[ D=m=i ] Sensor
-i Assembly
v^ 'Airbag SensorAssembly
/ V
QQDDMR- iaBi DMR+
s^*\ (iQQOflfflDQQQo )
H03355 V J1
CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the door side airbag sensor (RH) and the airbag sensorassembly, measure the resistance between DMR+ and DMR-.OK:
Resistance: 1 M& or Higher
NG \ Go to step 10.
Check wire harness.
Door Side AirbagSensor (RH)
Airbag SensorAssemblyDMR
H03353H03360 H12924
DMR+
H12937
PREPARATION:Using a service wire, connect DMR+ and DMR- of the connec-tor (on the door side airbag sensor (RH) side) between the air-bag sensor assembly and the door side airbag sensor (RH).CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the door side airbag sensor (RH) and the airbag sensorassembly, measure the resistance between DMR+ and DMR-.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 Q
Go to step 11.
OK
DI-442DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check door side airbag sensor (RH).
Door Side AirbagSensor (RH)
H04504H01062
CHECK:For the connector of the door side airbag sensor (RH), measurethe resistance between DMR+ and DMR-.OK:
Resistance: 300 -1500 Q
Replace door side airbag sensor (RH).
DI-443DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Door Side AirbagSensor (RH)
DLC3DTCB1142/B1143/34
CG Tc
H04502AB0119H10600 H0600T H12035
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the door side airbag sensor (RH) connector and
airbag sensor assembly connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC 34 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code 34 may be output at this time, but theyare not relevant to this check.
NG Replace airbag sensor assembly.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-444DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
8 Check RH front door wire harness (to B+).
Door Side AirbagSensor (RH) ,
< — > J AirbagE n n n n ~i *•0=10=0 J Sensor
/ -j Assembly
j «\ " "/---?N RH Front Door/ X?^ Wire HarnessW/ 7 ^Dr\ '
, " pH033S4 -i-AB0119H03364 H08348
OK
PREPARATION:Disconnect the RH front door wire harness connector on the air-bag sensor assembly side.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.(b) For the connector (on the RH front door wire harness
side) between the airbag sensor assembly and the RHfront door wire harness, measure the voltage betweenbody ground and each of DMR+ and DMR-.
OK:Voltage: Below 1 V
NG \ Repair or replace RH front door wire harness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and RH front door wireharness.
Check RH front door wire harness (to ground).
Door Side AirbagSensor (RH)
0=10=0
RH Front DoorWire Harness DMR+J .DMR-
H03354H03362 H08349
PREPARATION:Disconnect the RH front door wire harness connector on the air-bag sensor assembly side.CHECK:For the connector (on the RH front door wire harness side) be-tween the airbag sensor assembly and the RH front door wireharness, measure the resistance between body ground andeach of DMR+ and DMR-.QK:
Resistance: 1 M& or Higher
Repair or replace RH front door wire harness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and RH front door wireharness.
DI-445DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
10 Check RH front door wire harness.
Door Side AirbagSensor (RH)
RH Front Door WireHarness
OK
PREPARATION:Disconnect the RH front door wire harness connector on the air-bag sensor assembly side.CHECK:For the connector (on the RH front door wire harness side) be-tween the airbag sensor assembly and the RH front door wireharness, measure the resistance between DMR+ and DMR-.OK:
Resistance: 1 MQ, or Higher
Repair or replace RH front door wire harness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and RH front door wireharness.
DI-446DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
11 Check RH front door wire harness.
Door Side AirbagSensor (RH)
™ Front Door Wire
**
:-)H03352H03360H09S07
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the RH front door wire harness connector on
the airbag sensor assembly side.(b) Using a service wire, connect DMR+ and DMR- of the
connector (on the RH front door wire harness side) be-tween the RH front door wire harness and the door sideairbag sensor (RH).
CHECK:For the connector (on the RH front door wire harness side) be-tween the airbag sensor assembly and the RH front door wireharness, measure the resistance between DMR+ and DMR-.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 n
Repair or replace RH front door wire harness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and RH front door wireharness.
DI-447DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
W6PV-01
DTC B1144/B1 145/35 Door Side Airbag Sensor (LH)Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe door side airbag sensor (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and door side airbag sensor(LH).For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B1144/B1145/35 is recorded when malfunction is detected in the door side airbag sensor (LH) circuit.
DTC No.
B1144/B1145/35
DTC Detecting Condition
• Door side airbag sensor (LH) malfunction
Trouble Area
• Door side airbag sensor (LH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Instrument panel wire harness
• LH front door wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Door Side Airbag Sensor (LH)
DML+
DML-
W-L
R~Y
Airbag Sensor Assembly
R~Y 16fee
DML+
DML-
H02750
DI-448DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page 01-471).
Check wire harness (to B+).
Door Side Airbag Sensor(LH)
D=CD=i
ON
Airbag SensorAssembly
H03355AB0119H12925 H12938
CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn the ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side)between the door side airbag sensor (LH) and the airbagsensor assembly, measure the voltage between bodyground and each of DML+ and DML-.
Voltage: Below 1 V
Go to step 8.
3 Cr
Door Side ASensor (LH)
[
&
H03355H12926
|
OK
ieck wire harness (to ground).
irbag
D m PI\\l_|_l U
Air/ As
J Airbag1 Sensor-i Assembly
bag Sensorsembly x
QQQ
O' \ DML+pxV=V JB86
-j^W py
nsfl
tSmh nOOaDDDDDl)
-t\H12939
CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the door side airbag sensor (LH) and the airbag sensorassembly, measure the resistance between body ground andeach of DML+ and DML-.OK:
Res
NG\
istance: 1 Ma or Higher
Go to step 9.
DM49DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
4 Check wire harness.
Door Side AirbagQoncnr (\ H^
J Airbag[ D=JB=B ] Sensor
U -i Assembly
V • — -Airbag Sensor
i Assembly \
QQDDML+ EDQ^^GDQJ DML-
t+M\ (IllfiraDDO ) '
H033SS ' ) \_ . „ .H12927 H12940
CHECK:
tween the door side airbag sensor (LH) and the airbag sensorassembly, measure the resistance between DML+ and DML-.OK:
Resistance: 1 MQ or Higher
NG\ Go to step 10./
Check wire harness.
Door Side AirbagSensor (LH)
DML-
Airbag SensorAssembly
H03353H0336O H12927 H12941
PREPARATION:Using a service wire, connect DMU- and DML- of the connector(on the door side airbag sensor (LH) side) between the airbagsensor assembly and the door side airbag sensor (LH).CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the door side airbag sensor (LH) and the airbag sensorassembly, measure the resistance between DML+ and DML-.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 Q,
Go to step 11.
OK
DI-450DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check door side airbag sensor (LH).
Door Side AirbagSensor (LH)
DML+ DML-
H04SO4H01062 H08346
CHECK:For the connector of the door side airbag sensor (LH), measurethe resistance between DML+ and DML-.OK:
Resistance: 300 -1500 n
Replace door side airbag sensor (LH).
DI-451DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Door Side AirbagSensor(LH)
DLC3
ON
DTCB1144/B1145/35
Tc
H04502AB0119H1Q600 H08036 HI 2036
PREPARATION;(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the door side airbag sensor (LH) connector and
airbag sensor assembly connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC 35 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code 35 may be output at this time, but theyare not relevant to this check.
NG Replace airbag sensor assembly.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
Dl-452DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
8 Check LH front door wire harness (to B+).
Door Side Airbag
H08348
PREPARATION:Disconnect the LH front door wire harness connector on the air-bag sensor assembly side.CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn the ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the LH front door wire harness side)between the airbag sensor assembly and the LH frontdoor wire harness, measure the voltage between bodyground and each of DML+ and DML-.
Voltage: Below 1 V
Repair or replace LH front door wire harness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and LH front door wireharness.
Check LH front door wire harness (to ground).
Door Side AirbagSensor(LH)
LH Front DoorWire Harness DML+
H03354H03362
OK
DML-
H08349
PREPARATION:Disconnect the LH front door wire harness connector on the air-bag sensor assembly side.CHECK:For the connector (on the LH front door wire harness side) be-tween the airbag sensor assembly and the LH front door wireharness, measure the resistance between body ground andeach of DML+ and DML-.OK:
Resistance: 1 MH or Higher
Repair or replace LH front door wire harness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and LH front door wireharness.
DI-453DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
10 Check LH front door wire harness.
Door Side AirbagSensor (LH)
LH Front Door Wire
H08351
OK
PREPARATION:Disconnect the LH front door wire harness connector on the air-bag sensor assembly side.CHECK:For the connector (on the LH front door wire harness side) be-tween the airbag sensor assembly and the LH front door wireharness, measure the resistance between DML+ and DML-.OK:
Resistance: 1 MQ or Higher
Repair or replace LH front door wire harness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and LH front door wireharness.
DI-454DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
11 Check LH front door wire harness.
Door Side AirbagSensor(LH)
H Front Door Wire
H033S2H03360H09507 H08350
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the LH front door wire harness connector on
the airbag sensor assembly side.(b) Using a service wire, connect DML+ and DML- of the con-
nector (on the LH front door wire harness side) betweenthe LH front door wire harness and the door side airbagsensor (LH).
CHECK:For the connector (on the LH front door wire harness side) be-tween the airbag sensor assembly and the LH front door wireharness, measure the resistance between DML+ and DML-.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 &
Repair or replace LH front door wire harness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and LH front door wireharness.
DI-455DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
WPW-01
DTC B1156/B1157/15 Front Airbag Sensor (RH) Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe front airbag sensor (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and front airbag sensor (RH).For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B1156/B1157/15 is recorded when a malfunction is detected in the front airbag sensor (RH) circuit.
DTC No.
B1156/B1157/15
DTC Detecting Condition
• Front airbag sensor (RH) malfunction
Trouble Area
• Front airbag sensor (RH)
•Airbag sensor assembly
•Wire harness
• Engine room No. 2 wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Front Airbag Sensor (RH)
+SR
-SR
B-W
Airbag Sensor Assembly
B-W
BR-W
+SR
-SR
DI-456DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check wire harness (to B+).
D=[D=i
Front AirbagSensor (RH)
ON
Airbag SensorAssembly
-SR
CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn the ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side)between the front airbag sensor (RH) and the airbag sen-sor assembly, measure the voltage between body groundand each of +SR and -SR.
Voltage: Below 1 V
Go to step 8.
OK
Check wire harness (to ground).
n m nU=D]=@
Front AirbagSensor (RH) Airbag Sensor
Assembly
H03353H03361
-SRH03443
CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the front airbag sensor (RH) and the airbag sensor as-sembly, measure the resistance between body ground andeach of +SR and -SR.OK:
Resistance: 1 MQ or Higher
Go to step 9.
DI- 57DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
4 Check wire harness.
Front AirbagQr>n<*nr ^RH
J Airbag[ MM ] t— bly
JL JVAirbag Sensor
, Assembly ,
QQDf (+) Hgs +SR
/ x " \ \ toon czn 004I 12 j /1=D2SaS ahX. / UaOQQQDDD OB\)
[ H -- -""QRH03355 \ \H03356 H09518
CHECK:
tween the front airbag sensor (RH) and the airbag sensor as-sembly, measure the resistance between +SR and -SR.OK:
Resistance: 1 MH or Higher
\NG \ Go to step 10.
OK
Check wire harness.
Front AirbagSensor (RH)
H03353H09521H03356
Airbag SensorAssembly
PREPARATION:Using a service wire, connect +SR and -SR of the connector(on the front airbag sensor (RH) side) between the airbag sen-sor assembly and the front airbag sensor (RH).CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the front airbag sensor (RH) and the airbag sensor as-sembly, measure the resistance between +SR and •OK:
Resistance: Below 1 &
Go to step 11.
Dt-458DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check front airbag sensor (RH).
Front AirbagSensor (RH)
H08346
CHECK:For the connector of the front airbag sensor (RH), measure theresistance between +SR and -SR.OK:
Resistance: 300 -1500 &
Replace front airbag sensor (RH).
OK
DI-459DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Front AirbagSensor (RH)
ON
DLC3
Tc
H02757AB0119H10600H01063
OK
DTCB1156/B1157/15
H10638
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the front airbag sensor (RH) connector and air-
bag sensor assembly connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B1156/B1157/15 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B1156/B1157/15 may be output at thistime, but they are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-460DIAGNOSTICS SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
8 Check engine room No. 2 wire harness (to B+).
Front AirbagSensor (RH)
Engine Room No. 2 ^»Wire HarnecQ *AWire Harness
D -SR
H08348
PREPARATION:Disconnect the engine room No. 2 wire harness connector onthe airbag sensor assembly side.CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn the ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the RH front door wire harnessside) between the airbag sensor assembly and the en-gine room No. 2 wire harness, measure the voltage be-tween body ground and each of +SR and -SR.
Voltage: Below 1 V
Repair or replace engine room No. 2 wire har-ness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and engine room No.2 wire harness.
9
Front ASensor
EnginWirer
IH03354H03362
Check engine room No. 2 wire harness (to ground).
rbag(RH)
AirbagC n n n n "i <-.D=@ 0=0 ] Sensor
/ -i Assembly/ ^k — J
3 Room No. 2terness ,7- 9 — s
+SR/IS]I~SR
±)/5\i±) —
H08349
PREPARATION:Disconnect the engine room No. 2 wire harness connector onthe airbag sensor assembly side.CHECK:For the connector (on the engine room No. 2 wire harness side)between the airbag sensor assembly and the engine room No.2 wire harness, measure the resistance between body groundand each of +SR and -SR.OK:
Resistance: 1 MQ or Higher
NG \ Repair or replace engine room No. 2 wire har-/ ness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and engine room No.2 wire harness.
DI-461DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
10 Check engine room No. 2 wire harness.
Front AirbagSensor (RH)
Engine Room No. 2Wire Harness
OK
PREPARATION:Disconnect the engine room No. 2 wire harness connector onthe airbag sensor assembly side.CHECK:For the connector (on the engine room No. 2 wire harness side)between the airbag sensor assembly and the engine room No.2 wire harness, measure the resistance between +SR and -SR.OK:
Resistance: 1 MO or Higher
Repair or replace engine room No. 2 wire har-ness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and engine room No.2 wire harness.
DI-462DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
11 Check engine room No. 2 wire harness.
Front Airbag E"9ine Roorn No- 2Sensor (RH) Wire Harness
H033S2H03360H09507 H08350
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the engine room No. 2 wire harness connec-
tor on the airbag sensor assembly side.(b) Using a service wire, connect +SR and -SR of the con-
nector (on the engine room No. 2 wire harness side) be-tween the engine room No. 2 wire harness and the frontairbag sensor (RH).
CHECK:For the connector (on the engine room No. 2 wire harness side)between the airbag sensor assembly and the engine room No.2 wire harness, measure the resistance between +SR and -SR.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 &
Repair or replace engine room No. 2 wire har-ness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and engine room No.9 u/iro harnoec2 wire harness.
DK-463DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
OBPX-OJ
DTC B1158/B1159/16 Front Airbag Sensor (LH) Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe front airbag sensor (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and front airbag sensor (LH).For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS-2.DTC B1158/B1159/16 is recorded when malfunction is detected in the front airbag sensor (LH) circuit.
DTC No.
B1158/B1159/16
DTC Detecting Condition
• Front airbag sensor (LH) malfunction
Trouble Area
• Front airbag sensor (LH)
• Airbag sensor assembly
• Wire harness
• Engine room main wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Front Airbag Sensor (LH) Airbag Sensor Assembly
+SL
-SL
W-R W-R15
C6
BR BR26
+SL
-SL
H02750
DI-464DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check wire harness (to B+).
Front AirbagSensor(LH) Airbag Sensor
Assembly
CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn the ignition switch to ON.For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side)between the front airbag sensor (LH) and the airbag sen-sor assembly, measure the voltage between body groundand each of +SL and -SL.
Voltage: Below 1 V
Go to step B.
OK
Check wire harness (to ground).
Front AirbagSensor(LH) Airbag Sensor
, Assembly ,
H03353H08399
OK
-SL
CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the front airbag sensor (LH) and the airbag sensor as-sembly, measure the resistance between body ground andeach of +SL and -SL.OK:
Resistance: 1 MQ. or Higher
Go to step 9.
DI-465DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
4 Check wire harness.
Front AirbagSensor (LH)
r n m a n Airbag
[ 0=03=1 ] Sensorn ~| Assembly
JL JV
Airbag SensorAssembly
QQD
i O i /l2SriysasoaT\\T~s (InoiDDDaDDSl)
Hf_ r^T^-siH03355 ' I \
H08058 H10974
CHECK:P~ .i . / .1 . i i i . . . .ror tne connector (on tne airoag sensor assemuiy side) be-tween the front airbag sensor (LH) and the airbag sensor as-sembly, measure the resistance between +SL and -SL.OK:
Resistance: 1 M& or Higher
\NG y Go to step 10.
OK
Check wire harness.
Front AirbagSensor (LH)
H12942
PREPARATION:Using a service wire, connect +SL and -SL of the connector (onthe front airbag sensor (LH) side) between the airbag sensorassembly and the front airbag sensor (LH).CHECK:For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-tween the front airbag sensor (LH) and the airbag sensor as-sembly, measure the resistance between +SL and -SL.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 &
Go to step 11.
DI-466DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check front airbag sensor (LH).
Front AirbagSensor (LH)
+SL -SL
H04504H01062 H08346
CHECK:For the connector (on the front airbag sensor (LH)), measurethe resistance between +SL and -SL.OK:
Resistance: 300 -1500 &
Replace front airbag sensor (LH).
DI-467DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check airbag sensor assembly.
Front AirbagSensor (LH
ON
DLC3
H02757AB0119H10SOO H01064
OK
DTCB1158/B1159/16
H10647
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Connect the front airbag sensor (LH) connector and air-
bag sensor assembly connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI-326).(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(e) Check the DTC (See page DI-326).OK:
DTC B1158/B1159/16 is not output.HINT:Codes other than code B1158/B1159/16 may be output at thistime, but they are not relevant to this check.
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-468DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
8 Check engine room main wire harness (to B+).
Front AirbagSensor (LH)
Engine Room MainWire Harness
OK
PREPARATION:Disconnect the engine room main wire harness connector onthe airbag sensor assembly side.CHECK:(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.(b) For the connector (on the LH front door wire harness side)
between the airbag sensor assembly and the engineroom main wire harness, measure the voltage betweenbody ground and each of +SL and -SL.
OK:Voltage: Below 1 V
Repair or replace engine room main wire har-ness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and engine room mainwire harness.
Check engine room main wire harness (to ground).
Front AirbagSensor (LH)
Engine Room MainWire Harness
-SL
H033S4H06140 H08258
PREPARATION:Disconnect the engine room main wire harness connector onthe airbag sensor assembly side.CHECK:For the connector (on the engine room main wire harness side)between the airbag sensor assembly and the engine room mainwire harness, measure the resistance between body groundand each of +SL and -SL.OK:
Resistance: 1 M& or Higher
Repair or replace engine room main wire har-ness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and engine room mainwire harness.
DM69DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
10 Check engine room main wire harness.
Front AirbagSensor (LH)
Engine Room MainWire Harness
OK
PREPARATION:Disconnect the engine room main wire harness connector onthe airbag sensor assembly side.CHECK:For the connector (on the engine room main wire harness side)between the airbag sensor assembly and the engine room mainwire harness, measure the resistance between +SL and -SL
Resistance: 1 MQ or Higher
Repair or replace engine room main wire har-ness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and engine room mainwire harness.
DI-470DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
11 Check engine room main wire harness.
Front AirbagSensor (LH)
Engine Room MainWire Harness
HO3352H09521H09519 H09522
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect the engine room main wire harness connector
on the airbag sensor assembly side.(b) Using a service wire, connect +SL and -SL of the connec-
tor (on the engine room main wire harness side) betweenthe engine room main wire harness and the front airbagsensor (LH).
CHECK:For the connector (on the engine room main wire harness side)between the airbag sensor assembly and the engine room mainwire harness, measure the resistance between +SL and -SL.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 &
Repair or replace engine room main wire har-ness.
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and engine room mainwire harness.
DI-471DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
W6FY-O1
DTC Normal Source Voltage Drop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe SRS is equipped with a voltage-increase circuit (DC-DC converter) in the airbag sensor assembly incase the source voltage drops.When the battery voltage drops, the voltage-increase circuit (DC-DC converter) functions to increase thevoltage of the SRS to normal voltage.The diagnosis system malfunction display for this circuit is different from other circuits that is when the SRSwarning light remains lit up and the DTC is a normal code, source voltage drop is indicated.Malfunction in this circuit is not recorded in the airbag sensor assembly, and the source voltage returns tonormal, the SRS warning light automatically goes off.
DTC No.
(Normal)
Diagnosis
Source voltage drop
WIRING DIAGRAM
Instrument Panel J/B
IG1
IG2
Airbag SensorAssembly
H12919
DI-472DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Prepare for inspection.
LOCK
AirbagSensorAssembly
P/T Squib (LHH [] QZ
[=0 D=
Side Squib fLHK [j
Side Squib (RHK [j
AB0117H12015 H12943
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(b) Remove the steering wheel pad (See page SR-11).(c) Disconnect the connector of the front passenger airbag
assembly (See page RS-27).(d) Disconnect the connector of the side airbag assembly RH
and LH (See page RS- K)).(e) Disconnect the connector of the seat belt pretensioner
RH and LH (See page BO-109).(f) Disconnect the connectors of the airbag sensor assembly
(See page RS-53).(g) Disconnect the connector of the front airbag sensor RH
and LH (See page RS-58).(h) Disconnect the connector of the side airbag sensor as-
sembly RH and LH (See page RS-63).(i) Disconnect the connector of the door side airbag sensor
RH and LH (See page RS-68).CAUTION:Store the steering wheel pad, front passenger airbag as-sembly and side airbag assemlby with the front surfacefacing upward.
DI-473DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check source voltage.
Airbag Sensor Assembly
AB0119H01298 H01299
PREPARATION:Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery.CHECK:(a)(b)
OK:
Turn ignition switch ON.Measure the voltage between body ground and each ofIG1 and IG2 on the sensor and operate electric system(defogger, wiper, headlight, heater blower, etc.).
Voltage: 10-14V
Check harness between battery and airbag sen-sor assembly, and check battery and chargingsystem.
OK
Does SRS warning light turn off?
ON
AB0119AB0234 H01249
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Connect the steering wheel pad connector.(c) Connect the front passenger airbag assembly connector.(d) Connect the side airbag assembly connectors.(e) Connect the seat belt pretensioner connectors.(f) Connect the airbag sensor assembly connectors.(g) Connect the front airbag sensor connectors.(h) Connect the side airbag sensor assembly connectors.(i) Connect the door side airbag sensor connectors.(j) Turn the ignition switch to ON.CHECK:Operate electric system (defogger, wiper, headlight, heaterblower, etc.) and check that SRS warning light goes off.
Check for DTCs. If a DTC is output, perform trou-bleshooting for the DTC. If a normal code is out-put, replace airbag sensor assembly.
YES
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
DI-474DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SRS Warning Light Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe SRS warning light is located on the combination meter.When the SRS is normal, the SRS warning light lights up for approx. 6 seconds after the ignition switch isturned from the LOCK position to ON position, and then turns off automatically.If there is a malfunction in the SRS, the SRS warning light lights up to inform the driver of the abnormality.When terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 are connected, the DTC is displayed by blinking the SRS warninglight.
WIRING DIAGRAM
DLC3 Instrument Panel J/B
C14
Light
15
arning
/R
K14
E
6B-Y
B-Y
L
3-R
18
s!LJ*
7
®m.*^
9
® ML
*
9
U!±/*
*?S,.r>
^' M
•vM
3Ba
1/**' "**S
M IW\lELx
4.
11^JKV
16Q C M
B-YI
Ignition Switch
6 ^^ 5B-O
B-R
Engine Room J/B
AM2 1
K. I 1 ^VsfAJ
B-R
Airbag SensorAssembly
FL Main
Battery
LA
DI-475DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDUREAlways lights up, when ignition switch is in LOCK position
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Does SRS warning light turn off?
LOCK Airbag Sensor Assembly
oo
AB0117 H01293 H01295
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Disconnect the airbag sensor assembly connector.(d) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery.CHECK:Check operation of SRS warning light.
Check SRS warning light circuit or terminal A/Bcircuit of DLC3.
YES
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
DI-476DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Does not light up, when ignition switch is turned to ON
Check AM2 Fuse.
Fuse
N14677
PREPARATION:Remove the AM2 fuse.CHECK:Check continuity of the AM2 fuse.OK:
ContinuityHINT:• Fuse may be burnt out even if it appears to be OK during
visual inspection.• If fuse is OK, install it.
Go to step 5.
OK
Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI-471).
Check SRS warning light circuit.
Airbag Sensor Assembly PREPARATION:(a) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery.(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON.CHECK:Measure the voltage between body ground and LA terminal ofthe harness side connector of the airbag sensor assembly.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
Check combination meter or repair SRS warn-ing light circuit.
OK
DMT?DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Does SRS warning light come on?
P/T Squib (LH)
Side Squib (LH)dZZQ
P/T Squib (RH)dZZQ
LtSide Squib (RHVi [j
AirbagSensorAssembly
H12944
PREPARATION:(a) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery.(b) Connect the airbag sensor assembly connector.(c) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON.CHECK:Check operation of the SRS warning light.
Check terminal LA of airbag sensor assembly.If normal, replace airbag sensor assembly.
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.To make sure of this, use simulation method to check.
DJ-478DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Is new AM2 fuse burnt out again?
Using simulation method, reproduce malfunc-tion symptoms (See page IN-20).
YES
Check harness between AM2 fuse and SRSwarning light.
DM79DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Tc Terminal Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONBy connecting terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 the airbag sensor assembly is set in the DTC output mode.The DTCs are displayed by blinking the SRS warning light.
WIRING DIAGRAM
DLC3 Instrument Panel J/B
W-B 4
J3J/C
CG Tc13
P_B
Airbag SensorAssembly
\
19Tc
H12921
DI-480DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDUREIf the DTC is not displayed, do the following troubleshooting.
1 Does SRS warning light light up for approx. 6 seconds?
LOCK ON
(§) (2)
pAB0117 AB0119H11997 H12917
PREPARATION:Check operation of the SRS warning light after ignition switchis turned from LOCK position to ON position.
Check SRS warning light system (See pageDI-474).
YES
Check voltage between terminals Tc and CG of DLC3.
ON
AB0119H10688 H10654
PREPARATION:Turn the ignition switch to ON.CHECK:Measure the voltage between terminals Tc and CG of DLC3.OK:
Voltage: 10 -14V
Go to step 4.
NG
DI-481DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Check voltage between terminal Tc of DLC3 and body ground.
ON
AB0119H10689 H10656
CHECK:Measure the voltage between terminal Tc of DLC3 and bodyground.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
Check harness between terminal E1 of DLC3and body ground.
NG
4 Check airbag sensor assembly.
LOCK ON
Airbag Sensor Assembly
AB0117 AB0119H01302 H12918
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Disconnect the airbag sensor assembly connector.(d) Insert service wire into terminal Tc from back side as
shown in the illustration.(e) Connect the airbag sensor assembly connector with ser-
vice wire.(f) Connect negative (-) terminal cable to the battery.(g) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.(h) Connect service wire of terminal Tc to body ground.CHECK:Check operation of the SRS warning light.OK:
SRS waning light comes on.NOTICE:Pay due attention to the terminal connecting position toavoid a malfunction.
Check harness between the airbag sensor as-sembly and DLC3.
NG
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
Di-482DIAGNOSTICS - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
If the DTC is displayed without a DTC check procedure, perform the followingtroubleshooting.
Check resistance between terminal Tc of airbag sensor assembly and bodyground.
Airbag Sensor Assembly
H01305
OK
Replace airbag sensor assembly.
PREPARATION:(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.(b) Disconnect negative (-) terminal cable from the battery,
and wait at least for 90 seconds.(c) Disconnect the airbag sensor assembly connector.CHECK:Check resistance between terminal Tc of the airbag sensor as-sembly connector and body ground.OK:
Resistance: 1 M& or Higher
Repair or replace harness or connector.
DI-483DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMHOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTINGTroubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following page.
C Vehicle Brought to Workshop^
Customer Problem Analysis
P. Dt-484
Items inside // // are titles of pages in thismanual with the page number indicated in thebottom portion. See the indicated pagesfor detailed explanations.
2/Check and Clear DTC (Precheck)
P. DI-485 y4J-
Problem Symptom ConfirmationSymptom does not occur 4 n SymptQm Sjmulation
P. IN-20 7Symptom occurs
*
5 DTC CheckP. DI-490
Normal code
Malfunction code IDTC Chart
P. DI-490 7 7l Problem Symptom Table
P.DI-494 7J]
I^Circuit Inspection /L Input Signal Check
P. DI-496 - DI-534—jl II Parts Inspection 11
10
/ L<^>
Identification of Problem
ni
j Repair j
n NGConfirmation Test i
J Mi
OK of the hand-held tester or break-out-box.
C End
DI-484DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector's name:
Customer's Name
Date VehicleBrought in
/ /
Registration No.
Registration Year
Frame No.
Odometer Reading kmMile
Condition ofProblem Occurrence
Date of ProblemOccurrence
How Often doesProblem Occurs
Vehicle Speed whenProblem Occurred
/ /
D Continuous D Intermittent ( Times a day)
kmMile
Symptoms
D Auto canceloccurs
D Cancel does notoccur
D Cruise controlmalfunction
D Switchmalfunction
D Cruise MAINindicator light
• Driving conditionD City driving D Freeway D Up hill D Down hill
• After cancel occurred, did the driver activate cruise controlagain?D Yes D No
D With brake OND Except D position shift D At 40 km/h (25 mph) or lessD When control SW turns to CANCEL position
D Slip to acceleration sideD Slip to deceleration sideD Hunting occursD O/D cut off does not occurD O/D does not return
DSET D ACCEL D COAST
n Remains ON D Does not
D RESUME D CANCEL
light up D Blinking
DTC Check1st Time
2nd Time
n Normal Code
D Normal Code
D Malfunction Code (Code )
D Malfunction Code (Code )
Dl-485DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
PRE-CHECK1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM(a) Check the indicator.
(1) Turn the ignition switch ON.(2) Check that the CRUISE MAIN indicator light comes
ON when the cruise control main switch is turnedON, and that the indicator light goes OFF when themain switch is turned OFF.
HINT:If the indicator check result is not normal, proceed to trouble-shooting (See page BE-42) for the combination meter section.
Indicator Light
1.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
ON-
OFF
BE4034
N09214
(b) Check the DTC.HINT:If a malfunction occurs in the No. 1 vehicle speed sensor or ac-tuator, etc. during cruise control driving, the ECU actuatesAUTO CANCEL of the cruise control and turns on and off theCRUISE MAIN indicator light to inform the driver of a malfunc-tion. At the same time, the malfunction is stored in memory asa DTC.
(c) Output of DTC using diagnosis check wire.(1) Turn the ignition switch ON.(2) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and CG of DLC3.SST 09843-18020(3) Read the DTC on the CRUISE MAIN indicator light.
DM86DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Normal Code
0.25 sec.0.25 sec.
ON
OFFUUUU
Malfunction codes 11 and 210.5 sec. 0.5.sec.
ON
OFF
BE4032BE4033
4 sec. 1.5s&c.
-
2.5 sec. /-
\-
l.5se
Code 11 Code 21100021
D07259
(b) Tc
CG (d) 5 timeswithin 3 seconds
HINT:If the DTC is not output, inspect the diagnosis circuit (See pageDI-532).As an example, the blinking patterns for codes; normal, 11 and21 are shown in the illustration.
2. USING HAND-HELD TESTER(a) Hook up the hand-held tester to the DLC3.(b) Monitor the ECU data by following the prompts on the tes-
ter screen.HINT:Hand-held tester has a "Snapshot" function which records themonitored data.Please refer to the hand-held tester operator's manual for fur-ther details.
3. DTC CLEARANCE (ERASE MODE)HINT:During in the erase mode, diag detection does not work.(a) Drive at about 15 km/h or below.(b) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and E1 of DLC3.
SST 09843-18020(c) Pull the cruise control switch to CANCEL.(d) On the above metioned condition, turn on the cruise con-
trol main switch 5 times within 3 seconds.
DI-487DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
N17520
4. PROBLEM SYMPTOM CHECK (ROAD TEST)(a) Inspect the SET switch.
(1) Push the main switch ON.(2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or high-
er).(3) Press the control switch to the SET/COAST.(4) After releasing the switch, check that the vehicle
cruises at the desired speed.
(b) Inspect the ACCEL switch.(1) Push the main switch ON.(2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or high-
er).(3) Check that the vehicle speed increases while the
control switch is turned to RES/ACC, and that thevehicle cruises at the set speed when the switch isreleased.
(4) Momentarily raise the control switch upward to theRES/ACC position and then immediately release it.Check that the vehicle speed increases by approx.1.5 km/h (Tap-up function).
N17520
(c) Inspect the COAST switch.(1) Push the main switch ON.(2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or high-
er).(3) Check that the vehicle speed decreases while the
control switch is turned to SET/COAST, and the ve-hicle cruises at the set speed when the switch is re-leased.
(4) Momentarily pull the control switch down to SET/COAST, and then immediately release it. Checkthat the vehicle speed decreases by about 1.5 km/h(Tap-down function).
DI-488DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
N17520
(d) Inspect the CANCEL switch.(1) Push the main switch ON.(2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or high-
er).(3) When operating one of the following operations,
check that the cruise control system is cancelledand that the normal driving mode is reset.• Depress the brake pedal
Depress the clutch pedal (M/T)Shift to except D position (A/T)Push the main switch OFF
• Pull the cruise control switch to CANCEL
N17520
(e) Inspect the RESUME switch.(1) Push the main switch ON.(2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or high-
er).(3) When operating one of the following operations
check that the cruise control system is cancelledand that the normal driving mode is reset.• Depress the brake pedal
Depress the clutch pedal (M/T)• Shift to except D position (A/T)• Push the main switch OFF• Pull the cruise control switch to CANCEL
(4) After the control switch is turned to RES/ACC at thedriving speed of more than 40 km/h (25 mph), checkthat the vehicle restores the speed prior to the can-cellation.
DI-489DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
(1)
(1)N17520
5. INPUT SIGNAL CHECKHINT:(1) For check No.1 - No.3:Turn ignition switch ON.(2) For check No.4:
Jack up the vehicle.• Start the engine.• Shift to D position.
(a) Pull the control switch to SET/COAST or RES/ACC posi-tion and hold it down or up (1).
(b) Push the main switch ON (2).(c) Check that the CRUISE MAIN indicator light blinks twice
or 3 times repeatedly after 3 seconds.(d) Turn the SET/COAST or RES/ACC switch OFF.(e) Operate each switch as listed in the table below.(f) Read the blinking pattern of the CRUISE MAIN indicator
light.(g) After performing the check, turn the main switch OFF.HINT:When 2 or more signals are input to the ECU, the lowest num-bered code will be displayed 1 st.
No.
1
2
3
4
Operation Method
Turn SET/COAST switch ON
Turn RES/ACC switch ON
Turn CANCEL switch ON
Turn stop light switch ONDepress brake pedal
Turn PNP switch OFF(Shift to except D position)
Turn clutch switch OFF(Depress clutch pedal)
Drive at about 40 km/h(25 mph)or higher
Drive at about 40 km/h(25 mph) or below
CRUISE MAIN Indicator LightBlinking Pattern
0.25
Light°N IOFFON -.
LightOFF
ONLight
OFF -
ONLight
OFF
sec jX j o 25 se-
1sec.M PI• * i
nnnSwitch OFF
Switch ON
c.
tJU:
nnnSwitch ON
Switch OFF
*C WbWWlLight
OFF
ii
Diagnosis
SET/COAST switch circuitis normal
RES/ACC switch circuitis normal
CANCEL switch circuitis normal
Stop light switch circuitis normal
PNP switch circuit isnormal
Clutch switch circuitis normal
Vehicle Speed Sensor isnormal
DL-490DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHARTIf a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code in the tablebelow and proceed to the appropriate page.
DTC No.(See Page)
11,15(DI-496)
12,43(DI-498)
14(DI-502)
21(DI-504)
23(DI-508)
41
42
Circuit Inspection
Actuator Motor Circuit
Actuator Magnetic Clutch Circuit
Actuator Mechanical Malfunction
Open in Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit
Vehicle Speed Signal Abnormal
Cruise control ECU
Source voltage drop
Trouble Area
•Actuator motor• Harness or connector between cruise control ECU and
actuator motor
•Cruise control ECU
• STOP Fuse•Stop light switch
• Actuator magnetic clutch
• Harness or connector between cruise control ECU and
actuator magnetic clutch, actuator magnetic clutch and body
ground
• Cruise control ECU
• Actuator motor (actuator lock: motor, arm)
• Cruise control ECU
•Combination meter
• Harness or connector between cruise control ECU and com-bination meter, combination meter and vehicle speed sensor
•Vehicle speed sensor
•Cruise control ECU
• Vehicle speed sensor•Cruise control ECU
•Cruise control ECU
• Power source
DI-491DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
PARTS LOCATION
ECM
Cruise ControlActuator
Engine RoomJunction Block
Cruise Control Switch
Stop Light Switch
Cruise Control ECU
Center Junction Block• C/C ECU-IG Fuse• WARNING Fuse• STOP Fuse
113730
DI-492DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
TERMINALS OF ECU
r8 7
HH6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
100293
Symbols (Terminals No.)
STP-<->GND
(C18-2«->C18-16)
D o GND (C18-3 C18-16)
PI <-> GND (C1 8-4 <-> C1 8-1 6)
TC <-> GND
(C18-5<-»Cl8-16)
ECT«->GND
(C18-€<-»Cl8-16)
MC <-» GND
(C18-70C18-16)
L«-»GND
(C18-8<-»Cl8-16)
B«->GND
(C18-9^C18-16)
CCS <-> GND
(C18-10«-»C18-16)
Wiring Color
G-WoW-B
B-Y<->W-B
Y-BoW-B
P-B <-> W-B
YoW-B
R-W«W-8
G-B<->W-8
B-O<->W-B
W<-»W-B
Condition
Depress brake pedal
Release brake pedal
Shift to positions except D
Shift to D position
Ignition switch ON
Cruise control main switch ON
Ignition switch ON
Cruise control main switch OFF
Ignition switch ON
Ignition switch ON
Connect terminals Tc and E1 of diagnostic check connector
During drivingGear position 3rd
During driving
Gear position O/D
During cruise control drivingCOAST switch held ON
During cruise control driving
ACC switch held ON
During cruise control driving
Except during cruise control driving
Ignition switch ON
Ignition switch ON
Ignition switch ON
MAIN switch held ON
Ignition switch ON
SET/COAST switch held ON
Ignition switch ON
RES/ACC switch held ON
STD Voltage (V)
10-16V
Below 1 V
Below 1 V
10-16V
Below 1.2V
10-16V
10-16V
Below 1 V
10-16V
Below 1 V
9-15V
Below 1 V
9-15V
Below 1 V
10-16V
10-16V
4.2 -8.8V
2.5 -6.3V
0.8 -3.7V
DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMDI-493
SPD <-> GND(C18-12<-»C18-16)
IDL <-> GND
(C18-13<-»C18-16)
OD <-» GND
(C18-14oC18-16)
MO «^ GND
(C18-15<-»C18-16)
GND <-> Body Ground(C1»-16<-»Body Ground)
W-R«W-B
-W <-> W— B
B<->W-B
B-LoW-B
W-B<-»BodyGround
Engine startCar stoppage.
During driving (Pulse generated).
Ignition switch ONThrottle valve fully opened.
Ignition switch ONThrottle valve fully closed.
During cruise control drivingOD switch ON.
During cruise control drivingOD switch OFF (3rd driving)
During cruise control driving
ACC switch hold ON
During cruise control drivingCO AST switch hold ON
Constant
Below 1.5V or
4.7 -16V
3-7V
10-16V
Below 1.5V
10-16V
Below 1 V
9-15V
Below 1 V
Below 1 V
DM94DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLESymptom
SET not occourring or CANCEL occurring.
(DTC is Normal)
SET not occurring or CANCEL occurring.
(DTC dose not output)
Actual vehicle speed deviates above or below the set speed.
Gear shifting frequent between 3rd O/D when driving on uphill
road. (Hurting)
Cruise control not cancelled, even when brake pedal is de-
pressed.
Cruise control not cancelled, even when transmission is shifted to"N" postion.
Cruise control not cancelled, even when clutch pedal is de-pressed.
Control switch does not operate.
(SET/COAST, ACC/RES, CANCEL not possible)
SET possible at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less, or CANCEL does not
operate at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less.
Poor response is in ACCEL and RESUME modes.
O/D does not resume, even though the road is not uphill.
DTC memory is erased.
Suspect AreaSuspect Area
1 . Main Switch Circuit (Cruise control switch)
2. Vehicle Speed Sensor
3. Control Switch Circuit (Cruise control switch)
4. Stop Light Switch Circuit
5. Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit
6. Clutch Switch
7. Actuator Motor Circuit
8. Cruise Control Cable
9. Cruise Control ECU
1. ECU Power Source Circuit
2. Cruise Control ECU
1 . Cruise Control Cable
2. Vehicle Speed Signal Abnormal
3. Electronically Controlled Transmission
Communication Circuit
4. Actuator Motor Circuit
5. Idle Signal Circuit (Main throttle position sensor)
6. Cruise Control ECU
1. Electronically Controlled Transmission
Communication Circuit
2. Cruise Control ECU
1. Cruise Control Cable
2. Stop Light Switch Circuit
3. Actuator Motor Circuit
4. Cruise Control ECU
1. Cruise Control Cable
2. Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit
3. Actuator Motor Circuit
4. Cruise Control ECU
1. Cruise Control Cable2. Clutch Switch Circuit
3. Actuator Motor Circuit
4. Cruise Control ECU
1. Cruise Control Cable
2. Control Switch Circuit
3. Actuator Motor Circuit
4. Cruise Control ECU
1. Cruise Control Cable
2. Vehicle Speed Signal Abnormal
3. Actuator Motor Circuit
4. Cruise Control ECU
1. Cruise Control Cable
2. Electronically Controlled Transmission
Communication Circuit
3. Actuator Motor Circuit
4. Cruise Control ECU
1. Electronically Controlled Transmission
Communication Circuit
2. Cruise Control ECU
1. Cruise Control ECU
Seepage
DI-509DI-504
DI-509DI-515
DI-522
DI-525
DI-496
DI-534
IN-30
DI-527
IN-30
DI-534
DI-504
D 1-51 9
Dl-496
DI-512
IN-30
Dl-519
IN-30
DI-534
DI-515Dl-496
IN-30
DI-534
DI-522
Dl-496
IN-30
DI-534DI-525
Dl-496
IN-30
01-534
DI-525
DM96
IN-30
DI-534
Dl-508
Dl-496
IN-30
DI-534
Dl-519
Dl-496
IN-30
Dl-519
IN-30
IN-30
DM95DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC is not output, or is output when should not be.
Cruise MAIN indicator light remains ON or falls to light up.
1. Diagnosis Circuita. Cruise Control ECU
1 . Cruise MAIN Indicator Light Switch Circuit
DI-532IN-30
DI-530
DI-496DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
OI08U-15
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC 11,15 Actuator Motor Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe actuator motor is operated by signals from the ECU. Acceleration and deceleration signals are trans-mitted according to changes in the Duty Ratio (See below).Duty RatioThe duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle. For example, if A is the period of continuityin one cycle, and B is the period of non-continuity.
ADuty Ratio = •
A + Bx100(%) ON
OFF JLJL1 cycle
DTC No.
11
15
Detection Item
Short in actuator motor circuit.
Open in actuator motor circuit.
Trouble Area
•Actuator motor
• Harness or connector between cruise control ECU and
actuator motor
•Cruise control ECU
•Actuator motor
WIRING DIAGRAM
C5 C18Cruise Control Actuator Cruise Control ECU
: ^
,
^
C
^
MC
MO
^
r ^\
2 R-W r-fi-^ R-W 7" 1IUoR\
51 R^- riccic R"L 15
MC
MO
V J
113751
DI-497DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check resistance between terminals MO and MC of actuator motor.
100004
OK
PREPARATION:(a) Turn ignition switch OFF.(b) Disconnect the actuator connector.CHECK:Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2.HINT:If control plate is in fully opened or fully closed positions, resis-tance can not be measured.OK:
Resistance: more than 4.2 &
Replace cruise control actuator.
Check for open and short in harness and connectors between cruise controlECU and actuator motor (See page IN-30).
OK
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage IN-30).
01-498
OHM-IS
DTC 12,43 Actuator Magnetic Clutch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis circuit turns on the magnetic clutch inside the actuator during cruise control operation according to thesignal from the ECU. If a malfunction occurs in the actuator or speed sensor, etc. during cruise control opera-tion, the rotor shaft between the motor and control plate is released.When the brake pedal is depressed, the stop light switch turns on, supplying electrical power to the stop light.Power supply to the magnetic clutch is mechanically cut and the magnetic clutch is turned OFF.When driving downhill, if the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed by 15 km/h (9 mph), the ECU turns thesafety magnet clutch OFF. If the vehicle speed later drops to within 10 km/h (6 mph), cruise control at theset speed is resumed.
DTC No. Detection Item Trouble Area
12Short in actuator magnetic clutch circuitOpen (0.8 sec.) in actuator magnetic clutch circuit
•STOP Fuse> Stop light switch• Actuator magnetic clutch• Harness or connector between cruise control ECU and actua-tor magnetic clutch, actuator magnetic clutch and bodyground
•Cruisecontrol ECU
DI-499DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAMS8Stop 1 inht Switch C1 8 Cruise Contral ECU
3i
c
4
12
} \
F
\W-B
| IG3|
A
W-B
C
A
^
13l-Y rj n,, R-Y 4
I — __r
I 1
to Stop Fuse
-0—ii
_l^~
3 R-Y 8
2 1
1To Stop Lights
W-B
A
T7
1
J9Junction Connector
J10Junction Connector
f >l
V J
113752
DI-500DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check STOP fuse.
STOP FusePREPARATION:(a) Turn ignition switch OFF.(b) Remove the STOP fuse from instrument panel junction
block.CHECK:Check fuse continuity.OK:
There is continuity.
Replace STOP fuse.
Check stop light switch.
PREPARATION:Disconnect the stop light switch connector.CHECK:Check continuity between terminals.
Switch position
Switch pin free
(Brake pedal depressed)
Switch pin pushed in
(Brake pedal released)
Continuity
1-2
3-4
Replace stop light switch.
DI-501DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Check resistance between terminals L and GND of actuator magnetic clutch.
n_JLin\r100311
PREPARATION:(a) Turn ignition switch OFF.(b) Disconnect the actuator connector.CHECK:Measure resistance between terminals 3 and 4.OK:
Resistance: 34.65 - 42.35 &
OK
Replace cruise control actuator.
Check for open and short in harness and connectors between cruise controlECU and actuator magnetic clutch, actuator magnetic clutch and body ground(See page IN-30).
OK
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage IN-30).
DI-502DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
DWHO-15
DTC 14 Actuator Mechanical Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe circuit detects the rotation position of the actuator control plate and sends a signal to the ECU.
DTC No.
14
Detection Item
Cruise control actuator mechanical malfunction.
Trouble Area
• Actuator lode (motor, arm)
•Actuator motor
• Cruise control ECU
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-498.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check cruise control actuator arm locking operation
100055
PREPARATION:(a) Turn ignition switch OFF.(b) Disconnect the actuator connector.CHECK:(a) Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to the termi-
nal 3 of actuator and the negative (-) lead to terminal 4.NOTICE:Do not connect the high tension cables to the wrong bat-tery terminal. The cruise control actuator will be damaged.(b) Move the control plate by hand.OK:
Control plate doesn't move.
Replace cruise control actuator.
OK
DI-503DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Check cruise control actuator operation.
Fully Closed side
PREPARATION:(a) Turn ignition switch OFF.(b) Disconnect the actuator connector.CHECK:Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminals 1 and3 of actuator, connect the negative (-) lead to terminals 2 and4 of actuator.OK:
Control arm moves to fully open side
CHECK:Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminals 2 and3 of actuator, connect the negative (-) lead to terminals 1 and4 of actuator.OK:
Control arm moves to fully closed side
Replace cruise control actuator.
Check harness and connector between cruise control ECU and cruise control ac-tuator (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage IN-30).
DI-504DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
OtWP-19
DTC 21 Open in Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe signal from the vehicle speed sensor circuit is sent to cruise control ECU as vehicle speed signal.The rotor shaft is driven by the gear of the transmission.For each rotation of the shaft, the vehicle speed sensor sends a 4-pulse signal through the combinationmeter to the cruise control ECU (See the following installation).This signal is converted inside the combination meter and sent as a 4-pulse signal to the cruise control ECU.The ECU calculates the vehicle speed from this pulse frequency.
4 pulses/ 4 pulses/
1 rotation 1 rotation
of rotor shaft of rotor shaft
V^peed Sensor JUUUL / V JUUUL
1=3 / \
-^ '
r~ ~^
L. J
ECU Combination Meter Cruise Control ECU K0292
DTC No.
21
Detection Item
Speed signal is not input to the cruise control ECU while cruise
control is set.
Trouble Area
• Combination meter
• Harness or connector between cruise control ECU and com-
bination meter, combination meter and vehicle speed sensor
• Vehicle speed sensor• Cruise control ECU
Dl-505DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM
C11Combination Meter
C18Cruise Control ECU
G-Y
DI-506DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Input signal check.
Input Signal
Drive at about40 km/h (25 mph)or below
Drive at about40 km/h (25 mph)or higher
Indicator LightBlinking Pattern
rjM , , ,Light ;
OFF
L^o0FN
F"lMH
CHECK:(a) See input signal check on page DI-485.(b) Check indicator light operation when driving with vehicle
speed above 40 km/h (25 mph), and with vehicle speedbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).
OK:Vehicle speed above 40 km/h (25 mph):
Indicator light blinksVehicle speed below 40 km/h (25 mph):
Indicator light stays on
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage 114-30).
Check speedometer circuit (See Combination meter troubleshooting on pageBE-42).
OK
Repair or replace harness, connector or com-bination meter assembly.
Check harness and connector between cruise control ECU and combination me-ter, combination meter and vehicle speed sensor (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
DI-507DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
4 Check vehicle speed sensor (See page BE-46).
NG\ Replace vehicle speed sensor.
OK
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage IN-30).
DI-5QBDIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
OB8Q-14
DTC 23 Vehicle Speed Signal Abnormal
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONSee page DI-504.
DTC No.
23
Detection Item
Vehicle speed sensor pulse is abnormal.
Trouble Area
• Vehicle speed sensor
• Cruise control ECU
WIRING DIAGRAMSee page DI-504.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check vehicle speed sensor (See page BE-46).
NG\ Replace vehicle speed sensor.
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage IN-30).
DI-509DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Control Switch Circuit (Cruise Control Switch)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis circuit carries the SET/COAST, RESUME/ACCEL and CANCEL signals (each voltage) to the ECU.
WIRING DIAGRAM
W-B
W-B
J9J/C
J10J/C
C16Cruise Control Switch
C18Cruise Control ECU
\
W 10 CCS
113854
DI-510DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Input signal check.
Input Signal
SET/COASTswitch
RESUME/ACCELswitch
CANCEL switch
Indicator LightBlinking Pattern
ON-
OFF
ON-
OFF
2
:
Pulses
1FL_Pulsesinn
ON SW°FFUIN
OFF SWON
PREPARATION:See input signal check on page DI-485.CHECK:Check the indicator light operation when each of the SET/COAST, RESUME/ACCEL and CANCEL is turned on.OK:
SET/COAST, RESUME/ACCEL switchThe signals shown in the table on the left should beoutput when each switch is ON. The signal shoulddisappear when the switch is turned OFF.CANCEL switchThe indicator light goes off when the cancel switch isturned ON.
Wait and see.
NG
Check voltage between terminals CCS of cruise control ECU connector and bodyground.
CCS\\ \
AB0119100168
100171
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECU with connector still connected.(b) Turn ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals 18 of ECU connector andbody ground, when each of the SET/COAST, RESUME/AC-CEL and CANCEL is turned ON.
Switch position
Neutral
RES/ACC
SET/COAST
CANCEL
Resistance (V)
10-16V
0.8 -3.7V
2.5 -6.3V
4.2 -8.8V
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptom table (See page DI-494).
Dl-511DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Check control switch.
N16045
PREPARATION:(a) Remove steering wheel center pad.(b) Disconnect the control switch connector.CHECK:Measure resistance between terminals 3 and 4 of control switchconnector when control switch is operated.
Switch position
Neutral
RES/ACC
SET/COAST
CANCEL
Resistance (ft)
> (No continuity)
50-80
180-220
400-440
Replace control switch.
OK
Check harness and connector between cruise control ECU and cruise control switch,cruise control switch and body ground (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
5 Input signal check (See step 1).
OK\ Wait and see.
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage IN-30).
DI-512DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Idle Signal Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen the idle switch is turned ON, a signal is sent to the ECU. The ECU uses this signal to correct the dis-crepancy between the throttle valve position and the actuator position sensor value to enable accuratecruise control at the set speed. If the idle switch is malfunctioning, problem symptoms also occur in the en-gine, so also inspect the engine.
WIRING DIAGRAM
E2Engine Control Module
IDLO10 L-W L-W 13
C18Cruise Control ECU' \
IDL
113755
DI-513DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check voltage between terminal IDL of cruise control ECU connector and bodyground.
NG
100172
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECU with connector still connected.(b) Disconnect the ECM connector.(c) Turn ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal IDL of ECU connector andbody ground when the throttle valve is fully closed and fullyopened.OK:
Throttle valve position
Fully opened
Fully closed
Voltage
10-14V
Below 2 V
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptom table (See page DI-494).
Check harness and connector between ECM and throttle position sensor (Seepage IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
3 Check throttle position sensor circuit (See page DI-38).
NG\ Replace throttle position sensor.
01-514DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Check for open and short in harness and connector between cruise control ECUand ECM (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage IN-30).
DI-515DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Stop Light Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen the brake pedal is depressed, the stop light switch sends a signal to the ECU. When the ECU receivesthis signal, it cancels the cruise control.A fail-safe function is provided so that the cancel functions normally, even if there is a malfunction in the stoplight signal circuit.The cancel conditions are: Battery positive voltage at terminal STP-When the brake is ON, battery positive voltage normally is applied through the STOP fuse and stop lightswitch to terminal STP- of the ECU, and the ECU turns the cruise control OFF.If the harness connected to terminal STP- has an open circuit, terminal STP-will have battery positive volt-age and the cruise control will be turned OFF.Also, when the brake is ON, the magnetic clutch circuit is cut mechanically by the stop light switch, turningthe cruise control OFF. (See page DI-498 for operation of the magnetic clutch)
DI-516DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM
J9J/CC5Cruise Control Actuator
S8Stop Light Switch
W-B
Cruise Control ECU8 / N
STP-
J10J/C
B-R
FL MAIN
f
Battery
_W Instrument
c(JiS> PaneU/B
G-W A ( J 1 3 ) A ( J 1 3 )
G-W
J/C
G-W
H10HighMounted
T-1 Stop1 Light
J14J/C
113756
Dt-517DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check operation of stop light.
CHECK:Check that stop light comes ON when brake pedal is depressed, and turns OFF when brake pedal is re-leased.
Check stop light system (See page BE-2).
Input signal check.
Input Signal
Stop Lightswitch ON
Indicator LightBlinking Pattern
SWOFF.Light
r»M . — SWON
CHECK:(a) See input signal check on DI-485.(b) Check the indicator light when the brake pedal is de-
pressed.OK:
The indicator light goes OFF when the brake pedal isdepressed.
OK Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptom table (See page DI-494).
NG
DI-518DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
3 Check voltage between terminal STP- of cruise controlbody ground.
/— x O N
®x— -^ STP-
/ V \IS8I1
toi t+\
/TIN '
AB0119100142
K»173
NG
PREPARATION:
ECU connector and
(a) Remove the ECU with connectors still connected,(b) Turn ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal STP- of cruise control ECUconnector and body ground, when the brake pedal is de-pressed and released.OK:
Depressed
Released
10-14V
Below 1 V
3 Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptom table (See page DI-494).
Check for open in harness and connectors between terminal STP- of cruise con-trol ECU and stop light switch (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage IN-30).
DI-519DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Electronically Controlled Transmission Communication Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen driving uphill under the cruise control, in order to reduce shifting due to ON-OFF overdrive operationand to provide smooth driving, when down shifting in the electronically controlled transmission occurs, a sig-nal to prevent upshift until the end of the uphill slope is sent from the cruise control ECU to the electronicallycontrolled transmission.Terminal ECT of the cruise control ECU detects the shift change signal (output to electronically controlledtransmission No. 2 solenoid) from the ECM.If the vehicle speeds down, also when terminal ECT of the cruise control ECU receives down shifting signal,it sends a signal from terminal OD to ECM to cut overdrive until the end of the uphill slope, and the gear shiftsare reduced and gear shift points in the electronically controlled transmission are changed.
WIRING DIAGRAM
E1ECT Solenoid J2
C18Cruise Control ECU
rV
(
10*18*2
»UI lOlNJI 1
Donnectr— iJB
orY |
1
3EAll
16
20fE5)(*1)
29(E5)(*2)
S2 (*1)S4 (*2)
OD1B 14
ECT
OD
*1:1ZZ-FE*2:2ZZ-GE
113757
DL-520DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check operation of overdrive.
PREPARATION:Test drive after engine warms up.CHECK:Check that overdrive ON <-> OFF occurs by operation of OD switch ON-QFF.
OK
Check and repair electronically controlledtransmission (See page DM55 or DI-218).
Check voltage between terminal OD of harness side connector of cruise controlECU and body ground.
100174
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECU with connector still connected.(b) Turn ignition switch ON.(c) Disconnect the ECU connector.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal OD of harness side connec-tor of ECU and body ground.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
Go to step 5.
OK
DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMDI-521
Check voltage between terminal ECT of cruise control ECU connector and bodyground (On test drive).
NG
KW141
PREPARATION:(a) Connect the ECU connector.(b) Test drive after engine warms up.CHECK:Check voltage between terminal ECT of ECU connector andbody ground when OD switch is ON and OFF.OK:
OD switch position
ON
OFF
Voltage
8-14V
Below 0.5 V
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptom table (See page DI-494).
Check harness and connector between terminal ECT of cruise control ECU andelectronically controlled transmission solenoid (See page IN-30).
NG Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Check and replace cruise control ECU.
Check harness and connector between terminal OD of cruise control ECU andterminal OD1 of ECM (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage IN-30).
DI-522DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen the shift position is except D, a signal is sent from the park/neutral position switch to the ECU. Whenthis signal is input during cruise control driving, the ECU cancels the cruise control.
WIRING DIAGRAM
E3Engine and ECT ECU
C18Cruise Control ECU
CCE
Engine Room J/B
1410
-STEAl)B-W "L^J B-W(A/T) (MT)Engine Room J/B
L-W
417 18
P1Park/NeutralPosition Switch
C1 6 Cruise ControlClutch Switch
B-O
R-L
EngineRoom
B
B-Y(M/T)
B-0(M/T) Instrument Panel J/B
R-L
L-R
IgnitionSwitch
W
C/CECU-IG
W-B
FL Main
—«-.
Engine Room J/B
B-R
B-R
W-B
Battery
D
113652
DI-523DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check starter operation.
CHECK:Check that the starter operates normally and that the engine starts.
Proceed to engine troubleshooting (See pageDM).
OK
Input signal check.
Input Signal
Turn PNP switchOFF (Shift to posi-tions except D )
Indicator LightBlinking Pattern
ON SWONLight
OFF SWOFF
PREPARATION:See input signal check on page DI-485.CHECK:Check the indicator light when shifting into positions except D.OK:
The indicator light goes off when shifting into posi-tions except D.
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptom table (See page DI-494).
NG
DI-524DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Check voltage between terminal D of cruise control ECU connector and bodyground.
100175
PREPARATION:Turn ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal D of ECU connector andbody ground when shifting into D position and other positions.OK:
Shift Position
D position
Other positions
Voltage
10-14V
Below 1 V
NG
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptom table (See page Dl-494).
Check harness and connector between cruise control ECU and park/neutralposition switch (See page 114-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage IN-30).
DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMDI-525
Clutch Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen the clutch pedal is depressed, the clutch switch sends a signal to the cruise control ECU. When thesignal is input to the cruise control ECU during cruise control driving, the cruise control ECU cancels cruisecontrol.
WIRING DIAGRAMRefer to PNP switch circuit on page DI-522.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check starter operation.
CHECK:Check that the starter operates normally and that the engine starts.
Proceed to engine troubleshooting.
Input signal check.
Input Signal
Clutch switchOFF (Depressclutch pedal)
Indicator LightBlinking Pattern
AM SWON1 * k* ' ' " ' 1
PREPARATION:See input signal check on page DI-485.CHECK:Check the indicator lights when clutch pedal is depressed.OK:
The indicator light goes off when shifting into clutchpedal is depressed.
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptom table (See page DI-494).
NG
DI-526DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
3 Check voltage between terminal D of cruise control ECU and body ground.
/-~-\ON
(/)^ X D
\
/ \
o\h/ \ i.\ i i\ '/T\V+; ' '
AB0119 ~100139
\
asf2.
100175
PREPARATION:Turn ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminal D of cruise control ECU con-nector and body ground when clutch pedal is depressed andpushed in.OK:
Shift Position
Clutch pedal depressed
Clutch pedal pushed in
Voltage
Below 1 V
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptom table (See page DI-494).
Check for open in harness and connector between ECU and GAUGE fuse (Seepage IN-30).
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage 114-30).
DI-527DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
ECU Power Source Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe ECU power source supplies power to the actuator and sensors, etc, when terminal GND and the cruisecontrol ECU case are grounded.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Instrument Panel J/BC18Cruise Control ECU/*
113655
Dk-528DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check ECU-IG fuse.
MULTI Fuse(ECU-IG) \
114200
PREPARATION:Remove the ECU-IG fuse from instrument panel junction block.CHECK:Check continuity of ECU-IG fuse.OK:
Continuity
Check for short in all the harness and compo-nents connected to ECU-IG fuse.
OK
Check voltage between terminals B and GND of cruise control ECU connector.
PREPARATION:(a) Remove the ECU with connector still connected.(b) Turn ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals B and GND of ECU con-nector.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptom table (See page DI-494).
Dl-529DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Check resistance between terminal GND of cruise control ECU connector andbody ground.
z X
GND
IOOI40
CHECK:Measure resistance between terminal GND of ECU connectorand body ground.OK:
Resistance: Below 1 n
OK
Repair or replace harness or connector.
Check and repair harness and connector be-tween cruise control ECU and battery (Seepage IN-30).
DI-530DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
CRUISE MAIN Indicator Light Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen the cruise control main switch is turned ON, CRUISE MAIN indicator light lights up.
WIRING DIAGRAM
C18C11 Cruise Control ECUCruise ControlIndicator Light
113853
DI-531DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check voltage between terminals PI and GND of cruise control ECU connector.
S~^ ON
0PI
\
/ \ \
tifa JJ
\ 7r
r
•TWrHv)
A80119100144
100178
PREPARATION:Tun ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals PI and GND of cruise con-trol ECU connector when main switch is ON and OFF.OK:
Switch position
OFF
ON
Voltage
10-16V
Below 1.2V
NG
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptom table (See page DI-494).
2 Check combination meter (See page BE-42).
NG\ Replace combination meter.
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage IN-30).
DI-532DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnosis Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis circuit sends a signal to the ECU that outputs DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
D1DLC3 Instrument Panel J/B
TC 13 P-B4 9
® m -mfTTm * J1>P-B 5
C18Cruise Control ECU
TC
113761
DI-533DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check voltage between terminals Tc and E-, of DLC3.
Tc
ol™W*CG I
AB0119N09214
PREPARATION:Turn ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals Tc and E! of DLC3.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
NG
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown inproblem symptom table (See page DI-494).
Check harness and connector between cruise control ECU and DLC3, DLC3 andbody ground (See page IN-30).
NG Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK
Check and replace cruise control ECU (Seepage IN-30).
DI-534DIAGNOSTICS - CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Actuator Control Cable
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Actuator control cable inspection
OK:(a) Check that the actuator and control cable throttle link are properly installed and that the cable and link
are connected correctly.(b) Check that the actuator and bell crank operate smoothly.(c) Check that the cable is not loose or too tight.OK:
Freeplay: less than 10 mmHINT:• If the control cable is very loose, the vehicle's loss of speed going uphill will be large.• If the control cable is too tight, the idle RPM will become high.
DI-535DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEMHOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTINGHINT:This ECU is connected to the multiplex communication system. Therefore, be sure to check that there is notroubles in the multiplex communication system before performing the trouble shooting.
( Vehicle Brought to Workshop JTitles inside // ff are titles of pages in thismanual, with the page number indicated inthe bottom portion. See the indicated pagesfor detailed explanations.
II
Customer Problem Analysis
P.DI-536
Symptom does not
Problem Symptom Confirmationoccur
Symptomoccur
A j Symptom Simulation II~* j P. IN-20 /
Problem Symptoms Table
P. DI-542
Circuit Inspection= 01-544-DI-600
Identification of Problem
j Repair
,_JLConfirmation Test
C M 3Step 6, 8 : Diagnostic steps permitting the use of the
hand-held tester.
DI-536DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet |
Inspector's name:
Customer's Name
Date VehicleBrought in
/ /
Registration No.
Registration Year
Frame No.
Odometer ReadingkmMile
Date Problem First Occurred
Frequency Problem Occurs
Weather ConditionsWhen ProblemOccurred
Weather
Outdoor Temperature
/ /
D Constant D Sometimes (D Once only
D Fine D Cloudy D RainyD Various/ Others
times per day, month)
D Snowy
D Hot D Warm D CoolD Cold (Approx. °F( °C))
MalfunctionSystem
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Key Reminder System
Light Control System
Daytime Running Light System
Combination Meter (Open door warning light)
Light Auto Turn Off System
Illuminated Entry System
Seat Belt Warning
Power Window Control System
Power Door Lock Control System
Wireless Door Lock Control System
Others
DI-537DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
PARTS LOCATION
Automatic LightControl Sensor
Ignition Switch
Engine RoomJunction Block• HEAD RM-UPR Fuse• Headlight Relay
Light Control Rheostat
XXHeadlight
Combination MeterClock Power Window
Master Switch
Center Junction Block• ECU-ACC Fuse• DOOR Fuse 1 ^ Buckle Switch
»*nv DC FUSe Parking Brake Switch• MPX-B Fuse• DEF RLY Fuse• Taillight Relay• Defogger Relay• DEF Fuse• TAIL Fuse• DRL No. 2 Relay
Seat Belt OccupantDetection Sensor
113725
DI-538DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Front Personal Light Door Lock Assembly• Door Lock Motor• Door Unlock Detection Switch• Door Key Lock and Unlock Switch
Power Window Regulator• Power Window Motor
Luggage Compartment Light
Door Courtesy Switch
DI-539DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
TERMINALS OF ECU
pero—"—ionon
«I« « « < ' * » < I
j uu LJUL|3 |4|5|B|7|
|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|
Terminals No. (Symbols)
1 -11(TRLY-E)
2-11(DEFB - E)
3-11(IG-E)
4-11(DEF-E)
5-11(B-E)
6-11(L2-E)
7-9
(ACT — ACT+)
8-11
(B-E)
10-11
(HRLY-E)
11 -Body ground
(E - Body ground)
12-11
(ACC-E)
B6-1-11
(PWS-E)
B6-2-11
(BLVL-E)
B&-3-11
(CLTS-E)
B&-4-11
(CLTB-E)
Wiring Color
-
-
-
-
-
GR
R
LG-B
G-W
Condition
Light control switch OFF
Light control switch TAIL or HEAD
Constant
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
Ignition switch ON
Defogger switch OFF
Defogger switch ON
Constant
Door key lock and unlock switch OFF
Door key lock and unlock switch ON
Door lock operating
Constant
Light control switch OFF or TAIL
Light control switch HEAD
Constant
Ignition switch OFF
Ignition switch ACC or ON
Sliding roof ECU communication circuit
Parking brake switch ON (parking brake is used)
Parking brake switch OFF (parking brake is not used)
Automatic light control sensor communication circuit
Automatic light control sensor communication circuit
STD Voltage (V)
10-14V
Below 1 V
10-14V
Below 1 V
10-14V
10-14V
Below 1 V
10-14V
Approx. 5 V
Below 1 V
10-14V
10-14V
10-14V
Below 1 V
Below 1 V
Below 1 V
10-14V
-
Below 1 V
Approx. 5V
-
-
01-540DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Terminals No. (Symbols)
ee-5-11(T-E)
B6-9-11(KSW - E)
B&-10-11(LP-E)
B6-11 -11(SG1 - E)
B6-12-11(HF-E)
B6-13-9(ACTD-ACT+)
B&-14-11(HORN-E)
B6-16-11(MPX1 - E)
B&-17-11(L-E)
B6-18-11(H-E)
B6-20-11(LSWP-E)
B&-21-11(LSWD-E)
B6-22-11(UL2-E)
B6-24-11(CLTE-E)
B6-25-11(UL3-E)
B7-1-11
(SG2-E)
B7-2-11(SG3-E)
B7-3-11(FU-- E)
B7-7-11(DBKL-E)
B7-18-11(BLTW-E)
B7-9-11(PRG-E)
B7-10-11(RDA-E)
B7-11 -11
(P/W-E)
Wiring Color
LG
Y
R — W
W-L
P-B
L
L-B
R-L
Y-G
R-L
B
— W
LG-R
W-L
W
BR-W
L
R-B
Y
Y-B
Condition
Light control switch OFF
Light control switch TAIL or HEAD
Key is inserted
Key is not inserted
Each door are opened
All door are closed
Key is inserted
Key is not inserted
Light control switch HIGH beam or FLASH
Light control switch OFF or LOW beam
Driver door is operating
Horn sound
Horn does not sound
Multiplex communication circuit
Engine running
Light control switch OFF or TAIL
Light control switch HEAD
Except driver's door is unlocked
Except driver's door is locked
Driver door is unlocked
Driver door is locked
Passenger door key lock and unlock switch OFF
Passenger door key lock and unlock switch ON
Automatic light control sensor communication circuit
Driver door key lock and unlock switch OFF
Driver door key lock and unlock switch ON
Constant
Constant
Constant
Driver seat belt buckle switch ON (belt fastened)
Driver seat belt buckle switch OFF (belt unfastened)
Driver seat belt buckle switch ON (belt fastened)
Driver seat belt buckle switch OFF (belt unfastened)
Wireless door lock control receiver communication circuit
Wireless door lock control receiver communication circuit
Key-off power window operation
STD Voltage (V)
10-14V
Below 1 V
Below 1 V
10-14V
Below 2 V
10-14V
Below 1 V
10-14V
Below 1 V
Approx. 5.7 V
10-14V
Below 1 V
10-14V
-
Below 1 V
Approx. 5.7 V
Below 1 V
Below 1 V
Approx. 5.7 V
Below 1 V
Approx. 5.7 V
Approx. 5.0 V
Below 1 V
-
Approx. 5.0 V
Below 1 V
Below 1 V
Below 1 V
Below 1 V
Below 1 V
10-14V
Below 1 V
10-14V
-
-
10-14V
DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEMDI-541
Terminals No. (Symbols)
B7-12-11(FUA-E)
B7-13-11(FU+-E)
B7-14-11(PBKL-E)
B7-15-11(L1-E)
B7-16-11(UL1-E)
B7-17-11(DRL-E)
B7-4-11(SG4-E)
B7-19-11(PKB-E)
B7-20-11(DCTY-E)
B7-21-11(PCTY-E)
B7-22-11(LGCY-E)
Wiring Color
— H
Y-G
— Y
V — W
— a
L-W
— H
R — B
— Y
R
Lla
Condition
Ignition switch ON and fuel sender gauge float DOWN
Ignition switch ON and fuel sender gauge float UP
Ignition switch ON
Passenger seat belt buckle switch ON (belt fastened)
Passenger seat belt buckle switch OFF (belt unfastened)
Door lock manual switch OFF or UNLOCK
Door lock manual switch LOCK
Door lock manual switch OFF or LOCK
Door lock manual switch UNLOCK
Daytime running light system operating when DRL ON
Sport mode switch OFF
Sport mode switch ON
Parking brake is used
Parking brake is not used
Driver door opened
Driver door closed
Passenger door opened
Passenger door closed
Luggage door opened
Luggage door closed
STD Voltage (V)
Approx. 0.3 V
Approx. 4.6 V
Approx. 5.0 V
Below 1 V
Approx. 5.0 V
Below 1 V
Approx. 5.0 V
Below 1 V
Approx. 5.0 V
Below 1 V
10-14V
Below 1 V
Below 1 V
10-14V
Below 1 V
10-14V
Below 1 V
10-14V
Below 1 V
10-14V
DI-542DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLEDOOR LOCK CONTROL
Symptom
Lock or unlock cannot be operated with door lock control S/W.
Door key linked function does not operate.
Key confinement prevention function does not operate.
Does not lock and unlock each door only.
Luggage compartment door opener function does not operate.
Suspect Area
1. Door lock control switch circuit(Master switch)
2. Body ECU
1 . Door key lock and unlock switch circuit
2. Body ECU
1 . Key unlock switch circuit
2. Body ECU
1. Door lock motor circuit
2. Body ECU
1 . Luggage component door courtesy switch circuit2. Body ECU
Seepage
Dt-571
IN-30
DI-578IN-30
DI-563IN-30
DI-574
IN-30
DI-582
IN-30
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL
Symptom
AN function of wireless door lock control system do not operate.
Lock (or unlock) function does not operate.
Automatic lock function operates even if any door is opened within
30 seconds after all doors are unlocked by wireless door lock
control system .
Suspect Area
1. Transmitter
2. Wireless tuner circuit
3. Key unlock warning switch circuit
4. Body ECU
1 . Door key lock and unlock switch circuit
2. Door unlock detection switch circuit3. Body ECU
1. Door courtesy switch circuit2. Body ECU
Seepage
BE-73
DI-584
DI-563
IN-30
Dl-578
DI-576IN-30
DI-580
IN-30
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Symptom
Illuminated entry does not operate.
Suspect Area
1. Illumination circuit2. Body ECU
Seepage
DW560
IN-30
HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM:
Symptom
Headlight does not light up.
TailBght does not light up.
Automatic light control system does not operate.
Auto turn-off system does not operate.
Suspect Area
1 . Light control switch circuit
2. Headlight control relay circuit
3. Body ECU
1 . Light control switch circuit
2. Taillight control relay circuit
3. Body ECU
1 . Automatic light control sensor circuit2. Light control switch circuit
3. Body ECU
1. Driver door courtesy switch circuit
2. Body ECU
Seepage
DI-556
DI-550
IN-30
DI-556DI-548
IN-30
DI-598DI-556IN-30
Dl-580IN-30
DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEMDI-543
OTHERS
Symptom
Does not turn off the driver seat beK warning light
Does not turn off the passenger seat beK warning light.
Rear window defogger does not operate.
Body ECU does not operate.
Fuel sender gauge does not operate.
Suspect Area
1. Driver buckle switch circuit2. Body ECU
1. Passenger buckle switch circuit2. Body ECU
1. Defogger relay circuit2. Defogger switch3. Body ECU
1. Power source circuit2. Body ECU
1. Fuel sender gauge circuit
2. Combination meter system
3. Body ECU
Seepage
DI-565
IN-30
DI-565
IN-30
DI-586BE-55IN-30
DI-544
IN-30
DI-588
BE- 6
IN-30
DI-544DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Power Source Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis circuit provides power to operate the Body ECU.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Body ECUInstrument Panel J/B
W
B-R
B-R ...... BatteryFL Mam , i
113762
DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEMDI-545
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check MPX-B, DCC, AM1 and DOOR fuse.
CHECK:Check continuity of MPX-B, DCC, AM1 and DOOR fuse.OK:
Continuity
NG Replace the failure fuse.
OK
Check voltage between terminals B, B and E of Body ECU connector.
PREPARATION:(a) Turn ignition switch OFF.(b) Disconnect the Body ECU connector.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals B, B and E.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See page DI-542).
NG
Check wireharness and connector between Body ECU and body ground (Seepage IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
Check and repair wireharness and connectorbetween Body ECU and battery.
DI-546DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Ignition Switch Power Source Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen the ignition switch is turned to the ACC position, battery voltage is applied to the terminal ACC of theECU and when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, battery voltage is applied to the terminal IGof the ECU.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Body ECUInstrument Panel J/B
W
B-R
B-R FLMain . Battery.
±±h
113762
DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEMDI-547
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check BODY ECU-IG and ECU-ACC fuse.
CHECK:Check continuity of BODY ECU-IG and ECU-ACC fuse.OK:
Continuity
Replace the failure fuse.
OK
Check voltage between terminals ACC, IG and GND of Body ECU connector.
PREPARATION:Turn ignition switch ON.CHECK:Measure voltage between terminals ACC, IG, and GND.OK:
Voltage: 10-14V
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See page DI-542).
Check wireharness and connector between Body ECU and body ground (Seepage IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
Check and repair wireharness and connectorbetween Body ECU and battery.
DI-548DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Taillight Relay Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONTaillight relay will be "ON" by operating the taillight switch. The transistor which activates the tail light relayhas two sorts: one activates by the tail light switch for fail safe and the other activates by CPU.
WIRING DIAGRAM
BODY ECU
B-R
FLMain
Battery
114363
DI-549DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check taillight relay (See page BE-17).
NG\ Replace the taillight relay.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between taillight relay and Body ECU, batteryand taillight relay (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-550DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Headlight Relay Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Head light relay wilt be "ON" by operating the headlight switch. The transistor which activates the headlightrelay has two sorts: one activates directly by the headlight switch for fail safe and the other activates by CPU.the one that activates by CPU has two systems and prevents the headlight from turning off at the time ofone system trouble in the automatic operation circuit.
DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEMDI-551
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine Room J/B BODY ECU
HEAD Relay2
H4HeadlighFRH-LOW c
~HEAD RH-LWR
U) HEAD LH-LWR2D
R-YH2HeadlightLH-LOW
\A/_R Engine Room J/BDRLNO.4 Relay
2
DRL NO.2 Relay
HeadlightRH-HI
DRLNO.3Rela
HEAD RH-URR
HEAD LH-URRH1HeadlighLH-HI
Engine Room J/B
C12Hi-Beam Indicator(in Combination Meter)
C =
DI-552DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check headlight relay (See page BE-17).
NG \ Replace the headlight relay.
Check wireharness and connector between headlight relay and Body ECU, bat-tery and headlight relay (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-553DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Daytime Running Light No. 2 Relay Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen the light control switch is set to OFF or TAIL after the following conditions are satisfied simultaneouslywith the ignition switch ON, the daytime running lights up by control of the body ECU.
The parking brake switch is OFF.The generator is ON (Engine running)
DI-554DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine Room J/B BODY ECU
HEAD Relay2
H4Headlight
3 HEADRH-LWR
2D
HEAD LH-LWR
R-YH2HeadlightLH-LOW
W-R Engine Room J/BDRL NO.4 Relay
2
DRL NO.2 Relay
HeadlightRH-HI
DRLNO.3Rela
HEAD RH-URR
HEAD LH-URRH1HeadlighLH-HI
Engine Room J/B
C12Hi-Beam Indicator(in Combination Meter)
C "=
Dl-555DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check D.R.L. No. 2 relay (See page BE-17).
NG \ Replace the D.R.L. No. 2 relay.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between D.R.L. No. 2 relay and Body ECU,battery and D.R.L. No. 2 relay (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDJ-542).
DI-556DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Light Control Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis circuit defects the state of the light control switch.WIRING DIAGRAM
P-B
Lightcontrolswitch
Dimmerswitch
OFF
TAIL
HEAD
LOW
HIGH
FLASH
R-L
13HF
LG
14H
P-L
EL
o—o
16
HU HL
B-W
J13JunctionConnector
12
13
19
HF
H
HU
BODY ECU
113764
DI-557DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check light control switch (See page BE-17).
NG\ Replace the headlight control switch.
Check wireharness and connector between headlight control switch and BodyECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-558DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Headlight Dimmer Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis circuit detects the state of the headlight dimmer switch.WIRING DIAGRAM
P-B
Lightcontrolswitch
Dimmerswitch
OFF
TAILHEAD
LOW
HIGHFLASH
R-L
13HF
LG
14H
P-L
EL HU
o—o
HL
B-W
J13JunctionConnector
12B6
13
HF
H
HU
BODY ECU
113764
DI-559DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check headlight dimmer switch (See page BE-17).
NG\ Replace the headlight dimmer switch.
Check wireharness and connector between headlight dimmer switch and BodyECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
Dl-560DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Illumination Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONReceiving the courtesy signal from the Body ECU will make the interior light, ignition light, and courtesy lightcome on.
DI-561DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM
L-W
IB71
Personal Light
Instrument Panel J/B
B-R
Engine Room J/B
FL MAIN
Ht—IhBattery
1
10R-W
L-R<*3)L(*2)
*1: w/ Door Lock*2: w/o Door Lock*3:w/Sliding Roof*4: w/o Sliding Room
B6 BODY ECU
LP
113767
DI-562DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check DOME fuse.
NG\ Replace the fuse.
OK
Check illumination light.
Replace the failure light.
Check wireharness and connector between each illumination light and BodyECU, battery and each illumination light (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-564DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check key unlock warning switch (See page BE-14).
NG\ Replace the key unlock warning switch.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between key unlock warning switch and BodyECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-563DIAGNOSTICS - BODY COINTTROL SYSTEM
Key Unlock Warning Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe key unlock warning switch goes on when the ignition key is inserted in the key cylinder and goes off whenthe ignition key is removed.The ECU operates the key confinement prevention function while the key unlock warning switch is on.
WIRING DIAGRAM
U1 Key UnlockWarning Switch
W-L
B6 BODY ECU
11
KSW
SG1
113766
DL-565DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Driver Buckle Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen the buckle switch of the driver's seat is ON with the ignition switch ON, the body ECU sends a signalto make the seat belt warning light for the driver's seat light up and to sound a buzzer.When the buckle switch of the passenger seat is ON and the passenger seat belt occupant detecting sensoris ON with the ignition switch ON, the body ECU sends a signal to make the seat belt warning light for thepassenger seat light up.
WIRING DIAGRAMB9 Buckle Switch RH
R-L J LiI I FP
Instrument Panel J/B
16
WT4Tension ReducerSolenoid RH
R-L 1
Solenoid LH
L-R
L-Y
B8 Buckle Switch LH
12R
ReducerH
3
r, — ¥K
1 (
W-L(
2 (L '
B7
1*• -s
B7
110Ignition Switch
W-B
Battery
' BODY ECU
SG3
PBKL
SG2
DBKL
~Tt37B
DI-566DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check buckle switch (See page BE-46).
NG\ Replace the buckle switch.
OK
Check wire harness and connector between buckle switch and body ground(See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wire harness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit insjproblem symptoms table (£DI-542).
;tion shown on5 page
DI-567DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Horn Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe horn is connected to the body ECU and activated by the body ECU.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine Room J/B
1 HORN
\
1
5*— J* I '
B-R
$ FLMAIN?
Horn Rela
inrv
— o-»o—
y 22 1 ^
^ A]p(2P
L-erljv,f ^ 1
G-Y
I °-Y \I1 \
TBattery
Horn(High)
Horn(Low)
C17HornS/W
BODY ECU
HORN
113765
DI-568DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check horn (See page BE-126).
NG\ Replace the horn.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between horn relay and body ECU, batteryand horn relay (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-569DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
PWS Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When the ignition switch is ON, or during the time from when the ignition switch is turned OFF till 43 sec.has elapsed or till the closed door is opened, the body ECU permits the operation of the power window andsliding roof.WIRING DIAGRAM
M2Sliding Roof Control Relay BODY ECU
\
2 GR GR1
"86 PWS
Sliding Roof Control ECU
DI-570DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check wireharness and connector between sliding roof control assembly andBody ECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDL-542).
DI-571DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Power Window Master Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis circuit detects the state of the power window master switch.
DJ-572DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM
P7Power Window Motor LH
P4Power WindowMaster Switch
-L
14
i r-i±i n r«!l-P6 Power Window Motor LH
1 IAlK „ )flFT1
14
R
Instrument Panel J/B
PWR No. 2Relay ^
L-B
11L-Y
12
Ignition Switch
R
L-R
J3 P4J/C Power Window Lock Switch
BatteryN
A 10W-B
-o-- o- 7 rfW-R ;4
12'^T^—^mt
16W-R
17W-B
PU
PD
DU
DDUL
+B KOF
BDR
IG
W/L
Instrument Panel J/B
15
BODY ECU
L1
UL1
P/W
DI-573DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check the power window master switch (See page BE-59).
NG\ Replace the power window master switch.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between power window master switch andbody ECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-574DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Door Lock Motor Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONWhen the door switch is set to LOCK, the body ECU outputs a signal to lock all of the doors.
WIRING DIAGRAM
D5Door LockMotor LH
L_R
7
L_w
B10BackDoorLock fiMotor
L_R
D6Door LockMotor RH
6fBBlfe-
6 L-W
5 L~
BODY ECU
Instrument Panel J/B
L-W
L-W ng-a,, L-W n^ L-W
L-R
L-W
2IT
ACTD
ACT+
ACT-
113771
DI-S75DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check door lock motor (See page BE-63).
NG\ Replace the door lock motor.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between door lock motor and body ECU (Seepage IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-576DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Door Unlock Detection Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe door unlock detection switch is built in the door lock motor assembly. This switch is ON when the doorlock knob is in the unlock position and OFF when the lock knob is in the lock position. The ECU detects thedoor lock knob conditions is this circuit. It is used as one of the operating conditions for the key confinementprevention function.
WIRING DIAGRAM
J3JunctionConnecto
12-SpAl
J11JunctionConnector
BODY ECU
11 /If Q
3W-B
-o-""b- 4 B i1
W-B
D5Door LockDetection Switch
W-B 4
D6Door LockDetection Switch
J10JunctionConnector
LSWD
LSWP
113770
DI-577DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check door unlock detection switch (See page BE-63).
NG\ Replace the door unlock detection switch.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between door unlock detection switch andbody ECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-578DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Door Key Lock and Unlock Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe door key lock and unlock switch is built in the door key cylinder. When the key is turned to the lock side,terminal 3 of the switch is grounded and when the key is turned to the unlock side, terminal 2 of the switchis grounded.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Door Key Lock andJH Unlock Switch LH
W-B R
vn
J/U
B 3W-B
<T~
<•>
L— W
6
L-B5
L-W
W-BJ3J/C
InstrumentPanel J/B
YW-B
W-BA J10
J/C
D6Door Key Lock andUnlock Switch RH
W-B
I
BODY ECUr
UL3
L2
113769
DI-579DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check the door key lock and unlock switch (See page BE-63).
NG\ Replace the door key lock and unlock switch.
NG
Check wireharness and connector between door key lock and unlock switch andbody ECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-580DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Door Courtesy Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThe door courtesy switch goes on when the door is opened and goes off when door is closed.
WIRING DIAGRAM
D4Door CourtesySwitch RH
R~Y
D3Door CourtesySwitch LH
BODY ECU
21
20DCTY
Dt-581DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check courtesy switch (See page BE-28).
NG\ Replace the courtesy switch.
OK
Check that there is a grounding malfunction caused by looseness of the tightenscrew.
Install screw.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between courtesy light and body ECU, courte-sy switch and body ECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-582DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Luggage Courtesy Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The luggage courtesy switch goes on when luggage compartment door is opened and goes off when lug-gage compartment door is closed.WIRING DIAGRAM
LuggageCompartmentLight Switch
BODY ECU
LGCY
2 L3LuggageCompartmentLight
113768
DI-583DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check luggage courtesy switch (See page BE-28).
NG\ Replace the luggage courtesy switch.
OK
Check wire harness and connector between luggage courtesy switch and BodyECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wire harness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-584DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Wireless Door Lock Tuner Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The signal from the transmitter will be input to the body ECU through RDA line. RDA line is diagnosed bythe Body ECU, so check DTC also in case of the failure of the wireless function.WIRING DIAGRAM
Instrument Panel J/B
D2Door ControlReceiver BODY ECU
EngineRoom J/B
GND RDA
J14JunctionConnector
113782
DI-585DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check that DTC 42 is not output.
NG\ Check the RDA line.
Check wireharness.
PREPARATION:Disconnect connectors of wireless door lock tuner and Body ECU.CHECK:Check continuity between terminals PRG of wireless door lock tuner and PRG of Body ECU.OK:
Continuity
Repair or replace wireharness.
OK
Check the wireless door lock tuner.
CHECK:Replace the wireless door lock tuner and check if it recovers normally.OK:
Must be recovered normally.
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See page DI-542).
OK
Failure of the original wireless door lock tun-er.
DI-586DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Rear Defogger Relay Circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Instrument Panel J/B
B-R
B-R
FLMAIN
w L-R
Ignition Switch
W-B
|BB1|8 Rear Window: DefoggerW-B
IBAII 1
W-B
Battery
12 (JN)1 3 (IP) 7(IP)
W-BB
4|BA1
B
R R-W
1 (A18) 5(A1
11
2[BBl1
IG+
GND
RDEF
DEPB
DEF
BODY ECU
W-B
W-B
114373
DI-587DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check rear defogger relay (See page BE-55).
NG\ Replace the rear defogger relay.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between rear defogger relay and body ECU,front defogger relay and body ECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
Dt-588DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Fuel Sender Gauge Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis circuit detects sensor signals from the fuel sender gauge.WIRING DIAGRAM
c
F17Fuel Sender
-e<•<
FK
> FR>•->
FV
3 BR-W A{*E;
122 Y-R /-7P
(*L
131 Y-G /^p
^L
BODY ECUS ~\
FU-
FUA
FU+
v y
I13774
Dl-589DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check fuel sender gauge (See page BE-46).
NG\ Replace the fuel sender gauge.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between fuel sender gauge and Body ECU(See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-590DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONTo detect abnormality of the brake fluid level.
WIRING DIAGRAM
o ^AR
W-BB2Brake FluidLevel Warning Switch
R
BODY ECU
BLVL
DI-591DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check brake fluid level warning switch (See page BE-46).
NG\ Replace the brake fluid level warning switch.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between brake fluid level warning switch andbody ECU (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
Dt-592DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Parking Brake Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONThis circuit detects the state of the parking brake switch.WIRING DIAGRAM
P3ParkingBrakeSwitch
R-B
BODY ECU
19PKB
DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEMDJ-593
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check parking brake switch (See page BE-46).
NG\ Replace the parking brake switch.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between parking brake switch and Body ECU(See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-594DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
O/D Main Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONBody ECU detect the state O/D main switch.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Combination Meter03O/D MAIN S/W BODY ECU
BR-Y
ODLP ODMSEngine ControlModule
SG4
113777
DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEMDI-595
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check O/D main switch (See page DI-206, DI-268).
NG\ Replace the O/D main switch.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between O/D main switch and body ECU (Seepage IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown onproblem symptoms table (See pageDI-542).
DI-596DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Airbag Sensor Assembly Communication Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONSignals received at the body ECU, such as the passenger seat occupant detection sensor signal, is trans-mitted to the airbag sensor assembly.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Center Airbag Sensor Assembly
t 11
LBE+''
Body ECU
18BLTW
113779
DI-597DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check for open and short in wireharness and connector between body ECU andairbag sensor assembly (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness and connector.
OK
2 Check the airbag sensor assembly (See page DI-324).
NG\ Replace the airbag sensor assembly.
OK
Replace the body ECU.
01 598DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Light Sensor Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONSignals output from the light control sensor are detected.
WIRING DIAGRAM
A14Automatic Light Contorl Sensor
CLTB
CLTE
CLTS
1 G-W 4/(
3 LG-R 24,~\
4 LG-B 3,\
Body ECU
CLTB
CLTE
CLTS
113783
DJ-599DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check light sensor (See page BE-17).
NG\ Replace the light sensor.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between light sensor and body ECU (Seepage IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Replace the body ECU.
oi-eooDIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Multiplex Communication Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONSignals are transmitted between the ECM and combination meter through the communication circuit.
WIRING DIAGRAM
EngineControl Module Combination Meter
Body ECU
MPX1
MPX2
10
tlDn^R-Glfc LG-R /^T>
LG-R
MPX+ L
MPX- TX+
Y-G17
R-L !§.B6 MPX1
113750
DI-601DIAGNOSTICS - BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1 Check ECM (See page DI-1).
NG\ Replace the ECM.
OK
2 Check combination meter (See page BE-46).
NG \ Replace the combination meter.
OK
Check wireharness and connector between combination meter and body ECU,ECM and combination meter (See page IN-30).
Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
Replace the body ECU.
MEMO-
ID-1
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ID-2ALPHABETICAL INDEX (A - C)
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL(TERMS)
ABS ACTUATORAIR CONDITIONING (PREPARATION)AIR CONDITIONING
(SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIERAIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMAIR CONDITIONING UNITAIR REFINER FILTERAIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLYANTENNAANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD)(DIAGNOSTICS)
ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR (U240E)ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR (U341E)AUDIO SYSTEMAUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
(DIAGNOSTICS)AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
(PREPARATION)AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E)
(SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
(DIAGNOSTICS)AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
(PREPARATION)AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E)
(SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM (U240E)AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM (U341 E)AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE UNIT (U240E)AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE UNIT (U341E)
Page Vol.
IN-35(1)
PP-85(1)
SS-57(1)AC-60 (2)AC-1 (2)
AC-24 (2)AC-73 (2)RS-52 (2)
BE-119(2)
DI-274 (1)AX-6 (2)AX-5 (2)
BE-88 (2)
SS-41 (1)
PP-51 (1)
SS-43(1)AX-1 (2)AX-1 (2)
AX-30 (2)AX-30 (2)
B
BACK DOORBACK DOOR GLASSBACK DOOR STAYBACK-UP LIGHT SYSTEMBLOWER MOTORBLOWER RESISTORBLOWER UNITBODY (PREPARATION)BODY (SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)BODY CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS)BODY ELECTRICAL (PREPARATION)BODY ELECTRICAL
(SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEMBRAKEBRAKE (PREPARATION)BRAKE (SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)BRAKE BOOSTER ASSEMBLYBRAKE FLUIDBRAKE MASTER CYLINDERBRAKE PEDALBRAKE SYSTEM
BO-22 (2)BO-64(2)BO-27 (2)BE-30 (2)AC-48 (2)AC-49 (2)AC-30 (2)PP-80(1)SS-55(1)Dl-535(1)PP-77(1)
SS-54(1)BE-1 (2)MA-6(1)
PP-62(1)SS-49(1)BR-13(2)
BR-9 (2)BR-6 (2)BR-1 (2)
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR IG-8 (2)CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE SF-46 (2)CHARGING (PREPARATION) PP-24 (1)CHARGING (SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS) SS-27 (1)
Page Vol.CHARGING SYSTEM CH-1 (2)CHASSIS MA-7 (1)CIRCUIT INSPECTION
(ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-285 (1)
CIRCUIT INSPECTION(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-175 (1)
CIRCUIT INSPECTION(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-238 (1)
CIRCUIT INSPECTION (BODY CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-544 (1)
CIRCUIT INSPECTION(CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-496 (1)
CIRCUIT INSPECTION (ENGINE)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-23 (1)
CIRCUIT INSPECTION(SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-339 (1)
CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY SF-53 (2)CLIP BO-1 (2)CLOCK BE-122 (2)CLUTCH (PREPARATION) PP-27(1)CLUTCH (SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS) SS-29 (1)CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER CL-A (2)CLUTCH PEDAL CL-2 (2)CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER CL-9 (2)CLUTCH UNIT CL-14 (2)CO/HC EM-1 (2)COMBINATION METER BE-39 (2)COMPRESSION EM-3 (2)COMPRESSOR AND MAGNETIC CLUTCH AC-35 (2)CONDENSER AC-^3 (2)CONDENSER FAN AC-57 (2)COOLANT CO-1 (2)COOLING (PREPARATION) PP-11 (1)COOLING (SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS) SS-19 (1)COOLING FAN RELAY AC-56 (2)COOLING FAN RELAY CO-31 (2)CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR IG-11 (2)CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) DI- 83 (1)CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK
(ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-275 (1)
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-156 (1)
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-219 (1)
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK(BODY CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-536 (1)
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK(CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) Dl t84 (1)
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK(ENGINE)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-2 (1)
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK(SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-325 (1)
CYLINDER BLOCK EM-85 (2)CYLINDER HEAD EM-36 (2)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (D - H)ID-3
Page Vol.DEFOGGER SYSTEM BE-54 (2)DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
(ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-280 (1)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-168 (1)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-231 (1)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART(CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-490 (1)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (ENGINE)(DIAGNOSTICS) Dl-14 (1)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART(SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-332 (1)
DIFFERENTIAL CASE (C56) MX-45(2)DIFFERENTIAL CASE (C60) MX-48 (2)DIFFERENTIAL OIL SEAL (U240E) AX-14 (2)DIFFERENTIAL OIL SEAL (U341 E) AX-13 (2)DIRECT CLUTCH SPEED SENSOR (U341E) AX-4 (2)DOOR SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR RS-67 (2)DRIVE BELT AC-16 (2)DRIVE BELT SR-3 (2)
EFI MAIN RELAYELECTRIC COOLING FANELECTRIC TENSION REDUCER SYSTEMEMISSION CONTROL (PREPARATION)EMISSION CONTROL
(SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMENGINEENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSORENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SWITCHENGINE MECHANICAL (PREPARATION)ENGINE MECHANICAL
(SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)ENGINE UNITEVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL
SYSTEMEXHAUST SYSTEM
SF-52 (2)CO-24 (2)BE-52 (2)PP-7(1)
SS-16(1)EC-1 (2)MA-5(1)DM (1)
SF-71 (2)
SF-62 (2)
AC-72 (2)PP-2(1)
SS-6(1)EM-70 (2)
EC-5 (2)EM-115(2)
FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY (U240E)FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY (U341E)FOG LIGHT SYSTEMFOR ALL OF VEHICLESFRONT AIRBAG SENSORFRONT AXLE HUBFRONT BRAKE CALIPERFRONT BRAKE PADFRONT BUMPERFRONT DOORFRONT DRIVE SHAFTFRONT LOWER BALL JOINT
AX-17(2)AX-16(2)BE-22 (2)
RS-57 (2)SA-11 (2)BR-20 (2)BR-17 (2)BO-4(2)
BO-10(2)SA-18(2)SA-46 (2)
FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARMFRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLYFRONT SEATFRONT SHOCK ABSORBERFRONT SPEED SENSORFRONT STABILIZER BARFRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENTFRONT WHEEL HUB BOLTFRONT WIPER AND WASHERFUEL CUT RPMFUEL PRESSURE REGULATORFUEL PUMPFUEL TANK AND LINE
Page Vol.SA-41 (2)RS-26 (2)BO-92 (2)SA-33 (2)BR-55 (2)SA-50 (2)SA-^ (2)
SA-17 (2)BO-28 (2)SF-73 (2)SF-15 (2)SF-6 (2)
SF-26 (2)
GENERAL INFORMATION(HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECUCONTROLLED SYSTEMS)
GENERAL INFORMATION(HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL)
GENERAL INFORMATION(REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS)
GENERATORGLOSSARY OF SAE AND TOYOTA TERMS
(TERMS)
IN-1 (1)
IN-4(1)CH-5 (2)
H
HEADLIGHT BO-6 (2)HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM BE-15 (2)HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR SF-69 (2)HEATER CONTROL ASSEMBLY AC-65 (2)HEATER MAIN RELAY AC-54 (2)HOOD BO-9 (2)HORN SYSTEM BE-125 (2)HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
(ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-274 (1)
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-155 (1)
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-218 (1)
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING(BODY CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-535 (1)
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING(CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) Dl 83 (1)
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING(ENGINE)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-1 (1)
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING(HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECUCONTROLLED SYSTEMS) 1N-20 (1)
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING(SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-324 (1)
HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECUCONTROLLED SYSTEMS IN-19 (1),
HOW TO USE THE DIAGNOSTIC CHART ANDINSPECTION PROCEDURE(HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECUCONTROLLED SYSTEMS) IN-30 (1)
HOWTO USETHIS MANUAL IN-1 (1)
ID-4ALPHABETICAL INDEX (I - P)
Page Vol.IDENTIFICATION INFORMATIONIDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVEIDLESPEEDIGNITION (PREPARATION)IGNITION (SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS) .IGNITION COILIGNITION SWITCH AND KEY UNLOCK
WARNING SWITCHIGNITION SYSTEMIGNITION TIMINGINJECTORINPUT SHAFT (C56)INPUT SHAFT (C60)INSIDE VEHICLEINSTRUMENT PANELINTERIOR LIGHT SYSTEM
SF- K) (2)EM-14(2)PP-19(1)SS-23(1)
IG-5(2)
BE-13(2)IG-1 (2)
EM-13(2)SF-18 (2)MX-26 (2)MX-29 (2)MA-2(1)
BO-76 (2)BE-27 (2)
KNOCK SENSOR SF-66 (2)
LUBRICATION (PREPARATION) PP-15 (1)LUBRICATION (SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS) SS-21 (1)
M
MAGNETIC CLUTCH RELAYMAINTENANCE (PREPARATION)MAINTENANCE (SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)MANIFOLD GAUGE SETMANUAL TRANSAXLE (C56)
(PREPARATION)MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C56)
(SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
(PREPARATION)MANUAL TRANSAXLE (C60)
(SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)MANUAL TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY (C56)MANUAL TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY (C60)MANUAL TRANSAXLE UNIT (C56)MANUAL TRANSAXLE UNIT (C60)MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) METER
AC-55 (2)PP-1 (1)SS-4(1)
AC-19 (2)
PP-31 (1)
SS-31 (1)
PP-38(1)
SS-36(1)MX-9 (2)MX-9 (2)MX-2 (2)MX-2 (2)
SF-29 (2)
OIL AND FILTEROIL NOZZLE (2ZZ-GE)OIL PUMPOUTPUT SHAFT (C56)OUTPUT SHAFT (C60)OUTSIDE VEHICLE ...
LU-1 (2)LU-14(2)LU-5 (2)
MX-34 (2)MX-37 (2)
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH(U240E) AX-S (2)
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH(U341E) AX-7 (2)
PARKING BRAKE BR-42 (2)PARKING BRAKE LEVER BR-8 (2)PARTS LAYOUT AND SCHEMATIC DRAWING EC-2 (2)
Page Vol.PARTS LOCATION
(ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-281 (1)
PARTS LOCATION(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-169 (1)
PARTS LOCATION(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-232 (1)
PARTS LOCATION (BODY CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-537 (1)
PARTS LOCATION (CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-491 (1)
PARTS LOCATION (ENGINE)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-19 (1)
PARTS LOCATION(SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-335 (1)
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV)SYSTEM EC-4 (2)
POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM BE-62 (2)POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM BE-B5 (2)POWER SOURCE BE-10 (2)POWER STEERING FLUID SR-4 (2)POWER STEERING GEAR SR-33 (2)POWER STEERING VANE PUMP SR-22 (2)POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM BE-68 (2)PRE-CHECK
(ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-276 (1)
PRE-CHECK (AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-157 (1)
PRE-CHECK (AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341 E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-220 (1)
PRE-CHECK (CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-485 (1)
PRE-CHECK (ENGINE)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-3 (1)
PRE-CHECK(SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-326 (1)
PRECAUTION (FOR ALL OF VEHICLES) IN-10 (1)PRESSURE SWITCH AC-51 (2)PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
(ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-284 (1)
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-172 (1)
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341 E))(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-234 (1)
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE(BODY CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-542 (1)
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE(CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-494 (1)
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (ENGINE)(DIAGNOSTICS) DI-22 (1)
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE(SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS) Dl-338{1)
PROPORTIONING VALVE (P VALVE) BR-47 (2)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (Q - V)ID-5
QUARTER WINDOW GLASSPage Vol.
BO-55 (2)
RADIATORREAR AXLE CARRIERREAR BRAKE CALIPERREAR BRAKE PADREAR BUMPERREAR DRUM BRAKEREAR LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ...REAR SEATREAR SHOCK ABSORBERREAR SPEED SENSORREAR STABILIZER BARREAR UPPER SUSPENSION ARMREAR WHEEL ALIGNMENTREAR WHEEL HUB BOLTREAR WIPER AND WASHERREFRIGERANT LINEREPAIR INSTRUCTIONSREVERSE SHIFT WARNING BUZZER
SYSTEM (C60)ROOF DRIP SIDE MOULDINGROOF HEADLININGROOF SIDE MOULDING
CO-12(2)SA-54 (2)BR-36 (2)BR-33 (2)BO-5 (2)
BR-28 (2)SA-71 (2)
BO-101 (2)SA-61 (2)BR-58 (2)SA-75 (2)SA-68 (2)SA-8 (2)
SA-60 (2)BO-33(2)AC-21 (2)
MX-55 (2)BO-38(2)BO-86(2)
SEAT BELTSEAT BELT PRETENSIONERSFI (PREPARATION)SFI (SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)SFI SYSTEMSHIFT AND SELECT LEVER SHAFT (C56)SHIFT AND SELECT LEVER SHAFT (C60)SHIFT LEVER AND CONTROL CABLE (C56)SHIFT LEVER AND CONTROL CABLE (C60)SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM (U240E)SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM (U341E)SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLYSIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLYSIDE MUD GUARDSLIDING ROOFSLIDING ROOF SYSTEMSPEED SENSOR (U240E)SRS AIRBAGSRS AIRBAGSTANDARD BOLT (SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)STARTERSTARTER RELAYSTARTING (PREPARATION)STARTING (SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)STARTING SYSTEMSTEERING (PREPARATION)STEERING (SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)STEERING SYSTEMSTEERING WHEELSTEERING WHEEL PAD AND SPIRAL CABLE ..STOP LIGHT SYSTEM :
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM(DIAGNOSTICS)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM(PREPARATION)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM(SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS)
BO-106(2)BO-109(2)
PP-8(1)SS-17(1)SF-1 (2)
MX-44 (2)MX--t7 (2)MX-52 (2)MX-57 (2)AX-15(2)AX-14 (2)RS-39(2)RS-62 (2)BO-46 (2)BO-69 (2)BE-82 (2)AX-4 (2)BO-3 (2)RS-1 (2)SS-1 (1)ST-2 (2)
ST-17(2)PP-21 (1)SS-25(1)ST-1 (2)
PP-67(1)SS-51 (1)SR-1 (2)SR-8 (2)
RS-12 (2)BE-32 (2)
Dl-324(1)
PP-74(1)
SS-53(1)
Page Vol.SUSPENSION AND AXLE (PREPARATION) PP-56 (1)SUSPENSION AND AXLE
(SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS) SS-45 (1)
TERMINALS OF ECM(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U240E))(DIAGNOSTICS)
TERMINALS OF ECM(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (U341 E))(DIAGNOSTICS)
TERMINALS OF ECM (ENGINE)(DIAGNOSTICS)
TERMINALS OF ECU(ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONICBRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD))(DIAGNOSTICS)
TERMINALS OF ECU (BODY CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS)
TERMINALS OF ECU (CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS)
TERMINALS OF ECU(SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM)(DIAGNOSTICS)
TERMSTHERMISTORTHERMOSTATTHREE-WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC)
SYSTEMTHROTTLE BODYTILT STEERING COLUMNTIMING CHAINTIRE AND WHEELTORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH AND
DRIVE PLATE (U240E)TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH AND
DRIVE PLATE (U341E)TROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTING (C56)TROUBLESHOOTING (C60)TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING
SYSTEM
Dl-233(1)
Dl-20(1)
Dl-282(1)
Dl-539(1)
Dl-492(1)
Dl-336(1)IN-35(1)
AC-50 (2)CO-8(2)
EC-11 (2)SF-33 (2)SR-9 (2)
EM-15(2)SA-2 (2)
AX-36 (2)
AX-36 (2)AC-14(2)
BE-2 (2)BR-2 (2)CL-1 (2)SA-1 (2)SR-2 (2)MX-1 (2)MX-1 (2)
BE-25 (2)
uUNDER HOOD MA-4 (1)
VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY (U240E) AX-10 (2)VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY (U341 E) AX-9 (2)VALVE CLEARANCE EM-4 (2)VAPOR PRESSURE SENSOR SF-64 (2)VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION AND ENGINE SERIAL
NUMBER (IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION) IN-3 (1)VEHICLE LIFT AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS
(REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS) 1N-8(1),VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (U240E) AX-3 (2)VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (U341 E) AX-3 (2)'VSV FOR CANISTER CLOSED VALVE (CCV) SF-58 (2)VSV FOR EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SF-56 (2)VSV FOR INTAKE AIR CONTROL VALVE SF-54 (2)VSV FOR PRESSURE SWITCHING VALVE SF-SO (2)
ID-6ALPHABETICAL INDEX (W- W)
wPage Vol.
WATER PUMP CO-4 (2)WINDSHIELD BO-47 (2)WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM BE-34 (2)WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR RS-72 (2)WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM BE-67(2)
- MEMO -
-O1AI3IAI-